dedposint cas rc trnattiow. |e o> | Awe Cen SAAC ie ge ss YS Sk pease Y Me me) wah a igt = J Ne al " PROCEEDINGS OF THE California Academy of Sciences FOURTH SERIES Vol. XX VI SAN FRANCISCO PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 1948-1950 COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION Dr. Ropert C. MILLER, Chairman Dr. GEorGE S. MYERS Dr. Epwarp L. Kesset, Editor ~ No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. 10. ge CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXVI CHAPMAN, WiLBert McLeop. The Osteology and Rela- tionships of the Microstomidae, a Family of Oceanic Fishes. (12 text figs.). Published June 28, 1948...... CHAPMAN, Wirzbert M. The Osteology and Relation- ships of the Round Herring Etrwmeus mucropus Tem- minck and Schlegel. (18 text figs.). Published June 28, [SHEA No Sie Ret oe Cuban een hate Vein eral nee un yen a ee ar eera JENKINS, Hupert O. A Population Study of the Meadow Mice (Microtus) in three Sierra Nevada Meadows. (11 text figs. and 3 tables). Published June 28, 1948 YEN, TeENG-CuieEn. Notes on Land and Fresh-water Mol- lusks of Chekiang Province, China. (Plate 1, 1 text fig.). Published” Jame 28) 1948. cr. hs nk oo ie sie ee ate SKoGSBERG, TAGE. A Systematic Study of the Family Polyorchidae (Hydromedusae). (2 text figs.). Pub- lished Jurie 2B 1948... tay... Pa Die ee ee oe IncRAM, Witt1AmM Marcus. New Fossil Cypraeidae from the Miocene of Florida and Colombia. (Plate 2, 12 text figs.). Published June 28, 1948. ....5...-..00002+-05- IncRAM, Witt1aAm Marcus. The Cypraeid Fauna of the Galapagos Islands. Published June 28, 1948.......... Smitu, ALLyn C., and Mackenzie, Gorpon, Jr. The Marine Mollusks and Brachiopods of Monterey Bay, California, and Vicinity. (Pls. 3, 4 and 4 text figs.). Published "December 5 MOASN. caress «yeas ees Hanna, G. D., and A. M. Strone. West American Mol- lusks of the Genus Conus. (Pls. 5-10, 4 text figs.). Pub- hisited eefantenyt2 pl O49. ie eae, elem eee ls = el ets tin oe 2 Ricc, GeorcE B., and Ropert C. MI ter. Intertidal Plant and Animal Zonation in the Vicinity of Neah Bay, Washington. (8 text figs.). Published November 22, TSE A Sea aoe ae miso Mele Nee A eee WittiaMs, Francis X. The Wasps of the Genus Soli- erella in California (Hymenoptera, Sphecidae, Larri- nae). (Pls. 11-21, 3 text figs.). Published April 28, TASS) ak A ANE CORT A ATA a A eg PRIDE rt a ocr Pee pier Mastin, T. Pauw. Snakes of the Kiukiang-Lushan Area, Kiangsi, China. (10 text figs.). Published April 28, Re cal 2B lataie Sa. 6 die oR ime pray Bratny aye = poy ehatele ea eat PAGES 25-41 43-67 69-99 101-124 125-133 135-145 147-245 323-351 355-417 PAGES No. 13. Menzies, Ropert James. Notes on California Isopods of the Genus Armadilloniscus, with the Description of Ar- madilloniscus coronacapitalis, n. sp. (Pls. 22-26). Pub- lished Agpril 28, 19500. varete ss 2 steak? she os oe siete 467-481 No. 14. SxKocsperc, TAGE. Two New Species of Marine Ostra- coda (Podocopa) from California. (Pls. 27-30). Pub- lished. June: 29, L950 eat Sees thers tee alee 483-505 lntlesee ton VGlUIme XN VL a rei cok coco ee ee oe 507-553 how hnel dh. E avd Se wie) dN Genta a titre Ne Rant Re eee See 554 Errata Marine Biological Laboratory LIBRARY : AUG 2 4 1948 WOODS HOLE, MASS. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 1, pp. 1-22, text figs. 1-12 June 28, 1948 THE OSTEOLOGY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE MICROSTOMIDAE, A FAMILY OF OCEANIC FISHES BY WILBERT McLEOD CHAPMAN Curator of Ichthyology California Academy of Sciences | Di REPORT describes the bony structures and the gross visceral anatomy of Nansenia schmitti (Fowler), defines the family Microstomidae, and pre- sents reasons why that family should be placed in the suborder Opisthoproc- toidei rather than the Salmonoidea. A discussion of the genera and species of the family is given. Microstoma (Euproserpa) schimutti is placed in Nansenia. Bathymacrops macrolepis is placed in the synonymy of Nansenia ardesiaca. The relationship of the family Microstomidae to the other Opisthoproctoidei is discussed. The Microstomidae comprises a small group of pelagic, oceanic fishes distributed in the Mediterranean, North and South Atlantic, off southern Africa, and in the western Pacific. Although the group has been known since Risso’s (1810) description of Microstoma microstoma from the Mediterranean, and specimens have not infrequently been taken since, to the writer’s knowledge the internal anatomy of the group has not been explored previously and the position of the fish in the ichthyological system has been, in consequence, not precisely understood. The fish were long included with the argentines, smelts, etc., in the family Salmonidae (Giinther, 1866), a practice followed by some ichthyologists in recent years (Gilchrist and von Bonde, 1924). Gill (1861) placed the genus Microstoma in a separate family, Microstomatoidae. The Bathylagidae have often, even in recent years (Barnard, 1925), been included in the Microstomidae, but the ichthyological position of that group has recently been defined (Chapman, 1943), bi bo CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. The following observations are based on a single specimen of Nansenia schmitti (Fowler), a paratype from 4°12710” N., 118°38’08” E. near Mabul Island. It is a pleasure to acknowledge the kindness of Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, Curator of Fishes, United States National Museum, in permitting me to dissect this specimen. OSTEOLOGY Ethmoid cartilage (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) considerably restricted in extent. Main portion not pierced by median foramen as in Plecoglossus and some Os- merids (Chapman, 194la and >). Foramen of olfactory nerve lies mostly in notch on inner side of prefrontal and scarcely notches side of ethmoid cartilage. Fic. 1—Dorsal view of the cranium of Nansenia schmitti, with circumorbital and nasal bones left on the left side, x 5. Vou. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 3 Cartilage thinly separates frontals and prefrontals dorsally and extends back as thin band under frontals to lie between orbitosphenoid and alisphenoids below and frontals above to join chondrocranium of postorbital portion of cranium. Ethmoid cartilage a thin pad ventrally between mesethmoid above and vomer and parasphenoid below, rising upward to fill interior of irregularly conic mesethmoid, a rather thin ossification on surface of cartilage, and extending posteriorly along parasphenoid to end in point on that bone about halfway to pro-otics. Cartilage widest over parasphenoid and vomer, where it throws up a narrow column under each prefrontal for its support, and laterally projects outward to overlie median edges of mesopterygoids, binding those bones se- curely to parasphenoid. Mesethmoid (Figs. 1 and 3) single, shaped like hollow cone which has been strongly flattened sideways. Considerably higher than in Argentina or Bathy- lagus. No ventral ethmoids (as in Argentina and most Osmerids) or lateral ethmoids (as in some Osmerids). ABBREVIATIONS USED IN ALL FIGURES AC Actinost N_ Nasal AL Alisphenoid O Opercle AN Angular OR Orbitosphenoid AR Articular OT Opisthotic B. Basioccipital P Parietal BB Basibranchial PA Palatine BR. Branchiostegal ray PAR Parasphenoid BS Basisphenoid PC Postceleithrum C Ceratohyal PF Prefrontal CB Ceratobranchial PG Pterygoid CL Cleithrum PM Premaxillary CO Coracoid POP Preopercle D_ Dentary POR Postorbital E_ Epihyal POT Pro-otic EB Epibranchial PT Pterotic EC Ethmoid cartilage PTT Posttemporal EP Epiotic Q Quadrate EX Exoccipital S Symplectic F Frontal SB Suprabasal G_ Glossohyal SC Supracleithrum H Hyomandibular SCA Scapula HB Hypobranchial SO Supraoccipital I Interhyai SOP Subopercle IN Interopercle SP Sphenotic LLB Lateral line bone ST Supratemporal M Maxillary SU Supraorbital MC Mesocoracoid SUB Suprabranchial ME Mesethmoid V_ Vomer MES Mesopterygoid VH_ Ventral hypohyal MET Metapterygoid 4 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. . Vomer (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) curves downward strongly at anterior edge, on which it bears about twelve tiny, slender teeth in a single series. It curves upward around end of cranium to reach and slightly overlie lower edge of mesethmoid, with long, thin, posterior shank extending along ventral side of parasphenoid to end in sharp point at vertical from about midway between upper end of prefrontals and orbitosphenoid. Vomer strongly concave on its under side. Long, spatulate anterior end of parasphenoid (Figs. 2 and 3) strongly con- cave underneath. Concavity broadest and deepest anteriorly over vomer and tapers back to point under basisphenoid where bone becomes just as strongly convex. Short, broad wings sent up along anterior edge of pro-otics, to fall short of trigemino-facialis foramina of latter. Convexity of parasphenoid to- Vv Fic. 2.—Ventral view of the cranium of Nansenia schmitti, x 5. Vor. XXVI]J CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 5 gether with narrow groove in cartilage between pro-otics and on basioccipital provides narrow and shallow myodome which opens by a tiny pore posteriorly. “Myodome” doubtfully functional, since no fibers of rectus muscles of eye were noticed upon lifting parasphenoid off other bones. There is evident again the peculiar correlation of the presence of a broad myodome with the presence of a mesocoracoid and the disappearance of the myodome with the disappearance of the mesocoracoid. In Argentina the myodome is commodious and opens broadly behind, and the mesocoracoid is well developed. In Bathylagus, the next closest known relative of the Microstomidae, the mesocoracoid is absent and so is the myodome. Even in the Osmeridae it was noted that in the Tha- leichthys group of genera, where the mesocoracoid is well developed, the myodome opened broadly behind, and in the Mallotus group, where the meso- coracoid is more weakly developed, the posterior opening of the myodome is much restricted. It is hard to conceive of a functional relationship between these two organs. Frontals (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) curiously interwoven on midline; first that of right side overlying that of left, then that of left overlying that of right, with result that none of underlying cartilage is exposed on midline. It is a relatively short step from this to the condition found in the Macropinnidae and Opistho- proctidae where the frontals are indistinguishably fused. Frontals not diverg- ing anteriorly as in Argentina (Chapman, 1942a), but ending in single point on mesethmoid ; overlying considerable portion of parietals and sphenotics pos- teriorly, but not quite reaching anterior edge of supraoccipital, which can be seen under parietals. Near lateral edge of each bone extends well-formed canal of sensory system. This deep canal not quite closed into tube dorsally at any place, and broadest anteriorly where it diverges over prefrontals to send one branch of nerve out over that bone and another through canal of basal bone to snout. Canal continued at posterior end down over postorbital and out onto circumorbital ring. On ventral side of frontal a wing extends down over upper E arene if . jyt ] 1 IE Pr LL Tee DIELS. Ss ZZ: B POT Fic. 3.—Lateral view of the cranium of Nansenia schnutti, « 5. 6 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. edge of alisphenoid and opisthotic, binding those bones and frontal together — firmly. Prefrontals (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) small, rather weakly ossified bones, mesial edge of each notched in middle for emergence of olfactory nerve into nasal capsule. Large, flat parictals (Figs. 1 and 3) meeting broadly on midline, with that of left side overlying that of right for anterior three-fourths of their length. Nearly a third of their surface covered by frontals, and they in turn cover about half of supraoccipital as well as anterior tips of epiotics and small corner of sphenotics. Anteriorly they and frontals project slightly out over deep temporal fossae, but nothing like the deep caverns of Argentina is formed. Each parietal bears on its surface a flimsy trough for sensory canal. Of half of supraoccipital (Figs. 1 and 3) exposed, about half forms dorsal surface and other half slopes downward on posterior surface of cranium. As in other fishes of this relationship, supraoccipital widely separated from foramen magnum, not only by exoccipitals but by protruding mesial wings of epiotics. Epiotics (Figs. 1 and 3) high, broad, and narrowly rounded over semicir- cular canals of the ears. Pterotics (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) merely flattened cones which surround hori- zontal semicircular canals of ears... Ventrally each bone bears posterior half of cartilage-lined surface of articulation for hyomandibular. Ventral side of sphenotic (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) nearly entirely occupied by cartilaginous socket of hyomandibular, which extends to anterior edge of bone. Anterior face large and fills space between alisphenoid, pro-otic and frontal. About half of dorsal surface covered by frontal and rest covered by postorbital. Posterior surface largest and forms anterior end of enlarged temporal fossa. Alisphenoids (Figs. 2 and 3) large, well-formed bones lying between orbi- tosphenoid and postorbital portion of cranium, not touching one another any- where, but opening between them to brain cavity relatively narrow. Orbitosphenoid (Figs. 2 and 3) a deep but narrow bone around olfactory lobes of brain and bases of olfactory nerves. Latter emerging from slit-like anterior opening of bone. Ventral edge of bone sharp with interorbital septum extending from it to parasphenoid. Pro-otics (Figs. 2 and 3) the largest bones of postorbital part of cranium. A strongly ossified ridge which runs up from parasphenoid wing to sphenotic dividing bone into an anterior and posterior face. Anterior face large and somewhat concave, with four small nerve foramina, and two larger ones pierc- ing it. Another nerve emerges right through dividing ridge, a second posterior to ridge, and a third through posterior face of bone. How many of these nerves are associated with the trigemino-facialis complex could not be determined. Posterior portion of bone forms a prominent part of enlarged bulges for otoliths. Mesial edges of pro-otics, and relatively slender band of cartilage be- tween them, turn upward anteriorly and between this roof and wings of para- sphenoid lies a shallow concavity in which rectus muscles of eyes are inserted. VoL. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 7 Basisphenoid (Fig. 3BS) small and slender, curving downward from up- lifted junction of pro-otics to parasphenoid, and capped with cartilage at its junction with parasphenoid, but not very strongly attached to that bone. Basioccipital (Figs. 1, 2, and 3B) strongly constricted posteriorly to form entire occipital condyle, but thin and almost transparent forward where it bulges out to form posterior two-thirds of otolith expansions. Otoliths pro- portionately very large bones, plainly visible through basioccipital pro-otics, which extend from wings of parasphenoid back nearly to occipital condyle. Exoccipitals (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) send broad wings up to form roof of fora- men magnum. Each wing also extends over basioccipital on occipital condyle, but thin and forms none of junction with first vertebra. Exoccipital visible from dorsal aspect between pterotic and epiotic when opisthotic removed. Foramina of vagus nerves, which pierce bones near posterior edge of cranium, unusually large. Opisthotics (Fig. 10) tiny, cup-shaped bones which cover junction of epiotic, exoccipital, and pterotic. Each little larger than ligament of post- temporal, which it attaches to cranium, and pulls off with it in position shown in figure. Cartilage of postorbital portion of cranium considerably restricted. Largest expanse in bottom and mesial side of deep temporal fossa between sphenotic, pterotic, and epiotic ; narrower expanse evident on posterior surface of cranium between epiotics, exoccipitals, and supraoccipital; and narrow band extends from this area down between exoccipitals. Long sockets of articulation of hyomandibulars lined with cartilage. Narrow band of cartilage evident between orbitosphenoid and alisphenoids, and between those bones and sphenotics and pro-otics. SPECIAL OSSIFICATIONS OF SENSORY SYSTEM Small bones associated with support of branches of lateral line system over head, while thin, broader and more extensive than in either Argentina or Bathylagus. This especially true of circumorbital bones, which cover entire cheek. Seven bones present in circumorbital series (Fig. 5). Two thin bones over eye essentially same as in Bathylagus (shown in dorsal aspect on left side of Fig. 1). Both bones thin and projecting straight out over orbit to form dorsal protection for soft parts of eye. Neither of these bones supports sensory canal, which in this region courses through tube on lateral edge of frontal, except that suborbital branch of system crosses postorbital in open tube as it leaves frontal. Lachrymal small, with only about half area of succeeding bone. These two bones meet flush and form a sheath under which maxillary rests. Suborbital 4, largest bone of the series, completely covers space between orbit and preopercle, between suborbitals 3 and 5, and attaches securely by membranes to preopercle along entire ventral and posterior edges. Suborbital 5 and posterior plate of postorbital cover remaining area between orbit and preopercle, Suborbital 8 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. branch of lateral line system runs around orbit from postorbital to its emergence from lachrymal along orbital edge of bones. Covered along its entire course by flange of thin bone that opens on side away from orbit to form a trough rather than tube. Suborbital bones all lined internally by brilliantly silvered membrane whose sheen is visible through thin, transparent bone. Nasals (Fig. 1) small, thin, hollow tubes, incompletely closed dorsally, which lie over top of nasal capsules and support sensory canals from frontals to their anterior terminations. Supratemporal (Fig. 4) thin and broad; attached loosely to sphenotic and pterotic on its dorsal edge, and extending ventrally over dorsal portion of opercle. Dorsal edge of bone curves over to form trough which does not com- pletely close into tube. Supratemporal silvered on inner side like suborbital bones. Extending posteriorly from sensory trough of supratemporal another semitubular bone attached to outer side of base of posttemporal (Fig. 10) serves to protect lateral line nerve from supratemporal to first enlarged scale of lateral line. THE Upper JAw Upper jaw (Fig. 4), except for small differences in shape of maxillaries, as in Bathylagus. Only premaxillary and maxillary present. Neither bears teeth ; both thin. Premaxillary a simple curved bone loosely attached at anterior end between mesethmoid and vomer. Anterior end of maxillary prolonged and a little thickened where it lies against edge of mesethmoid. Jn situ broadened maxillary nearly completely hidden under first two suborbital bones. Upper jaw so weak and loosely attached to cranium as to have lost most, if not all, of function of aiding in ingestion of food. MANDIBLE Mandible (Fig. +) likewise essentially same as in Bathylagus. It consists of the dentary, articular, angular, sesamoid articular, Meckel’s cartilage, and ossification of mandibular branch of sensory canal. Teeth larger and fewer than in Bathylagus but similar in shape, as closely pressed together, and borne in deep sockets along entire oral edge of dentary. Portion of tooth in socket as long as or longer than that protruding. Thirty-four teeth on each dentary in specimen examined. Angular larger than in Bathylagus. PALATINE ARCH Palatine arch (Fig. 4), as in Macropinna and Bathylagus, securely bound to ethmoid cartilage along its entire anterodorsal end, which includes palatine as well as cartilage behind it. Posterior to palatine cartilage of palatine arch rises in high and stout lump which is synchondrized with ethmoid cartilage at base of prefrontal. From this projection cartilage spreads posteriorly over anterior end of mesopterygoid to symplectic, but does not extend posteriorly to reach cartilage between hyomandibular and symplectic. Vor. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 9 Palatine with a few teeth of same size as those on vomer, and extending in single line continuously back from latter. Pterygoid sends a wing dorsally along cartilage behind palatine which reaches to ethmoid cartilage, but is sep- Fic. 4.—Lateral view of the suspensorium of Nansenia schmitti, with mouth parts pulled downward, x 5. 10 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47TH SER. Fic. 5.—Lateral view of the circumorbital bones of Nansenia schmitti, < 5. arated by considerable space from prefrontal. This wing merely a thin surface ossification on cartilage. Main portion of pterygoid broad and extends ven- trally along quadrate more than halfway to condyle of that bone. Quadrate es- sentially as in Bathylagus except that posteriorly directed spur along pre- opercle is longer. Mesopterygoid large, broad, and thin ; attached by membrane along its dorsal edge to parasphenoid; bears no teeth; and extends under cartilage of palatine arch. Two differences in this region from condition in Bathylagus notable. Levator arcus palatinus muscle extends only over pos- terior portion of mesopterygoid ; and anteromesial edge of bone bound to cra- nium (parasphenoid) by overlapping wing of ethmoid cartilage (Fig. 2). Metapterygoid larger than in Optisthoproctus, Macropinna, or Bathylagus, but still a small and insignificant bone. It sends a slender process up along ventral shaft of hyomandibular but does not touch that bone. It overlaps edge of mesopterygoid ventrally. Degenerate condition of metapterygoid typical of Opisthoproctoidei and a character which sets off clearly from Osmeridae (with which Bathylagidae, Argentinidae, and Microstomidae have been asso- ciated in past) because of exceptionally strong development of the bone in Osmerids. Hyorp ArcH Hyomandibular (Fig. 4) terminates dorsally in broad, cartilage-capped condyle which articulates in shallow socket that extends across nearly entire ventral face of pterotic and cartilage between sphenotic and pro-otic. Opercu- lar condyle capped with cartilage, and longer than main articular head of bone, Voit. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 11 but narrow. Wing of thin bone present in angle between two condyles. Length of this process leaves space between opercle and preopercle filled, like space dorsal to opercular condyle between that structure and supratemporal, with dense and tough connective tissue. High flange of thin bone on lateral face of bone protecting truncus hyoido-mandibularis facialis nerve as it emerges on lateral face of bone. Foramen of that nerve enters bone a little below level of opercular condyle near anterior edge of bone and proceeds nearly straight ventrally to lateral face. Preopercle bound tightly to posterior edge of hyo- mandibular with only a narrow crack between them near ventral end of hyo- mandibular for re-entrance of ramus hyoidius facialis to inner side of skull. Wing of bone in anterior angle between articular head and ventral shaft of hyomandibular reduced in extent, but nearly as thick as rest of bone. Rod of cartilage between hyomandibular and symplectic narrow, short, and straight so bones directly in line. Symplectic (Fig. 4) narrow but thickened much longer than in Bathylagus and curve of bone much less. Membrane only between symplectic and meta- pterygoid and mesopterygoid. A small opening present between symplectic and angular flange of preopercle. Long anterior extension of bone bound tightly to posterior process of quadrate and extends a short way on main body of that bone. Interhyal, epthyal, ceratohyal, and hypohyals (Fig. 6) essentially as: in Bathylagus, interhyal a little smaller, ceratohyal more constricted in its middle, and ossification of dorsal hypohyal not extending broadly over dorsal side onto lateral surface of bone. Four branchiostegal rays broad, but thin and delicate. In Figure 6 they have been fanned out more than naturally. Most anterior of these attached to ceratohyal, others on cartilage around epihyal. First con- siderably shortest. All attached to epihyal-ceratohyal very loosely; held to- gether and moved by broad and thin interhyoideus muscle which covers their Fra. 6.—Lateral view of the hyoid apparatus of Nansenia schmitti, < 5. 12 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. surfaces. All covered on inner side by bright silvery pigment found under other bones of lateral surface of skull. OPpERCULAR APPARATUS Opercle (Fig 4) a delicate, thin bone thickened only at small and shallow articular socket. Ventrally it overlaps dorsal edge of subopercle, to which it is tightly bound. Long, slender subopercle sends an arm dorsally around an- teroventral corner of opercle which is covered by preopercle. From anterior edge of dorsal arm a short prong extends over dorsal edge of interopercle so all three opercular bones securely, but flexibly, joined together. Opercle and subopercle underlaid by same brilliantly silver pigment as circumorbital bones. Only small part of posterior end of long interopercle visible in lateral view, since it is hidden anteriorly clear to the angular by the preopercle. Preopercle (Fig. 4) differs markedly from that of bathylagus in broad post- erior and ventral extensions, and in this character it resembles Macropinna, although the two preopercles do not overlap ventrally as in this latter genus. Good share of bone excluded from lateral view by broad, circumorbital bones. Bone tightly bound to hyomandibular, symplectic, and quadrate. Two promi- nent posterior projections from tube of sensory canal which courses it and, as in Bathylagus, tube closed on vertical arm of bone and open ventrally on large horizontal arm. GILL ARCHES Bones of gill arches (Figs. 7, 8, and 9) sturdy and resemble those of Bathylagus more than those of Argentina. Ossified portion of glossohyal larger than cartilaginous anterior part. Dental cement bone that it bears with- out teeth, flat, thin, and not curving downward around cartilage. Suprabasal bone likewise without teeth, simple, flat, and thin, much reduced from its promi- nent development in Osmerids. No first suprabranchial found. Fourth epi- branchial entirely cartilaginous and curls peculiarly along edge of fourth suprabranchial. Fourth suprabranchial thin, but very broadly expanded, and high. It stands nearly at right angles to rest of superior gill bones and sticks up far above their level. On its posterior surface is inserted a broad muscle which extends directly downward to ceratobranchial below. This expanded fourth suprabranchial and broad muscle typical of Opisthoproctoid fishes and almost identical in Argentina, Bathylagus, Microstoma, and Macropinna. Trewevas (1933) shows bone similarly developed in Opisthoproctus. Small dental cement bone on cartilage ahead of fourth suprabranchial bears two teeth in Microstoma but no teeth oppose them on gill arch below. SHOULDER GIRDLE Dorsal fork of posttemporal (Fig. 10) long, slender, and extending up along back side of epiotic, to which it is attached by a weak ligament. Ventral fork stout and stubby, sending a short, stout ligament to opisthotic. Supra- Vout. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE Fic. 8.—Dorsal view of the dorsal half of the gill arches of Nansenia schmitti, * 5. 14 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. SUB*+ Fic. 9.—Ventral view of the dorsal half of the gill arches of Nansenia schmitti, with fourth suprabranchial somewhat depressed from its nearly vertical plane, x 5. Fic. 10.—Mesial view of the shoulder girdle of Nansenia schmitti, with postcleithra pushed slightly posteriorly below to expose the actinosts, x 5. Vor. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 15 cleithrum very thin, but on its mesial side a thin vane extends between the muscles and somewhat strengthens the bone. Cleithrum also thin and weakly ossified, except for a ray of denser ossification which extends dorsally to supra- cleithrum and the rod which extends anteriorly. On mesial side of bone a narrow ledge protrudes at an angle, to upper side of which attaches the pri- mary shoulder girdle. A small, flat, special ossification of sensory canal bound to outer side of junction of posttemporal and supracleithrum. Three thin, flat postcleithra present just under skin, extending in a continuously overlapped row from supracleithrum to posterior process of coracoid. In Figure 10 these bones drawn backward slightly and primary shoulder girdle somewhat de- pressed to better show parts. In natural position lower postcleithrum lies against posterior process of coracoid. Primary shoulder girdle bound to cleithrum by wide band of cartilage which continues downward between scapula and coracoid. Scapula nearly flat and has about same area as coracoid. Small scapular foramen entirely contained within bone. Four small actinosts borne entirely on scapula. Only dorsalmost actinost has normal hourglass shape. Coracoid bears both prominent posterior and anterior processes. Anterior process lightly bound to anterior extension of cleithrum, enclosing a considerable interosseous space between bones. Pos- terior process of coracoid is spike-like and bears rod of cartilage on posterior end, as in Argentina. No mesocoracoid. PELVIC GIRDLE Pelvic bones (Fig. 11) broad and relatively large, but rather lightly ossi- fied. Similar in shape to those of Argentina. Ere. 11. — Ventral Fie. 12—Caudal skeleton of Nansenia schmitti, x 5. view of left pelvic bone of Nansenia schmitti, x 5. 16 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. AXIAL SKELETON Forty-three normal and a single upturned terminal vertebra present. It could not be determined with certainty if first vertebra bore ribs, but succeed- ing twenty-nine do, leaving 13 caudal vertebrae. Ribs long, slender, and flat- tened on proximal end, which is bound to a broad, heavy parapophysis. Neural spines lightly ossified and slender, not closing dorsally over neural canal until behind dorsal fin, where they become stouter and more spine-like. Thirteen broad and heavy interneurals present which form almost solid osseous line between cranium and dorsal fin. First particularly large, anastomosed to neural spine, and forms protective channel over spinal nerve as it emerges from foramen magnum. Interneurals project down to slender neural spines and efficiently protect spinal cord from above, besides giving broad areas for insertion of dorsal body muscles. Besides terminal urostyle, five vertebrae and their neural and haemal spines modified for support of caudal fin (Fig. 12) and its muscles. Thin but broad wings of bone formed on anterior edges of these neural and haemal spines for insertion of caudal musculature so that interspaces between ‘spines very re- stricted. First basipterygium of dorsal fin inserted between twelfth and thirteenth neural spine and somewhat crowds last two interneurals. Nine of these bones present, all long and broad, like interneurals. First basipterygium of anal fin is inserted behind thirty-first vertebra’s haemal spine. Supports of anal fin long and slender, unlike those of dorsal fin, and reach only to haemal spines, not between them. | Long, slender epineural inserted on broadened base of each neural spine of first seventeen vertebrae. Most posterior epineurals so slender and fine that they may have been accidentally removed from two or three other ver- tebrae. No epipleurals. Body covered with rather large, thin cycloid scales, much like those illus- trated by Beebe (1931) for Bathylagus. VISCERAL ANATOMY Viscera of single specimen available none too well-preserved, but some notes of value made. Most prominent feature of abdomen is large silvery air bladder which fills nearly whole dorsal half of abdominal cavity from cranium almost to anus. Completely closed and airtight at both ends, although vestigial ducts may have existed which were not discovered because of condition of specimen. Color a most brilliant silver, and organ has appearance of being made up of fine circular rings of bright, thin tinsel. Walls paper-thin ; organ simple and blunt on both ends. Kidney made up of same kind of granular matter filled with black specks as found in Bathylagus and Macropinna; restricted to posterior quarter of VoL. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 17 abdominal cavity, and gives appearance of being pushed into back corner by large air bladder. Stomach long and slender, extending fully halfway back of abdominal cavity before turning forward again, with rugose external appearance and cov- ered by dark-brown pigment. Pyloric end less than one-quarter length of cardiac end, but intestine runs forward under cardiac end nearly to its an- terior end before flexing backward to run straight to anus. Three long, pyloric caeca present which all come off pyloris at same spot. Shortest extends back in crease between two arms of stomach to end of stomach; second little longer and bound tightly to wall of pyloric end of stomach; third slender and very long, extending along full length of stomach anteriorly and lying in crease between cardiac end of stomach and intestine, on left side. End of intestine expanded somewhat, and bulbous. Anterior to this for about one-third length of intestine this organ filled internally by a series of lamellae which project inwardly so as to almost completely fill lumen of - intestine. Although condition of specimen did not permit minute examination, it was assumed that this was a spiral valve similar to that found in Argentina, Bathylagus, Leuroglossus, and Macropinna. Specimen examined was a female with eggs very minute and probably immature. As in Bathylagus and Macropinna, eggs arranged in thin, vertical lamellae which, lying closely one against the other, form the long, slender ovary. THE GENERA AND SPECIES OF MICROSTOMIDAE The family Microstomidae contains two genera: Microstoma Cuvier and Nansenia Jordan and Evermann. The following key will serve for their separation : 1 a. Dorsal fin placed well behind the middle of the body, the origin about midway between the posterior border of the eye and the first rays of the caudal; pelvic fins inserted a little anterior to the origin of the dorsal; no adipose fin} vertebrae’45 to 4/7009. 6 a, Microstoma 1b. Dorsal fin originating approximately in the middle of the body; pelvic fins inserted under or a little behind the last dorsal ray ; adipose ine Present; VeErleprae 4.0 LOMao = someon ee naa tea ws ce evs wa Nansenia A single species of Microstoma, M. microstoma (Risso), is known, from the Mediterranean and the Gulf of Guinea. Six species referable to Nansenia have been described from the oceans of the world. Nansenia groenlandica was originally described by Reinhardt (1839) as Microstomus groenlandicus from a single specimen taken off the Greenland coast, and it was on his brief description that Jordan and Evermann (1896) based the genus Nansenia. More than 500 specimens of the species 18 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. were subsequently taken by the Danish ‘“Thor’’ expeditions (Schmidt, 1918) in the North Atlantic west of the British Isles, as far south as 48’ 43” N. (west of Brittany), and as far west as Iceland. Nansenia oblita (Facciola) is known from the western half of the Mediterranean and off the west coast of Brittany (Schmidt, 1918). These two species have been capably differ- entiated by Schmidt (1918) as follows: N. groenlandica; predorsal length equals 43.4 to 50 percent of total length, preventral length equals 50 to 55 percent of total length, prepectoral length equals 21.4 to 22 percent of total length, greatest depth equals 9.5 to 12 percent of total length; whereas in N. oblita: predorsal length equals 52.7 to 58.7 percent of total length, pre- ventral length equals 61.2 to 66.7 percent of total length, prepectoral length equals 28.2 to 30.5 percent of total length, greatest depth equals 16.0 to 18.6 percent of total length. Three species have been described from the Western Pacific. Tanaka . (1911) described a specimen from the Sagami Sea, Japan, as Nansenia gronlandica. On the basis of the reduced pelvic ray counts (9 to 10) given by Tanaka, the more posterior placement of the ventral fins, and the wide sep- aration of locality from the North Atlantic species, Schmidt (1918) proposed that the Japanese form be recognised as a separate species to which he give the name Nansenia tanakat. Previously to this Jordan and Thompson (1914) described a new species Nansenia ardesiaca from a single specimen taken in Sagami Bay, Japan. This was known to Schmidt but the description was not available to him. Jordan and Thompson considered their species to be con- specific with Tanaka’s, and if this were so their name would antedate Schmidt’s. However, their description varies in some particulars from Tanaka’s, the most important discrepancies being 12 plus 25 gill rakers on the first arch of their specimen as against 10 plus 11 on Tanaka’s, and 50 scales in the lateral line to the base of the caudal as against 44 in Tanaka’s. Unless the figure given by Tanaka for the raker count on the lower gill arch is a misprint for 21 it would be rather difficult to reconcile the descriptions. Until more Jap- anese specimens are available it will not be possible to determine whether two species are involved or if all the Japanese specimens are referable to Nansenia ardesiaca. At any rate the Japanese specimens agree with N. groenlandica in the depth of the body, but have fewer rays in the pectoral (Atlantic species 14 to 15, Japanese specimens 9 to 12), and agree with N. oblita in the number of pectoral rays but are more slender (greatest depth 5.4 to 6.2 in oblita, 7.5 to 8.0 in the Japanese specimens). Unfortunately no scale or gill raker counts are available in the literature for oblita or groenlandica, and a definite differentiation from the Japanese specimens cannot be made. Fowler (1933) described Microstoma schmitti from the Philippines and Borneo, placing it in a new subgenus Euproserpa. The species has an evident adipose fin, 43 vertebrae, the dorsal fin is located in the middle of the body, and the ventrals are located slightly behind the dorsal. It is, therefore, a mem- ber of the genus Nansenia, rather than Microstoma. The species can be told Vou. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 19 from the Japanese specimens by the heavier body (greatest depth 6% in body length), fewer scales (38 along the lateral line to the caudal base), and fewer gill rakers (8 plus 18 on first gill arch). It cannot be differentiated from Nansenia oblita by means of the available descriptions, but it is probable that the comparison of Mediterranean and Philippine material would show the species to be distinct. A sixth species was described by Gilchrist (1922) from material taken off South Africa as Bathymacrops macrolepis. In a later account (Gilchrist and von Bonde, 1924) he compared it with Tanaka’s description and said: “The S. African and Japanese do not seem to differ generically and only in small de- tails, specifically such as the number of rays and scales, though the number of gill-rakers in the former is much larger.” The genus does not differ from Nansenia and must be considered a synonym of the latter ; the species does not differ from Nansenia ardesiaca and must be considered a synonym of that species. SVolb MATIC POSITION OF THE MICROSTOMIDAE The above description reveals that the Microstomidae bear no especially close relationship to the Salmonoid fishes. Nansenia agrees with the Opistho- proctoid fishes in the following characters: Dentition lacking on premaxillaries and maxillaries, and these bones reduced in size and function; no supra- maxillaries; palatine arch strongly bound to cranium anteriorly; enlarged mesopterygoid bound to parasphenoid dorsally and extending under cartilage of palatine arch ventrally ; metapterygoid minute; vomer with long posterior shaft and single row of teeth around head of bone forming entire dorsal denti- tion of mouth; spiral valve present; etc. It thus must be considered a member of the suborder Opisthoproctoidei of the order Isospondyli. Although they diverge widely from the Argentinidae in many important characters (Chapman, 1942a) such as the dentition of the tongue, absence of mesocoracoid, minor development of myodome, reduced number of vertebrae and branchiostegal rays, absence of ventral ethmoid, no roof over temporal fossae, etc., the Microstomidae agree with that family in having deep temporal fossae, parietals large and meeting broadly on midline, a ventral flange on frontal binding the alisphenoid and orbitosphenoid to that bone, basisphenoid present, postcleithra present, pelvic bone roughly rectangular, and the pres- ence of a well-developed air bladder. They must therefore be classed as the nearest known relative of the Argentinidae, and in some respects intermediate between those fishes and the Bathylagidae, although the relationship between these three families is definitely not in a straight evolutionary line. Such characters of the Microstomidae as the broadened circumorbital bones, broad- ened preopercle, lack of epipleurals, overlapping of frontals and parietals on the midline, broadened caudal supports of the last five vertebrae, absence of ventral ethmoid, etc., are not associated with either of the other families. 20 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER, While they possess many differences the progression of the Microstomidae and the Bathylagidae from the Argentina-like stock has been in the same manner, a loss or reduction of bones and organs, such as the reduction in number of vertebrae and branchiostegal rays, loss of dentition on the glossohyal and fifth ceratobranchial, reduction or loss of myodome, loss of mesocoracoid, first suprabranchial, etc. The Microstomidae have simply not progressed as far in this direction as the Bathylagidae and it cannot be demonstrated that they are progressive points along a direct evolutionary line to the more bizarre Macropinnidae and Opisthoproctidae. Of particular interest is the strong development of the air bladder in the Microstomidae and its complete absence in the Bathylagidae. An identical contrast was found in the outwardly similar Macropinnidae and Opisthoproctidae (Chapman, 1942); Trewevas, 1933) and this leads one to wonder if in this group of fishes there have not been two parallel lines of evolution to the shortened, vertical-eyed Macropinna-O pis- thoproctus type, one line (with air bladder highly developed) by way of Microstoma to Opisthoproctus, the other (without air bladder) by way of Bathylagus to Macropinna. The following diagnosis will serve to separate the Microstomidae from other fishes. MICROSTOMIDAE Opisthoproctoid fishes with laterally directed eyes, basisphenoid, post- cleithra, orbitosphenoid, parietals meeting on midline, temporal fossae deep but not roofed over by bone, highly developed physoclistous air bladder, four branchiostegal rays, about 43 to 47 vertebrae, frontals separately distinguish- able but overlapped along entire mesial edge; and lacking teeth on glossohyal and fifth ceratobranchial, mesocoracoids, first suprabranchials, and epipleurals. Vou. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF MICROSTOMIDAE 21 BIBLIOGRAPHY BARNARD, KEPPEL HARCOURT 1925. A monograph of the marine fishes of South Africa, pt. 1. Ann. South African Mus., 21: 1-418, pls. I-XVII, figs. 1-18. BEEBE, WILLIAM 1933. Deep sea fishes of the Bermuda Oceanographic Expeditions, No. 3. Argentini- dae. Zoologica, 16 (3): 97-146, figs. 26-46. CHAPMAN, WILBERT McLEop 1941a. The osteology and relationships of the Isospondylous fish Plecoglossus alti- velis Temminck and Schlegel. Jour. Morph., 68 (3) : 425-455, 12 text figs. 1941b. The osteology and relationships of the Osmerid fishes. Jour. Morph., 69 (2): 279-301, 15 text figs. 1942a. The osteology and relationships of the Argentinidae, a family of oceanic fishes. Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., 32 (4): 104-117, 8 text figs. 1942b. The osteology and relationship of the Bathypelagic fish Macropinna microstoma Chapman, with notes on its visceral anatomy. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 11, 9: 272-304, 9 text figs. 1943. The osteology and relationships of the bathypelagic fishes of the genus Bathy- lagus Gunther, with notes on the systematic position of Leuroglossus stilbius Gilbert and Therobromus callorhini Lucas. Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., 33 (5): 147-160, 8 text figs. FowLer, HENRY WEED 1933. Descriptions of new fishes obtained 1907 to 1910, chiefly in the Philippine Islands and adjacent seas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 85: 233-367, 30 pls. Gitcurist, J. D. F. 1922. Deep sea fishes procured by the S.S. “Pickle” (Part I). Rept. Fish. Marine Biol. Surv. South Africa, 3: 41-79, pls. VII-XII. Gitcurist, J. D. F., anp CEcCIL voN BONDE 1924. Deep sea fishes procured by the S.S. “Pickle” (Part II). Rept. Fish. Marine Biol. Surv. South Africa, 3 (7) : 1-24, pls. I-VI. GILL, THEODORE 1861. Catalogue of the fishes of the eastern coast of North America from Greenland to Georgia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Ser. 2, 13: 1-63. GUNTHER, ALBERT 1866. Catalogue of the fishes in the British Museum, 6: i-xv, 1-368. JoRDAN, DAavip STARR, AND BARTON WARREN EVERMANN 1896. The Fishes of North and Middle America. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 47 (1): 1-1240. JorDAN, Davip STARR, SHIGEHO TANAKA, AND JOHN OTTERBEIN SNYDER 1913. A catalogue of the fishes of Japan. Jour. Coll. Sci. Tokyo, 33: 1-497. JoRDAN, Davip STARR, AND WILLIAM FRANCIS THOMPSON 1914. Record of the fishes obtained in Japan in 1911. Mem. Carnegie Mus., 6 (4): 205-313, pls. XXIV-XLII. SCHMIDT, JOHANNES 1918. Argentinidae, Microstomidae, Opisthoproctidae, Mediterranean Odontostomi- ae ae Of a= iw ' -Z2t4p 22 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. dae. Rept. Dan. Oceanogr. Exp. 1908-10, vol. 2. Biology, A, 5: 1-40, 23 text figs., 4 charts. TANAKA, SHIGEHO 1911. Figures and descriptions of the fishes of Japan, including Riukiu Islands, Bonin Islands, Formosa, Kurile Islands, Korea, and Southern Sakhalin. Vols. I-X, Tokyo, 1911-1912: 1-186, pls. I-L, figs. 1-193. TREWEVAS, ETHELWYNN 1933. On the structure of two oceanic fishes, Cyema atrum Ginther and Opistho- proctus soleatus Vaillant. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1933 (pt. 3): 601-614, 8 text figs. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA AGCADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 2, pp. 25-41, text figs. 1-18 June 28, 1948 THE OSTEOLOGY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE ROUND HERRING Etrumeus micropus Temminck and Schlegel BY WILBERT M. CHAPMAN Curator of Ichthyology California Academy of Sciences HE ROUND herrings are a small group of fishes found in tropical and tem- Eee parts of the Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian oceans. They are some- times included in the Clupeidae and sometimes segregated into a separate family, the Dussumieridae. The brief discussion of the skull of Dussumieria acuta by Ridewood (1904) is the chief source of information on the osteology of the group. To the writer’s knowledge no study of the anatomy of the genus Etrumeus, or of the axial skeleton of any of the group, has been previously made. It is the purpose of the present report to describe the osteology of Etrumeus muicropus Temminck and Schlegel and discuss the relationships of the round herrings to the other Clupeoid fishes. CRANIUM The cranium (Figs. 1, 2, and 3) bears a strong resemblance to that of the Clupeidae (Figs. 4, 5, and-6; and Phillips, 1942), but differs in the following respects: The ethmoid cartilage is considerably broader and bulkier between the prefrontals and the anterolateral wings of the mesethmoid. The ossifica- tion of the mesethmoid is correspondingly reduced in size. There is no fora- men in the cartilage which is exposed dorsally between the anterior ends of the frontals. The anterior knob of the vomer is proportionately enlarged and bears teeth, while the posterior shank of the bone is broader than in the Clupeidae, and not so long. The orbitosphenoid arches high under the frontals, without an opening between it and the cartilage, except the foramina for the emergence of the 25 26 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. olfactory nerves. The anterior end is broad and curves downward behind the prefrontal to reach the cartilage over the parasphenoid, not as shown by Ridewood (1904, Fig. 131) for Dussuimieria acuta. No median wing was found descending from the small basisphenoid to the parasphenoid. The lateral projection of the sphenotic is much smaller than in the Clu- peidae. The temporal foramen is a small slit. The epiotic fossa is deep and large, but scarcely visible in dorsal aspect. More of the supraoccipital is ex- posed between the parietals than in the Clupeidae. The sockets of articulation of the hyomandibular are separate, one on the pterotic, the other on the sphe- notic. The auditory foramen is entirely borne by the exoccipital. Fic. 1.—Dorsal view of the cranium of Etrumeus micropus, x4 PAR Fic. 3.—Lateral view of the cranium of Etrumeus micropus, x3.5 28 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES | Proc. 47H SER. SPECIAL OSSIFICATIONS OF THE SENSORY SYSTEM The nasal (Fig. 7) is a thin, flat bone with about the same surface area as the second circumorbital bone. It lies directly over the nasal capsule and, while it bears the anterior portion of the sensory nerve, it is not grooved nor tubular for the protection of the nerve, and is only slightly concave on top. The seven bones of the circumorbital series of the Clupeidae are found here (Fig. 7), but in somewhat differing proportions. The anterior half of the first is broadened and flattened in a vertical plane. The second is likewise broadened, with its dorsal edge overlying the ventral edge of the first, and Fic. 4.—Dorsal view of the cranium of Sardinops cacrulea, x2.5 PTO PAR Fic. 6.—Lateral view of the cranium of Sardinops caerulea, x2 30 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47TH SER, slightly underlying the dorsal edge of the third (lachrymal). The fifth is proportionately even larger than in the Clupeidae. Its posterior edge, to- gether with the sixth and seventh bones, overlie the preopercle, leaving no interosseous space. A thin tubular bone, not illustrated, bridges the gap be- tween the pterotic and posttemporal. Upper JAw The premaxillary (Fig. 7) is smaller than in the Clupeidae and is without teeth. The lateral face of the maxillary bears a longitudinal ridge which in life meets the lower edge of the lachrymal, leaving the dorsal edge of the maxillary and the supramaxillary hidden under the circumorbital bones. The maxillary bears a single row of tiny teeth. There is a single, slender supra- maxillary. Lower JAw The mandible is deepest over its posterior third. The dentary (Fig. 8) bears a single row of teeth, which are larger than those on the maxillary. The small angular is almost covered laterally by the posterior prong of the articu- lar. The sesamoid articular is a tiny, thin bone lying against the angular and over the posterior end of Meckel’s cartilage. The latter is a slender straight rod of cartilage extending from the middle of the angular to the anterior third of the dentary. The angular is broadly overlapped by the dentary. PALATINE ARCH The palatine (Fig. 8) is long and slender and bears a plate of fine teeth (like those on the tongue) along its under and inner surface. The pterygoid is a thin bone, mostly in a vertical plane, which lies over the cartilage behind the palatine and that between the quadrate and mesopterygoid. It does not bear teeth, although the posterior projection of the palatine, which overlies the anterior end of the bone and does bear teeth, gives it the appearance of doing so. From the dorsal end of the bone, but borne mostly on the carti- Fic. 7.—Circumorbital bones and upper jaw of Etrumeus micropus, x3 Vou. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF THE ROUND HERRING 31 lage, a tough tendon runs to the cavity in the posterior side of the frontal above, and securely binds the palatine arch to the cranium. The mesoptery- goid is long and thin and extends far forward along the inner side of the pala- tine nearly to the anterior end of that bone (as shown by Ridewood, 1904, Fig. 132, for Dussunueria acuta). Excepting the posterior quarter of its sur- face, the under side of the bone is entirely covered by fine, almost granular, teeth. The dorsal side of the bone is slightly concave and supports the eye. A small projection from the inner edge of the metapterygoid aids in supporting the posterior end of the mesopterygoid. Behind the mesopterygoid lies an- other bone of the same nature which is broader than the mesopterygoid and has almost as much surface area. It les under the toothless posterior end of the mesopterygoid and extends posteriorly under the metapterygoid and hyo- mandibular. It lies loosely in the membranes of the roof of the mouth and is not associated with the other bones. A considerable thickness of membranes lies between it and the mesopterygoid. The under side of the bone is com- pletely covered with fine teeth. This bone is not shown by Ridewood for Dussumieria. It has been found in the Engraulidae, but not the Clupeidae (Chapman, 1943, a and b). The metapterygoid (Fig. 8) is proportionately smaller than in the Clupei- dae, but it is a strongly ossified bone. There is a characteristic interosseous space between it and the ventral edge of the hyomandibular. The quadrate differs little from that of the Clupeidae. Hyorp ArcH The hyomandibular (Fig. 8) has two distinet cranial condyles, of which the posterior one is a little the larger. The anterior condyle articulates entirely on the sphenotic ; the posterior entirely on the pterotic. The opercular condyle Fic. 8.—Lateral view of the suspensorium of Etrumeus micropus, x3 32 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. curves downward from the posterior condyle and is about the same size as the anterior condyle. The hyoido-mandibularis facialis nerve enters the bone on the inner side near the top of the anterior condyle and emerges through a broad opening near the center of the face of the bone. The anterior side of the ventral edge of the bone is suturally connected with a strong spur project- ing up from the metapterygoid. The ventral edge of the bone is character- istically cut away, leaving a large opening between the hyomandibular and the metapterygoid. The long, slender sympletic extends anteroventrally at an angle of about 120° with the hyomandibular. The tiny, conical interhyal (Fig. 9) is attached to the pad of cartilage Fra. 9—Hyoid apparatus of Etrinneus aicropus, x4 between the hyomandibular and the symplectic and is attached ventrally to a slight protuberance from the epihyal. The ventral edge of the ceratohyal (Fig. 9) is not excavated as in the Clupeidae, but the groove in the middle of the epihyal and ceratohyal, characteristic of the Clupeidae, is: found here. The dorsal hypohyal is not visible from the lateral aspect (Fig. 9), since it is covered with cartilage, but it is only a little smaller than the ventral hypo- hyal. There are a great many more branchiostegal rays (14) than in the Clupeidae, but they are considerably smaller. The loss of branchiostegal rays in the Clupeidae has been mainly from those articulating with the cerato- hyal. OpERCULAR APPARATUS The opercle, subopercle, and interopercle (Fig. 8) differ only in relative proportions from the same bones in Clupeidae, except that the extensions of the sensory system over the opercle, which more or less mark the Clupeoid opercle, are not present here. The preopercle is broadly expanded posteriorly, quite unlike that of the Clupeidae; has numerous subsidiary tubules coming off the main nerve tube; nearly covers the interopercle, and leaves no open space between the preopercle and the other opercular bones. Rather than being of the customary boomerang shape, the preopercle is almost triangular in lateral view. Vor. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF THE ROUND HERRING 38) GILL ARCHES The lower half of the gill arch (Fig. 10) is well supplied with small granular teeth, which work against those of the roof of the mouth. The CBB Fre. 10.—Dorsal view of the ventral half of the gill arches of Etrwmeus micropus, x4 34 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47TH SER. glossohyal is large, but mostly cartilaginous. It is nearly covered dorsally by a thin plate of teeth. The suprabasal bone, found so well developed in the Engraulidae, Osmeridae, and Plecoglossidae, but poorly developed and eden- tulous in the Clupeidae (Fig. 11), covers the first two basibranchials and is completely covered with teeth. There are small patches of teeth on separable bony plates on the hypobranchials of the first gill arch. The teeth of the ante- rior part of the gill arch work against those on the vomer, palatines, and Oo Fie. 11.—Dorsal view of the ventral half of the gill arches of Sardinops caerulea, x2 Voit. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF THE ROUND HERRING 35 mesopterygoids above, although those on the palatines are more in apposi- tion to those on the dentaries. The pharyngeals and fourth suprabranchials (Fig. 12) likewise bear plates of teeth which oppose each other. They are somewhat larger and not so thickly concentrated as those in the front of the mouth. There are no teeth dorsally on the first three gill arches (Fig. 12). The gill rakers (Fig. 13) are shorter, stubbier, and less numerous than is typical for the Clupeidae (Fig. 14). Fic. 12—Ventral view of the dorsal half of the gill arches of Etrumeus micropus, x4 Fre. 14—Lateral view of the gill rakers on the first arch of 4losa sapidissima, x4 36 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. PECTORAL GIRDLE The posttemporal (Fig. 15) is not as strong as in the Clupeidae (Fig. 16). The flattened body of the bone is smaller and both the epiotic and opisthotic arms are longer and more slender. The supracleithrum, on the other hand, is longer and considerably wider than in the Clupeidae. It bears a short tube for the lateral line nerve on its outer face. There are two postcleithra: the first a simple flat bone, shaped like a scale, which is fitted in between the supracleithrum and cleithrum, and the second, which has a long spine pro- jecting posteroventrally like that of Sardinops (Fig. 16), although the spine is not so long or heavy as in the sardine. Fia. 15.—Mesial view of the shoulder girdle of Etriumeus micropus, x3 The mesocoracoid is slender and attached dorsally to the anterior edge of the inner side of the cleithrum. The coracoid is proportionately larger and more heavily ossified than in the Clupeidae. The anterior edge is particularly broadly expanded. The interosseous opening between the cleithrum and coracoid is about three times the size it is in Sardinops. Behind this opening the coracoid is suturally attached to a process from the inner side of the cleithrum. The shoulder girdle is otherwise much as in Sardinops. PELVIC GIRDLE The pelvic bones (Fig. 17) are triangular and considerably broader and larger than in the Clupeidae. The chief feature of the pelvic girdle is the two modified ventral scutes which are much broadened and probably serve to help Vor. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF THE ROUND HERRING 37 distribute the stresses of the movement of the fin. These are the only ventral scutes present on the abdomen. XCE Fre. 16.—Mesial view of the shoulder girdle of Sardinops caerulea, x2.5 AXIAL SKELETON In one specimen of Etrumeus there were 56 vertebrae, including the ter- minal centrum. The haemal arch is closed first on the 18th vertebra. On this vertebra the parapophyses, whose union on the posterior caudal vertebrae forms the haemal arch and spine, are short, and not as deep as the centrum. The parapophyses get only slightly larger back to the 29th vertebra, but poste- rior to that they become increasingly lengthened until the 41st vertebra is reached. All of the first 41 vertebrae bear pleural ribs, which are all attached ligamentously to the parapophyses. On the last ten of these vertebrae the ribs are very loosely attached. The parapophyses throughout the abdomen are 38 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Fria. 17.—Ventral view of the pelvic girdle and supporting ventral scutes of Etrumeus micropus, x3 proportionately longer than those of the Clupeidae, and the ribs are broader. The anterior haemal zygapophyses appear first on the 31st vertebra; the ante- rior neural zygapophyses on the 25th. Anterior to this point the posterior neural zygapophysis is a blunt hump on the vertebra which does not overlap the following centrum, but by the time the 35th vertebra is reached this process has diminished in size until it is nearly lost. The posterior haemal zygapophysis retains its identity for another five vertebrae posteriorly, but then becomes only a point on the back of the vertebra. It does not project strongly ventrally as in the Engraulidae. The anterior zygapophyses of the caudal vertebrae (Fig. 18) are long, slender, and hug tightly the preceding vertebrae as in Opisthonema and Sardinops, though they are more slender and_ spikelike than in those genera. The anterior haemal zygapophysis of the penultimate vertebra is characteristically enlarged. Hypural number 4 is characteristically NS ANZ Fie. 18—Caudal skeleton of Etrumeus micropus, x4 VoL. XXVI] CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF THE ROUND HERRING 39 narrower than in the Clupeidae and hypural number 5 is slender and tapers posteriorly (unlike in the Clupeidae). All of the neural spines anterior to, and under, the dorsal fin are very slender and are not united dorsally, the first one behind the dorsal fin being the first in which the two halves are united dorsally into a stiff spine. The first interneural is. enlarged, lengthened and broadened, and extends down past the first neural spine to lie over the foramen magnum and protect the spinal nerve as it emerges from the cranium. The remaining interneurals are all much heavier than the adjacent neural spines. There are nineteen pterygiophores for the support of the dorsal fin. The first is very broadly expanded and the next five or six bear lateral vanes of bone which permit a broader attachment for the fin musculature. The series terminates in the long, slender dorsal stay typical of the Clupeoid fishes. The twelve pterygio- phores of the anal fin are closely bunched together under the haemal spines of the 42d to 45th vertebrae. The first is somewhat broadened, but the rest are very long and slender, the twelfth little shorter than the second. Epineurals and epipleurals are present on all vertebrae as in the Clupeidae, but those over the posterior part of the abdomen are branched several times instead of bearing a single fork as in the Clupeidae. On the caudal peduncle these bones are broadened and form an almost continuous bony sheath under the skin. Long, slender, simple epicentrals are present on all vertebrae in distinction to the condition in the Clupeidae and Engraulidae where they are absent on most of the caudal vertebrae. There are no myorhabdoi either dor- sally or ventrally. The only ventral scutes present are the two associated with the support of the pelvic fins. In the anterior segments the backward radiating osseous brushes from the epiotic region of the cranium fill the place of the epineurals, which they resemble, except that they are even more slender, and more numerous. They are not grouped in bunches as in the Clupeidae. DISCUSSION While the round herrings, of which Etrumeus is one, are often associated with the Clupeidae, and never with the Engraulidae, they nevertheless share several peculiar osteological characters with the latter (Chapman, 1943) which are not found in the Clupeidae (Phillips, 1942; Chapman, 1943a). Among these are: (1) the possession of the toothed secondary mesopterygoid ; (2) the well-developed, toothed suprabasal bone over the first two basibran- chials ; (3) the bifurcated, dorsal articular head of the hyomandibular ; (4) the lack of a descending limb on the basisphenoid; (5) the numerous branchio- stegal rays; and (6) the lack of ventral scutes, save for one or two remaining in the pelvic region. The first, second, and fifth of these characters must be considered primitive and are evidence that the round herrings are of ancient derivation and, rather than being a specialized offshoot of the Clupeidae, had already differentiated from the primitive Clupeoid stock before the develop- ment of recent Clupeidae. This is further borne out by the retention of epi- 40 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES | Proc. 4VH SER. centrals on all caudal vertebrae (lost on the posterior caudal vertebrae in the Clupeidae and Engraulidae), the presence of two postcleithra, and the primi- tive, simple condition of the various bony processes radiating back into the body musculature from the back of the cranium. There is no indication, however, that the round herrings bear a close rela- tion to recent Engraulids, for they share none of the striking specializations of that group, such as the enormous gape with its attendant osseous changes, the development of the cross-struts on the frontals, the exceptional develop- ment of the intermuscular bones of the body, and the large and prominent mesethmoid. The evidence is simply that both groups retain certain characters of the ancestral Clupeoid stock which recent Clupeids have lost. The above-noticed characters, the rounded abdomen, the abbreviated anal fin, the posterior insertion of the pelvic fins, the complete fusion of the adipose eyelids over the eyes, and other characters cited in the text serve to show that these fishes are as deserving of familial status as the Engraulidae or Clupeidae. They comprise the family Dussumieridae. DIAGNOSIS OF THE FAMILY DUSSUMIERIDAE Clupeoid fishes with a single supramaxillary; fifth bone of circumorbital series very large, not cut away anteriorly, and with its posterior edge overlying the preopercle; hyomandibular with two separate cranial heads, one for the sphenotic and the other for the pterotic articulation ; ventral edge of the hyo- mandibular cut away so that there is an open space between it and the meta- pterygoid; preopercle broadly expanded posteroventrally so as to cover most of interopercle and its junction with the subopercle; gape small, not reaching behind eye; glossohyal large and covered with fine teeth ; suprabasal long and broad, covering first two basibranchials and covered with fine teeth; two mesopterygoids, both covered with teeth; ceratobranchial of fifth gill arch with a long pad of small teeth; teeth found dorsally only on fourth gill arch ; no ethmoid foramen; no median descending wing on basisphenoid ; two post- cleithra present; anterior zygapophyses very strongly developed in caudal region, and broadly overlapping the preceding vertebra; ventral scutes absent except for two in region of pelvic fin insertion; myorhabdoi absent both dor- sally and ventrally; epicentrals present on all vertebrae; posterior haemal zygapophyses short throughout, and not projecting strongly on posterior ab- dominal vertebrae; pelvic fins behind dorsal; belly smoothly rounded; anal fin much shorter than dorsal; adipose layer over eye continuous, without vertical slit over pupil. BIBLIOGRAPHY CHAPMAN, W. M. 1944a. The comparative osteology of the herring-like fishes (Clupeidae) of California. California Fish and Game, 30(1) : 6-21, 19 text figs. 1944b. The osteology of the Pacific deep-bodied anchovy, Anchoa compressa. Jour. Morph., 74(2) : 311-329, 15 text figs. Vor. AXXVII CHAPMAN: OSTEOLOGY OF THE ROUND HERRING 41 PuHILurps, J. B. 1942. Osteology of the sardine (Sardinops cacrulea). Jour. Morph., 70(3): 463-500. Ripewoop, W. G. 1904. On the cranial osteology of the Clupecid fishes. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1904(2) : 448-493. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN ALL FIGURES AC peauiquios snrpnreribuor w i snpneribuor Ww NSN SS YS FT Sa NERS OA i pue snuequow ‘Ww pug snuejuow pw Se abuse) 30 sjenp/sipul payseu Jo | peqiiel aqisso WIDOW JO : P A equit wawiuly aiqissod | | undinreyy 2 ahoj a0 ff paysou SYFTTWIAN Syempraipus aE] ZO So jouaquinu anal ia prep arijeshuiny AIM | snpnes/buo) Ww Baa snpreribuorw STYNTZIAICNI A Ce snpneobuor w Fe SNUG QUOW ‘fy (fjuo au0) SNUBZUOW “fy enuejuow ? V / 3 W N Vibe dicbbo tito 9 7) 6£6/- 2 d00MNIg Beeé6él- 2 GOOMNIG LE6/- 2 COOMNIG Fic. 7.—Graphs showing number of montanus and longicaudus trapped (i.e., population density) in Benwood 2 and 3 during 1937-1939 Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 55 TABLE I Number of MJicrotus captured : Males Females Total VIERA TORILOTUES eRe ee ce ore sine ats sisters 41 21 62 US TOP OMEOUMOUS Ont a oe clan ass Sule oe ele toe 73 60 133 PEP MESHECICS Oss fet. s, <1 aisles a caus eels pias oem 114 81 195 MOM be OlmaChesy (rapped o27..As)s.. 2 als bc cle seies lee se tierce shes ca eee vate 19 acres Maximum number of traps operated at any one time................... 283 traps Wena SeMmiiimpen Or taps Wel ACL Cave, sepa, evn s ore) ol eitrens s/s + et myeielele ere aleve e 15 traps iNnipemeoreseasons (1937—1938=1939))\s onc eras ec cays oe were ocelot 3 seasons Moraienumber of season-acres (1 x4,3x8 and 2x7). .2......20.000%-. 42 season-acres Motaleniinben Ol GCaysvot thappillei. a. sae ee cmecs a sdote em ae ance. 70 days Maximum distance in a straight line between the outside edges of the UIMAAS TWARERVOLOR GEA e cy eto aa OI GON Gece a aie cian eictere o.ciar etn cera 6 5,800 feet Total number of trap-days (one trap-day equals one trap in operation PABNOUGSPTROM MOON CO) MOOM =)... 4,46 a's ci slele 6 a eeriens ase 2 cielo wie Senor as 10,839 trap-days Morlaniumbem or captures Gneluding recaptures) >..---.+-.-<--0s0-+-- ee 645 captures Aweracesimber or thap-days per Captunes..-sa6-.a-.-25000es42 oe 16.8 trap-days Total number of different individual mice captured.................... 195 mice Average number of trap-days per individual.......................... 55.6 trap-days Average number of individual mice per acre per season in all meadows.. 4.55 mice Maximum number of individuals per acre for any meadow (as found on Beringer, 2)! sae pepe Saeco > De ioe ae tater one oe oes aaa 6.5 mice Minimum number of individuals per acre for any meadow (as found on SEW OO CMS) MRO Ta Si ont ais aches Woes jacd Histalel 6 a. clue 0 ie eros 2 mice Number of times each individual was caught: minimum 1; maximum 15; GSES ahh SSG Ge eee cho EEO Dt DES Ceo einen FIG cade aR rae CRORE AS Han ee ea oe 3.3 times caught iMnowiededdu(ncludins those purposely, killed) 222 5.5..5..4.5+522450-- 113 mice Some mexpressedminupercemt ol total imdivaduals...4sc5 2 seen eee ae 58 percent Known dead (found dead in traps and not including those purposely NaUNSGl)). Rte cies eveectese SRORaes pte GcctM Rey cm eK ae ny Par Pe a a PU Al a 73 mice Same, expressed in percent of total individuals...-......:....2...22.. 37 percent from base line to top of shaded bar or the bottom of the stippled bar. The maximum point reached by the tops of shaded bars is at Benwood 2, for total montanus and longicaudus on August 22 and 23, 1937, and would represent a total of 28 mice for the meadow or 3.5 per acre. This is referred to here- after as the “possible maximum.” It must be assumed that some of the marked individuals died after being released or that they might even have left the meadow. Therefore the length of the clear bar is used to indicate the number of individuals that up to the dates given had been marked and released, but which were certainly not dead or lost as was proved by capture at some later date. This number would then represent the minimum possible number of marked individuals that were at large on the meadow for the dates indicated. This number, of course, would be reduced to zero on the last day of trapping, for the obvious reason that no more subsequent recaptures were made, and therefore there could be no proof that the mice were still living. 56 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. The true number of marked mice at large on the meadow must then lie somewhere in the shaded bar between the top of the clear bar and the bottom of the stippled bar, for any date indicated, and lacking further evidence, one may make an arbitrary assumption that the true number of marked mice at large lies nearest to the mid-point within this shaded area. This mid-point reaches its peak of 20 mice on Benwood 2 on July 26 and 27, 1938, or 2.5 mice per acre. This figure may then be taken as the best estimate of the maximum number of marked mice that were at large at any one time on any meadow. This is referred to hereafter as the “probable maximum.” To recapitulate, we have the following figures for the three Benwood meadows for the summer seasons of 1937, 1938, and 1939: Number of marked Microtus per acre at large at any one time on any meadow: Possible maximum sence eee te 3.5 mice per acre per season ID OAKS TWERIOTIETIN) Gh nu 6,cocvsougctadcuouese 2.5 mice per acre per season Number of Microtus per acre, cumulative for any entire season: Average for all three meadows and three seasons. ..4.55 mice per acre per season Maxamuni in! Benwoode2, 1939 s5 sree ae seeeae 6.5 mice per acre per season Mininiumiem benwood Ie 1938ie eee eee eee eis 2.0 mice per acre per season An examination will now be made of the adequacy of the number of the traps used, in giving a true picture of the total numbers in the Benwood area. It will be noted upon referring to Figure 7 (total montanus and longicaudus combined, Benwood 2, 1937), that the curve representing cumulative total captures rose steadily during that season. This was the first year of trapping, and because some of the traps had to be manufactured in the field, they were only gradually placed in operation, starting with 45 or 5.6 per acre at the beginning of the season and increasing up to 140 or 17.5 per acre at the end of the season. Therefore the steady rise in captures was due in part to the increase in the number of traps. The graph for Benwood 2, 1938, represents the effect of applying the full number of traps (176 total or 22 per acre) at the beginning of the 1938 season. Here will be noted a sharp rise in cumulative captures at first, and then a flattening off of the curve toward the end of the season. During the last week 103 additional traps were placed in the meadow, and all mice cap- tured in any traps were purposely killed. This was done in order to test thoroughly for total population at this time, and in spite of the added trapping efforts, no new individuals were discovered. This seemed to indicate that the number marked very closely approached the total population. Another point of interest was that, during the first two days of this final week, only eight recaptures (of marked mice) were made. During the following five days of trapping with 279 traps operating on eight acres, there were no captures of Microtus at all. This would seem to indicate that only eight Microtus were at large on the meadow at the beginning of this final week. At the date August 23, 1938, the number eight will be seen to lie very close to the middle Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 57 of the shaded bars, the upper and lower limits of which indicate the estimated maximum possible and minimum possible number of marked mice that could be at large. This then would seem to substantiate the assumption that the mid-point of the shaded bars gives the best estimate of the true number of marked mice at large. In Benwood 3, 1938, the number of traps was increased from 60 to 80 in the first two weeks, and here the curve of cumulative captures rose steadily, seeming to indicate the effect of the increased trapping effort. The curve finally flattened off but not so early in the season as with Benwood 2, 1938, and also at a slightly lower level. It was further noted in Benwood 3, 1938, that the total captures (including recaptures) per acre per day were exactly the same as for Benwood 2, 1938, while the total marked (or first captures) for the season, for Benwood 3, 1938, were but 88 percent of the total marked for Benwood 2, 1938. This would seem to indicate that the 80 traps on Benwood 3 (11.4 traps per acre) were enough to ascertain the true population, while the 176 traps on Benwood 2 (22 per acre) were not only enough but included a surplus that insured a fair record of the whole population. To conclude, then, we can assume that by the end of the 1937 season and for the 1938 and 1939 seasons the number of traps was sufficient to indicate the total populations with a fair degree of accuracy, and the number of Microtus at all times was not over 6.5 mice per acre per season, or to express this in round numbers, was not more than 10 per acre per season. This figure seems surprisingly low. Published records of the density of population of Microtus in other localities are given in Table II, page 58. It is interesting to note in the records quoted, that the excessively high numbers, of over 1,000 per acre, were termed “plagues” by the authors. Numbers of over 100 per acre occurred during periods which the authors thought to be the peaks of population cycles. I suggest, then, on the basis of my figures for the two species dealt with in this paper, that less than 10 per acre may be taken as an indication of borderline living conditions continually threatening local extinction. The factors in these borderline living conditions that restrict population increase in the Benwood meadows to this low number of less than 10 per acre are probably as follows, listed in the order of importance: 1. Predator control—tThis is very likely the chief limiting factor for mouse populations here, although the evidence was not complete. The total area of the three meadows is nineteen acres and they are surrounded by a much larger extent of wooded, brushy, and rocky country, which is not adapted to the life of the meadow mice but which does form a natural habitat for several predators. The areal proportion of meadow to nonmeadow in this general region is 1 to 50 or more. One can imagine that the weasels, badgers, coyotes, or other predators of this region might regularly make the rounds of the meadows in order to pick up some small morsel of mouse flesh, so easily caught. Evidence of this is in the presence of the three weasels (Mustela 58 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. erminea) that were caught in Benwood 2 in 1937 and the one in Benwood 3 in 1939, Quantitative data regarding weasel populations and feeding habits are quite meager, yet the high potential mouse predator value is very obvious. It concerns an animal which is small enough to enter a mouse runway, and which was found in my experiments during a short period of captivity to consume more than one mouse per day. Coyotes and pine martens were seen at no great distance, and what were thought to be badger diggings were noted in the meadows. Other predators are known to inhabit the Sierra Nevada at this elevation and may have invaded this territory. In the light of this evidence, I assume the predators to be the chief controlling factor of increase in population. 2. Climatic control—Climate is probably favorable most of the time but may occasionally act suddenly to the great disadvantage of the mice. Ac- cumulated snow merely followed by a gradual melting in the spring is prob- ably not very detrimental to the mice. Tunnels were found under the snow where food had been stored in the form of grass roots and other preserved plant materials. Slight differences in the ground level could afford sufficient escape from water saturation, and thus moderate rainfall and gradual melting of snow might work no hardship. However, climatic extremes will undoubt- TABLE PuBLISHED REcORDs OF Microtus NUMBERS Authors’ fig- ures con- verted to : number Authority Species Country per acre Pidoplichka as reported by Vinogradov COSA ie Bree cne ei teinim ae ams nr tieae et Seranhceate M. pelliceus U.S.SiR. 2% Wrooster (G1939) soe he tacos cies cece M. haydent Kansas Oto4 Seton (i909 % 522) aaa ek ce crane M. [pennsylvanicus | drummonai plus M. minor Manitoba 16 Merriam (S845 py 274) ase ceacre crete M. pennsylvanicus Adirondacks 23 Hamilton (937d; ps 76o)\ek sees cee ee M. pennsylvanicus Northeast 15 to 40 United States (low) 50 to 250 (high) MmowmnsencaGlOSSt Mk.OO) ee cies ao eet MI. pennsylvanicus Central 2 to 67 New York Elton, Davis and Findlay (1935, iS Fag eA) aaa este Pee 2M ie eRe M. agrestis England 50 to 250 Selle (UQ2Z8)\ era cates ecp se eiteters elo aese ncn: VW. californicus Kern County, 4,000 California Piper (1908) 05 2 Reta sn ewe eee ae M. montanus Humboldt Val- 8,000 to ley, Nevada 12,000 la NNIQW7 ey IWAiac womaccans cocooubn! M. californicus Kern County, 12,342 California Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 59 edly reduce populations, as for example, a sudden downpour of rain and re- sulting flood conditions such as are described later. Another condition that could cause particular hardship to the underground forms, although we have no actual record of such an occurrence in this area, would be a hard freeze following quickly after the meadows became water-saturated. 3. Food control.—As long as predators, plus any adverse climatic condi- tions, hold the number of mice to a low level, the food factor would not be operative. Apparently the food was very abundant in proportion to the num- bers of mice observed, and no evidence was noted of a depleted supply. Only if and when the numbers of mice became greatly increased could food be a limiting factor. 4, Disease was not observed. The mice seemed in good physical condition when they had not been in the traps too long. No doubt scarcity of population makes infection less likely, while abundance of food and elimination of the weaker by predators and climate would make for selection of the healthier individuals. SPECIES DIFFERENCES Figure 7 not only shows the differences in total population density of Microtus, but also indicates certain significant differences in the numbers of the two species. In brief, /. montanus shows greater yearly differences in numbers, and apparently is more sensitive to environmental changes than is M. longicaudus. On Benwood 2, in 1937, the numbers of montanus exceeded those of longicaudus two to one, and in 1938 montanus had disappeared until the end of the season, when a single female appeared. and was caught seven times in nine days. No other montanus were taken that season, although longicaudus had increased in numbers. In seeking for an explanation it is noted that in December 1937 a sudden downpour of rain occurred in this region. Records from the United States Weather Bureau showed for Twin Lakes, ten miles south of Benwood 2, on December 10, 3.82 inches of rain in 24 hours, and on December 11, 3.58 inches. Locally the forest rangers and others reported excessive flooding in the meadows and streams. Check dams and trails where present were washed out and meadows were heavily flooded. An animal that was largely restricted to the meadow would be fairly caught and drowned out. Grinnell (1939) noted a marked depletion in the terrestrial mammal population of northeastern California following this same storm.* In 1938 the golden-mantled ground squirrels had completely disappeared from the Ben- wood area, while the tree-dwelling Tahoe Chipmunk showed no diminution in numbers. M. montanus has been found inhabiting burrows and making use * Dr. Grinnell refers to this storm as occurring on “December 10” preceding “June 1937,’ therefore indicating the date of the storm as December 10, 1936. Mrs. Hilda W. Grinnell writes me as follows: “ ‘June 1937 ... .’ should have read 1938. It was a mis- print which we ourselves overlooked when reading proof, but noted in the printed article.” 60 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. of runways, while M. longicaudus was never found using burrows or runways. Also, as is shown farther on in this article, the range of montanus proved to be restricted to smaller areas than longicaudus. M.montanus was not found to leave the meadow, while at least three individual longicaudus were noted to have left one meadow and entered another during the time of the field observations. Grinnell and Storer (1924, p. 130) noted that longicaudus “lives chiefly along the banks of swift-moving mountain streams and in marshes, but also on dry hillsides at some distance from water.” Thus the indication is that montanus was caught and nearly eliminated from Benwood 2 in the winter of 1937-38, while longicaudus was able to come back probably from the surrounding higher ground. It is interesting to note that one mon- tanus female did come into this meadow late in the summer of 1938, thus showing the difficulty of a complete extinction of this type of animal. At the end of the 1938 summer, all Microtus of both species that were taken on Benwood 2 during the last seven days of trapping were purposely killed in order to see what the effect would be upon the next year’s population. There was no storm of sudden flood proportions during the winter between 1938 and 1939, and apparently, in spite of the artificial reduction in numbers in the late summer of 1938, enough mice escaped to bring the population back in 1939 to 6.5 per acre. Just why Benwood 3 showed no montanus in 1938 and but a single speci- men in 1939 is not clear. It is quite probable that if there were any montanus in that meadow in 1937, the storm of December 1937 destroyed them, just as it did in Benwood 2. It is possible that the restricted physical nature of Benwood 3 made the storm more effective in drowning out the meadow- dependent montanus and also in making it more difficult for them to migrate from other localities, while the wider-ranging Jongicaudus could more easily come in and fill the niche left by those destroyed. BREEDING AND LENGTH OF LIFE Most collectors of mammals are at work during the summer only, there- fore their many published records concerning specimens containing embryos only tell us that breeding goes on in the summer, as we might well guess. However, the painstaking work of some recent investigators sheds light on this important phase of the life history. In England, John R. Baker and R. M. Ranson (1933) collected M. agres- tis each month for two years, and from 2,500 specimens taken, determined that this species has a well-marked breeding season from mid-March to late September (rarely February and October), with no evidence of breeding in the winter (November, December, and January). In central New York, W. J. Hamilton, Jr., (1937), p. 785) found M. pennsylvanicus commonly breeding from mid-March until mid-November. He noted further that although the mice do not customarily breed during the winter months (December to February), yet in a year of greatest mouse Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 61 abundance the animals continued to produce young throughout the winter. At the same time, however, there was a considerable decrease in litter size and frequency of breeding. These facts have considerable bearing on the problem of cycles of population and mouse plagues. During the three seasons of investigation on the Benwood meadows and out of a total of 62 marked M. montanus, none was recaptured during a second season. Of 60 female and 73 male marked M. longicaudus only 3 male longi- caudus were recaptured during a second season. This would seem to indicate that the Microtus seldom live more than a year, due very likely to their early attainment of sexual maturity, extreme prolificness, and high metabolic ac- tivity, as has been noted by several authors. I found pregnant females as late as September, and it is quite possible that breeding continued much later in the fall. The last litters which escaped marking were probably those that made up the breeding stock for the next year. THE SIZE AND CHARACTER OF INDIVIDUAL RANGES Field observers have inferred that the home range of the meadow mouse was quite restricted. Seton (1909, p. 522) gave as his opinion that “the home range of the individual [M/. pennsylvanicus drummondt1| is probably less than 50 feet across. I have seen an isolated hollow of that size which was obviously the whole world of a dozen or more of these Mice.” Hamilton (1937a) arrived at very nearly this same figure after recaptur- ing 100 of his 600 marked mice. He stated (p. 263) that “the home range of an individual vole seldom encompasses an area in excess of 1/15 of an acre [about 54 feet across] .... [Also on p. 261.] The results of this study point to a very limited home range, even in extensive areas of similar habitat. Males wander more widely than females, and are more likely to take up residence in new areas which have been previously unpopulated by the species. This is in keeping with the ‘wandering tendency’ theory proposed by Townsend (CSE SD ea My own records on the Benwood meadows showed that, with the excep- tion of three individual mice, the average size range of all Microtus was an area with a diameter of 163 feet, increasing to a maximum diameter of 820 feet. The method of obtaining the field data has been described. Each catch was recorded by exact location and the position plotted on a large scale de- tailed map of the meadow. This gave for each individual mouse a series of points on the meadow where the mouse had at some time been found. AI- though it would never be possible to obtain a complete record of the area ranged over by any individual, it was desirable to obtain a measure of the range that would be reasonably comparable in indicating differences in size of ranges between sexes, species, etc. To connect all of the points where an individual had been found would be to describe a geometrical figure with a measurable area. But since this area would become zero whenever all of the points happened to lie along a straight 62 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. line, comparison by this method would obviously be of little use. To measure the length of the broken line connecting all points would also be a poor meas- ure, since an individual if caught often enough in a small area might show a longer total line than one that was caught but twice, even though the two captures were far enough apart to suggest a much greater width of range. It was finally decided to use as the factor that would probably come near- est to expressing the comparative extent of ranges, the distance between the two points of capture that were most widely spaced, or in other words, the maximum diameter of the observed range. These distances were then scaled off on the large scale maps and recorded for each individual. A summary of these records is given in Table III, but with omission of all cases where but one capture was made, since in such cases there could be no opportunity to determine the size of the range. In cases where an individual mouse was each time captured in the same trap, the record was retained but the range was recorded as zero. TABS. Til SIZE OF RANGES oF Muicrotus Length of Record Diameter of Range in Days in Feet Grouping Number of Individuals Average Extremes Average Extremes otal” Macrotus’ Ss... .. 113 12.6 2 to 50 163 0 to 820 Motalefemalesy ct. eves, os 53 14.3 2 to 47 144 0 to 730 Motalemalesu seme erraeer 60 a0) 2 to 50 179 0 to 820 Total montanus .......... 27 WA 2 to 47 115 0 to 410 Total longicaudus ........ 86 1257 2 to 50 177 0 to 820 M. montanus females ...... 11 12°5 4 to 47 82 0 to 360 M. montanus males ........ 16 12.0 2 to 47 138 0 to 410 M. longicaudus females .... 42 14.8 2 to 46 161 0 to 730 MT. longicaudus males ..... 44 10.7 2 to 50 194% 0 to 820* * These figures are for ranges within the meadow. Three individuals, all male /ongicaudus, were found to have left one meadow and to have appeared in another meadow. In two of these cases the gam Ce ee aes aerate line from one meadow to the other) was 3,000 feet and in From Table III it is seen that males have a wider range than females in both species, and that /. longicaudus has a wider range than M. montanus in both sexes, and even the longicaudus females have wider ranges than the montanus males. To determine whether the ranges as given in Table III express the full size of the natural range of the species and sex groups of Microtus, Figures 8, 9, 10, and 11 may be examined. Here the diameter of range in feet for each individual is plotted on the y axis as against the time or length of record in days on the x axis for each of the following groups: M.montanus females M.montanus males M. longicaudus females M. longicaudus males Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 63 ODIAMETER OF RANGE /N FEET JE 40 44 48 $52 LENGTH OF RECORD /N DAYS Fic. 8—Microtus montanus (females) 3 DIAMETER OF RANGE IN FEET N K 8 5 /OOp Weiss 20 24 26 J6 44. 48 352 LENGTH OF RECORD IN DAYS Fre. 9.—Microtus montanus (males) 64 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. DIAMETER OF RANGE IN FEET w S 300 200 00 6 We /6 20 e4 26 3? J6 40 44 46 $2 LENGTH OF RECORD /N DAYS Fic. 10.—Microtus longicaudus (females) e 600 o ~ | q 8 5 ai S S h Oe | e ) DIAMETER OF RANGE W FEET 3 N 8 a LEAS) 2O 24. £8 SEEN LENGTH) OF RECORD IN DAYS 40 44 48 $2 Fic. 11.—WMicrotus longicaudus (males) Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 65 From these graphs it appears that with one group only, namely the Jongi- caudus males, there is a definite correlation between length of record and range, such that as the length of record increases, the diameter of range also increases. With the other groups an increase in the length of records does not show correspondingly significant increase in the size of ranges.* This may be interpreted as indicating that in these experiments the natural limit of the size of the ranges of all groups, except longicaudus males, has been determined. To elucidate by a simple example: If a man were confined to the four walls of a room, within which he were free to move, and his position were recorded every day, then an increase in the number of records or in the number of days when records were taken would not show an increase in the distance that he was able to put between himself and the center of the room. But if, on the other hand, the man were free to leave the room and, upon leaving, had no inclination to return, then an increase in the number of records or in the number of days when records were taken would continuously show some cor- relation with the distance he was able to put between himself and the original point of confinement. Relating this example to the case in hand, we may arrive at the conclusion that as far as the data of these experiments show: (1) the longicaudus males are not limited in their ranges but continue to wander farther and farther from the initial point of capture, and that the previously noted “‘average diameter of range” of 194 feet and the “extreme” of 820 feet within the meadows and the “extreme” of one mile from one meadow to another, were merely the average and the extremes as obtained during these experiments, and did not express a true measure of the natural ranges of the longicaudus males; (2) with the longicaudus females, as shown on the graph, an increase in the time of taking records did not show a corresponding increase in the sizes of ranges, and it may be assumed that these experiments revealed the true size of their ranges, namely, an average distance of 161 feet or an extreme of 730 feet; (3) there were not as many montanus captured as longicaudus and therefore the results were not as conclusive. However, the graphs seem to indicate that the limit of ranges was reached in both sexes of montanus and that the true ranges of the montanus males averaged 138 feet in diameter with an extreme of 410 feet while the true ranges of the montanus females averaged 82 feet with an extreme of 360 feet. SUMMARY 1. By means of live-trapping on three Sierra Nevada meadows in the boreal zone of central California, data have been obtained concerning 195 individual Microtus of two species. (The two forms were Microtus longi- caudus sierrae and Microtus montanus yosemite, and are referred to through- out this report by specific names only. ) * The regressions of range on length of record were calculated for each group, and the regression coefficient was found to differ significantly from zero only in the case of the Jongicaudus males. 66 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. 2. The population density of Microtus as indicated by the method of trap- ping used, in the three meadows totaling 19 acres, during the summer seasons of 1937, 1938, and 1939, averaged 4.55 mice per acre per season, with a possible maximum of 6.5 mice per acre per season, and a probable maximum of 2.5 mice per acre at any one time. Therefore, by allowing a margin of safety in the estimate, it is reasonably certain that the population, if expressed in round numbers, was never more than 10 per acre for any season. 3. It is suggested that a population density of over 1,000 per acre may be taken to represent so-called “‘plague” conditions, over 100 per acre to represent normal peaks in population cycles, and less than 10 per acre to indicate the presence of borderline conditions of existence threatening local extinction. The factors producing such borderline conditions are thought to be as follows: (a) predation, first in importance and of continuous application; (b) climate or weather, second in importance and of only intermittently controlling influ- ence; (c) food and (d) disease, both of which do not become controlling fac- tors as long as a and b impose severe restrictions on populations. In other words, when populations are low, due to predation or adverse weather con- ditions, then food is entirely sufficient and disease is not readily transmitted. 4. Differences in the population behavior of Microtus montanus and M1- crotus longicaudus are noted as follows: M. montanus was seen to fluctuate more in numbers, even disappearing entirely for a time, while 7. longicaudus maintained a more nearly uniform, though low, population density. The differ- ence is thought to be due to the greater dependence of M. montanus upon meadow conditions, while /. longicaudus could survive outside of the meadow and was therefore able more readily to reinvade the meadow. 5. The length of life of Microtus seemed to be, with but few exceptions, less than a year. Very likely the breeding stock of each season was recruited principally from litters last born in the preceding season. 6. Individual ranges were measured for purposes of comparison by taking the greatest distance between any two points of capture for each individual Microtus and the following conclusions are reached: (a) Males of both species have wider ranges than females. (>) Individuals of M. longicaudus have wider ranges than those of W/. montanus in hoth sexes. (c) The determined ranges are shown to be as follows: Average Number of Diameter Extreme Diameter Individuals of Range of Range MotaleViacnotuSis esses ee a 195 163 feet 820 feet M. montanus females ........ A\\ 82 360 M. montanus males .......... 4] 138 410 M. longicaudus females ...... 60 161 730 M. longicaudus males........ 73 194 820 feet within meadow up to 1 mile out of meadow The natural limits of the ranges of the first three groups above were apparently reached in these experiments, whereas with the last group, namely Vor. XXVI] JENKINS: POPULATION STUDY OF MEADOW MICE 67 the M. longicaudus males, the limit of the range was still increasing at the close of the experiments, thus indicating that the M. longicaudus males were not restricted as to range but continued to wander during the season. BIBLIOGRAPHY BAKER, JOHN R., and R. M. RANSON 1933. Factors affecting the breeding of the field mouse (Microtus agrestis). ILI. Locality. Proc. Roy. Soc., London, B., 113 (784): 486-495. Exton, C., D. H. S. Davis, and G. M. FINDLAy 1935. An epidemic among voles (Microtus agrestis) on the Scottish border in the spring of 1934. Jour. Animal Ecol., 4 (2) : 277-288. GRINNELL, JOSEPH 1939. Effects of a wet year on Mammalian populations. Jour. Mamm., 20 (1): 62-64. GRINNELL, JOSEPH, and TRAcy IRWIN STORER 1924. Animal life in the Yosemite. Berkeley, University of California Press, xvili + 752 pp. Hatz, E. RAayMonpD 1927. An outbreak of house mice in Kern County, California. Univ. Calif. Pub. Zool., 30 (7): 189-203. HAMILTON, W. J., JR. 1937a. Activity and home range of the field mouse, Microtus pennsylvanicus pennsyl- vanicus (Ord.). Ecology, 18 (2): 255-263. 1937b. The biology of microtine cycles. Jour. Agric. Res., 54 (10): 779-790. MeERRIAM, CLINTON Hart 1884. The vertebrates of the Adirondack region, Northwestern New York. Trans. of the Linnaean Society of New York, 2: 1-223. Moore, A. W. 1936. Improvements in live trapping. Jour. Mamm., 17 (4): 372-374. Piper, S. E. 1908. Mouse plagues, their control and prevention. U.S. Yearbook of Agriculture, p. 301. SELLE, RAYMOND M. 1938. Microtus californicus in captivity. Jour. Mamm., 9 (2): 93-98. SETON, ERNEST THOMPSON 1909. Life histories of northern animals. An account of the mammals of Manitoba. Vol. I. Charles Scribner’s Sons, New York, xxx + 673 pp. TOWNSEND, M. T. 1935. Studies of some of the small mammals of Central New York. Roosevelt Wild Life Ann., 4 (1): 1-120. VINOGRADOV, B. S. 1934. Materialy po dinamike fauny myshevidnykh gryzunov SSSR. [On the dy- namics of the fauna of muriform rodents in the USSR.| 62 pp. Vsesottiznoe Gosudarstvennos Ob’edinenie po Bor’be s_ Vrediteliami 1 Bolezntami v Sel’skom i Lesnom Khozfaistve. Sektor Sluzhby Ucheta. [AII- Union State Association for the Control of Pests and diseases in Agricul- ture and Forestry in the USSR. The Section of Record Service.] Lenin- grad, 1934. Wooster, LyMAN DwiGuHtT 1939. The effects of drouth on rodent population, Turtox News, 17 (1): 26-27. * wp oT on ' ie ents “i 1) evil es) : Par : W ee ay he ‘liea es Bae aye ae} , Fy ee Marine Biological Laborutury hIiBRA HS AUG 2 4 1948 WOODS HOLE, MASS. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 4, pp. 69-99, pl. 1, figs. 1-10; 1 text fig. June 28, 1948 NOTES ON LAND AND FRESH-WATER MOLLUSKS OF CHEKIANG PROVINCE, CHINA” BY TENG-CHIEN YEN INTRODUCTION HE PRESENT papery is based on a collection of land and fresh-water mol- lusks made by Mr. John T. Wright during 1925 to 1928, in several lo- calities along the Chien-tang-kiang Valley of Chekiang Province, and includes a few lots from Shanghai and Haimen in Kiangsu Province. The material was obtained by the California Academy of Sciences through purchase, and it was partially and preliminarily identified by the late Dr. Bryant Walker. The collector’s primary interest was ornithology, but mollusks were taken when seen. However, it is remarkable that numerous species of comparatively minute forms of land snails are present in the collection and some of these are here described as new to science. Mr. Wright deserves credit for the discovery of these small forms. Formal headings and descriptive notes are given for one hundred species. Of these, five are described as new. The mollusks of Chekiang were first collected from Chowshan Island, ten miles east of the coast of Chekiang, by Theodore Cantor. In early literature, the island was romanized as “Chusan.” Cantor’s material was studied by W. H. Benson in 1842, who thus contributed the first paper since 1758 on Chinese mollusks with a precise and exact locality. The types of Benson’s species are now preserved in the Indian Museum in Calcutta, and most of the land and fresh-water species described by him from Chowshan are included in the present collection. Isaac Lea’s paper on new species of exotic Melaniana in 1856 (Proc. Acad. Natural Sci. Philadelphia, 8: 144-145) also includes one species, namely Melania ningpoensis, from Chekiang. Lea’s specimens were * Printed from.the John W. Hendrie Publication Endowment. + This work was carried on with a grant-in-aid from the Johnson Fund of the Ameri- can Philosophical Society in Philadelphia. 69 70 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. collected by S. R. House. From 1882 to 1890, Pére Heude recorded a few species of Clausilia from Chowshan, and many of his species described from the neighborhood of Chekiang Province are contained in the present collec- tion. B. Schmacker obtained a collection of mollusks from Ningpo and vi- cinity, and his material was partly recorded by himself jointly with Oscar Boettger in 1890 to 1891. Early in the present century, Pilsbry and Hirase (1908) published a paper on Chinese mollusks in which a few species of land snails were described from Hangchow, the capital of Chekiang. During his residence in Chekiang, Mr. A. W. L. Oliver collected mollusks in Hangchow, Mokanshan, Yen-chow, Tsao-ngo River, etc. His collection was afterward presented to the Indian Museum in Calcutta. The gastropods were studied and reported by T. N. Annandale and the pelecypods by B. Prashad (Annandale and Prashad, 1924). The molluscan species of medical importance from Chekiang have received more attention only in recent years. Early records show that a few species of Oncomelania Gredler were reported from this province. Dr. F. C. Li in 1934 made a very detailed study of the anatomy, development, and ecology of Oncomelania. Li’s material was collected from Kashing and its neighboring regions in Chekiang. Paul Bartsch in 1936 also contributed a very compre- hensive paper on molluscan hosts of parasites, in which species of Oncome- lania were recorded from Shaohing, Wuhing, and Kashing; species of Blan- fordia and Katayama from Shaohing and Ling-an. Bartsch’s series of speci- mens were collected at different times by E. C. Faust, Mary Andrew, Y. T. Vao,and Pa @2 ki. The present collection represents, as the subsequent pages will show, an important part of the molluscan fauna of this province ; however, such common forms as Cathaica fasciola (Draparnaud), Oncomelama schmackeri Moellen- dorff, Oncomelania moellendorffi (Schmacker and Boettger), Parafossarulus eximius (Frauenfeld), Assiminea scalaris Heude, etc., are conspicuously ab- sent. The large series of young and adult examples available for some species, such as Cyclophorus martensianus Moellendorff, Cyclotus fortunet (Pfeiffer), Mirus cantorii (Philippi), etc., makes it possible to trace a wider range of shell variation in adult characters as well as in developmental stages. Among the minute forms, species of Cyathopoma, Carychium, and Ha- waiia are again recorded in this country. Cyathopoma and Hawata came to my notice for the first time in the molluscan fauna of China when I studied a collection of gastropods from western Szechwan Province. It may be con- sidered as one of the few parallel cases of Heudiella Annandale (1924) whose known geographical range up to the present is Yunnan and eastern Chekiang. Further records of these forms to fill the gap of such a long distance depend on future exploration along the Yangtze Valley. My acknowledgment cannot be completed without mentioning my appre- ciation to Dr. Robert C. Miller, Director of the California Academy of Sci- ences, who was for a time Visiting Professor of Zoology at Lingnan Uni- Vor. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS Ail versity—a missionary institution in Canton—for his kindness and courtesy extended to me during my stay in the Museum of the California Academy of Sciences. I am equally grateful to Dr. G. D. Hanna and Dr. L. G. Hertlein of the Department of Paleontology of the same Academy, for their kindness and for giving me the privilege of studying this collection of Chinese mollusks. The illustrations shown on the plate accompanying this paper were drawn by Miss Helen Winchester. The line drawing of the new species of Psidium was made by Dr. G. D. Hanna. SYoLEMAIMC DESCRIPTIONS Family HY DROCENIDAE Georissa sinensis (Heude), 1882 Realia sinensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 8, pl. 12, fig. 7; pl. 19, ng. 2. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Fengshiu, Lanchi, and Chiang-shan. This species was originally described from Anhwei Province, and has been recorded from various places in the lower Yangtze Valley. Heude described it as “imperforate,” but the umbilical space seems to be well traceable on these specimens, and in adult ones it is covered more or less completely by a colu- mellar callosity. Georissa nivea (Heude), 1882 Realia nivea HEupDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 9, pl. 19, fig. 4, 1882. Collecting stations: Fengshiu, Lanchi, Wong-kiang, Yenchow, Chekiang. This species differs essentially from the preceding one by its much smaller size, less elongate outline, and in possessing four and one-third rapidly in- creasing whorls. The spiral lines are very distant and prominent, except on the basal region where the sculpture is rather faint. According to Moellendorff this is only a form of G. bachmanni (Gredler). Family CYCLOPHORIDAE Lagochilus sexfilaris (Heude), 1882 Cyclophorus sexfilaris HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 3, pl. 12, fig. 4. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, Fengshiu, and Yenchow. This species was originally described from Ningkuofu and Chechowfu, Anhwei Province. Cyclophorus martensianus Moellendorff, 1874 Cyclophorus martensianus MOELLENDOR®F, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 2: 120, Taf. 3, fig. 3, 1874. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, Lutzepu, Fengshiu, Lanchi, and Cha-yuan-chen. 72 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. This is a common species occurring in the lower and middle Yangtze Valley. It was originally described from Kiukiang of Kiangsi Province. The shell is variable in size as well as in color pattern, and such names as nan- kingensis, pallens, and ngankingensis, all proposed by Heude, which were based on differences in size and color patterns, can be retained perhaps only for local races. In the present collection there are several large series of specimens from the above localities, including many forms of the young. The adult specimens from Feng-shiu represent the typical form, measuring 24 x 25 mm., with 5% whorls, and bearing lighter color markings. Those from Tung-lu are smaller in size, the largest of which measures 21 X 23 mm., with 5 whorls, and lighter color pattern. They approach nearly the form pallens. The specimens from Lan-chi bear rather dark color patterns which appear almost unicolor in dark brown except the lightly colored peripheral band. The largest of that lot measures 21 & 23 mm. with 5 whorls. Cyclotus fortunei (Pfeiffer), 1853 Cyclostoma (Cyclotus) fortunei PFEIFFER, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1852, p. 146. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Fuyang, Mokanshan, Tunglu, Lutzepu, and Fengshiu. This species is rather variable in size, elevation of the spire, and color patterns. The color band, whenever present, is often infraperipheral. A few examples in the collection are unicolored olive-brown. The peristome is simple in the young and double margined in the fully matured and aged shells. A number of forms were described from various parts of China on the basis of differences in size and color markings such as C. chinensis Pfeiffer, 1854, from Hong Kong; C. approximus Heude, 1882, from Ningkuofu of Anhwei; C. stenomphalus Heude, 1882, from Hunan; C. tubaeformis Moellendorff, 1882, from Canton; and C. diffillimus Schmacker and Boettger, 1890, from Wuchang of Hupei Province and Ningpo of Chekiang. It seems that these forms are very closely related to each other, if not identical. They are com- pared in the following table. The young forms usually consist of about 3 whorls and are small. They appear to be different from the adult forms be- cause the rapid increase in size of the following two whorls changes consider- ably the general outline of the shell. The measurements are given in milli- meters. Altitude Width of Number of of Shell Shell Whorls CA CHUMCNSES saa c eaiete hd Sonera 8.00 6.5— 7.5 13-14 4 Co FOREAES Prtae Sete oie ere tace a ce 7.0 10-12.5 4 Griappronimusmeraee cee: 11.0 13-16 44 C. stenomphalus ............. LTO 13-15 5 C... tubachormiso easiness 10.5-11.5 17-19 5 CG. .dtfillumus: ng eigeeee as 10.0-12.5 14-16 5 Vout. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 73 Platyrhaphe fodiens (Heude), 1882 Cyclotus fodiens HEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 5, pl. 12, fig. 9. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, Fengshiu, Lanchi, and Wong- kiang. This species was originally described from Ningkuofu and Chechowfu, Anhwei. A few of the specimens in the present collection are larger than the typical form, one of which measures 5.1 mm. in altitude, 7.2 mm. in width, with 4% whorls. Some examples from Lanchi are decidedly higher in altitude, one of which measured 5.8 mm. in altitude, 6.2 mm. in width, with 4% whorls. Platyrhaphe hunana (Gredler), 1881 Cyclotus hunanus GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Gesell., 8: 113, 1881. Collecting station: Cha-yuan-chen, Chekiang Province. This species differs from the preceding one by its more planorboid outline, much larger size, wider umbilicus, and finer sculpture. It was originally de- scribed from Hunan, and these examples of Chekiang agree with the typical form except for the slightly greater altitude. A larger specimen in the collec- tion measures 6.2 mm. in altitude, 10.0 mm. in width, with 4% whorls. Cyathopoma micronicum Yen, new species Plate 1, figures 3, 4 Shell minute, subdiscoidal, widely umbilicated. The umbilicus contains one-third of the diameter of the shell. The shell substance is rather thin and subtranslucent. The whorls increase very rapidly in width, are well rounded, and are separated by a deep suture. The first whorl is oblique and high, but the following whorls of the spire are only slightly elevated. The sculpture consists of growth lines decussated by faint spiral lines; the latter are more distinctly traceable on the body whorl rather than on the early whorls. The body whorl is somewhat tubular and has the last one-third to one-fourth free from the penultimate whorl. The aperture descends in front, with continuous circular form. The peristome is simple and thin. The operculum is rounded, consisting of numerous closely coiled lamellose whorls, concave externally, and dark in the center. Measurements: altitude 1.1 mm.; width 1.8 mm.; diam. umb. 0.48 mm.; 3% whorls. Holotype, No. 8237, and paratypes Nos. 8238, 8239, 8240, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Yenchow, Chekiang Province, China. Also found at Mokanshan, Fuyang, Tunglu, Lutzepu, Fengshiu, Chayuanchen, Shunan, and Puchiang. This species approaches the size and generai outline of Cyathopoma tat- wanicum Pilsbry (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 57: 724, 1905), and is somewhat larger than C. micron (Pilsbry), (Nautilus, 14: 12, 1900), also from Formosa. However, it differs from both of them by having its last one-third of the body whorl conspicuously free from the penultimate whorl. 74 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. This genus has been known hitherto from India, Polynesian islands, and Formosa. The present series of specimens was obtained from the lower Yangtze Valley, and gives a second record of this genus from this country, indicating that it probably has a wide range of distribution south of the Yangtze River. Cyathopoma planorboides Yen, new species Plate 1, figures 8, 9 Shell minute in size, planorboid in form, umbilicated, the umbilicus more than one-third of the shell diameter. The spire is very low, having only the prominent smooth apical whorl obliquely elevated. The whorls increase very rapidly in size, bearing fine but distinct spiral lines which are intersected by fine growth striae and occasionally by coarser lines of growth. The aperture is circular in form, not descending in front, and the peristome is simple and thin. Measurements: altitude 1.2 mm.; width 2.5 mm.; diam. umb. 1.0 mm. ; 3% whorls. Holotype, No. 8241, and paratypes Nos. 8242, 8243, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Yenchow, Chekiang Province, China. Also found at Chihlilung near Puchiang, Chekiang Province. This species is essentially different from the preceding one by its larger size, planorboid outline, and bearing distinct spiral lines of sculpture. It seems to be closely related to C. taiwanicum Pilsbry, differing by its larger size, lower altitude, and in the more planorboid outline. Chamalycaeus rathouisianus (Heude), 1882 Alycaeus rathouisianus HrupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 7, pl. 12, figs. 12, 12a. ‘ Collecting stations: Tunglu, Yenchow, Chihlilung near Puchiang, and Lanchi. The present collection contains a series of specimens which are identical with this species except that they are larger in size. The typical form is 2.5 mm. in altitude, 4.0 mm. in width, with 4 whorls, while most of the specimens in this collection measure 3.2 mm. in altitude, 5.0 mm. in width, with 4 whorls. It was originally described from Sungkiang, Kiangsu Province, in the near neighborhood of Chekiang. Chamalycaeus sinensis (Heude), 1882 Alycaeus sinensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 7, pl. 12, figs. 13, 13a. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, and Fengshiu. This species differs from the preceding one by its smaller size, lower spire, and absence of spiral lines of sculpture. It was originally described from Tung-liu, Anhwei Province. Measurement: altitude 2.0 mm.; width 3.5 mm. ; 4 whorls. Vou. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS “SY ur Diplommatina paxillus (Gredler), 1881 Moussonia paxillus GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 8: 29, Taf. 1, fig. 7, 1881. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Wongkiang, Fengshiu, Chihlilung near Puchiang, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. ; This species was originally described from Hunan Province, but has been further recorded in lower Yangtze Valley. Diplommatina paxillus mucronata Schmacker and Boettger, 1890 Diplommatina (Sinica) paxillus var. mucronata SCHMACKER and Boettc_ErR, Nachrichtsbl. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., Jahrg. 22, 1890, p. 122, Taf. 2, fig. 4. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, Lutzepu, and Yenchow. This subspecies differs from the forma typica by its smaller size and more contracted outline. It was originally described from Dalanshan near Ningpo, Chekiang Province. Diplommatina confusa Heude, 1885 Diplommatina confusa Hrupr, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1885, p. 97, pl. 24, nea, WA ZW Collecting station: Mokanshan, Chekiang Province. A few specimens from the above locality agree well with this species but are slightly smaller in size. One of the better preserved specimens measures 3.5 mm. in altitude, 2.0 mm. in width, with 7 whorls. It was originally de- scribed from Szechwan. Pseudopalania dautzenbergiana Yen, new species Plate 1, figure 1 Shell sinistral, perforate, minute in size, and ovately oblong in outline. The whorls are roundly convex, increasing moderately rapidly in size. The sculp- ture consists of fine but distinct and close ribs, but the apical whorls appear to be smooth. The suture is well impressed. The aperture is circular in out- line, having its peristome continuous, somewhat thickened and double-mar- gined. The columellar lamella is deeply inserted and hardly visible from a frontal view. Measurements: altitude 2.1 mm.; width 1.1 mm.; 5% whorls. Holotype, No. 8244, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Tung- lu, Chekiang Province, China. Judging by its weakly developed columellar lamella and the sinistral coil- ing of the shell, this species evidently belongs to Pseudopalania Moellendorff, a genus not hitherto recorded from China. Its general outline approaches that of some species of Palania O. Semper, but differs by having a distinct but deeply inserted columellar lamella, 76 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Proc. 4TH SER. Family VIVIPARIDAE Viviparus chinensis lecythoides (Benson), 1842 Paludina lecythoides BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat .Hist., (1) 9: 488, 1842. Collecting stations: Yuyao, Tunglu, Fengshiu, and Lanchi. This subspecies differs essentially from other forms of chinensis Gray, such as fluminalis Heude, ventricosa Heude, longispira Heude, etc., by its smaller size. It was originally described from Chowshan Island, and Annandale in 1924 has designated a sea from Benson’s original lot of specimens and figured it in reduced size. This is a very common form in the lower Yangtze Valley, but the present collection contains only a few adult specimens with a large series of young forms, which evidently belong to this subspecies. Viviparus quadratus (Benson), 1842 Paludina quadrata BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 487, 1842. Collecting station: Tunglu, Chekiang Province. This is another species of the genus commonly occurring throughout the country. It is easily recognized by its elongate outline, scarcely convex whorls, and obtusely angulated periphery. Viviparus quadratus lapillorum (Heude), 1890 Paludina lapillorum HrEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 177, pl. 40, figs. 11, lla. Collecting stations: Chien-tang-kiang and Lanchi. This subspecies differs from the forma typica by its more ovate outline and smaller size. It was described from Ningkuofu of Anhwei Province, but it has been subsequently recorded from Huchow and other places around Tai-hu (Great Lake). Viviparus lithophaga (Heude), 1889 Paludina lithophaga Hruper, Journ. Conchyl., 37:49, 1889; Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 177, pl. 40, figs. 13, 13a. Collecting station: Tunglu, Chekiang Province. This species is small, subglobose in outline, and almost rounded at the periphery. The apical whorl is rather obtuse. It was originally described from Ningkuofu, and the typical form seems to be considerably larger than the examples in the present collection ; however, they agree well in other features. The typical form is 33.0 mm. in altitude, 20.0 mm. in width, with 5 whorls, while the largest specimen here is only 20.0 mm. in altitude, 15.0 mm. in width, with 4 whorls. Its general outline, thick shell, and obtuse, apical whorls seem to suggest resemblance to Viviparus praerosus (Gerstfeldt) and Viviparus chui Yen, which were described from Amur and Kirin, respectively. Vor. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 77 Family HY DROBIIDAE Parafossarulus striatulus (Benson), 1842 Paludina (Bithynia) striatula BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 488, 1842. Collecting stations: Siwoo near Yuyao, Bamowoo, Lanchi, and Chiang- shan. This is a very common species occurring throughout the country. The sculpture varies and may be obscure or prominent ; however, no smooth form has been recorded. The shell is unicolored but in some cases with a thin, yel- lowish-brown periostracum. The young form is more conical in outline. Parafossarulus longicornis (Benson), 1842 Paludina (Bithynia) longicornis BENSON, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 488, 1842. Collecting stations: San-chiang and Lanchi. This species is often collected together with the preceding one; however, it is less common. It differs from P. striatulus by having a much shorter spire, finer sculpture, and ovately globose outline. It is more commonly recorded from the Yangtze Valley and along the canal zone. Bithynia misella Gredler, 1884 Bythinia misella GREDLER, Arch. Naturgesch., 50: 276, Taf. 19, fig. 8, 1884. Collecting stations: Yuyao, Tunglu, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. The shell is conically ovate in outline, rather thin and translucent. The sculpture consists of fine spiral and growth striae, and the shell is rather variable in size. The whorls of the spire are occasionally marked by lip-margin lines which indicate various periods of resting. A few specimens are larger than the typical form, described from south Hunan Province; one measures 7.0 mm. in altitude and 4.0 mm. in width. Katayama fausti Bartsch, 1925 Katayama fausti BARtscH, Jour. Washington Acad. Sci., 15: 72, 1925. Collecting station: Lanchi, Chekiang Province. The single specimen measures 7.0 mm. in altitude, 3.0 mm. in width, ana has 5% whorls. It was described from Shaohing, Chekiang Province. Blandfordia species undetermined Collecting station: Lanchi, Chekiang Province. The single specimen has its apical whorl injured. It measures 6.4 mm. in altitude, 3.0 mm. in width, with 61%4 whorls. It resembles B. formosana Pils- bry and Hirase (Proc. Acad. Sci. Philadelphia, 57: 750, 1906), but it appears to be more slender in outline. 78 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Stenothyra divalis (Gould), 1859 Bithynia divalis GouLD, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 7: 41, 1859. Collecting stations: Sanchiang, Chekiang Province; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was originally described from Canton, but it has been subse- quently recorded from the Yangtze Valley. Stenothyra toucheana Heude, 1890 Stenothyra toucheana HEeupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 173, pl. 33, figs. 13, 13a, 13b. Collecting station: Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species differs from the preceding essentially by its smaller size, and in that the spiral lines of punctations are more closely arranged. Stenothyra decapitata Annandale, 1918 Stenothyra decapitata ANNANDALE, Mem. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, (5) 6: 308, pl. 10, fig. 1, 1918. Collecting station: Bamowoo, Chekiang Province. This species is larger in size than either of the above two species, and its apical whorls are almost always eroded. Family ASSIMINEIDAE Assiminea latericea H. and A. Adams, 1863 Assiminea latericea H. and A. Apams, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 434. Collecting station: Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This is one of the common species occurring on the coast of China. Assi- minea flummea and A. haematina, described by Heude from farther interior from the coast, are generally recognized as only forms of this species. The specimens contained in this collection agree well with A. flummea except that they are somewhat smaller in size. Assiminea violacea Heude, 1882 Assiminea violacea HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 82, pl. 21, figs. 4, 4a, 4b, 4c. Collecting stations: San-chiang, Chekiang Province; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was described from the mouth of the Yangtze River. The shell is imperforate, rather solid, elongately conical in outline, usually bearing a sutural band of lighter coloration, and obtusely angulated at the periphery. The present specimens here are slightly smaller than the typical form, the largest of which measures 6.6 mm. in altitude, 3.7 mm. in width, with 7 whorls. Vor. XXVIJ TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 79 Assiminea schmackeri Boettger, 1887 Plate 1, figure 2 Assiminea schmackeri BoETTGER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 14: 201, Taf. 6, fig. 9, 1887. Collecting station: Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was originally described from Lantao near Hong Kong, but the specimens here are identical with this interesting species, which seems to have a different outline from other Chinese forms of Assiminea so far re- corded. The shell is subglobose in outline, rather solid, perforate, but partly cov- ered by the columellar margin. It seems that Boettger’s description was based on an immature specimen measuring 17 mm. in altitude, 2% mm. in width, with 344 whorls, while a large specimen in the present collection is 3.0 mm. in altitude, 2.9 mm. in width, with 6 whorls; another 2.0 mm. in altitude, 2.1 mm. in width, with 4 whorls. Family THIARIDAE Melanoides gredleri (Boettger), 1887 Melania tumida GREDLER, Arch. Naturgesch., 50: 277, Taf. 19, fig. 9, 1884. (Not Melania tumida PHILLIPS, 1836). Melania (Melanoides) gredleri BOETTGER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 14: 108, 1887. Collecting station: Shunan, Chekiang Province. This species seems to be closely related to M. ningpoensis Lea (= M. can- cellata Benson, 1842), but it differs by having stronger and fewer riblets which are not cancellated by any spiral lines. The species was originally described from South Hunan. Melanoides ningpoensis (Lea), 1856 Melama cancellata BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., London, 9: 488, 1842. Not Melania cancellata Say, 1829. Melania ningpoensis LEA, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 8: 144, 1856. Collecting station: Bamowoo, Chekiang Province. This is a common species recorded from different parts of the country. It is characterized by its narrowly oblong outline, convex whorls bearing close riblets, and fine but distinct spiral lines. The base is sulcated with a few rather strong spirals. Semisulcospira libertina jacquetiana (Heude), 1890 Melania jacquetiana HEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 163, pl. 41, figs. 7-9; pl. 43, fig. 5. Collecting station: Shunan, Chekiang Province. These specimens have the early whorls decollated, its sculpture more ob- scure and of smaller size than the typical form, which was described from 80 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rir ser. Ningkuofu, Anhwei Province. However, these features, as already pointed out by Annandale, are considered to be rather variable. He has examined a large series of specimens collected from Hangchow. Semisulcospira libertina davidi (Brot), 1874 Melania davidi Brot, Martini-Chemnitz Conchyl.-Cab., 1 (Abt. 24. Melania and Mela- nopsis) : 62, Taf. 7, fig. 3, 1874. Collecting station: Shunan, Chekiang Province. This form occurs in mountain-stream habitats and was originally described from Lushan, Kiangsi Province. After examining the type specimens of S. libertina (Gould) and this series of specimens which agree well with S. davidi (Brot), I am convinced that davidi may be only a subspecies of liber- tina. It is smaller and bears three distinct color bands on the body whorl which are sometimes traceable in the aperture, while libertina, also recorded from the Lower Yangtze Valley, is much larger and is usually unicolored. Semisulcospira theaepotes (Heude), 1888 Melania theacpotes HEupr, Journ. Conchyl., 36: 307, 1888; Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 163, pl. 41, fig. 10. Collecting station: Chihlilung near Puchiang, Chekiang Province. This species was originally described from the tea district in Hweichow, Anhwei Province. It is conically turreted in outline, with an acute spire and ventricose body whorl. It differs from S. libertina by its obscure sculpture and conical outline. The specimens in the present collection are somewhat smaller than the typical form; the largest one measures 23.5 mm. in altitude and 10.5 mm. in width. Semisulcospira joretiana (Heude), 1890 Melania joretiana HeupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 166, pl. 41, fig. 20. Collecting station: Lanchi. This species was originally described from Hoshan of Anhwei, and seems to be related to the preceding species. Semisulcospira praenotata (Gredler), 1884 Melania pracnotata GREDLER, Arch. Naturgesch., 50: 278, Taf. 19, fig. 10, 1884. Collecting station: Tunglu, Chekiang Province. The single specimen in this collection agrees well with this species, which was described from South Hunan Province, except that it is somewhat smaller in size. It measures 17.0 mm. in altitude, 6.5 mm. in width, with 10 whorls. It is narrowly turreted in outline, bearing fine sculpture on the scarcely convex whorls representing what Gredler described as “suturam inferiorem con- vexiusculi, supra plane.” Vou. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 81 Semisulcospira dolium (Heude), 1890 Melania dolium Heupe, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 166, pl. 41, figs. 24, 24a 25; pl. 43, fig. 6. Collecting station: Fengshiu, Chekiang Province. These specimens agree with Heude’s Figure 25, except for being of much smaller size. The largest one measures 14.0 mm. in altitude and 12.0 mm. in width. Among the 30 examples, there is only one bearing strong, spiral sculp- ture and unicolored, while the others bear only faint and fine spiral and growth lines, and most of them are marked with three color bands. It seems that the sculpture is rather variable in this species, as Heude has figured both the strongly and obscurely sculptured forms. However, he mentioned nothing of the color bands. Semisulcospira pacificans (Heude), 1888 Melama pacificans HEUDE, Journ. Conchyl., 36: 305, 1888; Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 164, pl. 41, figs. 22, 22a. Collecting station: Fengshiu, Chekiang Province. This species was originally described from Anhwei Province, and was re- corded by Schmacker and Boettger from Dalanshan of Snowy Valley near Ningpo. It is ovately conical in outline, thick, having a small and low spire and inflated body whorl. The sculpture is rather obscure, with spiral lines faintly traceable. In this collection the specimens bear three color bands which are in some cases only traceable in the aperture. These color bands were mentioned in the record noted by Schmacker and Boettger, but not mentioned in the original description for the species by Heude. The largest one measures 18.4 mm. in altitude and 12.0 mm. in width. Family ELLOBITDAE Carychium minusculum Gredler, 1887 Carychium minusculum GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 14: 362, 1887. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Fuyang, Tunglu, and Fengshiu. This species was described from Hupei Province and recently recorded from Pungshan of Western Szechwan. It has not been reported hitherto from the Lower Yangtze Valley. Family LYMNAEIDAE Radix plicatulus (Benson), 1842 Lymnaea plicatula BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 487, 1842. Collecting stations: Hsiaoshan, Yuyao, Sanchiang, Bamowoo, Shunan, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. This is a very common species occurring throughout the country. It varies 82 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. considerably in outline as well as in size. The typical form is elongately ovate but it is not uncommon that some specimens have quite inflated body whorls. Galba ollula (Gould), 1859 Limnaea ollula Goup, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 7: 40, 1859. Galba ollula Goutp, Yen, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., (4) 23 (38): 580, pl. 51, figs. 42, 50, 1944, Collecting station: Lanchi, Chekiang Province. After examining the type specimen of this species, I became convinced that it agrees well with those specimens hitherto identified as L. parvia von Mar- tens and L. andersoniana Nevill, which are to be replaced with the earlier name Galba ollula (Gould). This is another common species which occurs in fresh-water bodies through- out the country. Family PLANORBIDAE Gyraulus saigonensis (Crosse and Fischer), 1863 Planorbis saigonensis Crosse and FiscuEr, Journ. Conchyl., 11: 362, pl. 13, fig. 7, 1863. Planorbis compressus Hurton, 1834. Not Planorbis compressus M1cHAvD, 1831. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Yuyao, Sanchiang, Tunglu, Feng-shiu, Shunan, Lanchi, and Chiangshan, Chekiang Province; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species is characterized by its very rapidly increasing whorls, having its apical whorls sunken and the body whorl much dilated. It resembles G. albus (Mueller) but it differs by its larger size and by having more whorls. Gyraulus zilchianus Yen, 1939 Gyraulus zilchianus YEN, Abhandl. Senck. Naturforsch. Ges., No. 444, p. 68, Taf. 6, fig. 2, 1939. Collecting stations: Yuyao and Chiangshan, Chekiang Province. This species is readily recognized by the high altitude of the shell, strong peripheral keel, and dilated body whorl. It is not uncommonly found around the Tai-hu region, and more frequently found near the bank of the Great Canal. The specimens from Yuyao are mostly young and not well preserved. Gyraulus membranaceus (Gredler), 1884 Planorbis membranaceus GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 11: 153, 1884. Collecting station: Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species is much smaller than G. saigonensis. Its periphery is very obtusely angulated, the last whorl is not so rapidly dilated, and the peristome is calloused within, which makes the lip-margin appear to be reflected. This species was described from Hunan, and the type was given as 4.5— Vou. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 83 4.75 mm. in width, 1.0 mm. in altitude, with 2-3'% whorls, while the largest specimen in the present lot measures only 4.0 mm. in width, 1.0 mm. in alti- tude, with 4 whorls. Hippeutis distinctus (Gredler), 1887 Planorbis (Hippeutis) distinctus GREDLER, Malakol. Blatt., N.F., 9: 15, 1887. Collecting stations: Yuyao, Lanchi, Foulanchi, and Chiangshan. It differs from the closely related species H. umbilicalis (Benson), also commonly found in China, by its smaller size, more lens-shaped outline, and in having a less shallow umbilicus. Polypylis hemisphaerula (Benson), 1842 Planorbis hemisphacrula BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 487, 1842. Collecting stations: Yuyao, Tunglu, Fengshiu, Lanchi, and Foulanchi. This species was described from Chowshan Island, and the type was given as 0.25 poll. in diameter. Most of the specimens in the present collection are somewhat smaller than the type; one of them measures 6.0 mm. in width, 2.7 mm. in altitude, with 5% whorls. Its relationship to the following species as well as to P. succineus (Gred- ler), described from Hunan Province, is not yet clear. They resemble each other in general outline, but differ considerably in size. Polypylis largillierti (Dunker), 1867 Planorbis largillierti DUNKER, in von Martens, Malakozool. Blatt., 14: 217, 1867. Collecting station: Sanchiang, Chekiang Province. This species was originally described from Hong Kong and at the same time recorded from Amoy. The type was given as 3.5 mm. in altitude, 8.5 mm. in width (diameter), with 5 to 6 whorls. The single specimen in the present collection measures 4.0 mm. in altitude, 8.0 mm. in width, with 5% very rapidly increasing whorls. It differs essentially from the preceding species by its larger size with almost similar number of whorls, and having a more concave base. Family SUCCINEIDAE Succinea erythrophana Ancey, 1883 Succinea erythrophana Ancey, Il Naturalista Siciliano, 1883, p. 270. Succinea rubella HEuDE, Mem, Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1890, p. 80, pl. 18, fig. 29 (non Pease). Collecting stations: Sanchiang, Chekiang Province; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was described from Shanghai, but has been since recorded from different parts of the Yangtze Valley. The type was given as 9.5 mm. 84 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. in altitude, 5.0 mm. in width, with 3 whorls. One of the specimens from Sanchiang measures 7.0 mm. in altitude, 4.0 mm. in width, with 3 whorls. Family PUPILLIDAE Gastrocopta armigerellum (Reinhardt), 1877 Pupa (Leucochila) armigerella REINHARDT, Sitzungsber. Ges. Naturforsch. Freunde, Berlin, 1877, p. 96. Collecting stations: Sanchiang and Fengshiu, Chekiang Province; Shang- hai, Kiangsu Province. This species is common along the Yangtze Valley, with its infraparietal tooth being, in some cases, much reduced or even totally absent. One of the examples from Shanghai measures 2.3 mm. in altitude, 1.3 mm. in width, with 5%4 whorls. Boysidia hunana (Gredler), 1881 Pupa hunana GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 8: 23, Taf. 1, fig. 5, 1881. Collecting stations: Wongkiang, Fengshiu, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. These specimens agree well with this species which was originally de- scribed from Hunan Province and subsequently recorded from various parts of the Yangtze Valley. A few shells from Chiangshan show the tendency of the aperture to be almost free from the penultimate whorl and some of them show that it barely touches the preceding whorl. Boysidia hangchowensis (Pilsbry and Hirase), 1908 Hypselostoma (Boysidia) hangchowensis Pitspry and Hirase, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 60: 42, fig. 6, 1908. Collecting station: Hangchow, Chekiang Province. This differs from the preceding species by its much smaller size and bearing only two palatal plicae. Family VALLONIIDAE Vallonia pulchellula (Heude), 1882 Helix pulchellula HEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 20, pl. 13, fig. 17. Collecting stations. Fengshu and Lanchi, Chekiang Province; Shanghai and Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This is one of the common species occuring along the Yangtze Valley and also in the northwestern part of China. It was originally described from Shanghai, and at the same time recorded from Ningkuofu of Anhwei Prov- ince. Heude’s figure was not well done. The sparse and delicate rib lines on the specimens are much more distinctly shown in contrast with the growth striae. Vor. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 85 Family ENIDAE Mirus cantorii (Philippi), 1844 Bulimus cantorii Putiiprt, Zeitschr. Malakol., 1: 165, 1844. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Fengshiu, Chayuanchen, and Wongkiang. This species was originally described from “Goldinsel bei Nanking” with specimens collected by Largilliert. The locality apparently means Chin-shan of Chenkiang, about 60 miles eastward from Nanking. Chin-shan was formerly an island situated in the Yangtze River and is now almost connected with the mainland at the south side of the river. This is a common form occurring in the Lower Yangtze Valley. In the present collection, the specimens agree well with the typical form except that some of them from Chayuanchen are of much smaller size and yet not so cylindric as to agree with pallens Heude, a varietal form of this species. Mirus cantorii obesus (Heude), 1882 Buliminus obesus HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 51, pl. 17, fig. 7. Collecting stations: Tunglu, Fengshiu, Yenchow, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. It differs from the forma typica by its much lower altitude and greater diameter. It was originally described from Nanking, and has been recorded around the Tai-hu region. The present series contains specimens approaching the typical form, one of them measuring 17.0 mm. in altitude and 6.0 mm. in width, but a few of them measured 20.0 mm. in altitude and 7.0 mm. in width. Mirus minutus (Heude), 1882 Buliminus minutus HrupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 49, pl. 17, fig. 15. Collecting stations: Tunglu and Chiangshan, Chekiang Province. This species was originally described from Shanghai, and also “in insulis Magni Laci” which apparently means west Tung-ting-shan of Tai-hu, about 45 miles away from Shanghai. It is characterized by its small size and convex whorls. The typical form is 10.0 mm. in altitude, 4.0 mm. in width with 6-7 whorls, while the examples in this collection range from 10.5 mm. to 13.0 mm. in altitude and 4.2 mm. to 4.8 mm. in width, with 8 whorls. Family CLAUSILEIDAE Hemiphaedusa cecillii (Philippi), 1847 Clausilia cecillii Puitippt, Zeitsch. f. Malakol., 4: 68, 1847. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, Lutzepu, Fengshiu, and Lanchi. The original locality was given by Philippi as China, based on specimens collected by Largilliert. Judging by the subsequently repeated records, the 86 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. type was probably collected from somewhere in Chekiang Province, where numerous specimens of this species have been found. Hemiphaedusa frankei (Boettger and Schmacker), 1894 Clausilia (Hemiphaedusa) frankei BOETTGER and SCHMACKER, Proc. Malacol. Soc. Lon- don, 1: 115, pl. 9, fig. 3, 1894. Collecting station: Wongkiang, Chekiang Province. The single specimen in the present collection seems to agree well with this species which was originally described from Kiangsi Province. Boettger and Schmacker have already pointed out that it is closely related to the preceding species, differing only by its slender form and smaller aperture. Hemiphaedusa méllendorffiana (Heude), 1882 Clausilia méllendorfiana HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 60, pl. 17, figs. 31, 3la, 31b. Collecting stations: Tunglu and Chayuanchen, Chekiang Province. This species was originally described from Ningkuofu and Kwangtehchow, Anhwei Province. The specimens here are typical, but a few specimens more ventricose in outline and shorter in altitude may belong to the varietal form, edentula Boettger and Schmacker 1894. Euphaedusa heudeana (Moellendorff), 1882 Clausilia heudeana MoELLENDORFF, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 9: 202, 1882. Clausilia pachystoma Heupr, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 61, pl. 18, fig. 1. Not Clausilia pachystoma KUESTER, 1848. Collecting stations: Tunglu, Lutzepu, Fengshiu, Lanchi, Chekiang Prov- ince; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This small species is easily recognized by its obtuse apical whorls and small aperture. It was described from the Tai-hu region and commonly found in the Lower Yangtze Valley. Clausilia obliterata Hsu, which was described in a subfossil state from Hsia-shu, Kiangsu Province, belongs to this common species. The species described by Hsu was founded upon juvenile specimens of Euphaedusa heudeana. Euphaedusa aculus (Benson), 1842 Clausilia aculus BENson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 487, 1842. Collecting stations: Wongkiang, Tunglu, Fengshiu, Chayuanchen, Chih- lilung near Puchiang, and Chiangshan. This species was described from Chowshan Island and it is very commonly found along the Yangtze Valley. The shell is rather variable in size, and varietal names such as shanghaiensis Pfeiffer, moellendorffi Martens, insularis Heude, vinacea Heude, fulvella Heude, labio Gredler, etc., have been adopted for different local forms of this species. Vor. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 87 Family SUBULINIDAE Opeas gracile (Hutton), 1834 Bulimus gracilis Hutton, Jour. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, 3: 93, 1834. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Mokanshan, Fuyang, Sanchiang, Tunglu, and Fengshiu, Chekiang Province; Shanghai and Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was originally described from India and has a wide range in the Indo-Pacific Province. The Chinese specimens approach very nearly the typical form which has a narrowly elongated outline with an obtuse apex, distinct sculpture, crenulations near the suture, and a reflexed columellar margin. Opeas filare (Heude), 1882 ‘Stenogyra filaris HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 56, pl. 17, fig. 27. Collecting stations: Sanchiang, Chayuanchen, Lanchi, Wongkiang, Che- kiang Province; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was described from Ningkuofu. It is characterized by its nar- row, slender outline and strong sculpture. It differs from the preceding species only by its more slender outline. Opeas turgidulum (Heude), 1882 Stenogyra turgidula HEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 59, pl. 17, fig. 19. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Mokanshan, Yuyao, Tunglu, Lutzepu, Fengshiu, and Chayuanchen. This species was described from Sung-kiang, Kiangsu Province. The shell has a swollen outline and bears fine sculpture. This is one of the forms which may belong to Opeas clavulinum (Potiez and Michaud). Tortaxis erectus (Benson), 1842 Achatina erecta BENSON, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1) 9: 487, 1842. Collecting station: Tunglu, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Chowshan Island. There are 2 speci- mens in the collection from Tunglu. It is cylindrically turreted with an obtuse apex and convex whorls. The adult specimen measures 2.6 mm. in altitude, 6.2 mm. in width, with 74% whorls. Family ENDODONTIDAE Punctum orphana (Heude), 1882 Helix orphana Heupe, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 21, pl. 13, fig. 18. Collecting stations: Tunghu, Chihlilung near Puchiang, Chekiang Prov- ince; Haimen, Kiangsu Province. This species was described from Shanghai and occurs commonly in the Lower Yangtze Valley. Its generic position was rather uncertain. For a time 88 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 471 SER. it was considered to be a species of Pyramidula, but Pilsbry in 1935 pointed out that it appears to be a species of Punctum because of the presence of micro- scopic spiral striae on the apical whorl. The young forms contained in this collection consist of 334 whorls, while the adult ones have 4+ to 4%4 whorls. The last whorl of an adult shell coils somewhat below the periphery of the penultimate whorl, so that its general outline appears to be more trochoid and the spire more elevated. Family CORILLIDAE Plectopylis emoriens (Gredler), 1881 Helix emoriens GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 8: 15, 1881. Collecting station: Lutzepu, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Yung-chow, southern Hunan Province, and subsequently recorded from the Lower Yangtze Valley. It seems to be closely related to the following species, but it differs by its larger size, more angulated periphery, and in having a much weaker parietal margin. Plectopylis diptychia (Moellendorff), 1885 Helix diptychia MoELLENDoRF?, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 9: 390, Taf. 10, fies 7, 1885. Collecting stations: Fengshiu, Tunglu, and Wongkiang. This species was described from Kweichow Province. It is characterized by its thin and subpellucid shell, bearing distant, membranous ribs in addition to the granulose sculpture. There are 5 to 6 short plicae on the outer wall and 2 approximate vertical lamellae on the inner wall of which the one on the right, side is more weakly developed. Family ZONITIDAE Hawaiia minuscula (Binney), 1840 Plate 1, figures 5, 6 Helix minuscula B1nNEY, Jour. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 3: 435, pl. 22, fig. 4, 1840. Collecting stations: Fengshiu, Shunan, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. This species was originally described from North America, and subse- quently recorded from Hawaii. In the present collection there are several lots of specimens which are hardly differentiated from H. minuscula so far as the shell features are available for reference. Family ARIOPHANTIDAE Kaliella franciscana (Gredler), 1851 Hyalina (Conulus) franciscana GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 8: 13, 1881. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Tunglu, Fengshiu, Shunan, Chihlilung near Puchiang, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. VoL. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 89 This species was originally described from Hunan Province. The shell is narrowly and shallowly umbilicated, obtusely angulated in the young, but in the adult stage rounded at the periphery, having roundly convex and closely coiled whorls and bearing sculpture of very fine growth striae. The base is quite convex. Kaliella franciscana gredleriana (Heude), 1882 I1yalina gredleriana HEubE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 19, pl. 19, figs. 11, lla. Collecting station: Tunglu, Chekiang Province. This subspecies differs from the typical form by its smaller size and greater height. This form was also described from Hunan Province, and Moellendorff in 1887 included it as a synonym of Kaliella franciscana. Kaliella imbellis (Heude), 1882 Hyalina imbellis HeupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 19, pl. 13, fig. 16. Collecting stations: Hangchow, Mokanshan, Tunglu, Lutzepu, Fengshiu, Yenchow, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. This species was described from Ningkuofu, Anhwei Province. The gen- eral outline of the shell resembles that of the preceding species, but it is some- what larger in size and bears both distinct growth and spiral lines and is obtusely angulated at the periphery. The young forms are less conical in shape and the peripheral angulation is stronger. Kaliella depressa Moellendorff, 1883 Kaliella depressa MOELLENDOREFF, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 10: 368, Taf. 12, fig. 7, 1883. Collecting station: Chiangshan, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Canton. The shell has a low, conical outline and is umbilicated and obtusely angulated at the periphery. A medium- sized specimen measures 3.2 mm. in width, 2.5 mm. in altitude, with 5% whorls. Kaliella euconus Moellendorff, 1899 Kaliella euconus MoELLENDORFF, Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Imp. Sci., St. Petersburg, 4:54, Taf. 2, fig. 4, 1899. Collecting stations: Chihlilung near Puchiang, Fuyang, Hangchow, Mo- kanshan, Chekiang. This species was described from Ta-chien-lu, west of Szechwan Province. ~The shell is umbilicated, conical, elevated, with scarcely convex whorls and strongly keeled periphery. This peripheral keel of the whorls of the spire is visible along the suture. The sculpture consists of distinct growth lines above the periphery of the body whorl and fine spiral striae on the base. 90 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Kaliella cuneus (Heude), 1885 Conulus cuneus HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1885, p. 105, pl. 27, fig. 6. Collecting station: Mokanshan, Chekiang Province. The single specimen in the collection seems to be identical with this species, which was described from Szechwan Province. It measures 4.6 mm. in alti- tude, 3.8 mm. in width, with 7 whorls, and is apparently a young shell ; how- ever, it is well characterized by its conical outline, bearing strong ribs on the surface of the whorls and with fine growth striae on the base. Kaliella chekiangensis Yen, new species Plate 1, figure 10 Shell broadly conical in outline, highly elevated, umbilicated and thin. Apex prominent and obtuse, the whorls roundly convex and closely coiled. The sculpture consists of fine but distinct lines of growth and occasionally of obscure ribs on the later whorls. The body whorl is very rapidly dilated, roundly convex at the base and distinctly keeled at the periphery. The pe- ripheral keel is visible along the suture of the whorls of the spire. The aper- ture is semicircular with its outer lip margin simple and thin, and parietal margin lightly calloused and well defined, but it is very thin in the young. The columellar margin is short and slightly reflected, and bears a white, but weak, plica on the axis and is somewhat obliquely twisted. This plica is trace- able also in the shell of the young. Measurements: holotype, altitude 5.3 mm., width 4.0 mm., with 714 whorls. Holotype, No. 8247, and paratypes Nos. 8248, 8249, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Fengshiu, Chekiang Province, China. This species resembles in form Conulus pyranus Heude 1885 (Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1885, p. 105, pl. 27, fig. 9), which was described from Chenkou of Szechwan Province, and according to Moellendorff, 1887, is a species of Kaliclla Blanford. But it differs from that species by its higher altitude, narrower width, and the presence of an axial plica. The generic posi- tion is considered to be uncertain. On account of the presence of the colu- mellar fold, the species does not seem to belong to the typical Kaliella, and the general outline of the shell suggests its similarity with some species of Buliminopsis Heude. It may belong to an undescribed group, but any definite generic assignment might best be deferred until more morphological informa- tion is at hand. Microcystina zikaveiensis (Heude), 1882 Hyalina sikaveiensis HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 16, pl. 13, fig. 9. Collecting stations: Fuyang, Fengshiu, Tunglu, Lutzepu, and Yenchow. The shell is minute in size, having a depressed spire, and bearing sculp- ture of fine striae. It was described from a suburban district of Shanghai. The Vou. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 91 specimens from Tunglu are typical, while the two specimens from Lutzepu are somewhat larger in diameter with one-fourth of a whorl more. Macrochlamys microgyra (Heude), 1882 Nanina microgyra HEubDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 13, pl. 13, fig. 10. Collecting stations: Fengshiu, Wongkiang, and Lanchi. This species is characterized by its low conical outline, closely coiled whorls, and keeled periphery. The specimens in the present collection are typical, except that they are somewhat larger in size. Measurments: altitude 3.8 mm., width 5.2 mm., with 7 whorls; altitude 4.0 mm., width 6.0 mm., with 714 whorls. Euplecta rathouisii (Heude), 1882 Hyalina rathowisii HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 14, pl. 20, figs. 31, 31a. Collecting station: Hangchow, Chekiang Province. This is a common species existing in the Lower Yangtze Valley, although the present collection contains only a single lot of four specimens. These are slightly larger in size than the typical form, one of them measuring 4.0 mm. in altitude, 7.0 mm. in width, with 7% whorls. Sitala turrita Moellendorff, 1883 Plate 1, figure 7 Sitala turrita MOELLENDORFF, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 10: 371, Taf. 12, fig. 3, 1883. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, and Shunan, Chekiang Province. The figured specimen is from Tunglu. This species was described from Kwangtung Province, with which a few specimens here agree well. It is of minute size, conically turreted and bearing characteristic spiral sculpture. The largest specimen measures 2.8 mm. in altitude, 2.0 mm. in width, with 6% whorls, which approaches nearly to that of the type. Helicarion sinense Heude, 1882 Helicarion sinense HEuDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 11, pl. 13, fig. 4. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglu, Yenchow, and Lanchi, Chekiang Province. This is a common species occurring along the Yangtze Valley. In the present collection, there is only a series of young specimens, the largest of which measures 11.8 mm. in width, 7.0 mm. in altitude, with 5 whorls, while the smaller one measures only 5.0 mm. in width, 3.0 mm. in altitude, with 3 whorls. The measurements of the type were given as 16.5 mm. in width, 10.0 mm. in altitude, with 5% whorls. The last whorl increases very rapidly in size, so that a difference of one-half of a whorl causes considerable change in the size and outline of the shell. 92 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. Family PLEURIDONTIDAE Ganesella brevibarbis (Pfeiffer), 1859 Helix brevibarbis PFEIFFER, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1859, p. 25, pl. 43, fig. 4. Collecting stations: Fengshiu and Wongkiang, Chekiang Province. This species is characterized by its trochoid outline with scarcely convex whorls, bearing a color band and spiral rows of hairs along the periphery of the body whorl. The umbilicus is narrowly open and slightly covered by the columellar margin. One of the adult examples measures 11.0 mm. in altitude, 13.2 mm. in width, with 74% whorls. Family BRADYBAENIDAE Bradybaena similaris (Férussac), 1821 Helix similaris Férussac, Tableaux systématiques des Animaux Mollusques .... 1821, p. 47. Collecting stations: Tunglu, Yenchow, Lanchi, and Chiangshan. This is one of the common species existing throughout the country. It includes unicolored and banded forms. The color band, whenever present, is normally along the periphery of the body whorl. The whorls are angulated at the periphery in the young and almost rounded in the adult. Bradybaena ravida (Benson), 1842 Helix ravida Benson, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (1)9: 486, 1842. Collecting stations: Fuyang, Hsiaoshan, Mokanshan, Tunglu, Lutzepu, Yenchow, and Chiangshan. The specimens from Tunglu are typical and identical with this species ; others are of younger stages, so that they appear to be much smaller in size and different in outline. However, it has been noticed that the size of the shell of this species varies considerably, and its last whorl is rapidly dilated, so that the differences of size of one-half of a whorl causes much change in the general outline of the shell. Bradybaena fortunei (Pfeiffer), 1850 Helix fortunci PFEIFFER, Zeitsch. f. Malakol., 7: 73, 1850. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Tunglutze, Lutzepu, and Fengshiu. This species was described from “Shang Hi, Chinae” [Shanghai], based on the material collected by Fortune Magazine. It is a common species of the Yangtze Valley. Its present known range is from Chekiang and Kiangsu provinces in the east to Hunan Province in the southwest. It is usually sinistral, may be either unicolored or single banded, and is sculptured by distinct, fine growth and spiral lines. Vout. XXVI]J TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 93 Bradybaena uncopila (Heude), 1882 Helix uncopila HeupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 41, pl. 16, fig. 6. Collecting station: Mokanshan, Chekiang Province. This species differs essentially from the preceding one by its more globose outline and its granulose sculpture and hairy surface. Bradybaena laeva (Pilsbry and Hirase), 1908 Eulota lacva Prtspry and Hrrase, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 60: 39, fig. 3, 1908. Collecting stations: Tunglu and Lutzepu, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Hangchow and seems to be closely related to the preceding species, differing only by its smaller size, higher altitude, and narrower umbilicus. One of the specimens in this collection measures 13.5 mm. in altitude, 17.0 mm. in width, and has 5% whorls, being slightly larger than the typical form. . Aegista chinensis (Philippi), 1845 Helix chinensis Purtipr1, Abbild. Beschr. Conchyl., (1) 1: 1, Helix, Tab. 6, fig. 1. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Fengshiu, and Tunglutze. One of the two larger specimens from Mokanshan agrees well with Philip- pi’s original figure, while the other specimen is larger and with thin lip margin. Plectrotropis sedentaria (Heude), 1885 Helix sedentaria HEUDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1885, p. 109, pl. 28, figs. 9, 9a. Collecting station: Chiangshan, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Kweichowfu of Upper Yangtze Valley. It differs essentially from P. trichotropis (Pfeiffer) by its smaller size. Plectotropis barbosella (Heude), 1882 Helix barbosella HEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 38, pl. 16, figs. 3, 3a. Collecting stations: Mokanshan, Fuyang, Wongkiang, Tunglu, Tunglutze, Yenchow, Chihlilung near Puchiang, and Langchi. This species was described from the Shanghai and Tai-hu region. The specimens in the present collection appear to be typical, but most of them are slightly smaller than the type. A large specimen measures 8.0 mm. in alti- tude, 11.0 mm. in width, with 6 whorls. Euhadra orientalis moreletiana (Heude), 1882 Helix moreletiana HEupE, Mem. Hist: Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 38, pl. 16, fig. 1. Collecting station: Mokanshan, Chekiang Province. This subspecies was described from Kwangtehchow, Anhwei Province, in the near neighborhood of Mokanshan. It is not uncommonly found in the Lower Yangtze as well as in the southern part of the country. It agrees well with its forma typica, described from Borneo, differing only by its wider umbilicus. 94 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Family STREPTAXIDAE Ennea strophiodes (Gredler), 1881 Pupa strophiodes GREDLER, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 8: 118, Taf. 6, fig. 4, 1881. Collecting stations: Tunglu, Yenchow, Chayuanchen, Shunan, Chihlilung near Puchiang, and Chiangshan. These specimens are slightly larger than the typical form, which was de- scribed from Hunan Province, but they agree well in other features with the species. Measurements: altitude 4.5 mm., width 2.5 mm., with 7% whorls; altitude 5.0 mm., width 2.6 mm., with 7% whorls. Ennea dolium Heude, 1885 Ennea doliolium HEupE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1885, p. 116, pl. 30, fig. 15. (non Morelet). Ennea dolium HEupeE, Journ. Conchyl., 33: 43, 1885. Collecting station: Lanchi, Chekiang Province. This species differs from the preceding one by its smaller size, finer sculp- ture, and more cylindric outline. It was described from Chen-kou of Sze- chwan Province. Measurements: altitude 3.2 mm., width 2.0 mm., with 6% whorls; altitude 3.0 mm., width 2.0 mm., with 6 whorls. Ennea larvula (Heude), 1882 Pupa larvula HEupDE, Mem. Hist. Nat. Emp. Chinois, 1882, p. 75, pl. 18, fig. 23. Collecting station: Chiangshan, Chekiang Province. This species differs from the preceding one by its smaller size and in pos- sessing almost one more whorl. It measures 3.1 mm. in altitude, 1.8 mm. in width, with 7 whorls. Ennea microstoma (Moellendorff), 1881 Pupa microstoma MOoELLENDORFF, Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakol. Ges., 8: 311; 10: 278, Dat. 10; he. 10: Collecting station: Lutzepu, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Kwangtung Province. It is openly um- bilicated, bearing rather distant ribs and with the body whorl compressed. The aperture is small, descending in front, having its peristome continuous and bearing one well-developed parietal and one columellar lamella, and one bi- lobed palatal plica. The columellar lamella is deeply inserted. It measures 2.9 mm. in altitude, 1.6 mm. in width, with 6 whorls. Family MYTILIDAE Modiolus lacustris von Martens, 1875 Modiola lacustris VON MaRTENS, Sitzungsber. Gesell. Naturforsch. Freunde, Berlin, 1875, p. 3; Malakol. Blatt., 22: 186, 1875. Modiolus (Limnoperna) lacustris vVoN MartTENs, Lamy, Journ. Conchyl., (4) 80: 361, 1937. Voit. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 95 Collecting station: Fuyang, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Tung-ting-hu, Hunan Province, and was based on specimens collected by Baron von Richthofen. It has been recorded subsequently from various parts of the Yangtze Valley. The specimens con- tained in the present collection are much smaller in size than the typical form. Family UNIONIDAE Anodonta arcaeformis (Heude), 1877 Anodon arcaeformis HEuDE, Conchyl. Fluv. Prov. Nanking, Fasc. 3, 1877, pl. 19, fig. 40. Collecting station: Bamowoo, Chekiang Province. A single pair of very young valves is present in the collection. This is a common species, occurring in various parts of the Lower Yangtze Valley. It was described from Sung-kiang of Kiangsu, in the near neighborhood of Che- kiang. Family CORBICULIDAE Corbicula fluminea (Mueller), 1774 Tellina fluminea MUELLER, Verm. Hist., 2: 206, 1774. Corbicula fluminea MULLER, Prashad, Mem. Indian Mus., (Calcutta), (2) 9: 51, pl. 7, figs. 1-10, 1929. Collecting stations: Zahkou, Shunan, Fengshiu, and Chuchow, Chekiang Province. The specimens from the above localities bear strong and rather distant ribs, and are interiorly tinged with purple. They seem to agree well with this species, except that they are of much smaller size. The species has been re- corded previously from this province as well as from other parts of the Yangtze Valley. Corbicula largillierti (Philippi), 1846 Cyrena largillierti Puitiep1, Abbild. Beschr. Conchyl., (3) 2: 75, Tab. I, fig. 1, 1846. Collecting station: Hangchow, Chekiang Province. This species was described from Yangtzekiang. The specimens here agree well with the typical form, except in being much smaller. It differs from the preceding species by bearing much finer and closer ribs. Family SPHAERITDAE Sphaerium parvium Yen, new species Text figure 1 Shell ovate and inflated in outline, subequilateral, small, thin, and yellow- ish-brown in color. The sculpture consists of concentric and close lines of 96 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES { Proc. 4TH SER. growth. Umbones small, slightly projecting, and slightly inclined anteriorly. The anterior end is semi-ovately curved, while the posterior side is subcircular in outline. The hinge is slightly curved and the ventral margin is almost rounded. The interior of the shell is pale brown and smooth. A single, small cardinal tooth in the right valve, rather compressed and slightly curved, but in the left divided, rather straight, and parallel to each other. The lateral teeth are strong, divergent, somewhat projecting, lamelliform, double in the right and single in the left. Measurements: length 6.5 mm., height 5.5 mm., con- vexity 3.2 mm. | Holotype, No. 8251, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Fou- lanchi, Chekiang Province, China. Text Fic. 1.—Sphacrium parvium Yen, new species. Holotype, No. 8251, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Foulanchi, Chekiang Province, China. A, right valve, B, left valve. Length, 6.5 mm.; height, 5.5 mm. This genus has been recorded previously by Moellendorff in 1902 from Kansu Province and Ordos district, by Annandale in 1918 from Tai-hu, and by Prashad in 1924 from Shang-kuan, on the northwestern shore of Tali Lake in Yunnan Province, but none of the specimens was specifically identi- fied. The two examples that Annandale obtained from the island of West Tung-ting in Tai-hu may probably also belong to this species, but his brief statement mentions nothing of the shell features. The present lot contains a single pair of valves with three pairs of embry- onic valves inside. This species seems to resemble Sphaerium inutilis Pilsbry 1901 (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 53: 406, 1901) but it differs by its smaller size, less curved hinge-line, lower beak, and stronger sculpture. Vor. XXVI] TENG-CHIEN YEN: MOLLUSKS 97 BIBLIOGRAPHY ANNANDALE, T. N., and Prasuap, B. 1924. Report on a small collection of molluscs from the Chekiang Province of China. Proc. Malac. Soc. London, 16: 27-49. BARTSCH, PAUL 1936. Molluscan intermediate hosts of the Asiatic blood fluke, Schistosoma japonicum, and species confused with them. Smithsn. Inst. Misc. Collect., 95 (5). Benson, W. H. 1842. Mollusca in Theodor Cantor’s general features of Chusan, with remarks on the flora and fauna of that island. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. London, 9: 481-493. aleroe. Cc. 1934. Beobachtung ueber die Biologie von Oncomelania, des Zwischenwirtes von Schistosoma japonicum. Arch. f. Schiffs. u. Tropen Hyg., 38: 519-524. Pitsspry, H. A., and Hrrasz, Y. 1908. New land shells of the Chinese Empire. I. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 60: 37-43. ScHMACKER, B., and BoeTTGER, O. 1890. Neue Materialien zur Charakteristik und geographischen Verbreitung chine- sischer und japanischer Binnen-Conchlien. Nachrichtenbl. Deut. Malakos. Gesell., 1890, pp. 1-33 and 113-136. YEN, TENG-CHIEN 1939. Die chinesischen Land- und Suesswasser-Gastropoden des Natur-Museums Senckenber. Abhandl. Senckenb. Naturf. Gesell., 444: 1-203. 1942. A review of the Chinese gastropods in the British Museum. Proc. Malac. Soc. London, 24: 170-289. 98 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1 Fic. 1.—Pseudopalania dautzenbergiana Yen, new species. Holotype, No. 8244, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Tunglu, Chekiang Province, China. Altitude, 2 lemme width, 1.1 mm. P75: Fic. 2.—Assiminea schmackeri Boettger. Hyptotype, No. 8245, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Haimen, Kiangsu Province, China. Altitude, 3.0 mm.; width, 2.9mm. P. 79. Fic. 3.—Cyathopoma micronicum Yen, new species. Holotype, No. 8237, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Yenchow, Chekiang Province, China. Altitude, 1.1 mm.; width, 1.8 mm. View of base. P. 73. Fic. 4.—Cyathopoma micronicum Yen, new species. Same specimen as shown in Figure 3. Apertural view. Fic. 5.—Hawatia minuscula (Binney). Hypotype, No. 8246, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Chiangshan, Chekiang Province, China. Altitude, approximately 1.37 mm.; width, 2.5 mm. View of base. P. 88. Fic. 6—Hawatia minuscula (Binney). Same specimen as shown in Figure 5. Aper- tural view. Fic. 7.—Sitala turrita Moellendorff. Hypotype, No. 8250, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Tunglu, Chekiang Province, China. Altitude, 2.8 mm.; width, 2.0 mm. 1s Wile Fic. 8.—Cyathopoma planorboides Yen, new species. Holotype, No. 8241, Mus. Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Yenchow, Chekiang Province, China. Altitude, 1.2 mm.; width, 2.5 mm. View of base. P. 74. Fic. 9.—Cyathopoma planorboides Yen, new species. Same specimen as shown in Figure 8. Apertural view. Fic. 10.—Kaliella chekiangensis Yen, new species. Paratype, from Fengshiu, Chekiang Province, China. Altitude, 5.2 mm.; width, 4.0 mm. P.-90. Scales of drawings are indicated by adjacent lines which equal 1 mm. magnified the same as the specimens. All drawings on this plate are by Miss Helen Winchester. [vEN] PLATE 1 Marine Biological Laboratuty LIBRARY AUG 2 4 1948 WOODS HOLE, MASS. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 5, pp. 101-124, 2 text figs. June 28, 1948 A SYSTEMATIC STUDY OF THE FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE (HYDROMEDUSAE)* BY TAGE SKOGSBERG Hopkins Marine Station Pacific Grove, California ACKNOWLEDGMENT WISH to express my appreciation to Professor S. F. Light and Dr. R. Stohler of the University of California, Berkeley, for their courtesy in pro- curing and sending me material of Polyorchis penicillatus from San Francisco Bay, California, one of the localities from which A. Agassiz obtained his specimens and possibly one of the sources of Eschscholtz’ type material ; and to Professors J. E. Lynch and T. Kincaid for sending me material of this genus from the Puget Sound region, Washington. GENERAL CLASSIFICATION The classification of the Hydromedusae offers very serious difficulties, a fact recognized even by some of the early investigators, e.g., Gegenbaur (1856, p. 217). Indeed, even the segregation of two of the main subdivisions of this group, viz., the Anthomedusae and the Leptomedusae, is both difficult and confusing. For this reason it was a most gratifying development when, mainly through the efforts of R. Weill, the study of the nematocysts opened up a new and very promising approach to this problem. In his large, monographic sum- mary, Weill (1934) demonstrated clearly that, if one takes into account all the different types of nematocysts occurring in a species, i.e., the cnidome, one usually obtains a clear-cut indication as to the true position of this form in the natural system. The new method, unfortunately, has some quite serious * Printed from the John W. Hendrie Publication Endowment. 101 102 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. limitations: fresh material is often indispensable ; the nematocysts frequently are extremely small and, in addition, are refractory to stains. To the medusae of uncertain systematic position, between the Anthome- dusae and the Leptomedusae, belongs one of the most commonly seen forms of the coastal waters of western North America—Polyorchis penicillatus (Eschscholtz). A brief account of the systematics of this species and of those which have been taxonomically more or less closely associated with it will give a convincing illustration of the confusion which has pervaded the field and at the same time will demonstrate what difficulties may be resolved through the application of facts brought out by a careful analysis of the cni- dome. Polyorchis penicillatus was established by Eschscholtz in 1829 under the name of Melicertum penicillatum. The genus Melicertum was very ill-defined and was placed, with six other genera, under the family Oceanidae, a unit which, as conceived by Eschscholtz, was extremely heterogeneous indeed. In brief, the first systematic allocation of this form was uncertain and may be said to have resulted from a guess, quite in accordance with the primitive state of the scientific knowledge of the Coelenterata in those early days of zoological investigation. The same may be said about the decision made by de Blainville (1834) to remove this form to the Trachymedusan genus Aglaura Peron and Lesueur. This unfortunate choice evidently was caused by the fact that Aglaura hemi- stoma Péron and Lesueur has a deep bell-like shape and pendent, sausage- shaped gonads. The first to submit P. penicillatus to careful examination was A. Agassiz whose results appeared in a preliminary form in L. Agassiz (1862, pp. 349, 352). In this work it was made the type of a new genus, Polyorchis, which in its turn was made the sole representative and hence the type of a new family, Polyorchidae, placed in the suborder Sertulariae. This suborder cor- responded largely to what we now term the Leptomedusae. (L. Agassiz, 1862, p. 348, although doubtfully, also placed in this suborder forms which we now refer to the Trachymedusae.) In his attempt to establish families within the Leptomedusae, Agassiz met with considerable difficulties because of the in- completeness of the available data. Hence he decided to proceed in accord- ance with the principle of progressive elimination (p. 352): he distinguished “as belonging to distinct families all those free Medusae and Hydroids which have distinct patterns.” Thus Polyorchis was made to represent a special fam- ily because its members are “quite remarkable for their branching, chymifer- ous tubes, and their pendent, reproductive organs.” In A. Agassiz (1865), too, Polyorchidae contained but a single genus. This, however, was due to the limitation of the material on which his report was based, as will be seen from the fact (p. 118) that Agassiz actually sug- gested that the genus Olindias F. Muller, 1861 (now belonging to the Trachy- medusae) would form a “very natural family” with Polyorchis, a suggestion Vor. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 103 evidently based on the identification of the lobe-like gonads on the radial canals in Olindias with the sterile side branches of these canals in Polyorchis. In his monumental monograph, ‘““Das System der Medusen,” Haeckel (1879, p. 140) described and analyzed the large family Cannotidae, previously (1877) established by him in a preliminary manner. Haeckel, of course, fully recognized that the 15 genera referred by him to this family are very hetero- geneous; indeed, some of the previously described ones had been classified as Anthomedusae while others had been arranged with the Leptomedusae—and some of the latter showed quite divergent features. Haeckel maintained, how- ever, that a careful analysis had convinced him that all of these genera were “echte Leptomedusen” and that they should be placed next to the Thauman- tiadae, i.e., near the bottom of the Leptomedusan system. Two of the most outstanding characters of the Cannotidae are the branching of the radial canals and the multiple gonads originating from these canals. The Cannotidae was divided by Haeckel into three subfamilies, one of which was Polyorchidae. This subfamily, however, did not correspond to Agassiz’s family of this name, but was a greatly broadened concept. It included, besides Polyorchis, the highly diversified genera, Staurodiscus, Staurophora, Ptychogena, and Gon- yonema. Quite naturally, a systematic unit as diversified as the Cannotidae aroused criticism among later investigators. Among the most important of these critics should be noted Browne (1896) and especially Maas (1904). The former demonstrated that the genus W/illsia (Proboscidactyla), strikingly characterized by its branching radial canals, is not a Leptomedusa but an Anthomedusa since its sex products do not originate on the radial canals but on the manubrium. Maas submitted the whole family Cannotidae to a search- ing analysis, the result of which was the complete dissolution of this family and the scattering of its component genera to various places in the system. Some of the component members, e.g., the Wullsudae sens. rect., Browne (1896), were allocated to the Anthomedusae, while others, such as the greatly restricted Polyorchidae, were classified with the Leptomedusae. This re- evaluation by Maas (1904) was in a large measure accepted by Mayer in his “Medusae of the World” (1910), a work which forms the main foundation of our modern knowledge of these organisms. Mayer presents the Polyorchi- nae as a subfamily of the comprehensive family Thaumantiidae, the first of the three large families forming the Leptomedusae. Throughout these classificatory studies we find emphasis on the branching of the radial canals. However, the fundamental value attributed to this char- acter by Haeckel (1879) was decidedly weakened when Browne (1896) was forced to place some forms with branched canals among the Anthomedusae while others were allowed to retain the position among the Leptomedusae assigned to them by Haeckel. This type of arrangement, of course, implied the tacit admission that branching had occurred more than once in the course of the evolution of the Hydromedusae. In this connection it is of interest to 104 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. note that quite a long time before Haeckel’s large monograph was published, Gegenbaur (1856, p. 219), with his keen sense for systematics, clearly real- ized that the branching of the radial canals is not such an important character as it may at first appear to be (see below, p. 122). The first investigator to question the correctness of the allocation of the Polyorchidae to the Leptomedusae was Fewkes (1889), p. 106). In a foot- note he wrote as follows: “It is probable that when the Polyorchis buds from its hydroid it has four radial tubes, four tentacles and possibly the stumps of four similar interradial appendages. As the radial tubes at that time lack lateral branches, we have in this stage a medusa closely resembling the young Sarsia. If my suppositions are correct, there seems no doubt that Polyorchis belongs to the true Anthomedusae, and that it is allied to Sarsia.” This was a bold suggestion, completely at variance with the prevailing ideas of the time. Fewkes’s assumption about the number of tenacles was borne out by Foerster (1923, p. 34) who established that the young medusae of Polyorchis found in British Columbia have four tentacles until they reach a bell height of approxi- mately 5 mm. The only one who, up to the present time, has accepted Fewkes’s view that the Polyorchidae are true Anthomedusae is Uchida (1927, p. 170) who based this conclusion to a large extent on his examination of the development of Spirocodon saltatrix (Tilesius). He found that the youngest recorded speci- men of this species “is very similar to Sarsia which is the most primitive of the Anthomedusae.” In his reconstruction of the evolutionary differentiation of the Anthomedusae, Uchida (1927, p. 168, Fig. 22) placed the Polyorchidae and the Spirocodonidae near the top of the system, next to the Willsiidae ; and he judged them to have evolved from the primitive Codoniidae, of which Sar- sia is a member, and to have passed through an intermediate Tiaridae stage. It may be worthy of notice in this connection that A. Agassiz stated on p. 132 of his in some respects quite remarkable “North American Acalephae,” 1865, that the medusae of Melicertum “hold an intermediate position between the Campanularians and the Tubularians, being more closely allied to the latter in their embryonic condition, and assuming as adult Medusae somewhat the aspect of Campanularian Medusae.”’ Since the genus Melicertum belongs to the subfamily Melicertinae of the Thaumantiidae, next to the Polyorchinae in Mayer’s (1910) large monograph, it is evident that Agassiz to some degree anticipated Fewkes’s and Uchida’s solution of the problem of the systematic position of the Polyorchidae. Agassiz’s figure 203 of the youngest stage of Melicertum certainly does show a remarkable similarity to the young medusae of Polyorchis. To summarize: there are at present two fundamentally opposed interpre- tations in regard to the systematic position of the Polyorchids: (1) the great majority of the investigators consider these forms to be Leptomedusae, lo- cated near the base of this group; (2) according to Fewkes and Uchida, they are true Anthomedusae to be placed, with the Willsiidae, at the top of this Vou. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 105 group, and derived from Codoniidae-like ancestors. Uchida, in addition, be- lieves that they have passed through a Tiaridae-like stage. Which of these two interpretations is the more correct, according to evi- dence derivable from the cnidome? The answer to this is quite clear: the Polyorchids are unquestionably Anthomedusae. They are equipped with two types of nettle cells (bicnidome) : desmonemes and stenoteles. According to Weill (1934, p. 478), neither of these categories ever occurs among the Calyptoblasts (Leptomedusae) while they are common, though by no means always present, among the Gymnoblasts (Anthomedusae) ; see Weill (1934, p. 444). Among the Anthomedusae, according to the same source, there is only one genus known to have a bicnidome consisting of desmonemes and stenoteles, and that is the genus Sarsia. Hence the close relationship between the Polyorchids and this genus may be considered to be settled with nearly com- plete certainty. The similarity even extends to quite detailed features of struc- ture, and the peculiarity emphasized by Russell (1938, p. 150), that Sarsia eximia is characterized by the fact that its stenoteles occur in two different size classes, is repeated among the Polyorchids. Concerning Uchida’s final assump- tion that the Polyorchids passed through a Tiarida-like stage, the evidence from the cnidome is equally decisive, even though it is derived from only a single member of the family Tiaridae—Leuckartiara octona (Fleming). In this form, there are neither desmonemes nor stenoteles, thus conclusively eliminat- ing it and its closest relations from the pedigree of the Polyorchids. In regard to the placing of the Polyorchidae next to the Willsiidae (either among the Leptomedusae or among the Anthomedusae), it may be noted that in Willsia stellata Forbes we find (Russell, 1938, p. 154) a cnidome which does not indicate any close relationship. (Note: Uchida, 1927, p. 169, specifically states that he does not know the relationships of the family Willstidae. ) A further tracing of the ancestry and systematic position of the Polyorchi- dae is impossible at present because of our fragmentary knowledge of the cni- domes of the various Hydromedusan genera. Suffice it to state that no forms are known, besides Sarsia and the Polyorchidae, in which there is a bicnidome consisting of stenoteles and desmonemes. The preceding discussion may give the impression that the cnidome yields taxonomic clues both simple to establish and incontrovertible in their applica- tion. Unfortunately, this a far from being true, although indeed, the Sarsia- Polyorchis relationship evidently is one of the simplest examples in this field. Concerning the difficulties inherent in the establishment of the nature of the cnidome, reference is made to Weill (1934) and Russell (1938). These diff- culties can be overcome only by very careful work. The really serious obstacles are encountered when we attempt to apply the evidence derived from the cnidome to taxonomic problems. This is due to the fact that the nematocysts, despite their structural complexities, evidently present amazing examples of the mysterious phenomenon which we call convergent evolution. A thorough morphological study of the cnidomes of a large number of genera distributed 106 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. throughout the entire Coelenterate phylum and analyzed statistically should result in very valuable evidence bearing on the fundamental, although alto- gether too little understood, problem of convergence. In his remarkable monograph, the “Medusae of the World,’’ Mayer (1910) classified the orders of the Hydromedusae into families which often in their turn were divided into subfamilies which, in some cases, had their genera arranged into tribes. This classification may have been somewhat too elabo- rate and graduated considering the immense difficulties inherent in the ap- praisal of comparative degrees of relationship. Hence it was natural that the criticism of this classificatory system became quite strong and that pronounced changes were proposed. In regard to these changes, Foerster (1923, p. 224) states that the chief difference between the system of Mayer and those of later investigators “lies in the complete abandonment of all sub-families [and tribes]. These have been either elevated to separate families or incorporated in the family without further division.” This policy, even though it was to a certain extent justifiable, probably was carried too far. After all, a classifica- tory system should mirror degrees of relationships to the greatest possible extent. In the present report I have proposed a couple of changes in the most recent classification along this line: the families Polyorchidae and Spiroco- donidae have been joined as subfamilies of Polyorchidae s./.; and, in addition, two genera were united and placed as subgenera, Polyorchis and Scrippsia, under the genus Polyorchis s.l. The material in these cases was such that it practically forced me to adopt this solution. It should be noted that the first to suggest the establishment of the Polyorchids and the Spirocodonids as subfamilies was Goette (1886, p. 832). Family Polyorchidae A. Agassiz, 1862 Acassiz, A., in Agassiz, L. (1862), pp. 349, 352 ;—Acassiz, A. (1865), p. 118;— HarEcKEL (1879), part., pp. 140, 142, 145, 149;—GorTTE (1886), p. 832;—MurspacHu and SHEARER (1903), part., pp. 174, 187;—Maas (1904), pp. 421, 423, 441;:—TorreEy (1909), p. 14;—FoeErsTER (1923), p. 250 ;—UcuIpDA (1927), pp. 169, 170, 171, 173, 226. Diagnosis: Anthomedusae of medium to large sizes (height of bell, from about 20 to somewhat more than 100 mm.). Umbrellar outline deeply bell- shaped in lateral view; at least as high as wide. Mesoglea moderately thick to rather thin, except aborally where it forms a more or less pronounced peduncle, the gastric peduncle, from whith the manubrium depends. Manubrium quad- rate in section. Oral lips 4, simple in young specimens, becoming flaring, recurved, and moderately frilled with age; their edges somewhat thickened with densely set nematocysts forming distinct marginal band, but without oral tentacles. Marginal tentacles increase in number with age, at first prob- ably always 4; in adults numerous, more than 20; simple and hollow, their canals connected with ring canal; armed with numerous, button-like aggre- gations of nematocysts scattered irregularly over the entire tentacle; when tentacle is contracted, buttons are closely set, except near tentacular base where Vor. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 107 they become increasingly scarce. Tentacles of different sizes, according to position in sequence of tentacular development; when relaxed, the longest ure longer than bell is high. Stomach tubular, without marked enlargement at place where radial canals join it. Radial canals 4; their distal two-thirds some- times simple, but show pronounced tendency to develop blind side branches on either side of each canal. Gonads located on parts of the 4 radial canals which are on gastric peduncle. Cnidome: bicnidome, consisting of stenoteles and desmonemes. Ocelli present at bases of tentacles. Statocysts and cordyli absent. Appears to be restricted to the Pacific Ocean.* Remarks: As mentioned on page 106, Goette (1886, p. 832) segregated the Polyorchids and the Spirocodonids as subfamilies. On the other hand, in his excellent study on the Anthomedusae of Japan, Uchida (1927) decided that these forms should be regarded as representing two distinct families. His Spirocodonidae included only Spirocodon, while, in the Polyorchidae, Uchida placed two genera, Polyorchis and Scrippsia. Should the latter arrangement be accepted? A careful inspection of these forms will bring forth three basic facts: (1) Morphologically, these genera are very closely related. (2) This relationship is much closer than the relationship between any one of the three genera and any other genus of the Anthomedusae, a conclusion borne out by the fact that for a long time Polyorchis was considered a member of the Leptomedusae rather than of the Anthomedusae. (3) Of the three gen- era, Polyorchis and Scrippsia are mutually much more similar than either of them is to Spirocodon. These basic facts indicated first, that Spirocodon, Polyorchis, and Scrippsia should be kept together and, at the same time, be removed from the remaining members of the Anthomedusae; second, that Spirocodon should be removed from Polyorchis and Scrippsia. To accom- plish this, it seems most advisable to revert to the classification proposed by Goette, 1.e., to maintain Polyorchidae s./. to include all these genera and to divide it in two subfamilies: Polyorchinae, for Polyorchis and Scrippsia; and Spirocodoninae, for Spirocodon. The most fundamental difference between these subfamilies is found in the structure of the gonads. Subfamily Polyorchinae Gonads in the form of narrow, sausage-like, multiple sacs, freely suspended in subumbrellar cavity. Remarks: As will be seen from the remarks above, this subfamily in- cludes two previously accepted genera, Polyorchis and Scrippsia. Since a close examination shows that these units are rather similar, the question presents itself: should these units maintain their present status ? At the time when the genus Scrippsia was established by Torrey (1909) to receive a single species, S. pacifica, there could hardly have been any rea- * The statement by Murbach and Shearer (1903, p. 177) that the genus Polyorchis has been found in the Adriatic Sea is erroneous, 108 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. sonable doubt as to the justification of its establishment. Besides a number of quantitative differences from the related genus Polyorchis, the new form exhibited a qualitative differentiating feature: its canal system was simple, that is, it lacked every trace of branching, and branching was considered a characteristic of fundamental importance in Polyorchis. The discovery of Polyorchis haplus has completely changed the situation. P. haplus is a typical Polyorchis except in the fact that, until the very latest stages, thus long after the attainment of sex maturity, its canals remain simple. Only in the very largest specimens do the radial canals exhibit a knobby appearance, thus show- ing that in this species too there is, although nearly concealed, a branching tendency. By this discovery the only qualitative difference between the two genera has been removed. Among the quantitative differences, perhaps the most striking is the decided displacement of the outer tenacles in Scrippsia from the bell margin, along the exumbrellar side. However, this difference, too, loses much of its significance when we consider the fact that in the little- known Polyorchis campanulata (Chamisso and Eysenhardt), which evidently is furnished with branched radial canals, the oldest tentacles appear to be about as far removed from the bell margin as in Scrippsia. The elimination of generic value from these two characters makes, I think, the generic status of Scrippsia untenable. However, considering the rather striking difference in general appearance between Scrippsia and the typical Polyorchis, it may be advisable, at least for the time being, to maintain Scrippsia as a systematic unit, assigning to it a subgeneric status. Further knowledge of Polyorchis campanulata may make even this status untenable. Polyorchis A. Agassiz, 1862 Polyorchis: Acassiz, A., in Agassiz, L. (1862), pp. 348, 349;—Acassiz, A. (1865), p. 119;—HarcKket (1879), pp. 140, 141, 142, 144, 149;—Mursacu and SHEARER (1903), p. 174;—Maas (1904), pp. 425, 426, 442;—Lorxs (1906a), pp. 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 141;—Haraerrr (1908), p. 317;—Mayer (1908), p. 126; (1910), pp. 197, 218 ;— TorrEY (1909), pp. 14, 16;—LittTLe (1914), p. 307 ;—ForERsTER (1923), p. 250 ;— Ucuipa (1927), pp. 170-173, 227. Medusa: CHAMIssO and EySENHARDT (1821), part., p. 359. Melicertum: EscuscHoutz (1829), part., p. 105. Melicerta: BLAINVILLE (1834), part., p. 284. Aglaura: BLAINVILLE (1834), part., p. 283. Campanella: Lesson (1843), p. 281. Polyorchidium: HAECKEL (1877), no. 148; (1879), p. 150. Diagnosis: Bell margin straight, i.e., not divided into lobes. Gastric peduncle subconical or rounded. Tentacles throughout life fairly uniformly distributed along entire bell margin. Following appearance of first 8 ten- tacles (first 4 perradial and then 4 interradial), tenacles increase by mul- tiples of 2, i.e., 2 tentacles appear about simultaneously in each quadrant, Vou. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 109 resulting in a tentacular series of: (4-8)—16—24—32, etc.* First 24 ten- tacles originate in a nearly completely fixed sequence (Fig. 1), viz., first, 4 perradial ; second, 4 interradial ; third, 8 adradial; fourth, 8 between second and third.+ Tentacles connected with ring canal by canals of different lengths, due to continued growth of these canals throughout life, canals of earliest tentacles being of moderate length, those of the later tentacles being progres- sively shorter, the youngest being for all practical purpose absent. Thus tentacles are arranged in concentric, slightly irregular rings, the outermost ones tending to become removed from the bell margin. Remarks: Since the nomenclatorial correctness of Polyorchis has been criticized, and since this question has not yet been properly settled, it may be advisable to submit it to a brief review. a omen he. 26. Og oy 2. G12 a9. 6. Th 8 8 fo Fic. 1—Polyorchis montereyensis. Diagram showing sequence of formation of ten- tacles, within one quadrant. * There is nearly always a slight difference in the time of appearance between mem- bers of each pair; and thus it would perhaps be more correct to state that 4 tentacles are added at a time, 1 in each quadrant. However, even though this is true, the difference in size between the members of the pairs soon disappears, and hence it may be permissible and preferable always to deal with these structures as paired. + Following the fourth group of tenacles, deviations from the ‘normal’ sequence, as expressed in Figure 1, may be found, as shown by the following exceptions found in Polyorchis montereyensis: (1) Rate of development not always identical in all four quad- rants; e.g., a pair of tentacles found in one quadrant or in two or three quadrants may be absent from the remaining; such an absence of even three tentacles has been observed by me. (2) Sequence of origin may be quite irregular in one to three quadrants and perfectly normal in the rest. (3) Sometimes the bud of a tentacle originates in its normal position but, for some unknown cause, its further development is inhibited. 110 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. In his discussion of the genus Melicertum, Haeckel (1879, p. 136) states that, if he followed the usual procedure of nomenclature, he would be justified in changing the names of Melicertum and Polyorchis as used by L. and A. Agassiz (1862): “so ware ich vollkommen im Rechte, wenn ich ihre Genera Melicertum und Polyorchis einfach striche, ihre Polyorchis als Melicertum und ihr Melicertwm mit einem neuen Namen bezeichnete; ebenso auch ihre Familie Polyorchidae als Melicertidae und ihre Melicertidae unter neuem Namen auffithrte.’”” The only reason why Haeckel did not carry through this radical nomenclatorial change was that Agassiz was the first to give a good description of the genus Melicertum! Disregarding this invalid reason, would it be correct to change the name of Polyorchis to Melicertum? What are the facts in the case? The first to use Melicertum as a generic name was Eschscholtz (1829, p. 105) who introduced it as an emended form of Oken’s (1815) Melicerta. According to Article 36 of the “International Rules of Zoological Nomen- clature,’’ even though generic names differ only in trivial details, e.g., in ter- mination, they should not be regarded as identical: hence the two mentioned names must be dealt with separately. Melicerta, as used by Oken, must be dis- carded as a homonym, yielding to Melicerta Schrank (1803), referring to Rotifers. Melicertum Oken, now commonly in use because of the fact that Oken (1835) accepted the emended form suggested by Eschscholtz, must be rejected, while Melicertum Eschscholtz becomes a legitimate name. Melicerta was used by Oken (1815) to designate generically a species previously named Medusa campanula by Fabricius in his “Fauna Groen- landica” (1780). Eschscholtz (1829) included in his Melicertum, besides this species, M. campanulatum (Chamisso and Eysenhardt), M. pemicillatum Eschsch., and M. pusillum (Swartz). Which of these four species should be selected as the type of the genus? M. pusillum is so poorly described that it should be assigned to “Species incertae sedis.” M. penicillatum can be rea- sonably well identified, but it has been made the type of another genus, Poly- orchis. M.campanulatum may also be a member of Polyorchis, although this identification is rather questionable, and hence its choice is not recommend- able. Thus our choice must fall on the sole remaining species, M/. campanula, i.e., on Oken’s type for Melicerta, and evidently intended as a type by Esch- scholtz. The answer to our question thus is that the name Polyorchis as used by A. and L. Agassiz is justified. (This decision, however, does not imply that these investigators were right in their usage of the name Melicertum. Indeed, the chances are that they were wrong in this respect. Whether Mayer’s [1910, p. 207] solution to this problem is acceptable may well be questionable. It may, perhaps, be advisable to have this nomenclatorial tangle settled by the International Com- mission on Zoological Nomenclature since, if a review is carried out in strict accordance with rules, it will imply a number of rather unfortunate changes. ) Vor. XXVIJ SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 111 Subgenus Polyorchis Diagnosis: Gastric peduncle of moderate size, as shown by the fact that point of origin of manubrium is never more than 0.40 the height of bell from exumbrellar apex. Manubrium long or of moderate length, always longer than gastric peduncle. An ocellus on base of every tentacle. Type Species: Polyorchis penicillatus (Eschscholtz). Remarks: To decide how many of the recorded forms should be referred, as species, to this subgenus is fraught with difficulties because of two condi- tions: first, the subgeneric delimination must still be regarded as tentative ; second, the fact that very similar species may occur within a very narrow distributional range, as exemplified by P. penicillatus and P. montereyensis (within 80 English miles of each other), and the fact that many of the previous investigators have submitted their material to comparatively superficial in- spection, force us to proceed with the greatest caution when the question arises whether forms previously recorded and identified really are specifically identical. Here follows an enumeration of the forms of this group which have been named up till the present time: Polyorchis penicillatus (also named Meli- certum penicillatum Eschscholtz; Aglaura penicillata Blainville; Polyorchis eschscholtzii Haeckel) ; P. campanulata (also named Medusa campanulata de Chamisso and Eysenhardt ; Melicertum campanulatum Eschscholtz ; Melicerta campanulata Blainville; Polyorchidium campanulatum Haeckel; Campanella chanussonis Lesson) ; Polyorchis pinnatus Haeckel; P. minuta Murbach and Shearer; and P. karafutoensis Kishinouye. What is the systematic status of these several forms? In regard to P. penicillatus, see the following discussion under the treatment of this form. Mayer (1910, p. 218) suggested that Medusa campanulata Chamisso and Eysenhardt, 1821, may be a synonym of Polyorchis penicillatus, indicating his doubt, however, by adding a question mark. If we are to accept at all the data in the original description, this identification must be unhesitatingly rejected, even though we take into account the evident incompetence with which the description was made. The most revealing difference is to be found in the arrangement of the tentacles. In Medusa campanulata, as in Polyorchis (Scrippsia) pacifica, the oldest tentacles are quite far removed from the um- brellar margin ; while in Polyorchis penicillatus, their removal from the margin is very slight. Considering the emphasis placed on this feature in Plate 30, Figure la, of Chamisso and Eysenhardt (1821) and its systematic signifi- cance in this group of medusae (of which these authors knew nothing!), it can hardly be considered as justifiable to neglect it or to discard it as due to erroneous observation and recording. Most other authors have accepted this form as a distinct species. It may even be subgenerically different (see above, p. 108). Polyorchis pinnatus Haeckel (1879, p. 149) was identified with P. peni- 112 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. cillatus by Mayer (1910, p. 218). Had Haeckel’s single specimen of this form been taken in San Francisco Bay, this decision would undoubtedly have been fully justified. However, its locality was Honolulu in the Hawaiian Islands; i.e., it came from a region that shows little faunistic relationship to the Cali- fornia waters. This, of course, makes it necessary to proceed with caution. Haeckel’s specimen of P. pinnatus measured about 30 mm. in height, ac- cording to the magnification given for his Plate 8, fig. 13. The following spe- cific features were particularly noted: (1) Radial canals, proximally to pedun- cular bend, without branches; distally to this bend, with 12-15 pairs of branches. (2) Tentacles, of uniform length, 40 in number. (3) Each radial canal with 8 gonads. From this it is evident that P. pinnatus agrees with the San Francisco Bay form of this genus in regard to the number of go- nads while at the same time it differs very decidedly in respect to the number of tentacles: a specimen of P. penicillatus only 19 mm. high has not less than about 100 of them as compared with 40 in a specimen of P. pin- natus of 30 mm. height. The number of side branches on the radial canals also exhibits distinct differences. Other differences also may be adduced, e.g., the lengths of the tentacles and the arrangement of the branches on the radial canals. Unfortunately, however, it is probably fair to assume that these are in part due to Haeckel’s somewhat superficial treatment of his material. Even so, the differences are too large to allow us to establish identity, at least until further observation on Hawaiian material justifies such procedure, especially if we also take the difference in geographical locations into con- sideration, as well as the systematic differentiations this genus exhibits along the California coast. It may finally be noted in this connection that P. pimnatus does not agree sufficiently with any of the other forms of this genus occurring on the west coast of North America to justify full systematic identification ; and that there- fore, for the time being at least, it must be regarded as a distinct species. There can be no doubt that Polyorchis karafutoensis is a distinct species ; see) Uchida. (1925, p: 68; Migesl3): While the systematic positions of these forms may be regarded as rea- sonably certain, the nature of those forms of Polyorchis on the west coast of North America which are furnished with branched radial canals is very diffi- cult, if not impossible, to decide at present with anything approaching scien- tific certainty, due to the absence of sufficient data. We can state with cer- tainty that we have forms which show quite characteristic differences, while at the same time they present so striking similarities that unity of species at first sight appears probable. It may be that the observed differences are caused by direct environmental modifications and that they are not inherited, but until this has been proved experimentally, there seems to be no choice except to assume tentatively that we are concerned with systematically distinct forms which, in the absence of clear-cut transitions, probably should be best regarded as species. Vor. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 113 The only form of this kind, besides Polyorchis penicillatus—the type spe- cies of the genus—named up till the present time, is P. minutus, a species established by Murbach and Shearer (1903, p. 17+) on a single, small specimen taken in Puget Sound, Washington. The authors stressed that what they called Fewkes’s “revised version” of P. penicillatus approached their new species “‘very closely. In fact we have only ventured to give it separate spe- ciric rank on account of size, a feature of no very great importance.” They had found that their specimen, measuring only 15 mm. in height, was sexu- ally mature, judged by the long gonads, and this size appeared to them too small to be compatible with previously published data. There can be no doubt that P. minutus is very closely related to P. peni- cillatus ; indeed, it would be rash to separate these two specifically if we had available only the descriptive and pictorial material given by Murbach and Shearer (1903). Fortunately, this is not the case. Foerster (1923, pp. 222, 226, 228, 232, and 250) presented under the name of P. penicillata observa- tional data on a large material from Puget Sound. Judging by these data as well as by observations made by me on specimens from this locality, collected by Dr. T. Kincaid, I have concluded that we are concerned with a special form, different from the California species, and hence that the name of P. minutus should be maintained as a specific denotation. A very striking difference is found, for example, in the coloration. Foerster (loc. cit., p. 251) states that P. minutus has the gonads, manubrium, and tentacle bulbs of a purple color, a condition found neither in P. penicillatus nor in P. montereyensis. Because the specimens which I obtained from Puget Sound were all large (more than 30 mm. high) and hence could not yield sufficient data for a detailed descrip- tion, I have decided to desist from attempting to write a supplementary de- scription and simply refer to Murbach and Shearer (1903) and to Foerster (1923, p. 250). It may finally be noted that Mayer, in his large ‘“Medusae of the World,” 1910, p. 219, states that the ocelli in P. minutus (which he accepts as a valid species) are yellow. This is misleading, yellow being the color only in preserved specimens. (Besides, by Murbach and Shearer, 1903, p. 174, P. minutus was noted by these authors in 1902, pp. 71, 72; Maas, 1904, pp. 425, 442; Mayer, 1910, p. 219; and Foerster, 1923, pp. 250, 251, who also noted this form under the name of P. penicillata on pp. 222, 226, 220,232). In regard to P. penicillata recorded by Fewkes (1889a, b) as well as the specimen recorded under this name by Bigelow (1940), see pages 120, 121, under “Remarks” to P. penicillatus. Murbach and Shearer (1903, pp. 175-76) were right when they criticized Haeckel’s (1879, p. 149) inclusion of the paired arrangement of some pinnate branches of the radial canals in the generic diagnosis of Polyorchis. This arrangement of the branches in the earliest published figures (Eschscholtz, etc.) is undoubtedly, as they suggested, simply due to the crudeness of the representation. Likewise, they were probably right when they criticized 114 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Fewkes (1889a, b) for his representation of all these branches as paired in what he terms Polyorchis penicillata from southern California. In addition to the forms of Polyorchis accepted in the foregoing as dis- tinct species, I introduce in this report two new species, both from Monterey Bay, California, viz., P. montereyensis, with branched radial canals, and P. haplus, with simple radial canals. Since this study was begun on P. mon- tereyensis, and since I have had available a much larger and more varied material of this form than of P. penicillatus, I have chosen to present it first and to give to it an elaborate description to be used for the purpose of comparison. Polyorchis (Polyorchis) montereyensis Skogsberg, new species Description: The largest among the hundreds of specimens seen by me were about 40 mm. high. Umbrellar outline somewhat variable; presents no distinct progressive change with age. Ratio between height and greatest width of body, 1.2 (1.0-1.6) : 1. Greatest width either about the middle of bell or near level of attachment of gonads. Aboral end of exumbrella usually almost semicircular in lateral outline and varies from this type gradually to the extremes of broadly conical shapes represented by Agassiz (1865, Fig. 179) and by Fewkes (1889a, Pl. 23) ; all of these shapes were found mingled with each other in Monterey Bay. Lateral sides of umbrella either broadly convex, with bell opening constricted (ratio between greatest width of bell and width of bell opening, about 1.3-1.4 : 1); or sides are more or less flat- tened, especially orally, the noted ratio sometimes being as low as 1.1: 1. Velar opening about 0.6-0.7 the umbrellar opening (about as in PI. 23 of Fewkes, 1889a) ; I never found it as small as indicated by Little (1914, p. 310, Pl. 13). Mesoglea quite firm, enough so to maintain shape of medusa out of water except for closing of umbrellar opening. Point of origin of manubrium about 0.25-0.40 the height of bell from exumbrellar apex (which shows size of the rounded gastric peduncle) ; it should be noted that my smallest speci- men was about 6.0 mm. high; in still smaller specimens, this peduncle prob- ably is smaller, as indicated by Fewkes (1889), p. 106) and Foerster (1923, pezoz)s Tentacles increase in number throughout life; arranged in 1-4 fairly dis- tinct, concentric circles, the number of circles depending on age of specimen ; in specimens of the usual sizes (15-25 mm. high), number of circles is 3. Number of tentacles varies as follows in relation to height of bell: (height of bell, 1-4 mm., tenacles, first 4 and then 8; these values are assumptions since I have not as yet seen any specimens of these sizes) ; height of bell 5 mm., tentacles 16; bell 6-10 mm., tentacles 24; bell 8-10 mm., tentacles 32; bell 10-15 mm., tentacles 40; bell 12-17 mm., tentacles 44; bell 17-20 mm., ten- tacles 48; bell 25-30 mm., tentacles about 72; bell about 35 mm., tentacles around 80. From this it will be seen that there is a considerable variation in regard to the ratio between the size of the bell and the number of tentacles. Vou. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 115 Even more striking deviations from the typical ratios were observed. Thus, in a couple of specimens about 18 mm. high, the number of tentacles was not less than 64; and in one of 26 mm., I counted as many as 88. All of these variations were found in one and the same population, taken within the harbor of Monterey. What the maximum number is is not known. In old specimens, size differences among earlier tenacles become negligible, if not obliterated. Oldest tenacles are hardly at all removed from the bell margin. When relaxed, medium-sized specimens may have tentacles as much as five times longer than bell is high. Tentacular bulbs, if present, are not marked off clearly from rest of tentacles. In specimens about 6.0 mm. high, manubrium extends, when relaxed, to a point about % the height of bell from apex of exumbrella; in specimens about 7.0 mm. high, it may extend to velum; and in older specimens it may extend slightly beyond this structure. In specimens as large as 10 mm., oral lips may be nearly even, but usually marginal folding begins somewhat earlier than in this stage. In specimens about 6.0 mm. high, each radial canal may have as few as 10-12 knob-like side branches on either side, beyond peduncular bend ; but this number may be as high as 20-25 at this early stage, 1.e., within the range characteristic of older specimens which is from 19 to 33. Thus the full number of these branches seems to develop nearly simultaneously at a very early stage. Sometimes almost the entire range of variation has been found in the 4 canals of a single specimen ; the prevailing numbers are 25-30. Most of the branches of the two sides of each canal alternate irregularly; see “Remarks” to sub- generic diagnosis, page 112; proportion of paired branches varies even among the 4 canals of each specimen. From their knob-like beginning, most of the branches increase in length, some, although seldom, reaching a maximum length of about 0.20 the distance between radial canals. Longest branches occur near the middle of bell; in oral portion of radial canals, branches usu- ally more or less small and rather few in number. Scattered among the longer branches there are often a few smaller ones (some of which may possibly be of later development) ; among these there may be some which are so small that it is difficult to decide whether they should be counted, a fact that makes the establishment of the number of branches uncertain. At first, side branches are simple, fairly straight, and nearly at right angles to radial canals. Later a variable number of them begin to become irregularly bent, slightly enlarged distally; or they send out, in distal half, 1-4 short, irregular secondary branches. In exceptional cases, a few of these secondary branches may even anastomose with neighboring branches of the same radial canal, thus forming local reticulation. In regard to these irregularities, it should be especially no- ticed that the 4 radial canals may be quite independent in their variations. In this connection it should be added that, although very rarely, even the main radial canals may be more or less irregular; thus I have seen specimens in which 1 or 2 of these canals had a more or less zigzag course. At place where 116 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. radial canal bends over on gastric peduncle (“‘peduncular bend”), there are, on either side of canal, about 7-10 closely-set, fine, somewhat irregular but not much branched branches, the longest of them usually somewhat shorter than longest branches beyond this bend. On radial canals of gastric peduncle, thus among gonads, branching is very variable. Often 1-2 of these canals are unbranched or furnished with only a few short branches; at other times, there are 5-8 medium-sized branches on either side of each canal; and in one speci- men, 25 mm. high, I even found these branches of the 4 radial canals quite well anastomosed. In each quadrant, ring canal usually has about 8-15 ir- regularly spaced, blind branches, most of them very short, knob-like; some- times their length may be as much as five times width of ring canal (Agassiz, 1865, Fig. 183) ; they may even show signs of branching. As many as 16-20 were counted in the quadrants of one specimen, and in all probability larger numbers will be found ; exceptionally, specimens were found with no branches of this kind. There was no regular spacing between these branches and canals leading to tentacles. When comparatively few, gonads usually are located near middle of radial canals on gastric peduncle ; when many, they occupy nearly entire length of these peduncular canals. Number of gonads difficult to establish for two reasons: first, some gonads may be so small that it is nearly arbitrary whether they should be counted ; second, some gonads are branched in many specimens. Branching may take place at any level of gonad; when it occurs very close to radial canal, it may. become almost impossible to decide with certainty whether there is a common part or whether “branches” originate directly from radial canal. Gonads begin to appear in specimens 5—6 mm. high and increase in number with age. Mature gonads may be found in specimens about 13 mm. high. Number of gonads on each radial canal varies even among the 4 canals of each specimen ; thus, for example, in a specimen 30 mm. high, these canals carried 25—-29-30-34 of them. Maximum number not known; as many as 45 have been counted. Under adverse conditions, gonads are reduced ; in speci- mens about 25 mm. high which had been submitted to prolonged starvation, as few as 6-10 were found on each canal. When fully developed, longest gonads may extend nearly to velum, while others at the same time are still very short; relative position of gonads of different lengths variable. When branched, each gonad usually has only one branch, but 2—4 branches have been recorded. Usually only a rather small number of the gonads are branched. Basal part of each tentacle has dark red to purple coloration, often with brownish admixture. Since this tentacular part is furnished with a rounded mammilliform extension (Fig. 2) covering exumbrellar side of bell margin, and since sizes of tentacles differ in a more or less regular sequence, this color- ation assumes quite a striking and distinctive pattern. Colored zone extends often around base and covers a distance from tip of base that is slightly less to somewhat more than basal width of tentacle. Within the mammilliform projection of tentacle base the eye forms a round, red-black spot. Rest of body Vot. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 117 fairly transparent, of greyish tone, sometimes with a faint somewhat pinkish tinge. However, canals of digestive tract and of gonads tend to absorb color of food. (Thus, for instance, these structures became brown in my cultures after a richly red-brown copepod, Tigriopus fulvus, had been used as food. This coloration of the endodermal cells remained during quite a long period of starvation, a fact that made the study of the canal system very easy.) Fic. 2—Polyorchis montereyensis. Diagram of base of tentacle, in which general distribution of pigmentation is indicated by stippling. In proximal portion of pigmented area, chromatophores are so close that pigment appears continuous; toward distal por- tion, chromatophores are more or less spaced. Occurrence: By far the most commonly observed Hydromedusa in Mon- terey Bay, California, where it has been recorded throughout several years (1937-1942), from February to December, inclusive, in Monterey Harbor (type locality). In this locality the species was characterized by as yet unex- plained prolonged periods of absence, followed by periods when it occurred in moderate to large numbers. Spawning specimens and specimens of very different sizes were present throughout the noted months. Hydroid stage not yet found. Surface temperatures throughout the years 1919 to 1928, inclusive, ranged from 14.9° to 9.2° C.; the usual range is 11°-13° C. Salinity for the same period ranged from 32.5 percent to 34.1 percent, according to records taken at Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University, located less than one English mile from the type locality (Bigelow and Leslie, 1930, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll., 70: 5; 1930). The species does not appear to have been recorded in literature before. Remarks: This species differs from Polyorchis penicillatus of San Fran- cisco Bay mainly in having a larger number of gonads and branches on the radial canals and a smaller number of tentacles; the pigmentation at the base of the tentacles also shows a striking and readily recognizable difference. 118 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. Polyorchis penicillatus (Eschscholtz) Non Medusa campanulata, CHAMisso and Eysenuarpt, (1821), p. 359, pl. 30: la, b, c. (This, of course, also eliminates the several synonyms of this species.) Melicertum penicillatum, EscuscHottz (1829), p. 106, pl. 8:4; BLAINvILLE, (1834), pl. 38;—Duyarpin (1840), p. 160;—Acassiz, L. (1862), pp. 348, 349;—Acassiz, A. (1865), p. 119;—HarckEt (1879), pp. 136, 149, 150 ;—Murpacu and SHEARER (1903), p. 176;—Maas (1904), pp. 425, 442;—BrEpor (1905), p. 144;—ForrstTeR (1923), p. 250. Melicertum penicillata, LEsson (1843), p. 293 ;—Acassiz, A. (1865), p. 119. Aglaura pencillata, BLAINVILLE (1834), p. 283, pl. 33: 4;—Acassiz, L., (1862), pp. 348, 349 :—Acassiz, A. (1865), p. 119;—HaEckeEt (1879), p. 150. Polyorchis penicillata, AGAssiz, A., in AGassiz, L. (1862), part., p. 349;—Acassiz, A. (1865), part., p. 119, figs. 179-183 ;—HaEcKEL (1879), part., p. 150;—Mursacn and SHEARER (1903), part., p. 175;—Bancrort (1904), pp. 43-46, 4 text figs.;—Maas (1904), pp. 425, 442;—Berpor (1905), part., p. 144;—Torrey (1909), p. 16;—MAyYER (1910), part., p. 218, fig. 111;—LitrLe (1914), pp. 307-328, pls. 13-15 ;—JoHNsoNn and Snook (1935), part., p. 66, fig. 55. Non Polyorchis penicillata, FoERSTER (1923), pp. 222, 226, 228, 232, 250; refers to P. minutus. Polyorchis penicillatus, HAECKEL (1879), part., p. 149;—Maas (1904), part., pp. 425, 442; —FoeErsTER (1923), part., p. 250. Polyorchis eschscholtzii, HAECKEL (1877), part., no. 147; (1879), part., p. 150. Non Polyorchis pinnatus, HAECKEL (1879), p. 149, pl. 8:13 ;—Maas, (1904), pp. 425, 442 ;— MAYER (1910), p. 218;—FoeErsTER (1923), p. 250. Polyorchis, LoeB (1906a), pp. 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 141; (1906b), p. 427;—MaccaLLuM (1907), p. 385. Description: Largest specimens recorded so far, about 25 mm. high. Ratio between height and greatest width of bell, about 1.0-1.3 : 1. Greatest width either at about the middle or somewhat closer to apex of bell. Aboral end of exumbrella usually almost semicircular in lateral outline; only very few spect- mens have a tendency toward the formation of a small, broadly rounded apical cone. Sides of bell usually subvertical; more or less flattened, especially orally; and oral constriction frequently very slight or not developed at all. Velar opening about 0.4-0.5 the umbrellar opening (whether it ever is so small as figured by Little, 1914, Pl. 13, Fig. 1, seems uncertain). In large specimens gastric peduncle of about the same size as in P. montereyensts. Tentacles increase in number throughout life; arranged in 1—4 concentric circles. Number of tentacles increases very rapidly with age, as shown by the following values: height of bell about 2 mm., number of tentacles 12-16; height of bell about 3.5 mm., number of tentacles about 24; height of bell about 10 mm., number of tentacles about 50; height of bell about 19 mm., number of tentacles about 100; height of bell about 21 mm., number of ten- tacles about 120. Maximum number of tentacles so far recorded, 160. In older specimens, size differences among most tentacles, except the latest ones, are nearly negligible. Oldest tentacles are but slightly removed from bell margin. In Little (1914, Pl. 14, Fig. 3), tentacles drawn in a manner Vor. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 119 suggestive of presence of large, well-marked tentacular bulbs ; tentacular bulbs, if at all present, usually are not clearly marked off from the rest of tentacles. Manubrium as in P. montereyensis. (It may be noted that Little’s [1914, p. 310] statement that there is an “enlarged sac-like stomach” at place where radial canals meet is incorrect. In accordance with family diagnosis given above, no such differentiation occurs. ) Number of branches on either side of each radial canal, beyond peduncular bend, about 16-25 of sizes about as in Little’s (1914) Plate 13, Figure 1, ex- cept that among the well-developed branches shown in this figure, there are a number of scattered, very short, more or less knob-like ones. Sometimes most of the well-developed ones are about equal in size, as in the noted figure ; but at other times those near the middle of bell are slightly longer than the others. Branches near margin of bell are both few and short. A varying number of the branches have 1-4 secondary branches, mostly knob-like, a few of which may in their turn be branched. In a few instances, anastomosis has been observed between neighboring branches. Proximally to peduncular bend, there are about 5-7 branches on either side of canal, of lengths about as those beyond this bend. Among gonads, there are on either side of radial canals 0-5 usually knob-like, irregularly placed branches. The 4 radial canals of each specimen vary independently of each other in respect to branching. In each quadrant, ring canal has about 0-6 irregularly spaced, blind branches, mostly knob-like, at most a few times longer than canal is wide. Gonads located near middle of radial canals of gastric peduncle; their number small, each group containing only 4-11, averaging about 8; branching occurs, but rarely. Relative position of gonads of different lengths varies. Pigmentation restricted to the bases of the tentacles where it is much less developed than in P. penicillatus. In regard to the distribution of the pigment, I refer to Little (1914, Pl. 15, Fig. 8). As will be seen from this picture, the pigment is very scarce, sometimes nearly absent outside the ocellus, occupying somewhat different patterns in different individuals. These patterns agree closely with what I have observed in freshly killed material sent me from San Francisco Bay by Dr. R. Stohler, of the University of California, Berke- ley. In regard to the nature of the pigment, Little (loc. cit., p. 312) gives red and brown, while Dr. Stohler informed me by letter that he had found it maroon with a purplish hue or purplish with a brownish hue—in other words, about the same colors that I found in the case of P. montereyensis. Occurrence: This species is common in San Francisco Bay, California, where Little (1914, p. 308) found it from December to the middle of April. For a period of one year, beginning in the middle of December 1942, daily records of this species were made from a pier in this bay (at Berkeley) through the arrangement of Dr. R. Stohler. General estimates of frequency and size were recorded, and data pertaining to tidal phase and general weather condi- tions at the hour of the day when the observations were made were also entered in the records. An analysis of these data shows that Polyorchis penicillatus 120 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47 SER. was observed near the surface all the year around, with the exception of a period from August 9 to October 8, 1943, when the records were consistently negative. During the rest of the time, no distinct regularity was evident in the occurrence. Usually at least a few specimens were seen, but there were irregular periods of absence, in some cases as long as 14 days. The causes for these periods of absence could not be deduced from the available data. The occurrence at the surface appears to be remarkably independent of the tidal phases, of rain and sunshine, and of calm and rough water ; also, observations were made at various hours of the day and from these observations there ap- peared no indications of a daily rhythm. Finally, it may be noted that large and small specimens were seen throughout the year, although on this point the records are too incomplete for certainty of statement. No other locality for this species is as yet known. Remarks: This species was possibly first described by Eschscholtz (1829, p. 106, Pl. 8, Fig. 4) under the name of Melicertum penicillatum. The original description is very incomplete and is in addition, at least in some respects, in- correct. As for the type locality, Eschscholtz simply records: “Coast of Cali- fornia.” Considering the fact that we evidently have more than one form of the genus Polyorchis along this coast, the uncertainty both in regard to descrip- tion and type locality is extremely unfortunate. Indeed, perhaps it would even justify the relegation of this species of Eschscholtz to “Species incertae sedis.” I know of no account of the localities visited by Eschscholtz during the six years of voyages when he made his observations and collections. However, considering the fact that in the earliest part of the nineteenth century shipping in California was quite undeveloped except in the region about San Francisco, it is not unreasonable to assume that Eschscholtz secured his type material of this species while at anchor in San Francisco Bay, especially since there is a form of this general appearance which is rather common in this neighborhood. For this reason and because A. Agassiz acquired most of his material of Polyorchis penicillata (Eschscholtz) from San Francisco Bay. I have decided that it is reasonable to maintain this species of Eschscholtz as identifiable. A factor that contributes to the advisability of this decision is that its acceptance will imply a minimum of nomenclatural changes. Other factors worthy of no- tice in this connection are that Agassiz’s redescription is quite acceptable, and that the form treated by him should be regarded as the type of the genus Poly- orchis. Because of the fact that some of Agassiz’ material was taken in the waters of the Strait of Georgia, British Columbia, hence in the region of P. minutus, P. penicillata Agassiz is stated as only partly identical with Melicer- tum penicillatuin Eschscholtz in the list of synonyms given in the foregoing discussion. In regard to Polyorchis penicillata Fewkes (1889a, p. 593, Pl. 23, Text Fig. 4; 18890, p. 103, Pl. 4, Figs. 6, 7), it has not been included in the above list of synonyms because of its uncertain status. It was taken south of Point Vout, XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 121 Conception in southern California, and at this place there is a very decided faunistic change associated with oceanic circulatory phenomena. Polyorchis penicillata, Johnson and Snook (1935), is furnished with a part. because of the color notation: “stomach, gonads, tentacle-bulbs, and radial canals are reddish brown to purple.”” This indicates that at least part of their material had a northern origin. Polyorchis penicillata, Bigelow (1940, p. 296), refers to a single specimen. This is entirely too scantily described for full certainty of specific identification and, in addition, it was taken very far to the south of the type locality of this species, viz., in the Gulf of California, a region characterized by tropical waters. Considering the difficulties inherent in the classification of the species of Polyorchis, it was judged advisable under these circumstances not to include this record in the above list of synonyms. In regard to the remaining names in this list, it should be noted that all of them refer either to Eschscholtz’s original material or to the species de- scribed by A. Agassiz. The names referring to the latter are furnished with a part. to indicate the restriction attached to Agassiz’ form. The description given above is based in part on data taken from Little (1914), partly on specimens from San Francisco Bay where they had been collected by Dr. R. Stohler and kindly sent to me. Polyorchis (Polyorchis) haplus Skogsberg, new species Description: Largest specimens recorded were about 20 mm. high; most specimens seen were about 15 mm. high or less. Ratio between height and greatest width of body, 1.1-1.3 : 1. Greatest width either at about middle of body or somewhat above. Aboral end of exumbrella almost semicircular in lateral outline; broadly conical shapes, such as figured for P. penicillatus by Agassiz (1865, Fig. 179) and Fewkes (1889a, Pl. 23), were never seen. Lateral sides of umbrella broadly convex, usually somewhat flattened toward oral end; ratio between greatest width of body and width of bell opening, about 1.3-1.4.: 1. Velar opening, mesogloea, and point of origin of manu- brium about as in P. penicillatus. Tentacles arranged in fairly distinct concentric circles. Number of ten- tacles comparatively small. Whether there is an increase throughout life is uncertain ; it should be noted that in the oldest specimen observed there were not even the slightest indications of tentacular buds despite the fact that the latest tentacles were large and well developed. Number of tentacles varies about as follows in relation to height of bell: height of bell ?-7 mm., tentacles 16; bell 8-11 mm., tentacles 18-20; bell 12-20 mm., tentacles 24 (possibly the maximum number). There undoubtedly is a greater variation in regard to ratio between size of bell and number of tentacles. Oldest tentacles hardly at all removed from bell margin. Length of manubrium about as in P. peni- cillatus but in large specimens lips appear to be slightly less folded than in that species. 122 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. In specimens up to about 17 mm. high., all canals appear to be simple, Le., without any side branches. In the oldest specimens (about 20 mm. high), the radial canals are either simple or are furnished with closely set, knob-like branches, less than or about as long as width of canals; ring canal may also be furnished with a few branches of this kind, and, occasionally, both types of canals may be furnished with a few somewhat longer, simple branches at about right angles to main canals. Thus in most specimens of this species as yet recorded, all canals were simple, and it is to this peculiarity that the species owes its name. Bend of radial canal at base of gastric peduncle forms, on the average, a more pronounced and acute angle than in P. penicillatus ; and this feature emphasizes the fact that the peduncle is more conical than in the noted species. When comparatively few, as in young specimens, gonads are located on inner half of radial canals of gastric peduncle; when many, they occupy entire length of peduncular canals. Number of gonads is difficult to establish for same reasons as in P. penicillatus; number appears to vary between 20 and 25 on each canal in fully developed specimens. When fully developed, longest gonads reach nearly to velum. Those close to manubrium usually are the longest, and this causes gonads to appear to be more crowded to manubrium than in P. penicillatus. Only a small number of gonads are branched; I have not seen more than one branch to any gonad. Mature gonads may be found in specimens about 12-13 mm. high. There is a small area of deep red pigment around each eye, not much larger than the mammiliform projection on which the eye is placed. Tentacles and gonads of a yellowish tinge, sometimes quite canary yellow; this color, which is quite characteristic of the species in contrast with P. penicillatus, remains even after a prolonged period of starvation in aquarium. In some specimens, however, the yellow is very faint, yielding to a greyish-brown tinge. Rest of body fairly transparent and of a greyish tone. Occurrence: So far recorded only at Monterey (type locality), where it was found in the harbor as well as in shallow water off a sandy beach; in latter place it was taken while dredging for sand dollars (Dendraster). Rare or moderately common from August to November. Remarks: The presence of a species with unbranched radial canals within the genus Polyorchis is very interesting indeed, since it clearly indicates that the branching phenomenon does not have the fundamental significance at- tributed to it by many of the leading taxonomists of the Hydromedusae. As a matter of fact, the branching of the radial canals offers many excellent examples of the important role played by convergence in the evolutionary history of this group. It may be of interest to recall in this connection that Murbach and Shearer (1903, p. 177) state that the comparatively late ap- pearance of the branches on the radial canals, in the postembryonic develop- ment, “points to their being a recent acquisition in the evolution of the race, probably within the limits of this particular group” (Polvyorchis). Vou. XXVI] SKOGSBERG: FAMILY POLYORCHIDAE 123 BIBLIOGRAPHY Acassiz, A. 1865. North American Acalephae. Illustrated Cat. Museum Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll., No. 2. 234 pp., 360 figs. Aeassiz, L. 1862. Contributions to the natural history of the United States of America, vol. 4; viii+380+12 pp., pls. 20-35. Boston. Bancrort, F. W. 1904. Note on the galvanotropic reactions of the medusa Polyorchis penicillata A. Agassiz. Univ. of Calif. Publ. Physiol., 2 (4): 43-46, 4 figs. Bepot, M. 1905. Matériaux pour servir a l’histoire des Hydraires. 2me Période (1821-1850). Rev. Suisse Zool., 13: 1-183. BicELow, H. B. 1940. Eastern Pacific Expeditions of the New York Zoological Society. XX. Medusae of the Templeton Crocker and Eastern Pacific “Zaca” Expeditions, 1936-1938. Zoologica., 25 (3): 281-321, 20 figs. BLAINVILLE, H. M. D. DE : 1834. Manuel d’Actinologie ou de Zoophytologie. viiit688+12 pp., Atlas of 100 pls. Paris. Browne, E. T. 1896. On British hydroids and Medusae, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1896: 459-500, pls. 16-17. CuHAmtisso, A. DE, and C. G. EySENHARDT 1821. De animalibus quibusdam e Classe Vermium Linneana, in circumnavigatione terrae, auspicante Comite N. Romanzoff, duce Ottone de Kotzebue, annis 1815-1818 peracta. Fasc. 2, Nova Acta Phys.-Med. Acad. Caes. Leop.-Carol., 10(2) : 343-374, pls. 24-33. Bonn. DujJARDIN, F. 1840. Radiaires. Vol. 3 of Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de: Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertebres. Edit. 2, revue et augmentée par G. P. Deshayes et H. Milne Edwards. Paris. _EScCHSCHOLTZ, F. 1829. System der Acalephen. 190 pp., 16 pls. Berlin. FEWKEs, J. W. 1889a. On a few Californian Medusae. Amer. Nat., 23 (271): 591-602, pls. 22-28, 7 text figs. 1889b. New Invertebrata from the coast of California. Bull. Essex Inst., 21 (7): 99- 146, 7 pls., 3 text figs. ForERSTER, R. E. 1923. The Hydromedusae of the west coast of North America, with special reference to those of the Vancouver Island region. Contr. Canad. Biol., n.s., I (12): 219- 277, 5 pls. GEGENBAUR, C. 1856. Versuch eines Systems der Medusen; mit Beschreibung neuer und wenig bekannter Formen. . . . Zeitscher. Wissensch. Zool., 8 (2): 202-273, pls. 7-10. GoETTE, A. 1886. Verzeichniss der Medusen, welche von Dr. Sander, Stabsarzt auf S.M.S. “Prinz Adalbert” gesammelt wurden. Sitzungsber. K. Preuss, Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 39 : 831-837. 124 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. HAECKEL, E. 1877. Prodrom. System. Medus. (Not seen.) 1879. Das System der Medusen. Erster Theil einer Monographie der Medusen. Jena. Denkschr., vol. 1, 672 pp., 40 pls. Harcitt, C. W. 1908. Occurrence of the fresh-water medusa, Limnocodium, in the United States. Biol. Bull., 14 (5): 304-318, 7 text figs. Jounson, M. E., and H. J. SNoox 1935. Seashore Animals of the Pacific Coast. xiv+659 pp., 11 pls., 700 text figs. New York. Lesson, R. P. 1843. Histoire naturelle des Zoophytes. Acaléphes. 8+596 pp., Atlas of 12 pls. Paris. ree: Ve 1914. The structure of the ocelli of Polyorchis penicillata. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., 11 (12): 307-328, pls. 13-15. LoeEs, J. 1906a. The dynamics of living matter. Columbia Univ. Biol. Ser., 8: xi+233, 64 text figs. 1906b. The stimulating and inhibitory effects of magnesium and calcium upon the rhythmical contractions of a jellyfish (Polyorchis). Jour. Biol. Chem., 1 (6): 427-436. Maas, O. 1904. Bemerkungen zum System der Medusen. Revision der Cannotiden Haeckels. Sitzungsber. math-phys. K1. K. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., 34 (3): 421-445. MaccaLuuM, J. B. 1907. The action of certain vegetable cathartics on the isolated centre of a jellyfish (Polyorchis). Jour. Biol. Chem., 2 (4): 385-390. Mayer, A. G. 1908. On rhythmical pulsation in Scyphomedusae. II. Pap. Tortugas Lab., vol. I, No. 7, Publ. No. 102, Carnegie Inst. Washington, pp. 115-131, 13 text figs. 1910. Medusae of the world. I. The Hydromedusae. Carnegie Inst. Washington. Publ., 109(1) : 498+-xv; 55 pls., 327 text figs. Mursacu, L., and C. SHEARER 1902. Preliminary report on a collection of Medusae from the coast of British Co- lumbia and Alaska. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 7, 9: 71-73. 1903. On Medusae from the coast of British Columbia and Alaska. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 2 (1): 164-192, pls. 17-22. RUSSELL, Ea S: 1938. On the nematocysts of Hydromedusae. Jour. Mar. Biol. Assn. United King- dom., 23 (1): 145-165, 88 text figs. Torrey, H. B. 1909. The Leptomedusae of the San Diego Region. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., 6 (2): 11-31, 11 text figs. Ucuipba, T. 1925. Some Hydromedusae from northern Japan. Jap. Jour. Zool., 1 (3): 77-100, 19 text figs. 1927. Studies on Japanese Hydromedusae. 1. Anthomedusae. Jour. Fac. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo. Zool., 1 (3): 145-241, pls. 10-11, 47 text figs. WEILL, R. 1934. Contribution a l’étude des cnidaires et de leurs nématocystes. I. Recherches sur les nématocystes (Morphologie, Physiologie, Developpement). Trav. Sta. zool. Wimereux, 10: 1-347, 200 text figs.; II. Valeur taxonomique du cnidome, ibid., 11: 351-701, 224 text figs. é iolost atuty ne Biological Labor Se ee a ee AUG 24 1948 WOODS HOLE, MASS. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY ‘OF SCIEINNCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 6, pp. 125-133, pl. 2, figs. 1-12 June 28, 1948 =e { NEW FOSSIL CYPRAEIDAE FROM THE MIOCENE OF FLORIDA AND COLOMBIA * BY WILLIAM MARCUS INGRAM Mills College, California HREE EXTINCT species of Cypraeidae from the Miocene of Alum Bluff, Calhoun County, Florida, and two extinct species from Miocene strata in’ the vicinity of Tubera, Colombia, are herein described. These new Cypraeidae from Florida bring the total of recognized species and subspecies of extinct fossil Cypraeidae described from North America to forty-two (Ingram, 1942). The Colombian species described here were referred to by Anderson (1929) in his work on the marine Miocene of northern Colombia. He considered them both to be Cypraea henekeni Sowerby (Sow- erby, 1850). The writer wishes to express his thanks to Dr. G. Dallas Hanna and to Dr. Leo George Hertlein of the Department of Paleontology of the California Academy of Sciences, who allowed the writer to examine the collections of Cypraeidae in that institution, and who for a number of years have extended every courtesy to the writer in his conchological work. The writer also wishes to express his appreciation to Dr. Herbert W. Graham, Professor of Biology at Mills College, for making the illustrations of the holotype specimens. FLORIDA SPECIES Cypraea hertleini Ingram, new species Plate 2, figures 1, 2 Shell bulbous, sloping steeply in lateral profile from the dorsum toward the anterior and posterior canals; spire obscured; sides of shell calloused; callosity of sides extends over lateral margins of dorsum, leaving an undu- * Manuscript received October 19, 1944. 125 126 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES L Proc. 4TH SER. lating pattern on top of the dorsum; pattern superficially recalls the dorsal pattern of Cypraea spadicea Swainson ; a 4 mm. wide shelf is present dorsally over anterior canal, shelf lacking over posterior canal; base convex, upturned at lateral margins, leaving a barely visible ridge at dorsal margin of upturned basal sides, and recalling a similar condition in Cypraea arenosa Gray ; ante- rior canal extremity straight ventrally, strongly curved to the left dorsally ; posterior canal turned toward the left; anterior canal lips of equal length; anterior canal 3 mm. broad by 4 mm. wide; terminal ridge of anterior canal sunken ; anterior region of outer lip declivous; outer lip teeth approximately 4+ mm. long; outer lip teeth along anterior one-half of lip have interstices of approximately 1 mm.; along posterior one-half interstices are approximately 1.50 mm. wide; anterior columellar teeth over anterior two-fifths of lip exist as nodules, the longest two extending 2 mm. into the aperture on the colu- mella of the shell; three poorly developed non-noduled teeth are present on the central fifth of the columella; posterior two-fifths of the columella without teeth ; barely noticeable depression on columella just posterior to the terminal ridges ; columella from terminal ridge to approximately mid-point of its length slightly concave; columella from mid-point to posterior extremity convex ; columellar surface just behind terminal ridge approximately 10 mm. deep; aperture 5 mm. wide anteriorly just behind terminal ridge, and narrowing posteriorly to 3 mm. just in front of posterior canal. The type measures: length, 40 mm.; breadth, 29.50 mm.; height, 22.50 mm. Holotype, No. 8044, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 578 (C.A.S.), marl bed about twenty feet above the water level, on the left bank of the Apalachicola River, about three and one-half miles above Bristow, at Alum Bluff on Apalachicola River, Calhoun County, Florida; E. L. Packard, collector. Lower Miocene. Discussion: Preservation in the holotype is excellent. The outer layer of the shell is nearly intact except where sand grains have made small, narrow, longitudinal furrows over the central region of the dorsum. The shell color is faded, but evidence is present to indicate that while living this species pos- sessed four color zones: a broad basal zone, a broad lateral zone, a line color zone that bounded the dorsal designs, and the dorsal design. The line color zone exists in the holotype as an orange-brown line; the color from the other zones has faded. This species is named for Dr. Leo George Hertlein, Assistant Curator, Department of Paleontology, California Academy of Sciences, who has untir- ingly given his time to aid the writer. Cypraea apalachicolae Ingram, new species Plate 2, figures 6, 8 Shell bulbous, sloping steeply in lateral profile toward the anterior canal; posteriorly the slope is marked by a broadly open concavity above the outer lip side of the shell; calloused base; callosity of the base extends up to the Vor. XXVII INGRAM: NEW FOSSIL CYPRAEIDAE 127 lateral margins, recalling a similar condition in Cypraea arenosa Gray ; dorsum unornamented ; dorsal shelf over anterior canal 5 mm. wide; shelf absent over posterior canal ; base convex; upturned lateral margins of base leave a series of small, smooth, barely discernible nodules on the outer lip side of base; nodules lacking on outer surface of columella side of base; anterior canal straight ventrally and dorsally; posterior canal turned toward the left; ter- minal ridge of anterior canal sunken; anterior region of outer lip declivous ; outer lip teeth approximately 5 mm. long; teeth along anterior one-half of outer lip have interstices of approximately 1 mm., along posterior one-half of approximately 1.50 mm.; anterior columellar teeth over anterior two-fourths of columella well developed, nodule-like; those of third fourth extremely small, barely visible; those over posterior one-fourth well developed, nodule- like; columella teeth longest over anterior one-fourth, extending 3 mm. into the aperture ; strong depression visible on interior columellar surface posterior to terminal ridge; columella from terminal ridge caudad one-third, strongly concave; columella strongly convex over posterior two-thirds; concave sur- face of columella is produced enough to be considered a toothless fossula ; aperture 3 mm. wide just behind posterior canal, 5 mm. wide anteriorly over fossula. The type measures: length, 48 mm.; breadth, 37 mm. ; height, 28 mm. Holotype, No. 8045, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 578 (C.A.S.), marl bed about twenty feet above the water level, on the left bank of the Apalachicola River, about three and one-half miles above Bristow, at Alum Bluff on Apalachicola River, Calhoun County, Florida; KE. L. Packard, collector. Lower Miocene. Discussion: The outer layer of the shell is missing from the posterior and lateral two-thirds of the shell. A piece is broken from behind the terminal ridge on the anterior columellar base of the shell. No dorsal pattern is present on the part of the dorsum remaining intact. This species is related to C. hertleim Ingram, but it differs from that spe- cies in possessing a defined, toothless fossula, in having a straight anterior canal ventrally and dorsally, in possessing teeth along the entire columella, in lacking an ornamented dorsum, and in that the posterior canal is produced. Cypraea alumensis Ingram, new species Plate 2, figures 3, 4 Shell ovate, sloping gently in lateral profile toward the anterior and poste- rior canals; shelves over both canals, anterior one 2 mm. broad, posterior one 4 mm. broad; lateral margins calloused; base calloused, convex, angled up- ward at its union with shell-sides ; terminal ridge extends directly back from columellar side of aperture and bends dorsad into shell; fossula absent; ante- rior canal straight ventrally, curved to left dorsally, 1.50 mm. wide and 3.50 mm. long; posterior canal slightly curved to the left, 2 mm. wide and 4 mm. long ; outer lip teeth declivous at anterior extremity; outer lip teeth with in- terstices of approximately .50 mm., confined to the aperture, and extending 128 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. dorsad around lip into shell; teeth very minute caudad on. outer lip, and extending on to posterior canal; first anterior columella tooth very elongate, narrow, next two nodule-like, remainder of teeth elongate, fine with broader interstices than those of anterior three teeth. The type measures: length, 28.50 mm.; breadth, 20.50 mm.; height, 14.50 mm. Holotype, No. 8043, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 578 (C.A.S.), marl bed about twenty feet above the water level, on the left bank of the Apalachicola River, about three and one-half miles above Bristow, at Alum Bluff on Apalachicola River, Calhoun County, Florida; E. L. Packard, collector. Lower Miocene. Discussion: The shell is moderately eroded; no indication of its original color remains. The aperture area and the lips are intact. DISCUSSION OF FossIL RELATIONSHIPS OF FLORIDA SPECIES Aside from the relationship of Cypraea hertleim Ingram and Cypraea apa- lachicolae Ingram, pointed out in the foregoing, these two species are quite distinct from other Cypraeidae of the Western Hemisphere. Superficially they recall the extinct lower Miocene species, Cypraea chilona Dall, from the Chipola Beds, Alum Bluff, Florida (Dall, 1900; Ingram, 1939, 1942). How- ever, the columellar teeth are not so well developed in C. chilona; the shell is flattened dorsoventrally ; there is a flange on the columellar side of the ante- rior canal; and the shelf over the anterior canal is absent. Cypraea alumensis Ingram bears relationship to Cypraea heilprini Dall from Ten Mile Creek, Calhoun County, Florida (Dall, 1890). This extinct lower Miocene species differs from C. alumensis, however, by possessing un- equal posterior canal lips, by having the outer lip teeth extend over the lip and not confined to the aperture, and by lacking well-defined differentiation of the columellar teeth. Dall (1890) in describing C. heilprini likened this species to Cypraea pinguis Conrad. Cypraea alumensis also shows affinity to Cypraea ballista Dall, from the Miocene of the Tampa Silex beds at Ballast Point, Tampa Bay, Florida; it differs, however, in having the outer lip teeth more nearly confined to the aperture ; in lacking the widened aperture area just posterior to the terminal ridge; in having well-defined columellar teeth along the anterior one-fourth of the columella; and in having the posterior canal strongly curved to the left rather than being straight. Cypraea alumensis Ingram is, in several characteristics, likewise similar to the living West Coast species, Cypraea robertsi Hidalgo, except in lacking a toothed fossula; in having the columellar teeth more nearly confined to the aperture, of a different shape, and more numerous; and in having a more produced posterior canal. Distributional records of the living species indicate that it is found at: Colombia; Taboga Island, Panama; Pacific side of the Canal Zone; Gulf of Fonseca between Costa Rica and Nicaragua ; Concepcion Bay and La Paz, Lower California; and Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico. Vor. XXVI] INGRAM: NEW FOSSIL CYPRAEIDAE 129 Other extinct Florida species, described from the Miocene, are quite dis- tinct from those discussed above. Such species are Cypraca carolinensis flori- danus Mansfield described from the Tamiami Trail, forty-two miles west of Miami, Florida, by Mansfield (1931), and Cypraca tiumulus Heilprin from Ballast Point, Hillsboro Bay, Florida, a species that Dall (1890) considered to be a synonym of C. pinguis, but referred to as a valid species when he described C. ballista, discussed above (Dall, 1915). COLOMBIAN SPECIES 3 Cypraea andersoni Ingram Plate 2, figures 5, 7 Shell heavy with a high dorsum, in lateral profile sloping gradually toward the anterior and steeply toward the posterior canal; posterior canal produced 5 mm., sides flaring out at free extremity ; two nearly obscured protuberances on dorsum just anterior to the central transverse axis of dorsum; base con- vex and upturned on its lateral margins; anterior canal not produced, and minute for size of mollusk, 3 mm. long by 3 mm. broad, curved to the left ; terminal ridge sunken, sloping immediately into shell aperture; fossula ab- sent ; anterior region of outer lip notably constricted ; outer lip teeth run from anterior end of constricture to beginning of posterior canal; teeth with inter- stices of from 1 to 1.50 mm. broad, teeth curved around lip into shell; colu- mellar teeth elongate, running into aperture on columella, interstices from 1 to 2 mm. broad; longest columellar teeth from 3 to 5 mm., in central columel- lar region; posterior columellar teeth poorly developed, as slightly raised lines; teeth on both lips confined to the aperture; aperture curves to the left anteriorly and posteriorly ; aperture 8 mm, broad just behind terminal ridge, and 5 inm., broad just in front of posterior canal. The type measures: length, 60 mm.; breadth, 44+ mm.; height, 32 mm. Holotype, No. 8042, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 267B (C.A.S.), Tubera Hill at west base of Tubera Mountain, in the lower part of the Tubera group, 1 mile west of Tubera, Colombia; Frank M. Ander- son, collector. Middle Miocene. Discussion: The holotype is moderately eroded dorsally; the shell is not fragmented. By scraping the sand matrix from its interior the characteristics of the teeth, canals, and aperture were revealed. This species is named for the late Dr. Frank M. Anderson, Honorary Curator, Department of Paleontology, California Academy of Sciences. Cypraea tuberae Ingram Plate 2, figures 9, 12 Shell heavy with a high dorsum, in profile sloping steeply immediately into the posterior canal notch, and sloping gradually toward the anterior canal; sides are streaked in brown, recalling the condition in Cypraca mus Linnaeus ; 130 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. one tubercle present on right of dorsum just above and to the right of the posterior canal notch; base flat, upturned at lateral margins but slightly; line of base demarcation well developed at lateral margins; posterior canal notch 8 mm. deep; distally free extremities of notch constricted (1.e., notch 8 mm. wide at base, and 5 mm. wide at free extremities) ; anterior canal bounded by two fractured flanges, remnants of right flange 8 mm. wide, of left flange 12 mm. wide; aperture curved to the left anteriorly and posteriorly ; aperture has maximum width, 7 mm., just posterior to terminal tooth, and is narrowest, 5 mm., just behind posterior canal; teeth on anterior margin of outer lip declivous; outer lip teeth interstices from 1.50 to 2 mm.; teeth on anterior one-half of outer lip elongate, on posterior one-half nodule-like; columellar teeth longest at anterior and posterior regions of columella, approximately 5 mm. long, shortened in the columellar center to 2 to 3 mm. The type meas- ures : length, 64 mm. ; breadth, 47.50 mm.; height, 35 mm. Holotype, No. 8041, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 267B (C.A.S.), Tubera Hill at west base of Tubera Mountain, in the lower part of the Tubera group, 1 mile west of Tubera, Colombia; Frank M. Ander- son, collector. Middle Miocene. Discussion: Color markings are partially preserved, indicating that the base and lateral surfaces were probably brown. The outer shell layer on the left posterior region of the dorsum has been broken away, possibly carrying away one tubercle, since one remains, and such protuberances in the Cyprae- idae are typically bilateral. The shell would have a greater length if a part of the flanges on either side of the anterior canal had not been broken away. DISCUSSION OF RELATIONSHIPS OF THE COLOMBIAN SPECIES Cypraea andersoni and Cypraea tuberae described in the foregoing belong to the “Cypraea henekeni Sowerby group” of Cypraeidae. Evidence indicates that the “C. henekeni group” may generally denote the presence of approxi- mately Miocene strata. Of the nine species and subspecies of the related Cy- praeidae belonging to this group in the Western Hemisphere, all but one are of Miocene occurrence, and the authors of this one exception, Cypraea cayapa Pilsbry and Olsson (1941), state in describing their species from the Pliocene of Ecuador that it possibly belongs to “an older fossiliferous series.” The extinct species of the Western Hemisphere related to the two new Colombian species appear to be: Cypraea almirantensis Olsson (1922) from Water Cay, Panama, Gatun Stage, middle Miocene; Cypraca angustirima Spieker (1922) from the lower Zorritos, Quebrada Zapotal, Peru, middle Miocene; Cypraca henekem Sowerby (1850) from Santo Domingo, middle Miocene; Cypraea henekeni potreronits Ingram (1939) from Rio Amina near Potrero, Provincia de Santiago, Santo Domingo, Gurabo formation, middle Miocene; Cypraea noueli Maury (1917) from Cercado de Mao, Santo Domingo, middle Miocene ; and Cypraea henekeni amandusi Hertlein and Jordan (1927) from San Igna- cio Arroyo, southwest of San Ignacio, Lower California, Isidro formation, Vout. XXVI] INGRAM: NEW FOSSIL CYPRAEIDAE 131 middle Miocene. Of these species, C. almurantensis Olsson is unusually elon- gate as the holotype figure indicates, and does not have the typical shape of the other species in the C. henekent group. BIBLIOGRAPHY. ANDERSON, FRANK MARION 1929. Marine Miocene and Related Deposits of North Colombia. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, 18 (4): 73-213, pls. 8-23. Dati, WILLIAM HEALEY 1890. Contributions to the Tertiary Fauna of Florida, with especial reference to the Miocene Silex-Beds of Tampa and the Pliocene Beds of the Caloosahatchie River. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci., Philadelphia, 3 (1): 1-200, pls. 1-12. 1900. Contributions to the Tertiary Fauna of Florida, with especial reference to the Miocene Silex-Beds of Tampa and the Pliocne Beds of the Caloosahatchie River. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci., Philadelphia, 3 (5): 949-1218, pls. 36-47. 1915. A Monograph of the Molluscan Fauna of the Orthaulax Pugnax Zone of the Oligocene of Tampa, Florida. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 90: 84-85, pl. 3. GARDNER, JULIA 1947. The Molluscan Fauna of the Alum Bluff Group of Florida. U.S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 142-H, pp. 493-656, pls. 52-62. HERTLEIN, LEO GEorRGE, and Eric KNIGHT JORDAN 1927. Paleontology of the Miocene of Lower California. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, 16 (19): 605-647, pls. 17-21. INGRAM, WILLIAM Marcus 1939. New Fossil Cypraeidae from the Miocene of the Dominican Republic and Panama, with a survey of the Miocene Species of the Dominican Republic. Bulls. Amer. Paleo., 24 (85): 1-14, pl. 1. 1942. Type Fossil Cypraeidae of North America. Bulls. Amer. Paleo., 27 (104): 1-32, pls. 1-4. 1947. Fossil and Recent Cypraeidae of the Western Regions of the Americas. Bull. Amer. Paleo., 31 (120): 1-82 (41-124), pls. 1-3 (5-7). MANSFIELD, WENDELL CLAY 1931. Some Tertiary Mollusks from Southern Florida. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 79 (2887) : 1-12, pls. 1-4. Maury, CARLOTTA JOAQUINA 1917. Santo Domingo Type Sections and Fossils. Bulls. Amer. Paleo., 5 (29): 1-251, pls. 3-39. Otsson, AXEL ADOLPH 1922. The Miocene of Northern Costa Rica with Notes on Its General Stratigraphic Relations. Bulls. Amer. Paleo., 9 (39): 1-167, pls. 1-15. Pitspry, Henry A., and A. A. OLsson 1941. A Pliocene Fauna from Western Ecuador. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 93: 1-79, pls. 1-19. SOWERBY, GEORGE BRETTINGHAM 1850. Descriptions of New Species of Fossil Shells found by J. S. Heniker, Esq. Quart. Jour. Geol, Soc. London, 6: 44-53, pls. 9-10, 132 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES PEAT EZ Fics. l-2.—Cypracu hertleint Ingram, new species. Length, 40 mm., breadth, 29.50 mm., height, 22.50 mm. Holotype, No. 8044, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll, from Loc. 578 (C.A.S.), marl bed about 20 feet above the water level, on the left bank of the Apalachicola River, about 34 miles above Bristow, at Alum Bluff on Apalachicola River, Calhoun County, Florida; lower Miocene. P. 125. Fics. 3-4—Cypraca alumensis Ingram, new species. Length, 28.50 mim., breadth, 20.50 mm., height, 14.50 mm. Holotype, No. 8043, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loe. 578 (C.A.S.), marl bed about 20 feet above the water level, on the left bank of Apalachicola River, about 314 miles above Bristow, at Alum Bluff on Apalachicola River, Calhoun County, Florida; lower Miocene. P. 127. Fics. 5, 7—Cypraea andersoni Ingram. Length, 60 mm., breadth, 44 mm., height, 32 mm. Holotype, No. 8042, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 267B (C.A.S.), Tubera Hill at west base of Tubera Mountain, in the lower part of the Tubera group, 1 mile west of Tubera, Colombia; middle Miocene. P. 129. Fics. 6, 8—Cypraea apalachicolae Ingram, new: species. Length, 48 mm., breadth, 37 mm., height, 28 mm. Holotype, No. 8045, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 578 (C.A.S.), marl bed about 20 feet above the water level, on the left bank of Apa- lachicola River, about 344 miles above Bristow, at Alum Bluff on Apalachicola River, Calhoun County, Florida; lower Mioicene. P. 126. Fics. 9, 12.—Cypruca tuberae Ingram. Length, 64 mm., breadth, 47.50 mm., height, 35mm. Holotype, No. 8041, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 267B (C.A.S.), Tubera Hill at west base of Tubera Mountain, in the lower part of the Tubera group, 1 mile west of Tubera, Colombia; middle Miocene. P. 129. Fics. 10, 11—Cypraea darwini Ingram, new species. Length, 26 mm., breadth, 16 mm., height, 13.50 mm. Holotype, No. 8046, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 27250 (C.A.S.), old beach deposit along beach, probably 5 feet thick, bay on northwest part of island on west side, South Seymour Island, Galapagos Islands, Subfossil. P. 144. [INGRAM] PLATE 2 PROC. CALIF. ACAD. SCI., 4TH SERIES, VOL. XXVI, NO. 6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 7, pp. 135-145 June 28, 1948 THE CYPRAEID FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS* BY WILLIAM MARCUS INGRAM Mills College, California N ATTEMPT is here made to list the entire Cypraeid fauna of the Gala- pagos Islands. No writer who has worked with the Mollusca of these islands has yet included all the Cypraeidae. Stearns (1893) listed Cypraea exanthema Linnaeus var. (= Cypraea cervinetta Kiener) from James and Indefatigable Islands; Cypraea migropunctata Gray from James, Hood, and Indefatigable Islands ; and Cypraea albuginosa Gray from James Island. Tom- lin (1927) listed Cypraea nigropunctata Gray from Charles and Narborough Islands. Wimmer (1880) lists Cypraea exanthema Linnaeus [Cypraea cer- vinetta Kiener| from the Galapagos Islands ;+ Cypraea albuginosa Gray from Charles Island; and Cypraea nigropunctata Gray from Hood and Bindloe Is- lands. Hertlein (1937) lists Cypraea moneta Linnaeus from the Galapagos Islands.t Pilsbry and Vanatta (1902) listed Cypraea exanthema cervinetta Kiener [Cypraea cervinetta Kiener] from Tagus Cove, Albemarle Island, and from Narborough Island; and Cypraea nigropunctata Gray from Point Chris- topher, Albemarle, and from Narborough Islands. Fossil records have been re- ported by Hertlein and Strong (1939) who list Cypraea nigropunctata Gray from late Pleistocene of James Bay, James (San Salvador) Island, from the late Pleistocene of South Seymour Island, and from the late Pleistocene or as a subfossil from Tagus Cove, Albemarle (Isabella) Island; and by Dall and Ochsner (1928) who reported a Cypraea (young) aff. cervinetta Kiener from the Phocene of Seymour Island, and Cypraea albuginosa Gray from the Pleis- tocene of Albemarle Island. The writer has examined this latter specimen, * Manuscript received October 19, 1944. + No specific locality within the Galapagos Islands was indicated. 15) 136 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. identified by Dall and Ochsner (1928) as C. albuginosa Gray, and has found it to be unmistakably a mature individual of Cypraca nigropunctata Gray. Seven living and one new fossil species represent the complete Cypraeid fauna of the Galapagos Islands as reported today. The living species are: Cypraeca moneta Linnaeus, Cypraca isabella mexicana Stearns, Cypraea ara- bicula Lamarck, Cypraea cervinetta Kiener, Cypraea nigropunctata Gray, Cy- praea albuginosa Gray, and Pustularia pustulata (Lamarck). A new fossil species is herein described as Cypraea darwini. Collections indicate that only one species, Cypraca nigropunctata Gray, is really common in the waters about the Galapagos Islands. The material examined shows that the other species are relatively rare. In the course of compiling data for this paper, 465 speci- _mens were examined. . The Cypraeid fauna of the Galapagos Islands is typically allied to that of the coastal waters of the West Coast of the Americas. Hertlein and Strong (1939) pointed out that the Galapagos Islands lie about 600 miles west of Ecuador, and that the cool Humboldt current sweeping up the coast of Peru serves to make the shore climate of the Islands unusually cool even though they lie on the equator. The number of western American Cypraeidae found in the Galapagos Islands indicates that these temperate zone species can adapt themselves to the shore water conditions about these islands, for of the nine typical West Coast species all but three, Cypraca spadicea Swainson, Cypraea anettae Dall, and Cypraca robertsi Hidalgo, are found in the Galapagos Islands. Available data indicate that the migration from West Coast waters of at least one species, Cypraca cervinetta Kiener, began in the Pliocene, and that of C. migropunctata Gray began in the Pleistocene. The single example of migration from the Indo-Pacific to this island group is Cypraea moneta Linnaeus. Clipperton Island, about 670 miles southwest of Acapulco, Mexico, is approximately 10 degrees north of the equator, and possesses a greater number of Indo-Pacific and Polynesian species of Cyprae- idae than the Galapagos, although both are approximately the same distance from the coasts of the Americas. In contrast with the one Indo-Pacific species in the Galapagos, it is interesting to note that Hertlein (1937) has reported five tropical Pacific Cypraeidae from Clipperton Island: Cypraea gillei Jous- seaume (C. imtermedia Gray), Cypraca isabella Linnaeus, Cypraea moneta Linnaeus, Cypraea scurra Chemnitz, and Cypraca teres Gmelin. It is possible that any great number of Indo-Pacific or tropical Pacific Cypraeidae is pre- vented from becoming established in the Galapagos Islands by the relative cool- ness of the sea and lack of coral reef formation. | Because of the importance of the Galapagos Islands as one of the frontiers of western American and tropical Pacific Cypraeidae, measurements are given of the specimens on which this study is based, to permit ready comparison by others working on these species. Also included as a comparative aid are the mainland records of localities of the species listed from the Galapagos. The writer wishes. to thank Dr. G. Dallas Hanna and Dr. Leo George Von. XXVI] INGRAM: CYPRAEID FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS 137 Hertlein of the California Academy of Sciences for allowing him to study the collection of Galapagos Island Cypraeidae upon which this paper is based. Ap- preciation is expressed to the following individuals who permitted the writer to examine Cypraeid records from the West Coast of .the Americas: Dr. Paul Bartsch and Dr. Harald Rehder, United States National Museum; Dr. Henry A. Pilsbry, The Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia; Mr. Wil- liam J. Clench, Harvard University ; and the late Dr. Bruce L. Clark, Univer- sity of California. SPECIES LIST Cypraea albuginosa Gray Galapagos Islands records : James Island (4 specimens: 3 beach, 1 living). Length 27 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 23 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 22 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 20 mm.; breadth 11 mm.; height 9 mm. Hood Island (2 specimens: 1 beach, 1 living). Length 28 mm.; breadth 18 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 32 mm.; breadth 20 mm.; height 15 mm. Albemarle Island, Banks Bay (1 specimen, beach). Leneth 27 mm.; breadth 16.50 mm.; height 13 mm. The 32 mm.—long Hood Island individual is larger than any of the numer- ous specimens that the writer has examined from the coastal waters of the Americas. Mainland records* United States National Museum: La Paz, Cape San Lucas, Lower Cali- fornia; southwest side of Ceralbo Island (‘“Ceralleo” Island), and San José Island, Gulf of California; Tres Marias Islands; Mazatlan, Mex- ico; Panama. California Academy of Sciences: Maria Madre Island, Tres Marias, Mex ico; Bay of Panama, Panama. Harvard University: Cape San Lucas, Lower California. University of California: Mazatlan, San Pedro, northwest of Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico; Marquer Bay, Carmen Island, Gulf of California. * The distribution records listed here were selected by the writer as being authentic; not all records were taken when a question of authenticity arose. Only specific localities were used. Additional records have no doubt been added to the collections since the writer’s visits from 1937 to 1942. Too, it is likely that some records were inadvertently overlooked under the pressure of time; an indication of the true range is indicated never theless. 138 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. Cypraea arabicula Lamarck Galapagos Islands records: Hood Island (2 specimens: 1 beach, 1 living) Length 29 mm.; breadth 20 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 18 mm.; height 13 mm. Indefatigable Islands (1 specimen, beach) Length 23 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. The Indefatigable Island record is that of an individual far below the mean size of the species. It is notably elongate in shape. Mainland records: United States National Museum: Mazatlan, Acapulco, and Manzanillo, Mexico ; Cape San Lucas, Lower California ; southwest side of Ceralbo (“Ceralvo”) Island, San José Island, Concepcion Bay, Lower Califor- nia; Corinto, Nicaragua; Punta Dominical, Costa Rica; Panama. California Academy of Sciences: Mazatlan, Tenacatita Bay, Tangola-Tan- gola Bay, Tres Marias Islands, Mexico; Corinto, Nicaragua; Bat Island, Costa Rica; Bahia Honda, Taboga Island, Changame Island, Venado Island, Panama. University of California: Mazatlan, Mexico; (recent; fossil) San Pedro Bay, northwest of Guaymas, Mexico. Cypraea cervinetta Kiener Galapagos Islands records: Albemarle Island (2 specimens, beach) Length 71 mm.; breadth 33 mm.; height 25 mm. Length 73 mm.; breadth 38 mm.; height 29 mm. Albemarle Island, Tagus Cove (3 specimens, beach) Length 89 mm.; breadth 42 mm.; height 33 mm. Length 82 mm.; breadth 39 mm.; height 29 mm. Length 81 mm.; breadth 41 mm.; height 31 mm. Hood Island (1 specimen, living) Length 83 mm.; breadth 39 mm.; height 28 mm. James Island (1 specimen, living; in tide pool) Length 83 mm.; breadth 41 mm.; height 28 mm. Indefatigable Island, Academy Bay (2 specimens, living ) Length 78 mm.; breadth 39 mm.; height 29 mm. Length 78 mm.; breadth 38 mm.; height 29 mm. Indefatigable Island (2 specimens, living) Length 65 mm.; breadth 31 mm.; height 23 mm. Length 72 mm.; breadth 34 mm.; height 26 mm. Charles Island (1 specimen, beach) Length 84 mm.; breadth 41 mm.; height 32 mm. Vor. XXVI] INGRAM: CYPRAEID FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS 139 The tide pool record from James Island indicates one of several likely habitats for this species. All individuals are typical C. cervinetta Kiener. The reports of C. exanthema Linnaeus |= C. zebra Linnaeus] from the Galapagos Islands have been based on faulty identification, for this species is confined in its distribution to the Atlantic side of Central America. A closely related species, Cypraea cervus Linnaeus, is also found on the Atlantic side of Central America. A likely ancestral type from which these closely related species descended is the extinct Miocene species, Cypraea trinitatensis Mansfield, from Trinidad. Probably C. cervinetta Kiener, or an ancestral type, migrated through Central America to the Pacific, and then was isolated from its parental stock with the closure of the migrational pathway sometime in the Miocene. The two living East Coast species, Cypraea sebra Linnaeus and Cypraea cer- vus Linnaeus, appear to have remained closer to their center of origin. Mainland records : United States National Museum: Margarita Bay, La Paz, and Cape San Lucas, Lower California; Guaymas, Mazatlan, and Mendia (Sinaloa), Mexico; Panama; Manta, Ecuador; Payta (Paita), Peru. California Academy of Sciences: Isabel Island,, Mexico; Corinto, Nica- ragua; Taboga Island, near Panama City, Vique Point, Panama. University of California: Mazatlan, Mexico; Panama; Cardalitos, Peru. Harvard University: Mazatlan, Mexico; Panama City, Pearl Island, and Palo Seco, Panama. Cypraea isabella mexicana Stearns Galapagos Islands records: Hood Island (4 specimens, beach) Length 44.50 mm.; breadth 23 mm.; height 19 mm. Length 32 mm.; breadth 16 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 29 mm.; breadth 14.50 mm.; height 12 mm. Height 29 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 12 mm. Abemarle Island, north of Tagus Cove on beach (2 specimens, beach) Length 47 mm.; breadth 27 mm.; height 22 mm. Length 46 mm.; breadth 28 mm.; height 24 mm. The two Albemarle Island individuals are more inflated than is the typical Cypraea isabella mexicana Stearns; too, both specimens lack a well-defined fossula. The teeth characteristic of the fossula in C. isabella Linnaeus and in the subspecies mexicana Stearns are entirely absent in one individual, and have been reduced in the other to extremely obscure nodules. If these two individuals had been examined and measured independently of a lot of 33 specimens from Clipperton Island, they might have been considered as repre- senting a new species or subspecies. However, certain intergradations exhib- ited by the series from Clipperton Island seem to indicate that they are only aberrant individuals. 140 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Mainland records: United States National Museum: Cape San Lucas, Lower California; Clarion Island, Tres Marias, Mexico. California Academy of Sciences: Socorro Island, Revillagigedo Islands, Tres Marias Islands, Mexico. Cypraea moneta [Linnaeus Galapagos Islands records: Hood Island (6 specimens, beach) Length 30 mm.; breadth 23 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 22 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 20 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 11 mm. In all specimens the outer layer of shell is eroded from the dorsum, making it impossible to distinguish its original color. The lateral margins, sides, and bases are white. Two specimens have been shellacked, giving a color distor- tion of yellow-orange over the sides, when in reality the shell sides are white. The writer has seen individuals similar to these from the Marquesas and Tuamotu Islands; no specimens resemble the type of C. moneta Linnaeus found in the Hawaiian Islands. No authentic records are available from the mainland of the Americas. Hertlein (1937) has reported this Indo-Pacific species from Cocos Island off the coast of South America, and closer to the mainland than this Galapagos Island record, a record also included by him. Cypraea nigropunctata Gray Galapagos Islands records : Indefatigable Island (11 specimens: 5 living, 6 heach) Length 34 mm.; breadth 19.50 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 16.50 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 16 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 11.50 mm. Length 26.50 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 10.50 mm. Length 26.50 mm.; breadth 14.50 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. Charles Island, Post Office Bay (1 specimen, beach) Length 18 mm.; breadth 9 mm.; height 7 mm. Vor. XXVIJ INGRAM: CYPRAEID FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS [4] South Seymour Island (4 specimens, beach ) Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 13.50 mim, Length 27 mm.; breadth 16 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 13 mm. ; height 10 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 12.50 mm.; height 10 nun. Albemarle Island (10 specimens: 9 beach, 1 living) Length 30 mm.; breadth 16 mm.; height 12 min. Length 26 mm.; breadth 14 mm. ; height 11 mm. Length 26 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 25.50 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 22 mm.; breadth 12 mm. ; height 9 mm. Length 20 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 8 mm. Length 19 mm.; breadth 11 mm.; height 8 mm. Albemarle Island, Tagus Cove (4 specimens, beach) Length 27 mm.; breadth 15.50 mm. ; height 12.50 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 14.50 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 18 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 8 mm, Albemarle Island, Banks Bay (25 specimens, beach) * Length 37 mm.; breadth 20 mm. ; height 17 mm. Length 36: mm.; breadth 21 mm.; height 17 mm. Length 33 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 33 mm.; breadth 18 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 33 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 32 mm.; breadth 18 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 13 mim. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 16 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 26 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 11 mm, Length 25 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 23 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10° mim. * Not all of the available specimens from the following localities were measured: Hood Island, 271 specimens; James Island, 56 specimens; Banks Bay, Albemarle Island, 71 specimens. Series were selected to illustrate the gradual reduction in size from the largest to the smallest. If intermediate lengths were not available to a collector, and only extreme sizes were studied, one might be led to believe that the smallest and largest were separate subspecies. 142 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47 sEr. Length 21 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 21 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 9 mm. Length 20 mm.; breadth 11 m.m.; height 8 mm. Length 17 mm.; breadth 9 mm.; height 7 mm. Hood Island (21 specimens, beach ) Length 39 mm.; breadth 22 mm.; height 17 mm. Length 35 mm.; breadth 21 mm.; height 16 mm. Length 34 mm.; breadth 20 mm.; height 17 mm. Length 33 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 32 mm.; breadth 18 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 31 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 18 mm.; height 15 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 29 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12.50 mm. Length 26 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 13 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 23 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 22 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 21 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 20 mm.; breadth 11 mm.; height 9 mm. Length 19 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 8 mm. Length 18 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 9 mm. Length 17 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 8 mm. James Island (11 specimens, beach) Length 33 mm.; breadth 19 mm.; height 16 mm. Length 28 mm.; breadth 17 mm.; height 14 mm. Length 27 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 26 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 14 mm.; height 12 mm. Length 24 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 23 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 22 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 21 mm.; breadth 13 mm.; height 10 mm. Length 19 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 8 mm. Length 18 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 8 mm. This species shows an extremely wide variation in size of its adult indi- viduals, ranging from 17 mm. to 39 mm. in length. Throughout its range the greatest abundance in individuals seems to be reached in the Galapagos Islands. This species may be considered one of the less common of the Cypraeidae of the world, and one with quite a restricted distribution. The series of bullae of this rare species warrants description, since they are undescribed, and show a remarkable early development of the anterior columellar teeth, uncommon in comparable stages in other Cypraeidae. Five early bulla stages are present in the collections; none is mature enough to Vor. XXVIJ INGRAM: CYPRAEID FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS 143 have the outer lip in-turned. These five stages will be numbered here from youngest to oldest, bullae 1 to 5. Bulla 1: This growth stage is represented by 3 specimens of from 6 mm. long by 3 mm. wide; 6.50 mm. long by 3.50 mm. wide, and 5 mm. long by 3 mm. wide. The color is not preserved in two of these; bleaching turns the bulla ivory-white. The dorsum is brown. Seven color bands are faintly visible dorsally on the outer lip; these are colored in an anterior-posterior direction ; brown, white, brown, white, brown, white, brown. The brown spire sutures are colored by a narrow white line. The anterior one-half of the columella is white ; the posterior one-half brown. Bulla 2: Two beach specimens, one fresh and one faded, represent this stage. They are 7 mm. long by 4 mm. wide; 7.50 mm. long by 4 mm. wide. Eight color zones are present; from anterior to posterior they are the same as those of bulla 1, with an addition of a posterior white zone mottled with brown. The spire is brown with the suture white. The columella coloring is as in bulla 1. Bulla 3: Two specimens, 11.50 by 4 mm. wide and 10 mm. long by 5 mm. wide, represent this stage. The eight color zones of bulla 2 persist, but with an addition of a yellowish-tinged white area over the anterior canal. The body whorl begins to become inflated, making the spire less conspicuous. The anterior one-half of the columella is white and the posterior one-half brown. Bulla 4: One specimen, 17 mm. long by 8 mm. wide, represents this stage. Eleven color zones are present on the dorsum; in an anterior-posterior direc- tion they are: brown, white, brown, white, brown, white, brown, white, brown, brown, white mottled with brown. The anterior half of the columella is white, while the posterior one-half is banded with brown. The spire con- tinues to be obscured by the inflating body whorl. Bulla 5: This stage is represented by one specimen, 19.25 mm. long by 9 mm. wide. The eleven color zones as present in bulla 4 persist, and the columella is colored the same. A terminal ridge of the anterior columellar region has formed, and 3 anterior columellar teeth have developed on the anterior one-third of the columella. The spire is as in bulla 4. Mainland records: United States National Museum: Manta, Ecuador; Parinas (Punta Pa- TMmas), ert, Pustularia pustulata (Lamarck) Galapagos Islands records: James Island (3 specimens, beach) Length 24 mm.; breadth 15 mm.; height 11 mm. Length 16 mm.; breadth 12 mm.; height 6 mm. Length 15 mm.; breadth 10 mm.; height 6 mm. The 16 mm. specimen is remarkably oval in proportion to its length. The I44 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [| Proc. dri ser. 24 mm. individual is larger than most specimens that the writer has examined from mainland localities. Mainland records: Harvard University: Mazatlan, Mexico. University of California: Mazatlan, Mexico; west coast of Panama. California Academy of Sciences: San Marcos Island, Gulf of California, Mexico; Bay of Panama, Panama. Also various localities from the Gulf of California to the Bay of Panama. United States National Museum: La Paz, southwest side of Ceralbo Is- land, Cape Pulmo, Cape San Lucas, Lower California; near Modesto, Mazatlan, Tres Marias Islands, Acapulco, Mexico; Taboga Island, Panama. Cypraea darwini Ingram, new species Plate 2, figures 10, 11 (see p. 132) Shell elongate-ovate; deep umbilicus present over posterior canal; spire completely obscured; well-defined lateral margin over posterior canal, and over posterior one-fourth of shell; well-defined lateral margin over both sides of anterior one-third of shell; dorsally, shelf absent over anterior canal ; outer- lip teeth deeply incised anteriorly, with incisures shallow posteriorly ; anterior one-third of outer-lip teeth, after first two which are short, are approximately 2 mm. in length, extending free from the lip and directed into the interior of the shell; outer-lip teeth confined to the aperture edge, not extending over the base; fossula absent; anterior four columellar teeth approximately 3 mm. in length and prominent; remainder of these teeth from 1 mm. to 1.50 mm. in length; anterior four columellar teeth slant diagonally toward the outer lip in shell interior; terminal ridge heavy, directed obliquely into aperture ; colu- nella lip of anterior canal narrow, very slightly produced; outer lip of ante- rior canal not produced, broadly rounded; anterior canal bends gradually to the left; posterior canal bends strongly to the left; posterior canal lips ap- proximately equal; posterior maximum width of aperture is 2.50 mm.; ante- rior maximum width of aperture is 3 mm. The type measures: length, 26 mm. ; breadth, 16 mm.; height, 13.50 mm. Holotype, No. 8046, Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 27250 (C.A.S.), old beach deposit probably 5 feet thick, along beach of bay on northwest part of island on west side, South Seymour Island, Galapagos Islands; L. G. Hertlein, collector. Subfossil. Discussion: From the dorsal side, anteriorly the shell recalls C. albugi- nosa Gray, while posteriorly the shell recalls C. nigropunctata Gray. The columellar teeth and the anterior outer-lip teeth are extremely different from any of the Cypraeidae occurring in the Galapagos Islands. The shell is intact and is crusted with a hard deposit, possibly limestone. Vor. XXVI] INGRAM: CYPRAEID FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS 145 Only one specimen was collected by Dr. Hertlein; it is not aberrant, for the specific characteristics are well formed. It seems quite likely that others will be found with further exploration, and it may well be that living individ- uals of this species will be found when an attempt is made to collect only living, and not beach, shells from these islands. The Cypraeidae collection discussed here indicates either that the greater part of collecting was confined to the beaches, or that the habitat in which the Cypraeidae live in the Galapa- gos Islands is extremely secluded. This new species is named for Charles Darwin. Key TO THE LIVING CYPRAEIDAE OF THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS A. Dorsum not noduled a) Fossula absent bye Snell ocellated on) dorsum. 8.5 6.) bs, eee sae ole i ee ieee Sie eheieenee albuginosa bb) Shell not ocellated on dorsum c) Shell with transverse bands under outer layer............. nigropunctata cee shell, without transverse: bands). .yojam oct cae se rine isle eres als 3 moneta aa) Fossula present d) Teeth extending over base, marked with brown.................-- cervinetta dd) Teeth not extending over base, not marked with brown e) Canals covered with orange blotches superimposed with black isabella mexicana ee) Canals not covered with orange blotches and not superimposed with black arabicula 'B, [Dyovesuitnow Savereliileal 5 yo 8 aepercieercte mics cicero aare iis sitar Bese iaiag seus Let DUES CULOLG BIBLIOGRAPHY DaLL, WILLIAM HEALEY, AND WASHINGTON HENRY OCHSNER 1928. Tertiary and Pleistocene Mollusca from the Galapagos Islands. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, 17 (4): 89-139, pls. 1-7. HERTLEIN, LEO GEORGE 1937. A note on some species of marine mollusks occurring in both Polynesia and the Western Americas. Proc. Amer. Philosoph. Soc., 78 (2): 303-312, 1 pl. HERTLEIN, LEO GEORGE, AND A. M. STRONG 1939. Marine Pleistocene Mollusks from the Galapagos Islands. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, 23 (24): 367-380, pl. 32. Pitspry, Henry A., AND EpwarpD C. VANATTA 1902. Papers from the Hopkins Stanford Galapagos Expedition, 1898-1899. XIII. Marine Mollusca. Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., 4: 549-560, pl. 35. STEARNS, ROBERT EDWARDS CARTER 1893. Report on the Mollusk-fauna of the Galapagos Islands with descriptions of new species. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 16 (942): 353-450, pls. 51-52. Tomtin, J. R. LEB. 1927. The Mollusca of the “St. George” Expedition. Jour. Conch., 18 (6): 153-170. WIMMER, AUGUST 1880. Zur Conchylien-Fauna der Galapagos Inseln. Sitzungsber. k. Akad. d. Wis- senschaften, Math.-Naturwiss. Kl. Wien., 80 (5): 465-514. es wilt 2 : | ine ‘sel oe. ye \ a —T ) ' Ki o = i ~." r ‘ ii Mm Ar ; V U4 td reve cm * - ( fk ad Haley eee Bee > 4 yh d'd,* Z ™_ a = ’ : : se 4 a iat rey ‘ ay weuat ihe 7 . he hh ad ’ *y 5 A wi 2, el i. F ve 4 i ' is — ‘ 77 f a4 f b —— eae. ne i ; { ' 4 od 7 Vy x \ ily J es ' P ianyet = ely wath ie Ee ae ; Tey a). aMe ‘ abe, ; he j 4 ’ . 4 be ‘ VP ian ay 7 7 oy y . a ‘ = ' 7 \ PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 8, pp. 147-245, pls. 3, 4, 4 text figures Dec. 15, 1948 THE MARINE MOLLUSKS AND BRACHIOPODS OF MONTEREY BAY, CALIFORNIA, AND VICINITY BY ALLYN G. SMITH Research Associate, Department of Paleontology California Academy of Sciences AND MACKENZIE GORDON, JR. Palo Alto, California COLEBCTING ACTIVITIES The first historical record of shell collecting in the Monterey region so far discovered is contained in Father Pefia’s account of the Perez expedition in the Santiago in 1774. Apparently shells from Monterey were in demand by the Indians of the northwest coast for inlay work and other purposes and explorers of that day, knowing this, supplied themselves with abalones and other Monterey shells for trade with them. The journal of Manuel Quimper of 1790 mentions shells traded to the Indians and Pantoja’s account of the Eliza expedition in 1791 mentioned “Monterey shells” as being traded at vari- ous places along the coast. Caamafio’s journal (1792) gives the clue that the shells most desired were black abalones. Concerning the villages on Graham Island, he writes: The Indians wanted to exchange them (furs) for clothing, or shells, but the latter they desired to have of as green a color as those that some wore in great numbers hanging at their ears. We were surprised to see that several had those of a sort that is found only at Monterey, and even more surprised when they told us that we ought to arrange that in Spain the meat be not [ 147 ] 148 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H Ser. extracted by heating the shells, as this process damaged the enamel, but that it should be done with a knife. I enquired who had taught them this, or had given them the Monterey shells, but either they did not catch my meaning, or I mis- understood their reply. These facts and others from an interesting account by R. F. Heizer (1940) indicate that shell collecting at Monterey goes back at least one hundred and seventy years, perhaps even further. For conchologists, the region of Monterey Bay has been a favorite col- lecting ground for more than a hundred years. Some of the characteristic shells of Monterey appear to have reached European collections soon after the beginning of the nineteenth century, probably through the trade then being carried on with Pacific Coast ports, especially in hides. By this means the following shells, well known for their beauty and for their abundance at Monterey, could easily have been and perhaps were actually obtained there: Black Abalone, Haliotis cracherodti (Leach )—Zoological Miscellany, 1817. Red Abalone, Haliotis rufescens (Swainson)—Bligh Catalogue, 1822. Giant Key-Hole Limpet, Megathura crenulata (Sowerby )—Tankerville Catalogue, 1825. California Olive-Shell, Olivella biplicata (Sowerby )—Tankerville Cata- logue, 1825. California Coffee-Bean Shell, Trivia californiana (Gray )—Zoological Journal, 1828. It is not unlikely, also, that La Pérouse and Vancouver, both of whom visited Monterey in the course of their explorations, the former about 1787 and the latter in 1795, may have obtained some of the species described by early conchologists. Both of these expeditions were accompanied by naturalists. Humboldt and Bonpland, though coming no nearer than Acapulco, obtained there in 1804 one species that seems exclusively Californian, the red abalone, probably brought down by some coastal ship. It does not seem that Captain Beechey’s exploration, from 1825 to 1828, obtained any shells at Monterey although many species common there were collected elsewhere. The first authentic collections there were those of Professor Nuttall, in 1835, who discovered 70 of the more common land and sea-beach shells of California, of which 9 species were from Monterey, although some had al- ready heen described. About 1838 the Venus, with Captain Abel du Petit Thouars, visited Monterey and obtained two or three new species besides several of Nuttall’s. These were described by Deshayes and Valenciennes. The surveying ship Sulphur, Captain Belcher, with the eminent concholo- gist Hinds, explored the west coast of North America from 1838 to 1842 but collected nothing new at Monterey although 21 species were discovered else- Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 149 where in California. Reeve, in his monumental Conchologica Iconica, quoted “Fissurella Lincolni, Gray,” now known as Diodora aspera (Eschscholtz), from ‘‘Monterey, Belcher.” Another British surveying ship, the Pandora, Captain Kellett, followed much the same route in 1849 without taking anything new at Monterey. The same year Colonel Edward Jewett collected 45 new species in Cali- fornia, spending a week at Monterey, where he found two of them. Lieu- tenant Green, U.S.N., and Major Rich, U.S.A., also visited the Bay, where the latter found two out of his three new Californian species along with seven species that probably came from other localities. The botanist Hartweg was in Monterey in 1855 and found a new species of chiton. Some time prior to 1860, A. S. Taylor sent four new species from Monterey to the Smithsonian Institution. The records cited above are based on the reports to the British As- sociation for the Advancement of Science by Dr. P. P. Carpenter in 1856 and 1863 on the mollusks of the West Coast, as reviewed by Dr. J. G. Cooper, who concludes that in 1860 there were 277 species of shells known from California, of which 66 were reported from Monterey, 22 being discovered there for the first time by six collectors. In 1861, Dr. Cooper spent several weeks collecting on shore at Santa Cruz, Carmel, and Monterey, doing considerable dredging in Monterey Bay down to a depth of 40 fathoms and in Carmel Bay to 35 fathoms. He published a list of the shells collected, consisting of 272 species and subspecies of marine mollusks, and gave an interesting account of his work (Cooper, 1870a, 1870b). From Monterey only, Cooper found 197 species “excluding manifest varieties,” which, with 50 others he collected at Santa Cruz only, brought the total collected in the Bay to 247. During the next decade Cooper stated that collections made by Dall, Stearns, Newcomb, Canfield, and Harford brought the list of mollusks found to 316. In this period Cooper lived for a year at Santa Cruz and reported that he collected 107 species there during that time. While the results of the work of four of the collectors mentioned by Cooper remain only in the shells they collected, some of which are still preserved in the United States National Museum and occasionally in other collections, William H. Dall, one of the country’s foremost con- chologists, has left us an account of his work at Monterey in 1866. While acting as Chief of the Scientific Corps of the Western Union Telegraph Expedition to Alaska in 1865-66, he obtained a three-week leave in January of the latter year, which he spent at Monterey. He was unable to do any dredging and, with the help of Dr. C. A. Canfield of Monterey, spent the entire time shore collecting. The results of his work were covered briefly in a note in the Proceedings of the California Academy of Sciences in which he stated that he himself had collected in two weeks 150 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. no less than 219 species, including 23 that were new or not previously reported from the region. He remarked that this number, added to the 44 already found at Monterey, but not collected by him, gave 263 as the number of species then known to have been found there (Dall, 1866). Later, he wrote: “I prepared at that time a faunal catalogue of the shells of Monterey, with notes and habitats, and on such species as appeared to be undescribed” (Dall, 1871), but his manuscript was never published. The new species Dall discovered, 17 in number, were finally described in the American Journal of Conchology along with others collected mostly in Alaska while he was with the Telegraph Expedition (Dall: 1871). In the early 1890's Dr. Dall collected again at Monterey. While he published no special account of the results of his work then, he made the following interesting comment in a letter to Dr. H. A. Pilsbry, editor of The Nautilus : ‘Monterey as a collecting ground is already greatly injured, and will probably be nearly ruined before long, on account of the Hotel Del Monte, the new town of Pacific Grove, and the increased population of old Monterey, all the sewage of which is turned into the bay in front of the town. Beaches which formerly would afford several hundred species are now nearly bare, or offensive with stinking black mud. Old collectors wil! learn this with regret” (Dall, 1892). The next published record of shell collecting in Monterey Bay is in 1893, when Williard M. Wood (1893) spent two weeks there and re- ported taking 91 species and subspecies. His list is interesting as it gives the numbers of each species collected and contains some unusual records in the light of present day collecting there. Like Dall, he bemoaned the fact that “Monterey is no longer the famous collecting ground it used to be. The increasing population at and around Pacific Grove is driving away all the land shells. The deadly sewerage flowing from the various towns into Monterey Bay is killing the marine shells.” In the summer of 1897, Dr. Harold Heath of the Stanford Marine Station (now the Hopkins Marine Biological Laboratory) collected a series of invertebrates and fishes for the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, among which were a number of chitons. A list of 25 species and subspecies, including two new species, was published subse- quently by Dr. Henry A. Pilsbry (1898) of the Academy, representing the most complete account of the group at the time. In 1904, as part of a comprehensive plan for the study of marine biology by the United States Bureau of Fisheries, the steamer Albatross conducted dredging operations in Monterey Bay from May 10 to June 15. Hauls were made at a total of 128 collecting stations at depths vary- ing from a few fathoms to nearly 1100 fathoms, data on which are listed in the report of the Bureau of Fisheries for the year 1905. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MONTEREY BAY MOLLUSKS 151 In addition to investigations of purely scientific interest, the work of the vessel included the development of a number of fishing banks hitherto only locally known. . A number of banks and ledges in Monterey Bay, all good rockfish (rock cod) grounds, were developed and charted. Off Point Santa Cruz is a small area called Rock Oyster Bank; an extensive rocky ledge, called Black Point Reef, extends entirely across the harbor of Santa Cruz; off Sauquel Point is a ledge called Sauquel Reef. About midway between Sauquel Cove and the mouth of the Pajaro River, parallel to the shore and about a mile distant, is a long narrow reef called Rock Cod Ledge; and off the mouth of the Estero Grande is a small spot similarly named, In the vicinity of Point Pinos are four fishing grounds much frequented by the boats from Monterey. Seventy Fathom Bank, or Coopers Rock, lies about 3.5 miles west of the Point; Italian Ledge, a smaller bank, is about the same distance north of the Point; Portuguese Ledge, still smaller, lies about 3 miles north-north- east of Point Pinos; and Humpback Rock, a tiny spot, is about 2 miles east of it. The above quotation from the Report is of interest because the vicinity of localities good for fishing are, in our experience, usually also inhabited by a larger fauna than is to be found elsewhere, and are gen- erally good places to dredge for shells and other marine life. The work of the Albatross contributed vastly to our knowledge of the mollusks of the Bay, especially the deep-water species living in 100 to 1000 fathoms, which are impossible to obtain without special gear and equipment of considerable power. At least fifty species, about twenty-five of them new, were added to the list from the Bay based on a study of Albatross dredgings by Dall and Bartsch, who published their results from time to time in the Proceedings of the United States Na- tional Museum. Dr. S. S. Berry of Redlands, California, did considerable collecting in the vicinity of Monterey and Pacific Grove and made a series of dredge hauls, mostly in shallow water, over a six weeks’ period in 1906. His list, pub- lished later in The Nautilus (Berry: 1907 and 1908), is a valuable addi- tion to the mollusk-fauna of the Bay as it contains many records of species not previously reported. In addition, he added 14 new species and 2 new subspecies. Berry stated that he collected 318 species and varieties (including land and fresh-water as well as marine). In his account he quite properly calls particular attention to the extraordinary develop- ment of the chitons (26 species and 4 subspecies); of Epitonium (9 spe- cies) ; of the Pyramidellidae (18 species) ; and of the prominence of the limpets in the shore fauna, both in number of species (15) and of in- dividuals. The senior author began collecting in Monterey Bay and its environs in the summer of 1910 under the expert tutelage of Professor Josiah Keep, of Mills College, who for a number of years had come to Pacific Grove to deliver a series of talks on conchology in connection with the Chautauqua assemblies held there. His audiences consisted largely of local collectors, a scattering of scientists in other fields, and a number 152 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H Ser. of young people who were attracted perhaps not so much because of the subject and the enjoyable field trips, but more because of the man him- self and his unusual ability to infect all who came in contact with him with his seemingly inexhaustible store of knowledge and boundless en- thusiasm for the broad field of natural history, particularly in conchology. His shock of white hair, his ruddy complexion, and his booming laugh are well remembered by all who were fortunate enough to attend his classes during the period. In all probability he accomplished more in developing a knowledge and appreciation of the remarkable marine-shell fauna of Monterey Bay than any other individual. His books on West Coast shells are full of references to the shells of the region. Less well known, however, is the list he printed privately for his later Chautauqua classes containing 97 of the commoner species of the Bay (Keep, 1910). One of the molluscan groups for which Monterey Bay is a center consists of the sea-slugs, or nudibranchs, of which there are many species. Cooper listed only 4 genera and 4 species in 1871, but in 1906 Dr. F. M. MacFarland of Stanford University increased this to 16 genera and 20 species in a paper devoted to an account of these beautiful animals (MacFarland, 1906). The next scientific paper of any extensiveness on the mollusk-fauna of the Monterey region is a study by G. E. McGinitie (1935) on the ecological aspects of Elkhorn Slough in which a careful analysis was made, among other biological groups, of the marine shells of this locality. This completes the principal written records to the present date. The junior author began collecting in the Bay in 1920, and has continued his work there ever since. More concentrated effort was made in 1932 while stationed at the Hopkins Marine Biological Laboratory. Many others have collected extensively in the Bay and although the re- sults of their work is unpublished they have added many new records of species as a result of careful work over many years. While it is impracticable to name them all, the efforts of the late Mrs. Charles S. Fackenthall, Mrs. David Muir, M. J. Becker, Miss Isabel Thayer, and Mrs. Bernard Freeman, all of Pacific Grove, among the older collectors are especially worthy of mention. The contemporary collectors who have done considerable work in Monterey Bay include Mr. Andrew Sorensen and the Rev. Elwood B. Hunter of Pacific Grove, Mr. and Mrs. Emery P. Chace of Lomita, Mr. and Mrs. Harry Turver, and Tom and John Q. Burch of Los Angeles. While shore collecting is undoubtedly far from what it must have been in the days of Dall, Canfield, and Cooper, it is still a good collecting area if one knows where to go. Gone, however, are the windrows of shells from many of the favorite beaches, which have long since been cleaned of the better and rarer specimens by collectors and the frequent summer visitors who come for a day or a vacation at the seashore. No longer is it possible to collect two hundred species in two weeks, as Dall did in 1866. Even at ex- Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 153 tremely low tide the rocky shores are less productive, as many of the movable rocks have been overturned in the ever-increasing search for specimens of marine life. In recent years the more spectacular species, such as the red abalone, the owl limpet Lottia gigantea (Sowerby), the giant key-hole limpet Megathura crenulata (Sowerby), the red top-shell Astraea inaequalis (Mar- tyn), and the horn-mouth Purpura foliata (Martyn), to mention a few, have become increasingly scarcer. Shore areas where one is free to collect without restriction are much fewer. Prohibited spots now cover some of the best former collecting ground along the rocky coast. Among these is a two-mile stretch of coastline from Pacific Grove to Point Pinos, which has been wisely set aside by the city authorities as a marine-life refuge where collecting is prohibited. Another extends along the ocean front of the Monterey Peninsula, where access to the rocky shores is restricted by the private estates along the famous 17-Mile Drive. The Point Lobos area, now a State park, is another wild-life area closed to collecting. While there are still long stretches of rocky coast from Carmel to Point Sur and below that afford good collecting in favorable spots, there are a few good places in the more sheltered areas of Monterey and Carmel Bays that are unrestricted and where the conchologist can operate without special permission. Dredging is probably still about as good as formerly, although in shallow water near the end of Monterey Bay one is liable to find a foul bottom where cannery and other refuse have killed all the marine life that was once there in abundance. Off-shore kelp beds, a splendid harbor for top-shells (Calliostoma and Tegula), have disappeared from many areas off Pacific Grove and Del Monte Beach, where they were once thick. Carmel Bay, however, still has a heavy growth of kelp off shore. While restrictions and changed conditions place definite limitations on shell collecting in the Monterey region it is to be hoped that a closing of certain areas will result in a return of the finest species to the size and numbers of former years. Apparently, this is already proving to be true of the black abalone on the rock ledges of Point Lobos. BEY SIOGRAPHIC BPEATURES AND: MOLLUSK FAUNAS The area considered in this paper extends from Pigeon Point south to Point Sur, a distance of approximately fifty-five miles, airline. The shoreline distance, which would follow all the irregularities and indentations of the coast, is more than a hundred miles. Monterey Bay itself covers an area of about 130 square miles. In the comparatively small area under consideration, almost all of the better-known types of shore and submarine ecologic condi- tions common to the temperate West Coast are encountered. 154 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH Ser. The rocky open seacoast condition of the littoral zone is typified by con- glomerate and other resistant sedimentary rocks exposed in the vicinity of Point Lobos, a few miles south of Carmel, and by the porphyritic granite of the Monterey Peninsula between Pescadero Point and Point Pinos. Here, in tidepools, nestling in rock crevices, or clinging to various species of algae are found about one hundred species of marine mollusks, chiefly gastropods and chitons. The porphyritic granite that crops out at Carmelo Point and between Point Pinos and Monterey is partly sheltered from the open sea, which permits a coarse-grained granitic sand to collect in pockets among the kelp- covered rocks and boulders. The fauna in this habitat totals almost one hundred and eighty species of mollusks, including most of those found along the rocky coast together with a number of small gastropod species that nestle under boulders set in the sand and a few pelecypod species that live in the sand itself. Strata of soft Miocene shale crop out in the vicinity of Santa Cruz Point and other strata of Pliocene sandstone are exposed near Capitola. These rocks harbor a number of rock-boring pelecypods as well as other mollusks—a total of not quite eighty species. The open beach condition is represented by Carmel Beach, with its famed white sand, and by small sandy beaches between Cypress Point and Point Joe on the Monterey Peninsula. Only five species, all of them pelecypods, manage to thrive in these wave-swept stretches, though numerous mollusks inhabit the rocky points between them. From Monterey to Watsonville extends a long unbroken sandy beach, somewhat protected from the direct buffeting of the open sea. The sand of this beach varies in coarseness and patches of gravel are exposed locally, at low tide. About fifteen species of mollusks, most of them pelecypods, comprise the normal littoral fauna. The last of the various ecologic types of the littoral zone, the typical estu- arine condition, is encountered in Elkhorn Slough. Approximately thirty- five species of mollusks, the majority of them pelecypods, inhabit the fine sand and mud. Some live in interesting commensal relationships with prawns, worms, and other mud-flat denizens. The Slough is noted for the abundance of individuals of the species living in it. Intimately associated with the littoral fauna of the rocky coast, but con- stituting a separate sub-littoral faunal group is the giant kelp assemblage, which includes about one hundred and forty-five mollusks and one brachiopod. The habitat of these species centers around the giant kelp plants growing at depths of from one to five fathoms. Some of the mollusks cling to the kelp stems, others nestle in the protecting mazes of the holdfasts, and still others live in the coarse sand and on the boulders to which the holdfasts are attached. The bottom of the shallower part of the neritic zone of Monterey Bay, from five to forty fathoms in depth, consists of fine dark sand with locally Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 155 scattered fragments of shale or other rocks. From this type of bottom four species of brachiopods and about two hundred and twenty of mollusks, many of them gastropods, have been collected. Strata of Miocene shale form submarine reefs in eight to twelve fathoms off Del Monte, and at Humpback Rock in about forty fathoms off Pacific Grove. Other reefs in ten to fifteen fathoms off Watsonville, Soquel Point, and Santa Cruz are of Pliocene sandstone, some of it fossiliferous. Clinging to, boring into, and nestling among these rocks are about ninety-five species of mollusks, in addition to most of the sand-dwelling forms encountered around the fringes of the reefs. These are the most prolific collecting stations in the Bay, with almost three hundred species recorded from them. At depths of from thirty to one hundred and fifty fathoms the fine sand that is common in the shallower parts of the Bay grades into mud, and harbors a small but interesting fauna of about sixty molluscan species. In parts of this deeper neritic zone, between forty and one hundred fathoms, are large areas of gravel and clay. The presence of rock and gravel generally adds four brachiopods and twenty mollusks to the above-mentioned muddy bottom fauna. The gravel beds in the southern part of the Bay are favorite fishing grounds, especially in the neighborhood of Italian Ledge and Portuguese Ledge, which are sedimentary reefs lying in fifty to sixty fathoms about three or four miles in a general northerly direction from Point Pinos. The Monterey Submarine Canyon is a distinctive and remarkable physio- graphic feature of the Bay. Its head lies in seventy fathoms about three- quarters of a mile west of Moss Landing and it extends in a general westerly direction. It is narrow-walled at first but opens out to a width of three and a half miles in a distance of about eight miles, where the bottom depth is four hundred fathoms. Beyond this point the Canyon takes a southerly direction and opens out rapidly into the Monterey Sea Valley with the maxi- mum depth dropping to a thousand fathoms or more. The edges of the Canyon are at a depth of about seventy fathoms, and of the Sea Valley west of Point Pinos and Cypress Point, about a hundred fathoms. The hundred- fathom line west of Cypress Point is only a mile off shore and the depth increases to nearly seven hundred fathoms four miles or so off the Point. A similar but less extensive submarine canyon is Carmel Canyon, whose head lies two-fifths of a mile off the mouth of the Carmel River, and which expands irregularly with the depth dropping to three hundred and fifty fathoms three miles or so off shore. Carmel Canyon has not been as well explored as Monterey Canyon and consequently little is known of its mollusk fauna below twenty-five fathoms. The side-walls of both canyons have been reported to have many jagged pinnacles of hard rock. The occurrence of these two submarine canyons in the Monterey region adds a bathyal zone to the marine ecologic conditions already described. 156 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. The fauna of this zone in Monterey Bay includes about fifty-five reported species of mollusks on a fine sand or mud bottom, and seven mollusks and four brachiopods where the bottom is rock or gravel. In addition to the bottom dwellers at least eight pelagic species of mollusks and fifteen free-swimming cephalopod species are to be found in the Monterey region. For additional information on the shore conditions around Monterey Bay the reader will find much of interest in Ricketts and Calvin’s “Between Pacific Tides,” published in 1939. An account of the bottom conditions in the Bay is given by Galliher (1932). Another study, by Bigelow and Leslie (1928), covers the temperature, salinity, and chemical content of the ocean water of the Bay, and also the availability of microscopic fauna and flora for food. For the hydrography of the Bay, reference may be made to the work of Skogsberg (1936). A list of the marine algae has been published recently by Smith (1944). COMMERCIAL USE OF MOLLUSKS FROM MONTEREY Baw. AND VICINITY THE Rep ABALONE One striking feature of the mollusk-fauna of the Monterey region is the fact that it contains six of the eight major species of abalone described from the West Coast. Of these, the red abalone Haliotis rufescens Swainson is of great commercial importance because of its excellence when well prepared and served as steaks, in chowder, or as the basic ingredient for other delec- table fish dishes. In fact, it is not at all unusual in California restaurants to find that one has been served abalone cut to the right shape instead of the “eastern scallops” that were ordered. Nor is this such a flagrant substitu- tion, as the flavor of the two is close and defies detection by all except the expert. Species other than the red abalone are of no commercial value. The meat of the black abalone is of inferior quality, while the others are small in size, rare, and found usually in relatively deep water. The red abalone fishery in California is an old one and the vicinity of Monterey has been one of its principal centers for many years. The Chinese carried on the industry, beginning as early as 1864 to dry the meats for shipment to China. In this, they were joined by the Japanese, but of late, with operations shifting to deeper and deeper water, the Japanese until the second World War dominated the industry by use of the most modern div- ing equipment. The first legal restrictions on the taking of abalones for commercial pur- poses was reported by Stearns (1899), when he stated that the supervisors of Monterey and of other seaboard counties had taken the necessary steps to Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 157 ’ “) regulate the “fishery.” The Monterey County ordinance restricted ‘fishing’ for abalones, except in deep water and set a license fee of $60 to be paid by commercial operators. The drying of abalones was stopped by State law in 1915 and the good- sized drying camp located within the city limits of Monterey was closed. However, the canning of abalones, which had started about 1905 at Cayucos, in San Luis Obispo County, was carried on for many years near Point Lobos on the south side of Carmel Bay. This cannery shut down operations in 1928 and there has since been no canning of abalones in California. For a more detailed discussion of abalone diving operations and the eco- nomic status of the red species the reader should refer to two interesting papers by Paul Bonnot (1930, 1940), of the California Division of Fish and Game. He has stated that the present fishery extends along the coast line between Point Pinos and Point Buchon, south of Morro Bay in San Luis Obispo County, approximately one hundred and twenty-five miles in length. After making a series of thirty-four dives in 1939 at depths varying from twenty to one hundred feet, Bonnot said: Abalones are found on rocky bottoms from the low tide line to an undetermined depth. There are vast numbers of them out to the 60-foot level. From 60 to 80 feet there is a gradual decrease in numbers and at 100 feet only a few are found in unusually favorable places, a condition which is said to continue to greater depths. The divers ordinarily work out to 80 feet. Only occasionally do they endeavor to work at greater depths. From the shore line to the 80-foot level in the territory surveyed, there are great numbers of abalones with shells that measure 6 to 8 inches in diameter. Comparatively few are 8 inches or larger (8 inches is the legal minimum size limit). This is a logical sequence in territory systematically worked by the divers. There are a few 5-inch and still fewer 4-inch abalones, and below 4 inches none at all, except in one or two areas where special conditions prevail. The absence of the small sizes constitutes a serious condition. As the 6- and 7-inch abalones reach 8 inches and are taken by the divers, there will be no younger age classes to replace them. In 1918, the commercial catch for the entire State was only about three thousand dozen, but with the rise in popularity of the abalone as a sea-food, the catch increased to 56,350 dozen in 1927 and over 41,300 dozen in 1928. This latter figure represents more than 2,066,000 pounds, or over one thou- sand tons of abalones. The commercial catch of California boats landing abalones at Monterey during the ten-year period 1931-1940 is shown in the accompanying table, indicating a steady decline in the catch reported for each year since 1934, In addition, of course, there is the non-commercial catch, which must run to considerable proportions each year judging from the num- ber of people who flock to good hunting grounds during the exceptionally low or “abalone”’ tides. 158 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SrEr. LANDINGS OF FRESH MOLLUSKS FROM CALIFORNIA BOATS Recion 50, MONTEREY Pigeon Point, south to Point Piedras Blancas Pismo Gaper Clam Calif. Oyster Oyster Oyster Year Abalone Clam Clam Cockle (Mise.) Mussel Native Eastern Jap. Squid Octopus 1931 3,210,825 16,510 60 _- — 150 1,706,671 58,412 1932 2,135,375 25,157 —- 54 16 — 9,142 —- — 4,087,621 17,554 1933 2,221,500 26,097 —- —- - : 78,088 769,695 22,535 1934 2,786,775 19,198 — — —-- - 50,240 1,486,446 18,958 1935 2,656,200 23,425 2,250 67,630 — 783,102 53,362 1936 1,575,675 20,289 -- —- ~- 750 -- — 9,226 933,231 48,721 1937 1,433,200 14,087 _- —- — 1,490 464,739 19,169 1938 1,203,950 20,110 —_ 7 800 150 - 1,472,003 24,423 1939 789,450 16,330 36 — —_— ~- _- ~- — 1,007;815e92a225 1940 813,400 13,524 —- —_— — 100 1,644,122 17,591 Data from reports and papers published by the California Division of Fish and Game. All figures in pounds. While the decline in the catch of the red abalone may not be a particularly serious matter in view of the existing supply of shells just under the legal limit, the rarity of young to medium-sized shells might spell tragedy for the fishery in the long run. The situation is particularly unfortunate because of the lack of adequate knowledge of the life history of the red abalone — especially with respect to breeding habits. No natural resource can be “man- aged” successfully unless the laws that regulate it are based on sound scientific information. It is to be hoped, therefore, that the fact-finding survey of the State Division of Fish and Game will be continued and also that a compre- hensive study of the red abalone will be undertaken by individuals or insti- tutions properly equipped for the task. SouIpD The commercial fishery in Monterey Bay is an interesting one and ranks as one of the most important in the Bay. This is due, in recent years, to an increased demand for dried squid for export to China as food, the establish- ment of canning operations for squid, and the creation of a small demand for fresh squid in the fish markets. To most people the idea of eating squid may be abhorrent, yet when well prepared and fried in pure olive oil it is said to be on a par with abalone steak or fried scallops. The species taken in the Bay is Loligo opalescens Berry. There are two brief but informative accounts of the Monterey squid fishery by W. L. Scofield (1924) and Classic (1929). According to the former writer : The squid industry along our coast is one of the most interesting, one of the oldest, and probably the least known of our California fisheries. The Chinese at Monterey fished for squid years before sardine canning was thought of, even before salmon were caught in large commercial quantities and the old Chinatown on China Point near Monterey was a busy community that polluted the atmosphere for miles around with the odor of drying squid, an odor that yields the palm for potency only to a whaling station. In the days before the power boat and before the Mediter- Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 159 ranean lateen sail was a common sight on Monterey Bay, most of the fishing was carried on by Chinese in small junks rigged with the ribbed sails of China or sculled by a single long sweep. Before 1870 the Chinese had established a town on China Point and were catching and drying squid. Later on the lights from their floating bonfires on dark nights were a common sight off the south shores of Monterey Bay. Squid are now caught with lampara nets mostly at night in the same manner as sardines. A few may be taken throughout the year but the spring months of April, May, and June are considered to be the squid season. The commercial catch is variable, as the figures in the table show. Not shown, however, is the high year of 1930, when a total of nearly 11,000,000 pounds was landed at the Monterey Wharf. Eighty per cent of the squid used to be dried in open fields, baled, and shipped for export. However, no squid have been dried at Monterey or elsewhere in California since 1932, and those who still hold memories of the spot known as “Heliotrope Point” in the Monterey of former years are quite willing to allow their experiences with drying squid to remain buried in the dim past. Phillips (1941) has pointed out that drying was stopped because of the unstable condition of Chinese foreign exchange, coupled with the compe- tition caused by a low-priced product from Japan. He stated that: Although fresh squid are sold in the domestic markets, the quantity absorbed through this channel is not great because these sales are mainly to people of a few nationalities who cultivated a taste for this cosmopolitan mollusk in the land of their birth. A great deal of the fresh squid is frozen for shipment to retail markets throughout California. During the spring of 1941, large quantities of fresh squid were also frozen in five-gallon liver cans and shipped as bait to shark fishermen working out of Santa Barbara and Port Hueneme, California. Canning of squid in California is of minor importance. The average amount taken annually for canning during the period 1918-1940, inclusive, was approximately 50,000 pounds, and this includes two years when no squid were canned. During the last three years there has been a great increase in the amounts canned, reaching a peak of 935,000 pounds in 1940. Most of the recent pack has been produced by one Monterey cannery. At present, squid is canned “natural style,” that is, squid in its own ink. It is also canned in sesame oil with the ink absent. The cooked squid “has a mild, shrimp-like flavor,” says Phillips. The bulk of the canned product has been exported. Since August, 1935, another species of squid, the Jumbo Squid Dosi- dicus gigas (d’Orbigny), has been taken in and off Monterey Bay in great numbers although it was a rarity in the Bay prior to that date. In No- vember, 1935, a thousand pounds were landed at Santa Cruz by a “drag- boat” working in one hundred and ten fathoms. Set-line fishermen also reported taking them in depths as great as three hundred fathoms on hooks baited for sable-fish. Since then many have been seen occasionally swimming on the surface, sometimes close to shore. 160 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. The Jumbo Squid ranges from two to four feet in length and may weigh from five to thirty pounds. Richard S. Croker (1937) of the State Fisheries Laboratory remarked that no one has yet devised a way to make it palatable, when prepared for the table, and hence a commercial fishery for this species has not been developed. (See also Clark & Phillips, 1936). According to Croker: In 1936 they seemed to be even more abundant all the way from Monterey Bay to San Diego. It was in this year that they were first recognized as a nuisance by the fishermen. Albacore trollers were first bothered with them striking at the jigs. Usually the squid pulled loose, but they invariably left some of their tender anatomy on the hooks to foul them. Those that were caught squirted slippery, insoluble ink on the decks much to the disgust of the fishermen. Rockfish set-liners complained bitterly that the squid not only stole all the bait from their lines, but also damaged the fish that had been caught on the hooks. The plague of Jumbo Squid has been worse in 1937. Setline, net and troll com- mercial fishermen are still bothered with them, and in addition sport fishermen have been harassed all spring. No sooner does a pleasure boat start to fish than a horde of squid appears on the scene to crowd the game fish away and seize all the baits. When one is hooked, it proceeds to shower boat and fisherman with ink and water, and then delights in biting its captor with its parrot-like beak. Several fishermen have been seriously bitten this year. Although squid fishing is hilarious sport for a few minutes, it becomes too much of a good thing day after day. Latest reports indicate that the Jumbo Squid is still a nuisance in the Bay. Octopus It may be news to some that California has a thriving “devilfish” or octo- pus fishery of commercial proportions although of minor importance. Since 1920 the annual catch for the State has varied from 10,000 pounds to 165,000 pounds, with an average of about 75,000 pounds, of which eighty-five per cent is landed at Monterey and Santa Cruz. At Monterey and at other points along the California coast, octopi are captured in baited traps consisting either of a wire-screened box or a peculiar dome-shaped basket of wicker or rattan, reinforced with wires. There are two and sometimes four octopus fishermen at Monterey, all Italians, each using from ten to thirty of these traps. The men anchor their traps one-half to one mile off the open rocky shore between Point Pinos and Carmel, in from ten to thirty fathoms of water. The normal season for fishing is the spring, sum- mer, and fall months, a set of ten traps producing an average of fifteen octopi a week. Monterey specimens generally run from twenty-five to thirty pounds in weight but there is a record of an individual that weighed ninety pounds. The form caught is Octopus sp., cf. O. apollyon Berry, although sometimes listed as O. hongkongensis Hoyle. Japanese abalone divers, working as deep as one hundred feet along the coast where octopi are trapped for market, do not complain of attacks by this VoL. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 161 eight-armed cephalopod. On the contrary, an occasional one is cornered by a diver, who ties a line around its body so that it can be lifted to the surface, later to provide the main course of a meal. Octopi are eaten in all of the fishing ports along the California coast, mostly by Italians. They do not ship well, so are not transported to any great distances. For an excellent account of this small but unusual fishery on which information in the above paragraphs are based the authors are indebted to J. B. Phillips (1924). Oysters — Native and Introduced While there is no active oyster industry in Monterey Bay at present, at- tempts have been made to establish one in the past. The possibilities for de- velopment are limited to Elkhorn Slough, as this locality is about the only one in the Bay that is suitable for oyster propagation. The Slough consists of two long narrow channels that unite about half a mile from the ocean water of the Bay. The main arm is about six miles long and varies in width from fifty to one hundred yards. The Slough is open to the Bay at all times and is there- fore subject to tidal flow. Speaking of the oyster industry, Bonnot (1935) had the following to say: Because of its accessibility and freedom from pollution, the slough has been used for oyster experimentation for some years. Native oysters are indigenous. In 1923 small eastern oysters from Texas were planted but they gradually died out or dis- appeared. In 1929 Mexican oysters were tried but they also failed to survive. Japanese oysters were introduced in 1929 and as they showed up well, 243 boxes of Japanese seed, set on tarred rope, were put out the following year. The rope was handled after a method developed in Japan, by cutting it into short lengths and hanging it from rafts. From this plant of 243 boxes some 9000 gallons of oyster meat was harvested and sold. The growth of these oysters was remarkable, requiring only eight months from the time of planting to reach market size. By the next spring the few oysters that remained were too large for the market, which calls for an oyster of 200 count (200 to the gallon). Twenty-five barrels of Eastern oysters were planted in January, 1932. Some were laid out on the bottom and some were strung on copper wire and hung from floats. They have shown a good growth but have not equaled the Japanese in size. Experiments have been carried on for the past two summers at Elkhorn in an endeavor to obtain a local race of the Japanese oyster, but so far without success. Other experiments, however, have resulted in a heavy set of native oysters, and with a little attention the slough should be able to produce a good grade of native oysters in fair quantity. From 1933 to 1936 good quantities of Japanese oysters were harvested but for several years none have been marketed. Small numbers of both the native and Eastern oysters were harvested in 1935 only. The oyster industry in Elkhorn Slough is not active at present. 162 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H Ser. The planting of oysters that are not indigenous to Monterey Bay should be watched carefully to prevent, if possible, the introduction of other species of mollusks that are harmful to them. The oyster drill Urosalpinx cinereus (Say) is already found in the Slough but so far the Japanese drill Ocenebra japomca (Dunker) has not been reported. Several other species have been introduced with oysters elsewhere in the State and in the bays and harbors of the Pacific Northwest. Shell collectors should therefore be on the lookout for new species liable to have been introduced into the Bay and report them, when found, to the proper authorities, particularly the Bureau of Marine Fisheries of the State Division of Fish and Game. For an excellent account of introduced species of mollusks the reader is referred to a paper by Dr. G. Dallas Hanna (1939) of the California Academy of Sciences, published by the State Department of Agriculture. Eastern oysters planted in Elkhorn Slough were Ostrea virginica Gmelin, those from Texas probably being a variety of this same species. The species introduced from Mexico is likely to have been O. chilensis Philippi. The Japanese species is O. laperousei Schrenck but is referred to by some as O. gigas Lamarck. The species native to the Bay is the well-known Olympia oyster Ostrea lurida Carpenter. CLAMS AND MUSSELS Although many species of clams found in Monterey Bay are edible, with only two or three exceptions they are not taken in commercial quantities. One is the Pismo clam Tivela stultorum (Mawe), which is found in small numbers at Moss Landing and at Watsonville Beach. Although J. G. Cooper reported the Pismo clam as common at Santa Cruz in 1861, it does not appear to be taken there in any numbers at the present time. During the legal season Pismo clams may be bought in the markets at Monterey, Watsonville, and Santa Cruz, and along the highway between these cities, for ten or fifteen cents apiece. The preceding table shows the reported annual commercial catches for a ten-year period. Unlike the red abalone, the Pismo clam has been carefully studied and its life-history is now well known (Weymouth, 1923). Steps were taken to protect the species after the great beds of them at Pismo Beach were virtually exhausted. Under present laws for a closed season during the breeding months and bag limits that control the number and size that may be taken, the species might have been expected to begin to rehabilitate itself where once it was common. Unfortunately this has not been sufficient even to maintain the species and the outlook for the industry, at least at Pismo, is not bright. At Pismo a census is taken every year by the State Bureau of Marine Fisheries that gives information on the size of the previous year’s “set,” and the numbers of clams of spawning age and legal size. There have been only three good sets in the last fifteen years, one of which, in 1937, suffered an ce Vot.XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 163 unusually high mortality. The clams reach legal size in about five years and then begin to be removed quickly. As a result of poor sets and other reasons it seems likely that the Pismo clam will have to be placed on the protected list for a number of years in order to give the species an opportunity to multi- ply to the point where there will be an ample supply in Monterey Bay and at beaches farther to the south. There is probably no hope that even under the most careful management there will ever be numbers comparable to those encountered in “the good old days” at Pismo, of which it has been said that the farmers could go down to the beach during a low tide with a horse and plow and turn clams out by the thousands. The Pismo clam is one of the West Coast’s finest species, which, for its combined qualities of size, tenderness and flavor, has few equals. Other species of clams occasionally taken in Monterey Bay are the “gaper” or “rubberneck” clam Schizothaerus nuttallii (Conrad) and the cockle or little-neck Protothaca staminea (Conrad). Although the “geoduck” of Puget Sound and northern bays has been collected in limited numbers in Morro and San Pedro Bays, it appears to be quite rare in Monterey Bay, occasional spe- cimens having been reported as taken in Elkhorn Slough. The common California or sea mussel Mytilus californianus Conrad is also taken occasionally for the market, as the table shows. All of the above species, and those in the following list, may often find their way to the tables of individual epicures, although the total catch is probably small: Cardium nuttallii Conrad . . . . . Giant cockle Macoma nasuta (Conrad) . . . . . Bent-nosed clam Macoma secta (Conrad) . .. . . Butter clam Mya arenaria Linnaeus . . . . . . Eastern soft-shelled clam Platyodon cancellatus (Conrad) . . . Rock clam Saxidomus nuttalli Conrad . . . . Giant clam; Washington clam Solen sicarms Gould . .. . .. . . Jack-knife clam Zirfaea pilsbryi Lowe . . . . . . + Mud-borer clam SHELLYISH POMONING Although the species of clams and mussels from the Monterey region listed above are edible under normal circumstances, a word of caution should be interjected, for there are times when clams, and mussels éspecially, make dangerous eating because of poison they absorb at certain times along the California coast. For a brief account of this situation we are indebted to Dr. G. Dallas Hanna, who was instrumental in assembling the following information : Since 1927 periodic cases of poisoning from eating the mussel, Mytilus califor- “ianus, have been reported along the west coast from southeast Alaska southward as far as La Jolla, California. Results are serious, as very severe illness and often death follow. Thus in June, 1939, the newspapers reported thirty-two cases and three deaths from eating these mollusks collected at Monterey, in spite of the fact that 164 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. the gathering of them at that time was strictly prohibited and all likely places had been posted with conspicuous signs. A great deal of study has been given to this problem by members of the staff of the Hooper Medical Foundation of the University of California. Many papers have been published, references to which, together with a late summary of the results obtained, will be found in the two referred to below. (Sommer, Whedon, Kofoid, and Stohler: 1937; Sommer and Meyer, et al.; 1937.) A few of the noteworthy points determined are: 1. The specific poisons are derived by the mussels from dinoflagellates belonging to the genus Gonyaulax and probably to the species catenella. 2. While Mytilus californianus has been responsible for most of the ill effects to human beings the toxic poison has been found in many other bivalve mollusks and even the common sand crab, Emerita analoga. 3. The following species have been selected from the papers referred to because . dangerous amounts of poison were found in them. Mytilus californianus Conrad—General distribution. Saxidomus nuttalli Conrad—Washington. Schizothaerus nuttallii (Conrad)—Bodega and Tomales Bays. Siliqua patula (Dixon)—Half Moon Bay. Protothaca staminea (Conrad)—Bodega and Tomales Bays. Pholadidea penita (Conrad)—Half Moon Bay. Tivela stultorum (Mawe)—Monterey Bay. Macoma (species ?)—Bodega Bay. Volsella demissa (Dillwyn)—San Rafael, San Francisco Bay. Probably this list will be extended with further study. 4. Except in the case of the single Volsella demissa, the mollusks of inner bays such as San Francisco have thus far been free from dangerous amounts of poison. Apparently the inhabitants of open surf-swept shores are the most susceptible. 5. Several poisons appear to be involved, the exact chemical structure having been determined for none of them as yet. To this account we can add but one item, which relates the possible con- nection between the presence of phosphorescent “‘red water” off the coast and epidemics of shellfish poisoning (Bonnot and Phillips: 1938). Fortunately, the California Division of Fish and Game is on the watch for any signs of this trouble and notices are posted and appear in the press whenever there is danger. At these times the epicure should, for his own protection, withhold his natural and perfectly understandable desires for a dish of his favorite shellfish, and wait for a more favorable time. A list of references on shellfish poisoning, which is as complete as we have been able to obtain, is given on pages 242 and 243. CHBGREISL OF SPECIES In assembling the accompanying checklist of the mollusks and brachio- pods of Monterey and its vicinity the attempt has been made to gather every authentic record, especially from the Bay itself. Besides searching all avail- able literature, shells from many of the museums and private collections on VoL. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 165 the West Coast have been examined. The junior author has made an inten- sive search through the United States National Museum Collection at Wash- ington, D. C., and determined the status of many questionable records for species listed by Dall in his “Summary of the Marine Shellbearing Mollusks of the Northwest Coast of America, from San Diego to the Polar Sea . lished by the National Museum in 1921. >’ . , pub- The large collection at the California Academy has provided the source of many hitherto unpublished records. This includes the Hemphill Collection and a number of others acquired subsequently, including that of the junior author. In addition, the fine collection at Stanford University, which includes the Oldroyd Collection, the collection at the University of California at Berkeley, and a number of private collections have been carefully reviewed. Because it has been necessary to exercise a degree of judgment in accept- ing some of the older published records and eliminating others, the present list is far from being the last word. Much careful collection needs to be done in order to confirm or reject the right of many species to remain in it, and perhaps to add new ones yet unreported. Also, inevitable taxonomic changes will result in adding, combining, or eliminating species. The checklist follows, in general, the classification used by Dall in his “Summary,” except that his emphasis on subgeneric names has not been applied. In certain other instances we have deviated from Dall’s work for reasons that are believed to be sound. No attempt has been made to supply the latest view on taxonymy but where changes have been made the authori- ties on which they are based will be found listed under the heading “Synonymic Notes,” beginning on a subsequent page. In citing species names we have tried to adhere strictly to Article 23 of the International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature by placing parentheses around authors’ names when the species are classified under different genera from those originally used. Because of the many taxonomic changes that have been made, there is a question whether this procedure still serves any useful purpose. Records that are patently erroneous or that appear to be doubtful are shown in brackets ([]) in the list. Many of these belong to a fauna farther to the south in California or Lower California and we have not been able to confirm the fact that they really belong to the fauna of the Monterey region. Species described from specimens originally collected in the area are preceded with an asterisk (*). To these, we are adding 18 new species and subspecies, which are described and figured on subsequent pages. It is nota- ble that about 27 per cent of the valid species in the list have Monterey Bay or its vicinity as the type locality, the total being 197. As the relative abundance of individuals of a species, the range in depth within which a species normally may be found, and the conditions or nature 166 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. of its habitat are important essentials in a checklist, we have given careful attention to these three items. While this information for each species repre- sents our knowledge at the present time, we would be the first to point out that it is still far from accurate or complete for a great many of them, espe- cially those living in the deeper parts of the Bay and the surrounding ocean. In order to show relative occurrence of a species in point of numbers we have used a five-step scale, based on the occurrence of individuals within the known habitat, as follows: Occurrence Definition 1. Abundant A species of which individuals may be found every- where in large numbers. The collector can take an almost unlimited number of specimens, if he so desires, at any time when the tide is right or when dredging at the proper depths on the proper type of bottom. 2. Common Individuals occur in considerable numbers and can be collected usually in fair quantity under the right conditions. A collector could expect to find speci- mens of a common species easily without making a special search. . Fairly Common Species of which individuals may normally be taken in small numbers. A collector could expect to find a few specimens of a fairly common species each time he sought for it. ios) 4. Scarce Individuals occur occasionally, and then singly or only a few at a time. The collector could not ex- pect to find specimens of a scarce species every time he collected, nor would it come up in every dredge haul. HyeRate Species of which only a few specimens are known to have been collected. A number of species listed as rare are based on a single shell. Species shown as rare may, in some instances, prove to be scarce or even common when more is learned of their habitats, or, if they live in deep water, when more opportunity and better facilities for dredging for them is afforded. The exact number of specimens existing for a rare species is given in the checklist, if known. The checklist contains 732 species and subspecies considered valid, which are classified under 139 families and 305 genera. Also listed are 80 more considered doubtful or erroneous. This is truly a remarkable assemblage of Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 167 mollusks and brachiopods from a north latitude of 36°. The following table gives a breakdown of the total, by groups: Numbers of Species and Subspecies Group Valid Doubtful Total Pelecypods 189 ae ai Scaphopods 10 0 10 Gastropods Pteropods 5 0 5 Opisthobranchs 21 2 Zs Nudibranchs 36 0 36 Pulmonates 5 0 5 Ctenobranchs 393 44 437 Chitons yi g 60 Cephalopods 15 1 16 Brachiopods 7 Z 9 TOTAL 732 80 812 We know of no other locality outside of tropical or semitropical areas where the molluscan fauna has such a large number of species. The fact that the ranges of nearly a hundred additional species not yet authentically reported from the Monterey region extend both to the north and to the south of it indicates the possibility of adding these to the list, bringing the total to over 800 species and subspecies. Genera having the largest representation of species and subspecies are shown in the following table, which lists those having six or more: Genus Number Genus Number LAGS (i ae aR oe 30 VOTE CPUC Sa eee ANE ae Bay Pe 8 OT OSHOWNAG, hs F ec thee teens rif BGLOTS ert cn tees eee 8 JEP a a 16 INGUIN Gt oa enero AB etree! 7 UPN ONUMIN (2 oooe et tee cs 14 TREGEOW. qe Mere RC. 7 SEM MOGIILOR: =o... nee 14 Cole Sense eee Vi Gerimiopsisy 200 sel cP es 1G TOPCO CHE Mee Vk FAM So 7 [ETERS C ete Oe al ee he Re 11 Phvaledideare te ee cat 6 WEE OVD oon nnncc wena ay eee 10 DCRTOMMIN TE ee Oe 6 WeeneUU es a eh A a Ly 10 LUNGS TOTS AES a etme a eee 6 PEI nee ete 1 Te INES SOITIUSE Foch es a ee 6 BU EL LG ie fae aiken es NY 9 NAL TT HTCSS Raat oe ORR Meet 6 PPNG GUO 05. SOL bee ee 9 Boreoiwopnon, <2. toe 6 CaWOSEOWMNG ~ <2 oi cc. PO ee 8 EL OIOUS: (elect 3.220 en 6 The authors will be grateful for any additions or for further information that will serve to make the checklist more complete and accurate. In acknowledging our debt to those who have assisted us in the prepara- 168 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. tion of this paper, it should be mentioned that experts on various molluscan groups have been of very material help. Dr. F. M. MacFarland of Stan- ford University furnished the list of nudibranchs and supplied much infor- mation on the habitats and occurrence of many species in this group to which he has given special study for many years. Dr. S. Stillman Berry reviewed the lists of his specialties, the chitons and cephalopods. Mrs. Avery R. (Grant) Test of the University of Michigan furnished collecting records and notes on the taxonymy of the limpets. Dr. Paul Bartsch reviewed the turrids and has kindly published the descriptions of several new species from the Monterey region so they could be listed here, in advance of the appearance of his monograph on this group. Both Dr. Bartsch and Dr. Harald Rehder of the National Museum were particularly helpful on problems connected with the survey of the shells from Monterey in the vast collection at Wash- ington. Appreciation goes also to Mr. and Mrs. Emery P. Chace of Lomita, Cali- fornia, Tom and John Q. Burch of Los Angeles, Dr. A. Myra Keen of Stanford University, the late George Willett of the Los Angeles Museum, Professor William J. Raymond of Berkeley, the Rev. Elwood B. Hunter and Mr. Andrew Sorensen of Pacific Grove, and Mr. John Strohbeen of Santa Cruz, all of whom have been generous with the loan of specimens for study and for invaluable information. We are especially indebted to Drs. G. Dallas Hanna and Leo G. Hertlein of the Academy’s staff for much assistance, en- couragement, and advice throughout the period this study has been under way. PELECYPODA PRIONODESM ACEA SOLEMYACIDAE Solemya panamensis Dall—9 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in coarse granitic sand ; one speci- men (Gordon). Solemya valvulus Carpenter—10-25 fathoms off Monterey, in sand; rare. NUCULIDAE Nucula cardara Dall—43-108 fathoms off Point Pinos and Santa Cruz, in soft green or dark mud (USFC Stas. 4475, 4482, 4483, 4523) ; fairly common. Nucula carlottensis Dall—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 3670) ; rare. Nucula linki Dall—51 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft dark gray mud (USFC Sta. 4464) ; rare, Nucula tenuis (Montagu)—15-149 fathoms, in mud, sand and clay; fairly common. Acila castrensis (Hinds)—15-149 fathoms, in mud, sand and clay ; common. NUCULANIDAE Nuculana acuta (Conrad)—28-35 fathoms off Point Pinos, in blue mud, sand and shells USFC Sta. 4441) ; rare. While the shells to which we refer here are close to the East Coast’s N. acuta, there are differences that may result eventually in classifying them Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 169 as a separate species. Until recently, collectors have incorrectly applied the name acuta to the fairly common subglobose shell with a short rostrum, which is properly identified as N. penderi (Dall). *Nuculana amblia (Dall)—465-1041 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green, blue and soft gray mud, and hard sand (USFC Stas. 3128, 4516, 4517, 4530, 4536-9, inclusive) ; abundant. Nuculana conceptionis (Dall) —298 fathoms off Point Sur, in yellow sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3187); one specimen. [Nuculana cuneata (Sowerby)—Monterey (Cooper). This is not N. cuneata (Sowerby), which is a synonym of N. elenensis (Sowerby). Early collectors applied the name to the species that Dall called N. acuta (Conrad).] Nuculana hamata (Carpenter)—35-158 fathoms, in mud and sand; fairly common. Nuculana leonina (Dall) —152-766 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in green mud, sand and rocks (USFC Stas. 3202, 4509, 4514, 4517, 4541) ; fairly common. Nuculana penderi (Dall and Bartsch)—8-35 fathoms, in sand; common. Nuculana taphria (Dall)—8-51 fathoms, in coarse and fine sand ; abundant. Common in fish stomachs (Sorensen). Yoldia beringiana Dall—152-1041 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard sand and blue and soft gray mud (USFC Stas. 3128, 4509, 4536) ; scarce. *Voldia cooperi Gabb—5-15 fathoms off Soquel, in sand; scarce. *Voldia montereyensis Dall—25 fathoms (Mrs. Oldroyd) ; 60 fathoms (Lowe) ; 152-871 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in mud and sand (USFC Stas. 3128, 3202, 3670, 4509, 4514, 4517, 4538, 4540, 4541, 4542) ; common. Voldia scissurata Dall—35-139 fathoms, in mud. Common in fish stomachs (Sorensen). Syn. Y. ensifera Dall. Yoldia seminuda Dall—21 fathoms off Monterey, in sand; one living specimen (Gordon). Malletia faba Dall—581-627 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in mud (USFC Stas. 3128, 3670). Malletia pacifica Dall—152-329 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft gray mud (USFC Sta. 4509) ; rare. Tindaria gibbsii Dall—755-958 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft gray mud (USFC Sta. 4530) ; rare. ARCIDAE Glycymeris subobsoleta (Carpenter)—5-15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in coarse granitic sand, valves only; scarce. [Arca bailyi Bartsch—recorded as Barbatia gradata Sowerby from 12 fathoms, sand, by Berry who now states that the record is extremely doubtful. The name A. pernoides (Carpenter), an indeterminate species from San Diego, has also been applied to this shell. ] PINNIDAE Philobrya setosa (Carpenter )—5-40 fathoms, on sea mosses and calcareous algae, off Pacific Grove and Monterey ; common. OSTREIDAE Ostrea laperousii Schrenck—Elkhorn Slough ; introduced for commercial propagation. Syn. O. gigas Thunberg, not O. gigas Meuschen. Ostrea lurida Carpenter—Sub-littoral in the Bay, in mud and on rocks and shells; fairly common. et An asterisk preceding a species’ name in the checklist indicates the Monterey region is the type locality. Brackets ([]) indicate erroneous or doubtful records. Since the manuscript was completed several years prior to date of publication changes in some names have been recommended. It has not been practicable to make these and a few other minor alterations such as to bring all information strictly up to date. 170 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H Ser. Ostrea lurida expansa Carpenter—Monterey Harbor (Dall). Possibly a situs form of the preceding species. Ostrea virginica Gmelin—Elkhorn Slough; introduced for commercial use. PECTINIDAE Pecten (Pecten) diegensis Dall—10-40 fathoms, in sand and on shale; fairly common. Take the rest of the Monterey pectens it is often found free-swimming. [Pecten (Plagioctenium) circularis Sowerby—Monterey (Dall). According to Hertlein this must be considered a doubtful record, as true circularis is not known to range into Cali- fornia. The southern California shell is the subspecies aequisulcatus Carpenter, also not found in the Bay.] Pecten (Chlamys) hastatus Sowerby—10-40 fathoms, in sand and on shale and corallines, sometimes encased in sponge; fairly common. Pecten (Chlamys) hericeus Gould—10-20 fathoms, in sand. Fine living specimens were taken years ago by trawl fishermen but recent dredging has failed to locate any bed and has produced only a few valves. Pecten (Chlamys) hericeus pugetensis I. S. Oldroyd—40 fathoms off Monterey, on shale (Burch). [Pecten (Chlamys) hindsii Carpenter—Monterey (Cooper, Dall) ; beach at Pt. Lobos, as navarchus (Leitch). Not taken recently and the records need confirming. Young Hinnites multirugosus Gale or worn valves of P. hastatus Sowerby or P. hericeus Gould may have been mistaken for this species. Syn. P. h. navarchus Dall. ] [Pecten (Leptopecten) latiauratus Conrad—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s immature specimen is the only record of this common southern California pecten. ] Pecten (Leptopecten) latiauratus monotimeris Conrad—Fan Shell Beach, near Cypress Point ; 15-40 fathoms in Monterey Bay, on calcareous algae; common. This is the small form with prominently laminated interspaces named as P. 1. delosi Arnold although the smoother form is collected occasionally. Syn. P. 1. delosi Arnold. Pecten (Delectopecten) randolphi tillamookensis Arnold—659 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud (USFC Sta. 5699) ; one specimen. Pecten (Delectopecten) vancouverensis Whiteaves—15-220 fathoms, on calcareous algae and bryozoans; scarce. Finnites multirugosus (Gale)—Low tide to 12 fathoms; free-swimming when young, the adults cement themselves to rocks. 30 fathoms (Cooper). Fairly common. Syn. H. giganteus Gray. LIMIDAE Lima dehiscens Conrad—10-35 fathoms, nesting in sand or free-swimming ; fairly common. Lima subauriculata (Montagu)—20 fathoms off Monterey, on shale (Burch). 25 fathoms off Carmel ; in sand; scarce. ANOMIIDAE [Anomia peruviana d’Orbigny—60 fathoms (Cooper). A doubtful record for this south- ern species. | Pododesmus macrochismus (Deshayes)—Low tide to 20 fathoms, on rocks, on living abalones and in dead shells, especially mussels ; common. MYTILIDAE Mytilus californianus Conrad—On rocks at low tide, especially along the ocean front; abundant. Mytilus edulis Linnaeus—On wharf piles, Monterey Municipal Pier and Moss Landing; abundant. “Santa Cruz near river” (Cooper). Septifer bifurcatus (Conrad )—Under rocks at low tide; fairly common. [Volsella capax (Conrad)—Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). Based on young specimens, Vot. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 171 which may have been V’. fornicatus Carpenter. We have seen no authentic specimens of capax from the vicinity of Monterey. Syn. Modiolus capax Conrad. | Volsella flabellata (Gould)—15-40 fathoms off Moss Landing and Santa Cruz, in sand; rare. Dr. Berry has a large specimen from Moss Landing measuring 210 mm. in length. Syn. Modiolus flabellatus (Gould). V olsella diegensis (Dall) —With Mytilus edulis, Monterey Municipal Pier; in rock fill at Elkhorn Slough; fairly common. Also 12 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale; scarce. This species is not a boring mollusk and we believe it to be a Volsella rather than a Botula. Syn. Botula diegensis Dall. V olsella fornicata (Carpenter )—Low tide to 40 fathoms, nestling among rocks, shells, and in fine gravel ; abundant. While dredging in 5-15 fathoms in the lee of Point Pinos over a sand and broken shell bottom the shells brought up in the dredge were largely worn and broken valves of this species. Syn. Modiolus fornicatus Carpenter. [Volsella modiola (Linnaeus)—Monterey (Cooper). A doubtful record for this northern species that needs confirming. Syn. Modiolus modiolus (Linnaeus ). | V olsella pallidula (Dall)—41-142 fathoms, in mud ; fairly common. Syn. Modiolus pallidulus Dall. Volsella recta (Conrad)—Elkhorn Slough, in mud at low tide; 10-20 fathoms, in sand; common. Syn. Modiolus rectus Conrad. Botulina denticulata (Dall)—5-40 fathoms, in sand, shale, and broken shells ; scarce. Shells we identify as this species have until recently been called Modiolus opifex Say, an East Coast species. Specimens from the West Coast are provisionally included under denticulata, although those from Monterey and other localities in California are lighter in color and smaller than typical specimens from Lower California, and may be separable. Botula californiensis (Philippi)—8-15 fathoms, boring in shale; scarce. *Botula falcata (Gould)—Low tide at Santa Cruz, in shale; also 10-15 fathoms off Del Monte, boring in shale ; common. [Lithophaga attenuata (Deshayes)—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s record was based on senile specimens of L. plumula (Hanley). San Ignacio Lagoon, Lower California, is the north- ernmost record for this species in the California Academy Collection. ] Lithophaga plumula (Hanley )—Low tide to 35 fathoms, boring in shale and occasionally in shells ; common. [Modiolaria protracta (Dall)—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s record was based on a small worn valve of Botulina denticulata (Dall), dredged by Berry in 12 fathoms off Del Monte. ] Crenella columbiana Dall—15-40 fathoms, in sand and mud; fairly common. Crenella decussata (Montagu)—15-30 fathoms, in sand; scarce. [Crenella inflata Carpenter—25 fathoms (Berry). A doubtful record for this Cape San Lucas species. ] ANOMALODESM ACEA PERIPLOM ATIDAE Periploma discus Stearns—15-25 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand; rare. THRACIIDAE Thracia challisiana Dall—Beach at Pacific Grove (Gordon, Mrs. Fackenthall) ; rare. Thracia curta Conrad—25 fathoms off Pacific Grove (Berry). Thracia trapezoides Dall—A single young specimen from 35 fathoms off Seaside, in mud (Gordon). Cyathodonta undulata Conrad—Fragments from 12 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand (Gordon). PANDORIDAE Pandora bilirata Conrad—41-142 fathoms, in mud, clay and gravel; fairly common. 172 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H SER. Pandora filosa (Carpenter) —40-202 fathoms off Watsonville Beach and Point Pinos, in dark green or soft dark gray mud and in coarse sand, shells and rocks (USFC Stas. 3204, 4457, 4464, 4549) ; scarce. Pandora punctata Conrad—10-15 fathoms, in sand ; common. LYONSIIDAE Lyonsia californica Conrad—10-40 fathoms, in sand; common. Lyonsia gouldii Dall—5-15 fathoms, in sand (Gordon) ; rare. Entodesma inflatum (Conrad)—At low tide, in sponges and ascidians, to 40 fathoms, on shale; rare. Entodesma saxicola (Baird)—Between tides, under boulders and in rock crevices; fairly common. Mytilimeria nuttallii Conrad—In compound ascidians (Amaroucium californicum and other species), usually in colonies at low tide. Also dredged from 10-20 fathoms off Monterey (Burch). Fairly common. POROMYACIDAE *Dermatomya buttoni Dall—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in mud (USFC Sta. 3670) ; rare. *Dermatomya tenuiconcha (Dall)—66-73 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4552) ; 659 fathoms off Point Sur, in green mud (USFC Sta. 5699) ; rare. CUSPIDARIIDAE Cuspidaria apodema Dall—70 fathoms, in mud (McGinitie) ; 85-158 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4475) ; scarce. Cardiomya californica (Dall)—34-73 fathoms off Point Pinos, in mud and rocks (USFC Stas. 4457, 4474, 4552). Syn. Cuspidaria californica Dall. Cardiomya pectinata (Carpenter )—66-69 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4555). Syn. Cuspidaria pectinata (Carpenter). Cardiomya planetica (Dall)—40-202 fathoms off Point Pinos, Watsonville Beach and Santa Cruz, in soft green mud and sand (USFC Stas. 3204, 4475, 4482, 4483, 4485). Syn. Cuspidaria planetica Dall). VERTICORDIIDAE Verticordia ornata (d’Orbigny )—25 fathoms, in sand, Monterey and Carmel Bays; scarce. ‘TELEODESMACEA CARDITIDAE Glans carpenteri Lamy—Shore to 15 fathoms, under rocks and among rubble and broken shells ; abundant. Syn. Cardita subquadrata (Carpenter). [Cardita crebricostata (Krause)—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s specimens belong under C. ventricosa montereyensis Smith and Gordon, new subspecies. True crebricostata does not appear to have been recorded south of Oregon. ] Cardita prolongata (Carpenter)—5-25 fathoms off Pacific Grove and 25 fathoms, in sand; rare. *Cardita ventricosa montereyensis Smith and Gordon, new subspecies. Described on page 212; see text figs. 2, 3; 35-139 fathoms, in mud and fine sand; fairly common. Milneria kelseyi Dall—China Point, under rocks, and 10 fathoms off China Point on sand and broken shell bottom; scarce. *Milneria minima Dall—10-15 fathoms, in sand and shells; rare. CHAMIDAE [Chama buddiana C. B. Adams—Monterey (Dall). This record was based upon a speci- men of Pseudochama granti Strong. ] Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 173 Chama pellucida Broderip—Between tides, cemented to rocks, often on their undersides ; fairly common. Specimens from Monterey Bay generally are small and lack the pink color of those found farther to the south. Pseudochama exogyra (Conrad)—With the above, but found only on the upper faces of rocks. Once fairly common, this species is now hard to find. Pseudochama granti Strong—25-60 fathoms in Monterey Bay, on rocks and shells; 25 fathoms, in Carmel Bay; fairly common. THYASIRIDAE Axinopsis sericatus (Carpenter)—15-25 fathoms, in sand and mud; fairly common. Axinopsis viridis Dall—36-85 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft dark gray and green mud (USFC Stas. 4464, 4475) ; 298 fathoms off Point Sur, in yellow sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3187); UNGULINIDAE (DIPLODONTIDAE) Taras orbellus (Gould)—Occasionally found at low tide and in beach drift. 3-15 fathoms, in sand and rocks; scarce. Usually nestles in borer holes. Syn. Diplodonta orbella (Gould). Taras sericatus (Reeve)—15 fathoms, in sand; one young specimen (Gordon). Dredged off Monterey (Burch). Syn. Diplodonta sericata (Reeve). LUCINIDAE Lucina annulata Reeve—8-10 fathoms (Dall). Fragments dredged in 25 fathoms in sand (Gordon). A young specimen from a kelp holdfast in 10 fathoms (Smith). Lucina approximata (Dall)—10-70 fathoms, in sand and mud; fairly common. Lucina californica Conrad—Shore to 40 fathoms, in sand and gravel; common. Lucina nuttalli Conrad—15 fathoms, in sand; rare. Lucina tenuisculpta (Carpenter)—19 fathoms off Watsonville Beach, in mud, fine sand and stones (USFC Sta. 3138) ; rare. [Divaricella perparvula Dall—‘Monterey” (Gabb). This record is unquestionably erron- eous. | ERYCINIDAE (LEPTONIDAE) Kellia laperousii (Deshayes)—Shore to 35 fathoms, nestling in kelp foldfasts; rock crevices, and borer holes; also in salt-water tank at the Hopkins Marine Laboratory; abundant. Kellia suborbicularis (Montagu)—With the preceding species and may include it. Ap- parently this name has been used as a catch-all for West American shells of K. laperousti tending toward the orbicular. Rochefortia aleutica (Dall)—10-35 fathoms, in fine sand and shale fragments; fairly common. Rochefortia tumida (Carpenter )—Shore to 40 fathoms (Berry). We have not collected it and suspect Berry’s shells may be the preceding species. Serridens oblonga (Carpenter )—Monterey, commensal on Ischnochiton heathiano (Berry) ; rare (Chace). *Sportella (?) californica Dall—15-25 fathoms off Pacific Grove and Point Pinos, in fine sand; scarce. This shell is not a Sportella and may be a species of Pseudopythina. [Pseudopythina compressa Dall—Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). The single specimen so identified is actually a large pathologic individual of P. rugifera (Carpenter.).] Pseudopythina rugifera (Carpenter)—Elkhorn Slough, commensal on shrimps of the genus Upogebia (McGinitie). 60-70 fathoms off Monterey, in mud, on the undersides of Aphrodite worms. Bornia retifera Dall—Monterey Harbor (Dall). Not taken recently. 174 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. Lasaea cistula Keen—In kelp foldfasts and nestling among mussels ; common. This species, and LL. subviridis Dall, are frequently found in collections under the incorrect name L. rubra (Montagu). Lasaea subviridis Dall—In kelp holdfasts; also 5-15 fathoms, in sand. Less common than the preceding species. *Anisodonta pellucida Dall—12 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand (Berry). Known only from the type specimen. CHLAMYDOCONCHIDAE Chlamydoconcha orcutti Dall—Between tides, on rocks (Heath) ; rare. CARDIIDAE Cardium (Trachycardium) quadragenarium Conrad—12-30 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments; fairly common. Cardium (Clinocardium) fucanum Dall—10-40 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. This species is often misidentified as C. californiense Deshayes, which is a northern species not found in California in spite of its name. Cardium (Clinocardium) nuttallii Conrad—Elkhorn Slough, in mud; common. Dredged in depths under 20 fathoms (Burch). This species has been incorrectly called C. corbis (Martyn). [Cardium (Laevicardium) substriatum Conrad—Monterey (Cooper). A doubtful record. ] *Nemocardium centifilosum (Carpenter )—10-40 fathoms in Monterey Bay, in mud and sand, scarce; 15 fathoms off Carmel (Cooper). Syn. Protocardia centifilosa (Car- penter). VESICOMYACIDAE Vesicomya gigas (Dall)—659 fathoms off Point Sur, in green mud (USFC Sta. 5699) ; a single specimen. Vesicomya ovalis (Dall) —415-659 fathoms off Point Sur, in green mud (USFC Stas. 5698, 5699) ; rare. VENERIDAE Tivela stultorum (Mawe)—Moss Landing, in sand at low tide; fairly common. Re- ported as common at Santa Cruz in 1861 by Cooper but now found there rarely, if at all. Transennella tantilla (Gould)—Low tide to 20 fathoms, in sand; abundant. Pitar newcombianus (Gabb)—30 fathoms, in sand (Cooper). No specimens appear to have been collected recently. Antigona fordii (Yates)—6-40 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments; rare. Saxidamus giganteus (Deshayes)—10-12 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand; rare. Saxidomus nuttalli Conrad—Pacific Grove, in sand and small rocks at low tide; scarce. Elkhorn Slough; common in mud and gravel. Many young specimens dredged down to 20 fathoms, in sand. Compsomyax subdiaphana (Carpenter)—10-40 fathoms, in sand and mud; common. Syn. Marcia subdiaphana (Carpenter). . Humilaria kennerleyi (Reeve)—Dredged in shallow water off Monterey (Burch) ; Beach at Carmel, one valve (Keep); a few miles south of Carmel (Chace). Syn. Marcia kennerleyi (Reeve). [Chione succincta (Valenciennes)—Three young specimens, listed as C. simillima Sowerby, 30 fathoms in Carmel Bay, in mud (Cooper). This is a doubtful record for this southern species. Cooper’s shells may have been the young of Protothaca staminea ruderata (Deshayes.) ] Protothaca laciniata (Carpenter )—10-20 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand; valves and fragments only. Syn. Paphia laciniata (Carpenter). Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 175 Protothaca staminea (Conrad)—Between tides, in sand and gravel; also to 25 fathoms in sand and shale fragments or nestling in borer holes in shale. Distorted specimens growing in borer holes have been named P. s. orbella (Carpenter) and P. s. petitii (Deshayes). The frilled variety, P. s. ruderata (Deshayes), may be subgenerically distinct. Syn. Paphia staminea (Conrad). Protothaca tenerrima (Carpenter)—Elkhorn Slough; rare. Cooper reported one valve in 20 fathoms and said “it lives below low tide at Santa Cruz.” Immature valves in 12 fathoms (Berry). Syn. Paphia tenerrima (Carpenter). *Irus lamellifer (Conrad )—Low tide to 35 fathoms, in gravel or nestling in borer holes ; common. Syn. Venerupis lamellifera (Conrad). Gemma gemma (Totten)—15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in sand; one specimen (Gordon). Introduced with oysters from the East Coast. Psephidia brunnea Dall—Monterey (Dall). We have not collected it. Psephidia lordi (Baird )—10-30 fathoms, in sand and mud; fairly common. [Psephidia ovalis Dall—12 fathoms (Berry). This record needs confirming. ] Psephidia salmonea (Carpenter)—10 fathoms off China (Cabrillo) Point, in sand; fairly common (Smith). PETRICOLIDAE Petricola carditoides (Conrad )—Low tide to 40 fathoms, in borer holes ; common. [Petricola californiensis Pilsbry and Lowe—Reported as P. denticulata Sowerby from 25 fathoms by Berry, on Dall’s identification. Berry’s specimens, on analysis, prove to be young valves of the preceding species. ] COOPERELLIDAE Cooperella subdiaphana (Carpenter )—15-40 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. TELLINIDAE Tellina bodegensis Hinds—Below low tide to 15 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. Tellina buttont Dall—10-25 fathoms, in sand; common. Tellina carpenteri Dall—15-75 fathoms, in sand and mud; scarce. Tellina modesta (Carpenter )—15-25 fathoms, in sand; scarce. Tellina salmonea (Carpenter )—5-40 fathoms, in coarse sand; fairly common. Macoma calcarea (Gmelin)—36-51 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft dark gray mud (USFC Sta. 4464) ; one specimen. Macoma carlottensis Whiteaves—40-286 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in soft green or gray mud, gray sand, and a combination of mud, sand and boulders (USFC Stas. 3666, 4457, 4475, 4509, 4522, 4523, 4555) ; common. Macoma expansa Carpenter—Monterey (Hannibal). 45 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4483). Macoma inconspicua (Broderip and Sowerby)—Elkhorn Slough, in mud, to 10 fathoms, in sand. Originally described as Tellina inconspicua Broderip and Sowerby. Macoma indentata Carpenter—9-25 fathoms, in coarse to fine sand; rare. Macoma irus Hanley—Common at Elkhorn Slough, in mud. Syn. M. inquinata (Deshayes). Macoma nasuta (Conrad)—Abundant in Elkhorn Slough, in mud and fine sand. Dredged down to 25 fathoms off Monterey (Burch). Macoma quadrana Dall—40-153 fathoms, in mud; scarce. Macoma secta (Conrad)—Abundant in Elkhorn Slough, in mud and sand. Macoma yoldiformis Carpenter—10-25 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments; common. 40 fathoms off Moss Landing (Berry). 176 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4tTH SER. SEMELIDAE Semele incongrua Carpenter—5-25 fathoms, in coarse to fine sand or nestling in borer holes in the shale; common. 20-30 fathoms in mtiddy sand, Carmel Bay (Cooper). [Semele pulchra (Sowerby)—Monterey Bay (Dall). Dall’s record is based on a single valve. This record needs confirming. ] *Semele rubropicta Dall—Low tide to 35 fathoms off Monterey and Soquel; beach at Point Pinos and Carmel. While valves of this fine red-rayed species are found occa- sionally, good living specimens are rare. *Semele rupicola Dall—Nestling in borer holes in shale, 15-25 fathoms off Del Monte, scarce; shore at Pacific Grove and Santa Cruz, valves only. Cumingia californica Conrad—Nestling among small rocks and gravel, and in borer holes, low tide to 35 fathoms; fairly common. SANGUINOLARIIDAE Gari californica (Conrad)—Between tides, in coarse granitic sand, gravel and granite boulders. Young specimens down to 15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in fine sand; scarce. Syn. Psammobia californica Conrad. Sanguinolaria nuttallii Conrad—Elkhorn Slough; in mud; rare. Heterodonax bimaculatus (Linnaeus )—Below low tide at Fan Shell Beach, near Cypress Point, (Dall; Mrs. Fackenthall) ; rare. Only separate valves have been collected. Tagelus californianus (Conrad)—Elkhorn Slough; one valve (Hanna). . SOLENIDAE Solen sicarius Gould—Low tide to 40 fathoms, in mud and sand; fairly common. Elk- horn Slough, in mud; scarce. Ensis californicus Dall—Young specimens taken in 15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in sand (Gordon). Siliqua lucida (Conrad)—10-25 fathoms off Monterey, in sand; fairly common. Siliqua patula (Dixon)—Beach at seaside, valves only; mouth of Elkhorn Slough; scarce. Syn. S. patula nuttallii (Conrad). MACTRIDAE Mactra californica Conrad—Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). Reported common on the beach at Santa Cruz by Cooper. 12 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand and shale frag- ments; one specimen (Smith). Spisula catilliformis (Conrad)—Off Soquel, in sand (Stanford Collection). 40 fathoms off Moss Landing (Berry). A rare species in the Bay. Spisula falcata Gould—15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in sand (Gordon) ; rare. Valves in 10 fathoms and living “toward Salinas River’ (Cooper). Spisula hemphilli Dall—15 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, in sand; one valve (Gordon). Spisula planulata Conrad—Elkhorn Slough, in mud; scarce. 12 fathoms off Del Monte; common (Berry). Schizothaerus nuttallii (Conrad)—Abundant in Elkhorn Slough. In borer holes in a shale boulder at Del Monte (Chace). Living young and valves off Monterey in 20 fathoms (Burch). MYACIDAE Mya arenaria Linnaeus—Elkhorn Slough, in mud; common. Introduced. [Mya intermedia Dall—Monterey (Dall). Two young specimens, one from Monterey and the other from 45 fathoms off Point Afio Nuevo are the basis for this record. Whether they are the young of this or another species is difficult to determine. ] Cryptomya californica (Conrad)—Nestling in rocks and gravel at low tide at Pacific Grove; fairly common. Abundant at Elkhorn Slough, where it extends its siphons Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 177 into the burrows of shrimps of the genera Callianassa and Upogebia, and the worm Urechis caupo. Beach to 20 fathoms (Cooper). Nestling in borer holes in shale at Del Monte (Chace). Sphenia pholadidea Dall—Beach at Monterey, as S. nana (Oldroyd), and at the Hopkins Marine Station, as S. globula, one valve (Keen) ; 8-35 fathoms off Pacific Grove and Monterey, boring in shale; fairly common. The California sphenias appear to have been divided into too many species and we are of the opinion that there is but one in the Monterey region. In this connection there has been some confusion between S. nana (Oldroyd) and S. globula Dall. According to Dr. Keen, there are two paratypes of globula in the Stanford Collection, which, with the holotype in the National Museum, were collected at Bolinas by Hemphill. The Monterey specimen of globula cited by Mrs. Oldroyd (1927, 1:201) is a young Platyodon cancellatus (Conrad). Be- cause of the variable shape of shells of this genus that are referable to the species named above, this becomes a questionable character for diagnosis and we are there- fore relegating S. nana and S. globula to the synonymy of S. pholadidea after a study of photographs of the type specimen of the latter species, which were kindly furnished by Dr. Keen. We have not collected S. fragilis Carpenter at Monterey, the only material in the Academy Collection being from south of San Diego, which shows this species to be quite different from pholadidea. No shells of S. ovoidea Carpenter have been available for comparison of our Monterey material with this species. Syns. Cuspidaria nana Oldroyd; S. nana (Oldroyd) ; S. globula Dall. Platyodon cancellatus (Conrad)—Low tide at Santa Cruz, in shale; fairly common. ALOIDIDAE (CORBULIDAE) [Aloidis fragilis (Hinds)—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s single beach-worn valve of this Panamic species is probably adventitious. Syn. Corbula fragilis Hinds. ] Aloidis luteola (Carpenter)—25 fathoms off Carmel, in sand; a single specimen. Syn. Corbula luteola Carpenter. SAXICAVIDAE Panope generosa Gould—Beach at Del Monte (Gordon); Elkhorn Slough (Ricketts). A young dead specimen, 15 fathoms off Monterey, in sand (Smith). Scarce. Saxicava arctica (Linnaeus )—Shore to 63 fathoms, nestling in kelp holdfasts, borer holes, and other sheltered places; abundant. Saxicava pholadis (Linnaeus )—8-25 fathoms, in borer holes in shale; scarce. Saxicavella pacifica Dall—Valves in 25 fathoms off Carmel, in sand; rare. PHOLADIDAE Zirfaea pilsbryi Lowe—Elkhorn Slough, in mud; scarce. Formerly identified as 7. gabbi Tryon. Parapholas californica (Conrad)—8-25 fathoms, in shale. Also in shale boulders washed ashore at Del Monte. A large specimen in the Berry Collection measures 145x71x68 mm. *Pholadidea ovoidea (Gould )—8-25 fathoms, in shale. Common in 12 fathoms. Pholadidea parva (Tryon)—Boring in shells of the red abalone ; common. Pholadidea penita (Conrad )—8-40 fathoms, in shale; fairly common. Pholadidea penita concamerata Deshayes. There appear to be no recent authentic records of this subspecies from the region. *Pholadidea penita sagitta Dall—Found with the typical variety; abundant. According to Dr. Keen, this subspecies is the predominant form of penita in the Bay. Pholadidea rostrata (Valenciennes )—8-25 fathoms, in shale; fairly common. This species has been misidentified as the South American P. darwintit (Sowerby), which is a very different shell. 178 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. Navea subglobosa Gray—Monterey Harbor (Dall) ; boring in shells of the red abalone, fairly common (Keen) ; 10-40 fathoms in shale; common. *Xylophaga californica Bartsch—75-108 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft dark mud (USFC Sta. 4523). Xylophaga mexicana Dall—Monterey (Dall). We have not collected it. TEREDIDAE Bankia setacea (Tryon)—In wharf pilings; common. Teredo diegensis Bartsch—Elkhorn Slough (R. C. Miller). SCAPHOPODA SOLENOCONCHA DENTALIIDAE *Dentalium berryi Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 216, see pl. 3, figs. 1-4; 20-40 fathoms off Monterey, in mud and sand; scarce. Dentalium neohexagonum Sharp and Pilsbry—9-40 fathoms, in sand ; abundant. Dentalium pretiosum Sowerby—Off Monterey (Cooper) ; 20 fathoms off Carmel, in sand; rare (Smith). The Carmel specimens are longer, more slender, more widely curved, and more pointed than typical shells of this species from Puget Sound and Alaska; one has a slit on the outside of the curve, which is a feature not present in any speci- mens of D. pretiosum we have examined. They are therefore referred to pretiosum with some doubt. Cooper’s shells may have been these, or D. berryi Smith and Gordon. Dentalium rectius Carpenter—35-70 fathoms, in mud; common. Dentalium semipolitum Broderip and Sowerby—9-35 fathoms off Monterey and Pacific Grove, in coarse to fine sand; scarce. Although the original description calls for “no notch or slit,” several adult specimens we have examined have a prominent notch at the apex on the outside of the curve; young shells occasionally have a deep narrow slit. These occur together with specimens having no notch. Therefore, we believe that D. hannai Baker, proposed for shells differing from D. semipolitum only in the notch, is synonymous with the latter species. Dentalium vallicolens Raymond—161-265 fathoms off Point Pinos, in mud (USFC Sta. 4462) ; a fragment. Cadulus fusiformis Pilsbry and Sharp—10-40 fathoms, in sand; abundant. Cadulus hepburni Dall—43-45 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in soft green mud (USFC Stas. 4482, 4483) ; 80 fathoms off Point Pinos, a single specimen (Gordon). Scarce. Cadulus perpusillus (Sowerby )—36-69 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft green and dark gray mud and rocks (USFC Stas. 4464, 4483) ; scarce. Cadulus tolmiet Dall—627 fathoms off Monterey, in blue mud (USFC Sta. 3128) ; rare. GASTROPODA PTEROPODA SPIRATELLIDAE *Spiratella pacifica (Dall)—Pelagic. Monterey, dead on the beach, 1866 (Dall). CAVOLINIDAE Cavolina tricuspida (Rivers)—Pelagic. Occasionally found on shore after winter storms. Syn. C. occidentalis Dall. CYMBULIIDAE Corolla spectabilis Dall—Pelagic. Monterey (Dall). Corolla vitrea (Heath and Spaulding )—According to Heath (1901), a large number of Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 179 individuals of this species were taken at or near the surface of Monterey Bay and twice since that time (December 27, 1900) great shoals have been noted in the same locality. Syn. Cymbuliopsis vitrea Heath and Spaulding. PNEU MODERM ATIDAE *Pneumoderma pacifica Dall—Pelagic off the coast (Dall). OpISTHOBRANCHIATA ACTEONIDAE *Acteon punctocaelata (Carpenter )—3-25 fathoms, in sand; common. Microglyphis breviculus Dall—66-73 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4552) ; rare. ACTEOCINIDAE Acteocina culcitella (Gould )—10-25 fathoms, in sand; scarce. Acteocina culcitella intermedia Willett—10-30 fathoms, in sand; common. Acteocina eximia (Baird)—20-158 fathoms, in mud and fine sand; fairly common. [ Acteocina inculta (Gould)—Monterey (Dall). This record is based on a worn specimen of Retusa harpa (Dall).] *Retusa harpa (Dall)—10-40 fathoms, in fine sand and mud; common. Found frequently in beach drift. *Retusa montereyensis Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 217; see pl. 3, fig. 11; 15 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand ; 25 fathoms off Pacific Grove; rare. Volvulella californica Dall—45 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4483) ; 298 fathoms off Point Sur, in mud and yellow sand (USFC Sta. 3187) ; rare. V olvulella cooperi Dall—Point Sur (Dall). Volvulella cylindrica (Carpenter )—15-63 fathoms, in sand and mud; scarce. DIAPHANIDAE Diaphana californica Dall—10-25 fathoms, in sand and kelp holdfasts; rare (Smith). [Cylichna alba (Brown)—Monterey (Dall). Probably the following, as we have seen only one species of Cylichna from the Monterey region. ] Cylichna attonsa (Carpenter)—10-40 fathoms, in sand and mud; common. Until better evidence is at hand we are tentatively referring the common Monterey shell to this species. AKERIDAE Haminoea vesicula (Gould)—Elkhorn Slough; seasonally abundant. Santa Cruz, living in Soquel Creek estuary (Cooper). GASTROPTERIDAE Gastropteron pacificum Bergh—Dredged in Monterey Bay; rare (MacFarland). AGLAJIDAE Navanax inermis (Cooper)—Elkhorn Slough; rare (McGinitie). Aglaja diomedea (Bergh)—Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). APLYSIIDAE Tethys californicus (Cooper )—Shore to 5 fathoms, on kelp. Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). Tethys californicus (subspecies?)—According to Berry, a small red form, very different from the shore form in appearance, was dredged by him in 12 fathoms. It may prove to be distinct. Phyllaplysia taylori Dall—On eel-grass of the genus Zostera, near Monterey (McFar- land) ; Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). 180 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH Ser. PLEUROBRANCHIDAE Pleurobranchus californicus Dall—Pacific Grove, at low tide under rocks; rare (Smith). Pleurobranchaea (species? )—Dredged (MacFarland). NUDIBRANCHIATA DUVAUCELIIDAE *Duvaucelia exsulans (Bergh)—Dredged off Afio Nuevo Point and in Monterey Bay (MacFarland). *Duvaucelia (Tritonia) festiva (Stearns)—Monterey to Point Lobos and Point Sur (MacFarland). Point Pinos (Stearns, Costello). Duvaucelia tetraquetra (Pallas)—Dredged in Monterey Bay (MacFarland). POLY CERIDAE *Aegirus (Aegires) albopunctatus MacFarland—Monterey to Point Lobos (MacFarland) ; low tide at Pacific Grove (Berry) ; extreme low water, on stones, at Santa Cruz (Cooper). *Laila cockerelli MacFarland—Cabrillo Point; Point Aulon; Point Pinos to Point Lobos; scarce (MacFarland). *Triopha carpenteri (Stearns)—Monterey to Point Sur; common in tide pools (MacFar- land) ; Point Pinos (Stearns) ; common on brown kelp (Costello). Triopha catalinae Cooper—Santa Cruz; rare on stones at extreme low water (Cooper). Not reported by MacFarland. *Triopha grandis MacFarland—Cabrillo Point to Point Sur, on kelp beds of the genus Macrocystis off shore along the coast (MacFarland). *Triopha maculata MacFarland—Cabrillo Point to Point Lobos; common in rocky tide pools along the coast (MacFarland). *Polycera atra MacFarland—Cabrillo Point; abundant. Also common from Point Pinos to Cypress Point (MacFarland). *Acanthodoris brunnea MacFarland—5-10 fathoms off Monterey; scarce (MacFarland). 12 fathoms off Del Monte (Berry). *Acanthodoris hudsoni MacFarland—Point Pinos; rare in tide pools at extreme fom water (MacFarland). *Ancula pacifica MacFarland—In tide pools at Cabrillo Point, Point Pinos, Cypress Point, and Point Lobos; rare (MacFarland). *Hopkinsia rosacea MacFarland—Common in tide pools at Cabrillo Point, Point Pinos, Cypress Point, and Point Lobos (MacFarland). CORAMBIDAE *Corambe pacifica MacFarland and O’Donoghue—Common off Monterey and Pacific Grove, on brown kelp bearing colonies of the bryozoan Membranipora villosa Hincks (MacFarland). DORIDIDAE *Cadlina flavomaculata MacFarland—Cabrillo Point to Pescadero Point; scarce. (Mac- Farland, Costello). *Cadlina marginata MacFarland—In tide pools all along the coast from Cabrillo Point to beyond Point Lobos, scarce (MacFarland) ; shore to 25 fathoms (Berry). Glossodoris (Chromodoris) californiensis (Bergh)—Point Pinos, very rare (MacFar- land) ; fairly common in tide pools near Monterey (Snook and Johnson). *Glossodoris (Chromodoris) porterae (Cockerell)—Point Pinos; rare (MacFarland). *Rostanga pulchra MacFarland—Abundant at Cabrillo Point, Point Aulon, and Point Pinos; less so at Cypress Point, Pescadero Point, and Point Lobos (MacFarland). Vo. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 181 Aldisa sanguinea (Cooper)—Common in rocky tide pools from Monterey to Point Lobos (MacFarland). *Archidoris montereyensis (Cooper)—Abundant in tide pools and on wharf piles (Mac- Farland). 7 fathoms on rock (Cooper). 25 fathoms (Berry). *Anisodoris nobilis (MacFarland)—Abundant in tide pools all along the shore of Monterey Bay, and to the northward and southward (MacFarland). Diaulula sandiegensis (Cooper)—Common in tide pools (MacFarland). *Discodoris heathi MacFarland—Scarce in tide pools at Cabrillo Point, Point Pinos, Pes- cadero Point, and Cypress Point (MacFarland). *Dendrodoris (Doriopsis) fulva (MacFarland)—Common all along the coast in rocky tide pools (MacFarland). Shore to 25 fathoms (Berry). ARMINIDAE Armina (Pleurophyllidia) californica (Bergh)—Dredged off Monterey on sandy bottom (MacFarland). DIRONIDAE *Dirona albolineata MacFarland—Cabrillo Point and Point Pinos, in rocky tide pools; rare. *Dirona picta MacFarland—Common in rocky tide pools from Monterey to Point Sur (MacFarland). DENDRONOTIDAE Dendronotus giganteus O’Donoghue—Dredged in deep water at various stations in Monterey Bay (MacFarland). FIMBRIIDAE Melibe leonina (Gould)—On kelp beds; scarce. (MacFarland, Fewkes). HANCOCKIIDAE *Hancockia californica MacFarland—Common at Cabrillo Point; less so at Point Pinos and Cypress Point (MacFarland). FLABELLINIDAE Flabellina iodinea (Cooper)—On wharf piles at Monterey and in rocky tide pools at Cabrillo Point and Point Pinos; scarce (MacFarland) ; rare on algae at extreme low water at Santa Cruz (Cooper). FIONIDAE Fiona pinnata (Eschscholtz)—On driftwood bearing cirripede colonies in Monterey Bay and the open ocean (MacFarland). AEOLIDIIDAE Hermissenda crassicornis (Eschscholtz)—Common on wharf piles, old boat hulls, and in tide pools in Monterey Bay and all along the coast (MacFarland) ; Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). Aeolidia hercules Bergh—On sea anemone beds near the mouth of Waddell Creek, north of Santa Cruz; tide pools in Monterey Bay, south to Point Sur and beyond (MacFar- land). Elkhorn Slough (McGinitie). This may be A. papillosa (Linnaeus) according to MacFarland. PULMONATA ELLOBIIDAE Phytia setifer (Cooper )—Elkhorn Slough, 2 miles above the highway bridge, in Salicornia; abundant (Hanna). Melampus olivaceus Carpenter—Mouth of the Salinas River (Dall). We have not collected it and have seen no specimens from this locality. There is a possibility that it may be found living in Elkhorn Slough. 182 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H SER. TRIMUSCULIDAE (GADINTIDAE) Trimusculus reticulatus (Sowerby)—Low tide, under rocks; scarce. Also large colonies on the roofs of caves exposed at low tide between Point Pinos and Point Lobos. Syn. Gadinea reticulata (Sowerby). SIPHONARIIDAE Williamia peltoides (Carpenter )—Below low tide mark. Living in 10-12 fathoms; scarce. (Berry, Smith). *Williamia vernalis (Dall)—Low tide to 12 fathoms, on rocks and shale fragments ; fairly common. Also common in beach drift. CTENOBRANCHIATA CONIDAE Conus californicus Hinds—Low tide, in sand pockets among rocks, to 15 fathoms; scarce. TURRIDAE Megasurcula carpenteriana (Gabb)—12-204 fathoms, in mud and fine sand; fairly common. *Megasurcula granti Bartsch—Monterey, Stearns Collection (Bartsch). Megasurcula stearnsiana (Raymond )—20-55 fathoms, in mud; rare. In the Berry Col- lection is a splendid specimen from 20 fathoms off the Hopkins Marine Laboratory measuring 64.1 x 25.3 mm. (SSB No. 1991). Megasurcula tremperiana (Dall)—Occurs with M. carpenteriana and may be only a variant of it. Its relationship to MW. granti may be very close. *Jrenosyrinx amycus (Dall)—795-871 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard gray sand (USFC Sta. 4538) ; rare. Syn. Leucosyrinx amycus Dall. [Ophiodermella halcyonis (Dall)—Monterey (Dall). See O. montereyensis Bartsch. Syn. Clathrodrillia halcyonis (Dall).] *Ophiodermella montereyensis Bartsch—Type from 13 fathoms, in fine sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3134) ; also 13-19 fathoms, on sand and mud and rock bottom (USFC Stas. 3138, 3142) ; 3 specimens. 10-50 fathoms, in sand; scarce. Shells from Monterey Bay identified as O. halcyonis (Dall) probably belong to this species. Ophiodermella ophioderma (Dall)—From depths between 5 and 12 fathoms we have dredged specimens that do not appear to differ in any marked particulars from those collected in the San Pedro region. Santa Cruz (Cooper). It is scarce in the Bay. Syn. Clathrodrillia incisa ophioderma Dall. [Pseudomelatoma moesta (Carpenter)—Monterey (Dall). Bartsch states there is no specimen from Monterey in the National Museum. The record needs confirming. ] *Pseudomelatoma torosa (Carpenter )—Low tide to 35 fathoms, on rocks; scarce in shallow water but fairly common on the shale at 35 fathoms. Santa Cruz (Cooper). Includes the color form P. t. aurantia (Carpenter). *Crassispira montereyensis (Stearns)—Below low tide mark, in rock crevices and kelp holdfasts; rare. *Carinoturris adrastia (Dall)—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 3670) ; rare. Syn. Cryptogemma adrastia Dall. *Carinoturris fortis (Bartsch)—Type specimen from 298 fathoms, in yellow sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3187). Known only from the type. *Rhodopetoma amycus (Dall)—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 3670) ; known only from the type specimen. Syn. Antiplanes amycus (Dall). *Antiplanes diomedea Bartsch—328 fathoms off Point Sur, in black sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3186). Known only from the type specimen. Antiplanes major Bartsch—43-278 fathoms off Point Aftio Nuevo and at several stations Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 183 in Monterey Bay, on bottoms composed of various grades of mud and sand (USFC Stas. 3115, 3129, 3147, 3666, 3669, 4483). Sometimes taken on a clay or gravel bottom. About 200 fathoms, 14 miles off Davenport, Santa Cruz County, brought up by set- line fishermen, whose hooks occasionally snag a species of sea anemone growing on the shell (Strohbeen). Appears to be fairly common in depths between 50 and 75 fathoms. [Antiplanes perversa (Gabb)—As now considered by Bartsch, this species has so far only been dredged off Catalina Island. Records of A. perversa from Monterey Bay should probably be referred to the preceding species. ] Antiplanes profundicola Bartsch—659 fathoms off Point Sur, in green mud (USFC Sta. 5699) ; two specimens. [Rectiplanes santarosana (Dall)—Point Sur (Dall). The shells on which this record is based could not be found in the National Museum and according to Bartsch it is doubtful, at best, for this southern California species. Syn. Antiplanes santarosana (Dall).] *Borsonella pinosensis Bartsch—40-50 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and fine sand (USFC Stas. 4452, 4457) ; 3 specimens. *Propebela casentina (Dall)—795-871 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard gray sand (USFC Sta. 4538) ; rare. Syn. Lora casentina Dall. *Propebela diomedea Bartsch—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, Monterey Bay, in mud (USFC Sta. 3670); type and three topotypes. Recorded from Monterey by Dall as Lora exarata (Moller). *Propebela monterealis (Dall)—With the preceding species; rare. Syn. Lora monterealis Dall. *Propebela pitysa (Dall)—66-73 off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4552); 4 specimens. (Syn. Lora pitysa Dall). *Propebela profundicola Bartsch—Type specimens from 871 fathoms off Point Pinos, on gray sand and rock bottom (USFC Sta. 4538). Listed from Monterey Bay as Lora popovia Dall, which is now considered as strictly Aleutian by Bartsch. *Propebela smithi Bartsch—Type specimen from 293-386 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4508). Known only from the type. *Propedcla surana (Dall)—298 fathoms off Point Sur, in yellow sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3187); 6 specimens. Syn. Lora surana Dall. [Propebela tabulata (Carpenter)—Monterey (Dall). Except for three beach-worn specimens, which Dall labeled as having been collected by him at Monterey, this species is not known to have been collected south of Neah Bay. We suspect Dall’s shells did not come from Monterey. Syn. Lora tabulata (Carpenter).] Glyphostoma cymodoce Dall—80 fathoms, in mud and gravel; one specimen (Gordon). In the National Museum are two lots from Monterey Bay collected by Cooper (6 specimens) and from the Stearns Collection (4 specimens). *Glyphostoma canfieldi (Dall)—At low tide, in rocky pockets in sand among eel-grass roots, Pacific Grove and Point Pinos. Syn. Philbertia canfieldi (Dall). Glyphostoma hesione (Dall)—Point Pinos (Dall). According to Bartsch there are no specimens from Monterey in the National Museum. Its occurrence in the Monterey fauna needs confirming. Syn. Philbertia hesione Dall. *Kurtsia gordoni Bartsch—10-20 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. Type and 3 topo- types from 43-46 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in green mud (USFC Sta. 4482). 40-158 fathoms off Santa Cruz and Point Pinos, generally on mud bottom (USFC Stas. 4457, 4464, 4475, 4483); 9 specimens. Shells of this species from Monterey have been identified by Dall and others as Mangelia arteaga roperi Dall. *Kurtzina beta (Dall)—Type dredged in 56 fathoms off Point Ano Nuevo, in brown mud (USFC Sta. 3147) ; 40-46 fathoms off Point Pinos, in dark green mud (USFC Sta. 4457), 1 specimen; 60 fathoms off Point Pinos in soft dark gray mud (USFC 184 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Sta. 4464), 2 specimens. Taken rarely in 40 fathoms, in mud or on a sand bottom. Syn. Mangelia beta Dall. Mangelia barbarensis Oldroyd—10-50 fathoms, in mud and sand; common. Syn. M. angulata Carpenter. Mangelia hecetae Dall and Bartsch—10-15 fathoms, in sand; rare. There is one lot in the National Museum from Monterey. Originally, we identified these shells as M. crebricostata Carpenter, but Dr. Bartsch believes they belong under M. hecetae. *Mangelia interlirata Stearns—Beach drift and at low tide; occasional. [Mangelia levidensis Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). This should be considered a doubt- ful record, as Bartsch states there are no specimens in the National Museum from Monterey. | *Mangelia perattenuata Dall—10-45 fathoms, in mud (Woodworth). Known only from the type, which is a badly worn shell. *Mangelia philodice Dall—65-71 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, sand, and gravel (USFC Sta. 4454); rare. Mangelia variegata Carpenter—Below low tide mark. Syns. M. pulchrior Dall; M. nitens Carpenter. Cytharella hexagona (Gabb)—10-20 fathoms, in sand, off Monterey; rare. Carmel Bay (Cooper). [Cytharella merita (Hinds)—Monterey (Dall). This record is probably an error as the species is found farther to the south. ] . *Daphnella fuscoligata Dall—5-15 fathoms, in rocky and shale crevices; also in kelp holdfasts and in the beach drift; rare. Syn. Mangelia (Mitromorpha) crassaspera Grant and Gale. CANCELLARIIDAE Cancellaria cooperi Gabb—15-300 fathoms, in mud; rare. Recently Mr. John Strohbeen has obtained nearly a dozen specimens from fishermen operating set-lines for sable fish in about 200 fathoms off Davenport, Santa Cruz County. The living shells are occasionally brought up when a species of sea anemone that grows on them, appar- ently attaches itself to the bait. This is one of the most striking and sought after species in the Bay. Cancellaria crawfordiana Dall—50-70 fathoms, in mud; scarce. Admete couthouyi (Jay)—45 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4483) ; 52-59 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud (USFC Sta. 4446) ; rare. Admete couthouyi (subspecies? )—394-406 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4514). The deep-water form has much finer sculpture than the preceding, approaching A. middendorffiana Dall; rare. Admete rhyssa Dall—65-71 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, sand, and gravel (USFC Sta. 4554); rare. Although labeled A. californica (Dall), this lot in the U. S. National Museum appears to be A. rhyssa. *Admete woodworthi Dall—l0-45 fathoms (Woodworth). Also 50 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and fine sand (USFC Sta. 4552). Evidently a rare species as we have not dredged it in the Bay. OLIVIDAE Olivella biplicata (Sowerby)—In colonies at low tide, in sand; abundant. Dredged "down to about 20 fathoms (Burch). Olivella baetica Carpenter—5-40 fathoms in Monterey and Carmel Bays, in sand; common. In older collections, shells of this species were often labeled O. pedroana Conrad. Following T. S. Oldroyd’s classification (Nautilus, 34(4) :117) they would be called O. baetica diegensis T. S. Oldroyd. Large shells, typical of O. baetica from Alaska, have not been reported from Monterey. VoL. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY ‘185 {Olivella pedroana (Conrad)—This species was based on a Pleistocene fossil from San Pedro. As the type has been lost it appears to be unidentifiable and so we are elimi- nating it from this list as an authentic species found within the Monterey region. We are referring shells formerly called O. pedroana to O. baetica Carpenter. Study of a series of Olivellas from the San Pedro Pleistocene in the Academy’s collection leads us to the suspicion that O. pycna Berry and O. pedroana (Conrad) may be synonymous. ] Olivella pycna Berry—Living at low tide, in sand, on the beach below “Pop Ernest’s” famous restaurant at Monterey (D. S. and E. W. Gifford) ; 10-15 fathoms in sand, Monterey Bay; 20 fathoms, in sand, Carmel Bay; fairly common. This is the species that has sometimes been labeled O. intorta Carpenter, which is a Mexican shell. MARGINELLIDAE Marginella jewettii Carpenter—Beach drift; common. Living shells rarely found in small colonies, in sand, at the roots of eel-grass among rocks at low tide. Dredged down to 20 fathoms. Marginella regularis Carpenter—Shore to 20 fathoms, living on or under rocks; fairly common. Marginella subtrigona Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). Beach drift at Pacific Grove (Smith). , Cypraecolina pyriformis (Carpenter)—In tide pools and at low tide in algae and sea mosses; abundant. Dredged down to about 40 fathoms (Burch). VOLUTIDAE LScaphella arnheimi Rivers—According to Dall (U. S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 59, 1909, p. 210) “the shell is really from Magellan Straits” and in an unpublished note by him in the National Museum it is stated that a specimen of S. magellanica (Sowerby), dredged by the Albatross in the Straits of Magellan, was stolen by a sailor and sold to J. J. Rivers as a Monterey Bay shell. Rivers mistakenly described it as new. The specimen was destroyed in the San Francisco fire of 1906.] MITRIDAE *Mitra montereyi Berry—Dead shells rare in beach drift. Living specimens dredged from 5-40 fathoms, on shale; scarce. The southern analog of this species is M. idae Melvill, which has a slenderer shell with somewhat rougher sculpture. *Mitromorpha aspera (Carpenter )—Shore to 15 fathoms, on rocks, in shale fragments, and in beach drift; fairly common. May include M. interfossa (Carpenter). Mitromorpha filosa (Carpenter)—At low tide, under rocks; rare. *Mitromorpha gracilior (Tryon)—Low tide to 15 fathoms; common. Syn. M. inter- media Arnold. PTYCHATRACTIDAE Ptychatractus californicus Dall—36-51 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft dark gray mud (USFC Sta. 4464) ; one young specimen. *Metzgeria montereyana Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 218; see pl. 3, fig. 6; 15 fathoms, in fine sand and shale fragments, off Del Monte. Known only from the type specimen. FUSINIDAE Fusinus barbarensis (Trask)—63-80 fathoms, in gravel; scarce. [Fusinus kobelti (Dall)—Monterey (Dall). This record, based on an immature living specimen collected by Stearns, is subject to doubt. We have not seen this species from the Bay.] 186 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. *Fusinus luteopictus (Dall)—Low tide, under rocks, to 15 fathoms; fairly common but not nearly so abundant as in southern California and seems near to the northern end of its range. Fusinus monksae Dall—8-35 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale; fairly common. There is a question whether shells from Monterey Bay usually so named are really F. monksae or a new species. Syn. F. robustus (Trask). NEPTUNEIDAE (CHRYSODOMIDAE) [Macron lividus (A. Adams)—4 specimens of this southern California species in the National Museum are labeled as coming from Monterey. We have never taken it and regard the record as extremely doubtful. | Mohnia vernalis Dall—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand GUSEC Sta. 3670)" ‘rare: Exilioidia rectirostris (Carpenter )—389-456 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud (USFC Sta. 4513); rare. Syn. Evvilia rectirostris (Carpenter). Plictfusus griseus Dall—381-633 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and sand (USFC Stas. 4513, 4541); scarce. Colus aphelus (Dall)—750-766 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 4517) ; one specimen. Colus clementinus Dall—627 fathoms off Point Pinos, in blue mud (USFC Sta. 3128) ; rare. Colus georgianus Dall—750-766 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 4517) ; rare. Colus halidonus Dall—331-633 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard sand and green mud (USFC Stas. 4541, 4542) ; rare. Colus jordani (Dall) —633 fathoms (Dall). In the National Museum there is a single specimen from 381-633 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 4541), and a lot of four specimens from 581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and fine sand (USFC Sta. 3670), under this name. They prob- ably represent a new species, allied to but not identical with C. jordani. *Colus severinus (Dall)—278 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and fine sand (USFC Sta. 3669) ; 296 fathoms off Point Afio Nuevo, in fine gray sand @USE@ ‘Sta. 3112) scarce: Colus trophius (Dall)—750-766 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 4517) ; rare. Neptunea amianta Dall—One dead specimen in 42 fathoms off Pigeon Point (Bolin) ; 278-871 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and various grades of sand (USFC Stas. 3127, 3669, 3670, 4513, 4517, 4538); fairly common. About 200 fathoms, 14 miles off Davenport, Santa Cruz County, brought up by set-line fishermen; about ten specimens of all sizes (Strohbeen). *Neptunea ithia Dall—204-382 fathoms off Point Sur, Point Pinos, and mouth of Salinas River, in green and soft gray mud and black and fine sand (USFC Stas. 3186, 3202, 3669, 4526); scarce. Brought up by set-line fishermen with the preceding species; about a dozen specimens (Strohbeen). Neptunea lirata (Martyn)—755-847 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft gray mud (USFC Sta. 4530); one immature specimen. Neptunea tabulata (Baird)—Worn shell from the beach at Seaside; 50-80 fathoms off Moss Landing, in mud, clay, and gravel; 202 fathoms off Watsonville Beach, in black sand (USFC Sta. 3204). Brought up by set-line fishermen; 15 specimens (Strohbeen). Scarce. Searlesia dira (Reeve)—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s very worn dead specimen in the National Museum is the only record from the Bay. We have not taken it there or Voi. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 187 elsewhere in the Monterey region, although it occurs a few miles north of Pigeon Point. BUCCINIDAE Buccinum strigillatum Dall—278 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 3669); one specimen. Buccinum viridum Dall—331-871 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, principally in green mud but occasionally on a sand bottom USEC. Stas. 3670; 4513, 4514, 4516, 4517, 4538, 4540, 4541, 4542) ; common. NASSARIIDAE (ALECTRIONIDAE) Nassarius californianus (Conrad)—30-40 fathoms off Moss Landing and Soquel Point, in mud and sand; rare. Nassarius cooperi (Forbes)—3-25 fathoms, in sand; abundant. Nassarius fossatus (Gould)—Elkhorn Slough, common; 10 fathoms off Monterey, in sand, rare. : Nassarius insculptus (Carpenter )—40-73 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, sand, and gravel (USFC Stas. 4452, 4454, 4457); scarce. Nassarius mendicus (Gould)—With N. cooperi; abundant. Nassarius perpinguis (Hinds)—5-25 fathoms, in sand; common. PYRENIDAE (COLUMBELLIDAE) Anachis penicillata Carpenter—Monterey (Cooper). We have not taken it although the range of this species has been extended as far north as Pescadero (Smith). *Mitrella aurantiaca Dall—At low tide, on rocks and among sea mosses; scarce. Mitrella carinata (Hinds)—Shore to 15 fathoms, on rocks and kelp; common. Mitrella carinata californiana (Reeve)—With the preceding, but more plentiful. Mitrella carinata hindsti (Reeve)—With carinata; less common. Mitrella gausapata Gould—With carinata; abundant. Mitrella gouldii (Carpenter )—39-356 fathoms off Point Pinos, mouth of Salinas River, and Sania Cruz, in soft green and dark gray mud, sand, and shells (USFC Stas. 3666, 4475, 4485, 4508, 4522, 4523); fairly common. This and M. Iutulenta were formerly placed in the genus Nitidella. Mitrella hypodra Dall—One beach-worn specimen at Monterey (Dall). Mitrella lutulenta (Dall)—10-73 fathoms, in mud and fine sand; common. This species is separated with some difficulty from M. gouldii on the basis of smaller size and shorter spire. Mitrella tuberosa (Carpenter)—Shore to 20 fathoms, in sand and rocks. Santa Cruz, living at low water (Cooper). Specimens dredged in abundance off Monterey have transverse finlike ridges of epidermis on the body whorl. [*Aesopus goforthi Dall—Monterey? (Goforth). We suspect that Goforth’s single specimen of questioned locality came from more southern waters. | *Amphissa bicolor Dall—66-356 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in soft green and gray mud and sand (USFCE Stas. 3666, 4462, 4508, 4509, 4526, 4552) ; common. Also 298 fathoms off Point Sur, in yellow sand and mud (USFC Sta. 3187), which is the locality of the figured type. Amphissa columbiana Dall—A large form of Amphissa, which is definitely not A. versi- color Dall, is found rarely under rocks at low tide. It is provisionally referred to columbiana, although it is quite different from typical northern shells of this species. Amphissa reticulata Dall—10-60 fathoms, in sand and mud; scarce. The relationship between this species and A. versicolor incisa Dall seems close. *Amphissa versicolor Dall—Shore to 15 fathoms, on rocks; abundant at low tide. Two color varieties, described as A. v. cymata Dall and A. v. lineata Stearns, are also 188 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Ser. found occasionally. Many other color forms of this handsome little species could be named from Monterey but they would have small scientific validity. Ampbhissa versicolor incisa Dall—10-12 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand and shale frag- ments; rare. Amphissa undata (Carpenter )—15-40 fathoms, in sand; scarce. MURICIDAE *Murex carpenterit (Dall)—7-35 fathoms, on shale, off Pacific Grove, Monterey, and Del Monte; fairly common. This is the shell that some collectors have been calling M. petri Dall, although the true petri (Syn. M. rhyssus Dall) is a southern species not certainly reported from the Montery region. Murex tremperi Dall—With the preceding species, but scarce. There has been much confusion between this species and M. carpenteri owing to Dall’s error in figuring a San Diego specimen as carpenteri. Monterey Bay specimens of tremperi are less delicately frilled and larger than carpenteri. From southern California shells of this species they differ by being more imbricate and the varices have frequent and more pointed digitations, which are often strongly recurved at the tips. The name trem- pert was proposed by Dall for a banded color variety of the southern California form, the types of which are in the California Academy’s collection. Syn. M. car- penteri tremperi Dall. Purpura foliata Martyn—Shore at low tide, among rocks under kelp, to 15 fathoms; fairly common. Dredged specimens are beautifully frilled, of which there are several in one of the main cases of the Pacific Grove Museum. [Purpura nuttalli (Conrad)—Recorded from Monterey by Dall and Berry. The latter now states that his shell is undoubtedly a form of P. foliata (Martyn). We have not seen specimens of true nuttalli from the Monterey region and consider the record to be an exceedingly doubtful one. ] Ocenebra barbarensis (Gabb)—10-40 fathoms, on shale fragments; scarce. The group of species listed under Ocenebra have previously been described under Ocmebra (mistake in spelling) and Tvritonalia. *Ocenehra beta (Dall)—8-35 fathoms on rocks and shale; common. Specimens sub- mitted to the National Museum for comparison with the type establish its identity as beta instead of a new species as previously supposed. It is the shallow water analog of O. barbarensis, from which it differs mainly, in its heavier shell, with shorter spire and canal. It is not related to O. interfossa (Carpenter), although described as a subspecies of it. *Ocencbra circumtexta Stearns—Between tides, on rocks, especially those a short dis- tance off shore; common. [Ocenebra foveolata (Hinds)—Monterey (Dall). Whether typical foveolata actually occurs in the Monterey region seems to depend on the range of variation allowed the species. As we have not collected adult shells identical with the usual southern California form, we are provisionally assigning the Monterey shells of this group to O. fusconotata (Dall).] *Ocenebra fusconotata (Dall)—3-15 fathoms, on rocks and in shale and kelp holdfasts ; scarce. Differs from foveolata in its smaller size, brown markings on a ground color of dirty white, and in being more strongly imbricate and elegantly sculptured. Ocenebra gracillima Stearns—Between tides, on rocks; scarce. Monterey specimens have coarser sculpture than is found on shells of this species collected in southern Cali- fornia. They were described as O. stearnsi Hemphill, which becomes a synonym of gracillima. O. gracillima obesa (Dall), also reported from Monterey, appears to be of doubtful taxonomic value. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 189 Fic. 1. Ocenebra beta (Dall). Hypotype. C.A.S. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8563. Length, 15.8; max. diam., 9.0 mm. (G. D. Hanna, del.) *Ocenebra interfossa Carpenter—Shore at moderately low tide, to 10 fathoms, under rocks; commonest of the ocenebras in the Bay. Carpenter’s type, in the National Museum, came from Monterey. Ocenebra interfossa clathrata (Dall)—Shore to 15 fathoms, on shale. From a study of a large growth series, Berry believes this to be a separate species. Ocenebra lurida aspera (Baird)—Low tide to 10 fathoms, on granite boulders and other rocks; abundant. Monterey shells of this subspecies are not as large or as heavily sculptured as specimens from northern localities. They are brilliantly colored, with yellow and red-brown predominating. There is a possibility that Baird’s sub- species is a synonym of the typical form and hence we use his name provisionally for shells from the Monterey region. O. lurida rotunda (Dall), found occassionally with aspera, is considered to be a variant without real subspecific standing. Ocenebra lurida munda (Carpenter)—Low tide to 10 fathoms, found with the pre- ceding but much less common. Ocenebra subangulata (Stearns)—Shore, on granite rocks, to 15 fathoms, on shale; rare. Comparison of Monterey and other northern California specimens with typical shells of O. michaeli from Cayucos shows no appreciable differences. Syn. O. michaeli Ford. Urosalpinx cinereus (Say)—Elkhorn Slough; fairly common. Introduced with seed oysters from the Atlantic Coast. Boreotrophon avalonensis (Dall)—Monterey Bay, in 40 fathoms (Burch). Boreotrophon calliceratus (Dall)—65-71 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, sand, and gravel (USFC Sta. 4454) ; one specimen. This is more robust than those from the original lot and strongly resembles B. triangulatus (Carpenter). [Boreotrophon multicostatus (Eschscholtz)—20 fathoms (Cooper). As this northern species has not been reported from the Bay in recent years, we believe Cooper’s shells were another species, possibly B. triangulatus (Carpenter).] Boreotrophon smithi (Dall)—46-71 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, sand, shells and rocks (USFC Stas. 4535, 4551, 4555, scarce; 75 fathoms off Santa Cruz, with Laqueus californianus (Koch) on rock (Bolin). A single specimen with rather high spire from the beach at Point Pinos (Sorensen). 190 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. Boreotrophon stuarti (E. A. Smith)—202 fathoms off Watsonville Beach, in black sand (USFC Sta. 3204) ; rare. Boreotrophon triangulatus (Carpenter )—20-40 fathoms, on shale; scarce. Syn. B. pere- grinus (Dall). *Trophonopsis lasius (Dall)—152-495 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, coarse sand, and shells (USFC Stas. 4509, 4515); scarce. Trophonopsis tripherus (Dall)—581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas ee in green mud and sand (USFC Sta. 3670) ; rare. *Thais canaliculata compressa Dall—Scarce between tides, on rocks along the ocean front, but common under beds of mussels exposed at low tide at the tips of Point Pinos, and Pescadero, and Carmelo Points. Thais emarginata (Deshayes)—On rocks, between tides; abundant. Unusually large and fine shells of this species, varying in color and sculpture, are to be found nearly everywhere. Thais emarginata ostrina (Gould)—Between tides, on rocks along the ocean front; common. Thais lamellosa (Gmelin)—Common on the beach at the mouth of Scott Creek, 15 miles north of Santa Cruz (Mr. and Mrs. Harry Turver). Not recorded from Monterey Bay or the ocean front of the Monterey Peninsula. The Scott Creek shells are probably the subspecies franciscana Dall. [Thais lima (Martyn)—Monterey (Dall, Berry). We have not collected this Alaskan species at Monterey and suspect that the published records of it there are based on misidentifications of T. canaliculata compressa Dall or one of the numerous varia- tions of T. emarginata (Deshayes).] Acanthina spirata (Blainville)—On rocks between tides at Monterey, Elkhorn Slough, Santa Cruz and elsewhere; scarce. The color form A. s. awrantia Dall is found rarely. Acanthina spirata punctulata (Sowerby)—On rocks between tides; abundant. It does not intergrade with the preceding species in the Bay. Formerly identified as A. lapilloides (Conrad). EPITONIIDAE Opalia chacei (Strong)—Below low tide mark, under granite boulders, scarce. Also in the beach drift. California shells incorrectly identified in collections as O. wroblewskyi Morch) or O. borealis (Gould) belong to this species. Opalia evicta (de Boury)—On shore in beach drift to 35 fathoms, on shale; scarce. *Opalia montereyensis (Dall)—25 fathoms off Del Monte, in mud; two specimens (Berry). Strong, Nautilus, 51(1) :6, states that this species may prove to be identical with O. evicta (de Boury), in which case the latter will become a synonym of montereyensis. Epitonium (Dentiscala) insculptum (Carpenter )—Monterey (Dall). We have not col- lected it and believe the record to be doubtful for this southern species. Syn. E. crenimarginatum (Dall). Epitonium (Asperiscala) bellastriatum (Carpenter)—10-25 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; fairly common. [Epitonium (Nodiscala) retiporosum (Carpenter)—15-25 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; rare. May be a synonym of the next species. | *Epitonium (Nodiscala) spongiosum (Carpenter )—Monterey, “shell washings” (Cooper). We have seen only one species of the subgenus Nodiscala from the California coast and are of the opinion that shells belonging to it are properly identified as spongiosum. *Epitonium (Nitidiscala) berryi (Dall)—12 fathoms off Del Monte (Berry). Apparently this is only a variety of E. rectilaminatum Dall. The type of berryi is the only known specimen from Monterey. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 191 Epitonium (Nitidiscala) columbianwm Dall—10-20 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in dark sand and rock fragments; rare (Gordon). Off Monterey in 20 fathoms, on shale (Burch). [Epitonium (Nitidiscala) cooperi Strong—Monterey (Dall). We have seen no authen- tic specimens of this southern California species from Monterey. The record needs confirming. Syn. E. fallaciosum Dall.] [Epitonium (Nitidiscala) crebricostatum (Carpenter)—Monterey (Cooper). Strong (1930) states that this species is indeterminate until a type is chosen that agrees with Carpenter’s description. He believes it to be possibly an extreme variant of E. tinctum. The reference to the type as being in the University of California “State Collection” by Oldroyd (1927, 2, 2:61) is incorrect according to Strong, as the shells probably referred to proved to be E. tinctum. The Monterey record is therefore a doubtful one. ] [Epitonium (Nitidiscala) hexagonum (Sowerby)—Santa Cruz (Dall). An extremely doubtful record for this Lower California species. Dall’s shell may have been Opalia evicta (De Boury), with which hexagonum might be confused.] Epitonium (Nitidiscala) indianorum (Carpenter)—65-71 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, sand, and gravel (USFC Sta. 4454). Although stated by Cooper to be common at Santa Cruz, living at low water, in all probability his shells were some other species, possibly E. tinctum (Carpenter). We have not collected typical indi- anorum at Monterey, either on shore or by dredging in moderately shallow depths. Epitonium (Nitidiscala) rectilaminatum (Dall)—10-15 fathoms off Monterey, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; fairly common. *Epitonium (Nitidiscala) regiomontanum Dall—10-30 fathoms off Monterey, in sand. We have not collected it. Epitonium (Nitidiscala) sawinae (Dall)—10-56 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; fairly common. Epitonium (Nitidiscala) tinctwm (Carpenter)—Shore to 10 fathoms. This is the most abundant of the ladder-shells or wentletraps in the Bay, which may be found living among colonies of the common small green sea anemone (Cribrina xanthogrammatica Brandt) on rocks between tides nearly everywhere. Syn. E. subcoronatum (Car- penter), for the shells of this species having coronate varices. *Epitonium (Crisposcala) acrostephanum Dall—34-203 fathoms, in mud, clay and gravel; scarce. Epitonium (Crisposcala) catalinae Dall—A single specimen from 21 fathoms, in mud, off Monterey (Smith). Epitonium (Crisposcala) regum Dall—Off Monterey, in 15 fathoms (Burch). Epitonium (Crisposcala) tabulatum Dall—10-25 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments, scarce; 43-44 fathoms off Santa Cruz, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4482). JANTHINIDAE Janthina bifida Reeve—Pelagic. Rarely washed ashore on sandy beaches during winter storms. Has been incorrectly called J. exigua Lamarck, which is a species originally described without locality information but generally considered to have a wide dis- tribution. Janthina globosa Swainson—With the preceding; rare (Mrs. Fackenthall). EULIMIDAE (MELANELLIDAE ) *Balcis berryi (Bartsch)—10-25 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; scarce. Balcis catalinensis (Bartsch)—25 fathoms, in sand off Carmel; rare. *Balcis delmontensis Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 219; see pl. 3, fig. 5; 10-30 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments ; not common. 192 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH Ser. Balcis micans (Carpenter)—5-25 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. Sometimes found living commensally on starfish. *Balcis montereyensis (Bartsch)—10-15 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale frag- ments; rare. Balcis oldroydi (Bartsch)—10-25 fathoms, with the above; rare. *Balvis rutila (Carpenter )—15-25 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. Occasionally found living commensally on starfish. Balcis thersites (Carpenter)—Shore to 20 fathoms, in sand, kelp holdfasts, and among small rocks and shale fragments; common. PYRA MIDELLIDAE Owing to the large number of species comprising the Pyramidellid fauna of Mon- terey Bay and vicinity, we have followed an arrangement of species in alphabetical order under subgenera. We agree with Willett (1937 :402) that in the genus Turbonilla, the subgenera Chemnitzia, Strioturbonilla, and Pyrgisculus are weakly defined, and so we follow his arrangement, which is as follows: Turbonilla (including Chemnitzia and Strioturbonilla) Pyrgolampros Pyrgiscus (including Pyrgisculus) Mormula Bartschella (including Dunkeria) Turbonillas and odostomias generally live on a bottom consisting of a fine dark sand, fragments of shale, and small pebbles or gravel. Unless the habitat of a particular species occurs in a different ecological niche, it will not be repeated in the list. Backs of abalone shells, often accumulated in large heaps on the Monterey Wharf, are an accessible and often prolific hunting ground for odostomias and other small species provided the abalone shells are reasonably fresh. Pyramidella (Longchaeus) adamsi Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). According to Dall, the single specimen in the National Museum from Monterey is much smaller and slenderer than the typical form and may prove to be a new species. We have not collected it. Turbonilla (Turbonilla) asser Dall and Bartsch—15-25 fathoms; scarce. Turbonilla (Turbonillo) cayucosensis Willett—Shore at Pacific Grove; scarce. *Turbonilla (Turbonilla) fackenthallae Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 220; see pl. 3, figs. 7, 8—Dredged in 20-30 fathoms, off Monterey; 3 specimens. *Turbonilla (Turbonilla) gabbiana (Cooper)—Monterey (Cooper). Because the type of this species has evidently been misplaced or lost, it is practically impossible now to tell just what shell Gabb described originally and Cooper subsequently renamed. We suspect, however, that it may be the same as T. cayucosensis Willett, though Gabb’s description calls for a shell with 23 axial ribs, while cayucosensis normally possesses 20 to 22. Syn. Chemmnitzia gracillima Gabb. *Turbonilla (Turbonilla) gilli delmontensis Dall and Bartsch—10-25 fathoms; rare. *Turbonilla (Turbonilla) muricatoides Dall and Bartsch—15-25 fathoms; rare. Turbonilla (Turbonilla) santarosana Dall and Bartsch—25 fathoms; rare. *Turbonilla (Turbonilla) serrae Dall and Bartsch—10-40 fathoms; common. Turbonilla (Turbonilla) stylina (Carpenter)—10-40 fathoms; fairly common. Turbonilla (Turbonilla) torquata (Gould)—10-30 fathoms; scarce. [Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) aurantia (Carpenter)—12 fathoms (Berry); Monterey (Cooper). As we have not collected this Puget Sound species at Monterey we sus- pect that these records are based on misidentifications. | [*Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) berryi Dall and Bartsch—39 fathoms off Monterey, in sand; 9-10 fathoms off Santa Cruz, on rocky bottom (USFC Sta. 4564). A study VoL. XXXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 193 of paratypes in the Berry Collection and a suite of specimens from San Pedro leads us to the conclusion that 7. berryi and T. painei Dall and Bartsch are synonyms of T. chocolata (Carpenter).] Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) chocolata (Carpenter)—Monterey Bay, 8-39 fathoms; Carmel Bay, 20 fathoms; scarce. Syns. T. berryi Dall and Bartsch and T. painei Dall and Bartsch. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) halia Dall and Bartsch—12-25 fathoms; rare. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) halibrecta Dall and Bartsch—One specimen in 10 fathoms off Del Monte (Smith). Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) halistrepta Dall and Bartsch—Two specimens from 10 fathoms off Del Monte seem referable to this species. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) lowei Dall and Bartsch—10-40 fathoms; common. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) pedroana Dall and Bartsch—10-20 fathoms; rare. *Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) skogsbergi Strong—5 miles north of Monterey in 28 fathoms, in mud. Also 5 fathoms off Capitola, in sand (W. Williams). A rare species. *Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) stillmani Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 221; see pl. 3, fig. 9; 10 fathoms off Del Monte; four specimens. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) valdezi Dall and Bartsch—Shore at Pacific Grove; rare. *Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) willetti Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 222; see pl. 3, fig. 10; 10 fathoms off Del Monte; rare. Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) almo Dall and Bartsch—5-40 fathoms; scarce. Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) antestriata Dall and Bartsch—40 fathoms, in mud (Burch). *Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) aragoni Dall and Bartsch—10-30 fathoms; scarce. *Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) canfieldi Dall and Bartsch—10-40 fathoms; fairly common. *Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) castanella Dall—10-40 fathoms; common. *Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) delmontana Bartsch—10 fathoms off Del Monte. Known only from the holotype. Syn. T. (P.) delmontensis Bartsch. Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) mérchi Dall and Bartsch—One specimen in 25 fathoms off Pacific Grove (Burch). Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) tenuicula (Gould)—Shore to 20 fathoms; scarce. Turbonilla (Mormula) tridentata (Carpenter )—10-40 fathoms; common. Also 20 fathoms in Carmel Bay. (Syn. T. ambusta Dall and Bartsch). *Turbonilla (Bartschella) bartschi Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 222; see pl. 3, fig. 13—Dredged in 25 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in sand. Known only from the type specimen. *Odostomia (Salassiella) heathi Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 223; see pl. 3, fig. 14—Dredged in 15 fathoms off Pacific Grove. Known only from the type specimen. *Odostomia (Chrysallida) astricta Dall and Bartsch—5-30 fathoms; fairly common. Odostoamia (Chrysallida) clementensis Bartsch—5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos; one specimen (Smith). *Odostonia (Chrysallida) cooperi Dall and Bartsch—Shore at Point Pinos, one speci- men (Smith) ; 10-25 fathoms; rare. Odostomia (Chrysallida) lucca Dall and Bartsch—15 fathoms off Cabrillo Point (Gordon) ; rare. *Odostomia (Chrysallida) montereyensis Dall and Bartsch—Shore to 30 fathoms; scarce. This species is very close to O. cooperi and the two may be conspecific. Odostomia (Chrysallida) oldroydi Dall and Bartsch—Shore at Cabrillo Point; 10 fathoms off Del Monte; scarce. Odostomia (Chrysallida) oregonensis Dall and Bartsch—Shore to 15 fathoms; scarce. *Odostomia (Chrysallida) ornatissima (Haas)—Washed from sand taken in a tide pool at Point Pinos; two specimens (Haas). In beach drift; rare. 194 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Ser, Odostomia (Chrysallida) trachis Dall and Bartsch—Monterey (Dall). Odostomia (Chrysallida) vicola Dall and Bartsch—Beach drift at Pacific Grove; rare. Shore at Point Pinos; one specimen (Smith). *Odostomia (Ividella) navisa delmontensis Dall and Bartsch—10-30 fathoms; rare. Odostomia (Ivara) turricula Dall and Bartsch—25 fathoms; rare. Odostomia (Iolaea) amianta Dall and Bartsch—Shore to 30 fathoms; scarce. *Odostomia (Menestho) churchi Smith and Gordon, new species—Described on p. 224; see pl. 3, fig. 12; 25 fathoms off Pacific Grove. Known only from the type specimen. *Odostomia (Menestho) exara Dall and Bartsch—Pacific Grove (Dall and Bartsch) ; 5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos; scarce (Smith). Odostomia (Evalea) angularis Dall and Bartsch—Shore to 15 fathoms; rare. Odostomia (Evalea) californica Dall and Bartsch—10-30 fathoms; fairly common. *Odostomia (Evalea) deliciosa Dall and Bartsch—10-25 fathoms; fairly common. Odostomia (Evalea) gravida Gould—Monterey (Cooper). Odostomia (Evalea) inflata Carpenter—Monterey (Cooper). Odostomia (Evalea) obesa Dall and Bartsch—Between tides; rare. *Odostomia (Evalea) phanea Dall and Bartsch—Low tide to 25 fathoms, on rocks and the backs of red abalones; common. *Odostomia (Evalea) tenuisculpta Carpenter—Shore to 15 fathoms, on rocks and the backs of red abalones; abundant. *Odostomia (Evalea) valdezi Dall and Bartsch—10-25 fathoms; scarce. *Odostomia (Amaura) canfieldi Dall—Shore, in beach drift, to 40 fathoms; scarce. Odostomia (Amaura) kennerleyi Dall and Bartsch—10-30 fathoms; fairly common. ATLANTIDAE Oxygyrus rangi (Lovén)—Pelagic off Monterey (Dall). AMPHIPERATIDAE Neosimnia barbarensis Dall—Monterey (Keep, Lowe). One specimen, over an inch long, from fishermen (Berry). According to Schilder (1931, p. 67), this shell is at least a subspecies of N. loebbeckeana (Weinkauff). Neosimnia catalinensis (Berry)—Monterey (Dall). We have not collected it. Neosimnia inflexa (Sowerby )—20-50 fathoms, on gorgonians; 12 fathoms (Berry). A rather rare species, also to be looked for in the stomachs of fishes taken by set-line fishermen. Syn. N. variabilis (C. B. Adams). *Neosimnia vidleri (Sowerby )—30 fathoms, on coral and gorgonians; rare. PEDICULARIIDAE Pediculariella californica (Newcomb)—20-50 fathoms, on pink coral. Not often taken, generally only when fishermen bring specimens of the coral that have been snagged by trawl nets or set-lines. Syn. Pedicularia californica Newcomb. CYPRAEIDAE - Cypraea spadicea Swainson—A single specimen in Mrs. Fackenthall’s collection, taken alive by her on rocks at low tide, represents the only authentic record from the Monterey region. See Ingram, Nautilus 52(1): 1-4, pl. 1, figs. 8-13, 1938. Schilder (1939) classifies this species as Zonaria spadicea (Swainson). ERATOIDAE Pusula californiana (Gray )—Beach drift and living below low tide mark to 40 fathoms, on rocks; fairly common in beach drift but living shells are scarce. Tits and the following species have until recently been placed in the genus Jvrivia. Pusula ritteri Raymond—Monterey (Dall). Erato columbella Menke—Shore, in beach drift, to 20 fathoms; scarce. Erato vitellina Hinds—Shore to 35 fathoms; fairly common. Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MON TBREY BAY 195 RANELLIDAE Bursa californica (Hinds)—10-60 fathoms, on rocks and the shale reefs; fairly common. Occasionally brought in by fishermen. Fusitriton oregonensis (Redfield)—15-60 fathoms ; rare. Formerly placed under various related genera, including Argobuccinum and Priene. TRIPHORIDAE *Triphora montereyensis Bartsch—Beach drift, and living below low tide mark to 15 fathoms in coarse granite sand, off Pacific Grove; scarce. CERITHIOPSIDAE Cerithiopsis alcima Bartsch—Off Monterey, in 15 fathoms (Burch). *Cerithiopsis berryi Bartsch—5-30 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments ; fairly common. Cerithiopsis columna Carpenter—At low tide, on rocks; rare. Also 10 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in coarse granite sand and pebbles; rare. Cerithiopsis cosmia Bartsch—Beach drift, and at low tide, on rocks; scarce. Also from a red abalone covered with sponge (Burch). Cerithiopsis diegensis Bartsch—At low tide, on rocks in the vicinity of Point Pinos, com- mon; 25 fathoms, rare. *Cerithiopsis fia Bartsch—Shore to 25 fathoms; rare. *Cerithiopsis ingens (Bartsch)—58-85 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4475). Known only from two specimens. *Cerithiopsis montereyensis Bartsch—Shore, in beach drift and at low tide on rocks, to 25 fathoms; scarce. Cerithiopsis rowelli Bartsch—25 fathoms, Monterey and Carmel Bays, in sand; rare. *Cerithiopsis santacruzana Bartsch—3-30 fathoms, on rocks; rare. *Cerithiopsis tumida (Bartsch)—Shore, collected by Canfield and Stearns (Bartsch). We have not collected this species. Seila montereyensis Bartsch—Living on rocks at low tide, to 30 fathoms; fairly common. Metaxia diadema Bartsch—Shore to 30 fathoms; rare. CERITHIIDAE [Bittium armillatum Carpenter—Beach to 20 fathoms (Cooper). We are of the opinion that Cooper’s shells were some other species. B. armillatum has not been reported from the Bay in recent years and it has not appeared in our dredgings. ] *Bittium attenuatum Carpenter—Shore to 20 fathoms; common. Several pretty color forms are found in the beach drift, the more common being one of an all over lavender tone, and another white with a dark brown revolving band at the summit of the whorls. Living specimens are to be sought for at low tide in sand among eel-grass roots. Bittium attenuatum multifilosum Bartsch—With the preceding; rare. Bittium eschrichtii icelum Bartsch—Monterey, Stearns Collection (Bartsch). Shells of this group that we have collected or studied belong to the following subspecies. *Bittium eschrichtti montereyense Bartsch—Shore to 10 fathoms; abundant. Found living in clean coarse granite sand among rocks, at low tide. Bittium interfossa (Carpenter)—Beach drift and at extreme low tide at Point Pinos; scarce. Bittium munitum (Carpenter )—12 fathoms off Del Mon‘e, in fine sand and shale frag- ments (Berry, Smith) ; rare. *Bittium paganicum Dall—292-356 fathoms off Point Pinos, in soft green mud (USFC Sta. 4508) ; rare. *Bittium purpureum (Carpenter )—In beach drift and living at low tide among eel-grass roots, to 30 fathoms in sand and shale fragments ; fairly common. 196 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH Ser. Bittium quadrifilatum Carpenter—Shore to 40 fathoms, with the preceding species ; scarce. *Bittium serra Bartsch—66-69 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4555); a single specimen. Syn. Cerithiopsis sassetta Dall according to Gordon after comparison of the types of both species in the National Museum. Bittium subplanatum Bartsch—66-73 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and rocks (USFC Sta. 4552) ; rare. CAECIDAE Caecum californicum Dall—In beach drift and from 3-30 fathoms, in sand; common. Caecum licalum Bartsch—10-30 fathoms, in sand; rare. [Caecum quadratum Carpenter—12 fathoms Berry, on Dall’s identification. A doubtful record for this Mazatlan species. ] Micranellum crebricinctum (Carpenter )—10-40 fathoms, in sand; common. Micranellum oregonense Bartsch—Monterey (Bartsch). Fartulum occidentale Bartsch—15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in sand; rare. VERMETIDAE Bivonia compacta Carpenter—Shore to 25 fathoms, found singly or in contorted masses} fairly common. Aletes squamigerus Carpenter—Between tides, on shells and rocks; common. Spiroglyphus lituellus (Mérch)—Shore to 20 fathoms; scarce. Petaloconchus complicatus Dall—Off Monterey, in 20 fathoms (Burch). *Petaloconchus montereyensis Dall—10-25 fathoms, on rocks and shells ; common. Vermiculum anellum (Morch)—15-25 fathoms, on shale; scarce. TURRITELLIDAE Turritella cooperi Carpenter—40-60 fathoms, in mud, sand and gravel; scarce. Tachyrhynchus lacteolus (Carpenter )—40-63 fathoms, in mud and gravel; scarce. LITTORINIDAE Littorina planaxis Philippi—At high tide mark, on rocks ; abundant. Littorina scutulata Gould—Between tides, on rocks; abundant. LACUNIDAE *Lacuna marmorata Dall—On eel-grass, at low tide; abundant. Lacuna carinata Gould—With the preceding species ; abundant. Syn. L. porrecta Carpenter. Lacuna solidula Loven—Beach at Point Pinos (Smith, Chace) ; rare. Santa Cruz (Cooper). Lacuna unifasciata Carpenter—On broad-leaved eel-grass at Elkhorn Slough; scarce. Lacuna variegata Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). On algae (Burch). FOSSARIDAE Iselica fenestrata (Carpenter )—10-30 fathoms, in sand; scarce. Santa Cruz (Cooper). Iselica obtusa (Carpenter )—5-15 fathoms, in coarse granite sand and boulders; rare. LITIOPIDAE *Alaba serrana Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 225, see pl. 4, figs. 1, 2; 25 fathoms, in Carmel Bay ; two specimens. RISSOELLIDAE *Rissoella hertleini Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 224; see pl. 3, fig. 15; 10 fathoms, in sand, off Pacific Grove; seven specimens. BARLEEIIDAE Barleeia haliotiphila Carpenter—In kelp holdfasts. Also, 5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos, in sand and broken shells; fairly common. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 197 *Barleeia marmorea (Carpenter )—At low tide, living on rocks, to 25 fathoms ; common, Syn. Diala marmorea Carpenter. *Barleeia oldroydi Bartsch—Between tides; abundant. Also in kelp holdfasts. Shore to 15 fathoms (Burch). Barleeia subtenuis Carpenter—From brackish spring; Carmel only (Cooper). Diala acuta Carpenter—Shore, under rocks at low tide, to 20 fathoms ; common, RISSOIDAE *Cingula montereyensis Bartsch—5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos; rare. Amphithalamus tenuis Bartsch—Shore to 10 fathoms, in sand; rare. Alvania acutelirata (Carpenter )—5-30 fathoms, in sand; common. *Alvania californica Bartsch—Monterey (Bartsch). We have not collected it. Alvania compacta (Carpenter)—15 fathoms, in sand; rare. Alvania carpenteri Weinkauff—Monterey, Oldroyd (Burch). [ Alvania filosa Carpenter—‘“Monterey. ‘From shell washings.’ Carpenter’s list.” (Cooper). Possibly a pathologic mutation, according to Bartsch. ] Alvania oldroydae Bartsch—Beach drift, at Pacific Grove; one specimen (Gordon). *Alvania purpurea Dall—Low tide, living on rocks, to 30 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. Alvania rosana Bartsch—25 fathoms, in sand, Carmel Bay; common with A. acutelirata Dall. *Alvania trachisma Bartsch—Monterey (Bartsch). Not collected recently. Alvania (Willettia) aequisculpta Keep—Beach drift at Pacific Grove; rare. *Alvania (Willettia) montereyensis Bartsch—Under rocks at low tide; fairly common. *Alvania (Willettia) microglypta Haas—Point Pinos, washed from sand in a tide pool (Haas). From the published figure and size of the shell we suspect it is not an Alvania but possibly the broken tip of a Bittium. RISSOINIDAE Rissoina bakeri Bartsch—10-30 fathoms, in sand; scarce. Most of the specimens we have seen from Monterey Bay are quite variable and few are typical. They appear to belong to this species, however. *Rissoina hannai Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 226; see pl. 4, fig. 4; 25 fathoms, in sand, Carmel Bay; 28 specimens. *Rissoina keenae Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 227; see pl. 4, fig. 3; 5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos, in coarse sand and broken shells; three specimens. Rissoina newcombei Dall—Off Monterey, in 15 fathoms, on shale (Burch). ASSIMINEIDAE Assiminea translucens (Carpenter )—Elkhorn Slough, in Salicornia; fairly common. Syn. Syncera translucens (Carpenter). HIPPONICIDAE Hipponix antiquatus (Linnaeus)—In colonies, under rocks at low tide; common. [Hippomx antiquatus cranioides Carpenter—With the preceding. In our opinion, this _ subspecies is of doubtful standing, as H. antiquatus varies considerably to fit the locations where it grows. ] [Hipponix serratus Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). A doubtful record of this southern species. | Hipponix tumens Carpenter—Living at low tide, on rocks, to 20 fathoms; fairly common. CREPIDULIDAE Crepidula aculeata (Gmelin)—Monterey (Cooper). This species normally lives to the south of Monterey, although Burch has recently reported having collected it in the Bay. 198 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. *Crepidula adunca Sowerby—Shore to 20 fathoms, on rocks and shells; common. Crepidula excavata (Broderip)—Monterey (Dall). Although we know of no recent authentic records for this shell in the Monterey region, it should occur there, having been collected both to the north and the south. [Crepidula onyx Sowerby—Monterey (Dall). We have neither seen nor collected un- questioned specimens of this species at Monterey and believe Dall’s record to be a doubtful one. ] Crepidula perforans (Valenciennes)—At low tide, under rocks and in the apertures of the larger gastropod shells inhabited by hermit crabs; common. C. exuviata Nuttall, described from Monterey, is a synonym. We believe that C. fimbriata Reeve is merely a situs form, and use perforans as it is the oldest name for this variable shell. C. nwm- maria Gould is a different species, easily separable from the other white California crepidulas by its heavy golden-brown periostracum. We have found no authentic records of nummaria from the Monterey region although it should occur there. Mon- terey records for C. navicelloides Sowerby published by Keep and others should prob- ably be referred to perforans. C. nivea C. B. Adams, which was described originally from Panama, has not certainly been reported from as far north as Monterey Bay. Crepipatella lingulata (Gould)—Living at low tide, under rocks and on shells, to 40 fathoms on shale rocks and stones; abundant. Syn. Crepidula lingulata Gould. Crepipatella orbiculata (Dall)—52-55 fathoms off Point Pinos, on rock; two specimens (Gordon). These and two other specimens examined show evidences of a nuclear sculpture consisting of extremely fine, sharp, spiral lirae, which scale off easily and may not be present on some adult shells. We suspect that Verticumbo charybdis Berry, from the lower Pleistocene of San Pedro and about 50 fathoms off Redondo, California, is a close relative of C. orbiculata if the two species are not actually conspecific. Syn. Crepidula orbiculata Dall. CALYPTRAEIDAE [Crucibulum spinosum (Sowerby)—Monterey; nine specimens (Wood: 1893). This is not a species of the Monterey fauna. Wood’s record is the only one known and must be considered doubtful until confirmed by other collectors. ] *Calyptraca burchi Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 227; see pl. 4, figs. 11-13; 15-40 fathoms, on shale; scarce. Carmel (CAS Collection). *Calyptraca contorta (Carpenter)—15-40 fathoms, on shale; rare. Distinguished from young shells of the preceding species by a white instead of a yellow nucleus. [Calyptraea fastigiata Gould—8-20 fathoms (Cooper). We have not collected this Puget Sound shell at Monterey and believe Cooper’s shells may possibly have been C. burchi]. NATICIDAE Natica clausa Broderip and Sowerby—389-871 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand (USFC Stas. 3670, 4513, 4517, 4538, 4540) ; fairly common. *Polinices acosmitus (Dall)—627 fathoms off Point Pinos, in blue mud (USFC Sta. 3128) ; rare. Polinices caurinus (Gould)—278-581 fathoms off mouth of Salinas River, in green mud and sand (USFC Stas. 3669, 3670). 500 fathoms off Monterey, from fishermen; one specimen (Gordon). A scarce species in the Bay. Polinices draconis (Dall)—12-50 fathoms off Monterey, in mud and fine sand; fairly common. Generally taken in deeper water than P. Jewisii (Gould). Polinices groenlandicus (Moller )—296 fathoms off Point Afio Nuevo, in fine gray sand (USFC Sta. 3112) ; 121-766 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud and sand (USFC Stas. 4462, 4517) ; scarce. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 199 Polinices lewisii (Gould)—Below low tide to 25 fathoms off Monterey, in fine sand. Also in Elkhorn Slough, in mud; fairly common. [Polinices reclusianus (Deshayes)—Monterey (Dall). A doubtful record for this south- ern California species. No specimens have been collected recently. ] [Polinices reclusianus altus (Dall)—Monterey (Dall). The preceding comment also applies to this subspecies. ] Sinum scopulosum (Conrad)—Below low tide (Mrs. Fackenthall) ; rare. Syn. S. cali- fornicum Oldroyd. Eunaticina oldroydii (Dall)—30-70 fathoms, in mud; fairly common. Sometimes brought in by fishermen operating drag boats for flat-fish. A large specimen in the Stanford University Collection, taken in the Bay, measures: height, 81.3; width, 71.5; height of aperture, 63.5 mm. LAMELLARIIDAE *Lamellaria rhombica Dall—Low tide to 15 fathoms off Pacific Grove; rare. *Lamellaria stearnsti Dall—At low tide, under rocks; scarce. The subspecies orbiculata Dall is found with the typical form and appears to have no value taxonomically. VELUTINIDAE *V elutina granulata Dall—28-35 fathoms off Point Pinos, in black mud, sand, and shells (USFC Sta. 4441) ; known only from the type specimen. Velutina laevigata (Miller )—Low tide to 12 fathoms, under rocks and on shale; fairly common. [Velutina prolongata Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s specimen in the National Museum looks like an abnormal VY. laevigata. The record must remain doubtful un- til confirmed. | [Velutina zonata Gould—Monterey (Dall). As this is the only record for the species south of the Pribilof Islands it is in need of confirmation. ] ACM AEIDAE Acmaca asmi (Middendorff)—Between tides, generally on the base or periphery of living shells of Tegula funebralis (A. Adams) ; common. [Acmaea depicta (Hinds)—One doubtful Monterey record (Ricketts). We have seen no authentic specimens from the region. ] Acmaea fenestrata cribraria Carpenter—Monterey (Test). Appears to be a scarce form in the Bay. Acmaea digitalis Eschscholtz—Between tides, on rocks; common. Syns. A. textilis Gould, and wmbonata Reeve. *Acmaea funiculata (Carpenter )—5-35 fathoms off Pacific Grove and Point Pinos; also 25 fathoms in Carmel Bay. This species is rare and we have taken only one live specimen. Young shells of A. mitra Eschscholtz from the Monterey region show no tendency toward intergradation with ficulata. Acmaea insessa (Hinds)—Between tides, living on “ribbon” kelp Egregia menziesu Aresch.; common. Acmaea instabilis (Gould)—At low tide, living on the round, stiff stalks of the alga Laminaria anderson Farlow; scarce. Acmaea limatula Carpenter—Between tides, on rocks; common. A. limatula morchit Dall, a single specimen of which was collected at Elkhorn Slough, is not a good subspecies but merely an ecologic variant according to Mrs. Test (1945 :405). Acmaea mitra Eschscholtz—Low tide, on rocks and in deep tide pools, to 20 fathoms. Dredged specimens are generally young. This shell is the common “White Cap” found on the beaches. 200 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Serr. *Acmaea ochracea (Dall)—Living on smooth stones or boulders at extreme low water; scarce. Syn. A. peramabilis Dall. Acmaea paleacea Gould—Living on the blades of the narrow-leaved eel-grass Phyllos- padix torreyi Watson; fairly common. Acmaea pelta Eschscholtz—Between tides, on rocks; abundant. A. cassis nacelliodes (Dall) is considered to be merely a situs form of young pelta commonly found living on kelp holdfasts. Other synonyms are: A. cassis Eschscholtz, monticola Dall, olympica Dall, pintadina Gould, and var. hybrida Shepard (Naut., 9:72, 1895). Acmaea persona Eschscholtz—Between tides, on rocks; scarce. Burch (Minutes, So. Calif. Conch. Club, No. 57, p. 10, Feb. 1946) cites A. persona strigatella Carpenter with a range extending north to Monterey, but there is some question whether this subspecies is a valid one. Acmaea rosacea Carpenter—Low tide to 35 fathoms, living on rocks and shale; fairly common. Dead shells of this species are often found in beach drift. Acmaea scabra (Gould)—Between tides, on rocks; common. Syn. A. spectrum Reeve. Acmaea scutuwm Eschscholtz—Between tides, on rocks; abundant. Cited as a subspecies of the circumboreal A. testudinalis (Miller) by Mrs. Test. Syns. A. patina Esch- scholtz, pintadina (Gould), parallela Dall, and emydia Dall. *Acmaea triangularis (Carpenter)—Low tide to 30 fathoms, generally living on the pinkish calcareous alga Amphiroa tuberculosa Decaisne but occasionally on rocks and shale; fairly common. The method used by the Chaces in collecting this small limpet in quantity is to obtain a pailfull of the alga and allow it to stand over night in fresh water. Subsequent washing and shaking cause the limpets to drop off and sink to the bottom of the pail, where they may be gathered with ease. Lottia gigantea Sowerby—Between tides, on rocks, especially along the ocean front. We include L. gigantca albomaculata Dall as a synonym on the basis that this is merely a color form. “Owl” limpets have been so much sought after that fine full- grown specimens are now hard to find where they were once common. Immature shells are still to be commonly collected. PHASIANELLIDAE {Phasianella compta Gould—Monterey (Berry, on Dall’s identification). See P. sub- striata (Carpenter). According to Strong (1928, p. 192), this species does not ap- pear to range as far north as Monterey. | Phasianella pulloides Carpenter—Low tide to 20 fathoms; abundant. Santa Cruz, living at low water (Cooper). Phasianella rubrilineata Strong—Shore to 15 fathoms; scarce. Fresh living shells are sometimes sculptured with exceedingly fine, closely-spaced striations that are visible only under proper light with fairly high magnification. [Phasianella substriata (Carpenter)—Shore to 15 fathoms (Berry). All specimens of the subgenus Eulithidium from Monterey that we have examined are imperforate and belong to the preceding species. A re-examination of Berry’s shells by him and A. M. Strong showed that they are P. pulloides Carpenter, as are also the shells re- ported from Monterey on U. S. National Museum authority as P. compta Gould and Eucosmia variegata Carpenter. ] TURBINIDAE Astraea inaequalis (Martyn)—Low tide to 35 fathoms, on rocks and shale; common inshore at certain times of the year. Syn. A. inaequalis montereyensis Oldroyd. Homalopoma baculum (Carpenter )—Between tides, under rocks; common. Syn. Lepto- thyra bacula Carpenter. ' Homalopoma carpenteri (Pilsbry)—Low tide to 20 fathoms, under rocks and on shale; abundant. Syn. Leptothyra carpenteri Pilsbry. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 201 *Homalopoma paucicostatum (Dall) —Living at low tide, under rocks, to 15 fathoms, in sand and broken shells; fairly common. Syn. Leptothyra paucicostata Dall. Homalopoma paucicostatum fenestratum (Bartsch)—With the preceding. Shells referred to the subspecies are but weakly differentiated from the typical. These may not be good examples, however, as Berry believes that fenestratum is distinct enough to warrant raising it to specific rank. LIOTIIDAE Liotia fenestrata Carpenter—Beach drift, and living at low tide, under rocks; scarce. Arene acuticostata (Carpenter)—Shore to 15 fathoms; rare. Syn. Liotia acuticostata Carpenter. TROCHIDAE Norrisia norrisi (Sowerby )—One young specimen taken in 12 fathoms by Berry, which appears to be the only authentic Monterey record of this southern species. *Halistylus pupoideus (Carpenter )—10-40 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments; com- mon. Syn. H. subpupoideus (Tryon). Tegula brunnea (Philippi)—Betweer tides, on rocks and ribbon kelp; off shore in the kelp beds on the fronds near the surface; abundant. This species lives a little farther out than 7. funebralis (A. Adams), with good living specimens generally found only at extreme low tide. A subspecies, T. brunnea fluctuosa (Dall), has been described but at best it is only a weakly differentiated form having doubtful tax- onomic value. Tegula funebralis (A. Adams)—On and under rocks between tides; abundant. We in- clude the subspecies 7. funebralis subaperta (Carpenter), there being a question on its valid standing, [Tegula gallina (Forbes)—Monterey (Dall). Dall’s specimens in the National Museum are correctly identified, yet we know of no recent authentic record of this southern species from the Monterey region. The record needs confirming. | [Tegula ligulata (Menke)—The preceding comment also applies to this species. ] Tegula montereyi (Kiener)—On kelp fronds at low tide; scarce. The finest specimens have been collected by searching the offshore kelp beds in a boat, where it occurs with 7. brunnea but generally farther down the stalks. A large specimen taken in this habitat measures: height, 40.0; major diameter, 43.2 mm. (AGS No. 242). Tegula pulligo (Martyn)—With the above, but scarcer. Young specimens, brilliantly maculated with lavender and brown, are occasionally taken alive under rocks at low tide and dredged down to 15 fathoms on the shale bed. It is possible that true pul- ligo is a northern race with a rounded basal periphery (syn. T. pulligo taylori Oldroyd), and that the Monterey shells with a sharply keeled periphery may be T. marcida (Gould). Calliostoma annulatum (Martyn)—Found sparingly on the fronds of the giant kelp, off shore. In 1913, accompanied by Mrs. Fackenthall, the senior author collected fine large specimens in considerable quantity off Pacific Grove in July, following several warm, quiet, sunny days during which the calliostomas has evidently crawled up the kelp stems from deeper down. Young, brilliantly marked specimens have been dredged on the shale in 8-15 fathoms off Del Monte. A scarce species. C. annulatum is without doubt one of the most beautiful among the mollusks in the Monterey region. Calliostoma canaliculatum (Martyn)—On kelp, off shore, with C. annulatum, C. costatum (Martyn), Tegula brunnea, T. montereyi, and T. pulligo; sometimes abundant. Young specimens occasionally collected alive at low tide, on kelp, and dredged down to 20 fathoms. The color variety C. canaliculatum nebulosum Dall, which is found only immature in the Monterey region, appears to have little taxonomic value as a subspecies. \ 202 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH Serr. Calliostoma costatum (Martyn)—Low tide to 20 fathoms, under rocks and on shale. Fine, large specimens occasionally collected off shore on the fronds of the giant kelp, well down on the stalks. On shore it is a common species. With the typical form we include the color varieties C. costatum caeruleum Dall and C. costatum pictum Dall. *Calliostoma gloriosum Dall—3-20 fathoms, on rocks and shale; scarce. Calliostoma platinum. Dall—198-495 fathoms off Point Pinos, in green mud, coarse sand, and shells (USFC Sta. 4515); 120 fathoms (Oldroyd) ; 220 fathoms off Monterey, on rock (Hopkins Marine Laboratory). Brought up by set-line fishermen from about 200 fathoms off Davenport, Santa Cruz County, when a small species of anemone growing on the shells attaches itself to the baited hooks; four specimens, of which the largest measures: height, 39.0; major diameter, 35.5 mm. (Strohbeen). A rare species. Calliostoma splendens Carpenter—Shore to 40 fathoms, on rocks and shale; scarce. This pretty species is sometimes difficult to distinguish from the young of C. costatum. In sculpture, it is closer to the southern C. supragranosum Carpenter, but is much darker in color. [Calliostoma supragranosum Carpenter—Monterey and Santa Cruz, dredged (Cooper). Low tide to 12 fathoms (Berry, on Dall’s identification). We have seen no typical specimens from the Monterey region. It is possible that shells under this name from Monterey belong to the preceding species. | Calliostoma tricolor Gabb—10-40 fathoms, on rocks and shale; scarce. Calliostoma variegatum Carpenter—Young specimens dredged in 15-20 fathoms; rare. *Turcica catfea Gabb—10-35 fathoms off Monterey, on shale. Also found occasionally in kelp holdfasts; scarce. Turcicula bairdii Dall—418-581 fathoms off Point Pinos, in mud and sand (USFC Stas. 3127, 3670). Apparently a common shell at this depth range. Cidarina cidaris (A. Adams)—53-93 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard sand, green mud and rocks (USFC Stas. 4543, 4552); rare. Solariella nuda Dall—278-627 fathoms off Point Pinos and mouth of Salinas River, in sand and mud (USFC Stas. 3128, 3669) ; 298 fathoms off Point Sur (USFC Sta. 3187) ; scarce. Solariella peramabilis Carpenter—40 fathoms, on shale; rare. Carmel Bay in 20 fathoms (Cooper). Margarites acuticostatus (Carpenter)—Shore (beach drift) to 12 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments; fairly common. Some of our specimens approach Dall’s figure (USNM Bull. No. 112, pl. 18, fig. 5) but may belong to the variable M. optabilis (Carpenter). *Margarites keepi Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 228; see pl. 4, figs. 5-7; 25 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, in sand; five specimens. Margarites lirulatus (Carpenter)—Shore, at low tide among rocks and gravel, to 15 fathoms; abundant. Margarites optabilis (Carpenter)—Rare in beach drift. Living from 5-15 fathoms in coarse sand and rocks and also in fine sand and shale fragments; common. Margarites parcipictus (Carpenter)—Shore, on rocks and among algae and seaweed everywhere; abundant. Dredged down to 40 fathoms. [Margarites pupillus (Gould)—Beach to 20 fathoms (Cooper). This typical northern species does not appear to live in the Monterey region. Cooper’s specimens may have been confused with the following species. ] *Margarites salmoneus (Carpenter )—Low tide, under rocks, to 20 fathoms; common. *Margarites smithi Bartsch—Shore at Pacific Grove; one specimen (Smith). The type lot of nine specimens was dredged in 10 fathoms off China (Cabrillo) Point (Smith). Margarites succinctus (Carpenter )—Low tide to 20 fathoms; abundant. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 203 [*Gibbula canfieldi Dall—Monterey, dead on the beach (Dall). Known for certain only from the type specimen. We have diligently sought for this species without success, and suspect it may be adventitious. | VITRINELLIDAE *Vitrinella berryt Bartsch—8-12 fathoms off Del Monte, in sand and shale fragments; rare. Vitrinella eschnauri Bartsch—12 fathoms (Berry). Vitrinella oldroydi Bartsch—Fairly common living on the mantles of [schnochiton heathiana Berry—15 fathoms off Pacific Grove, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; rare. *Vitrinella stearnsit Bartsch—5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos, in clean granite sand, and off Del Monte, in fine sand and shale fragments; rare. Skenea californica (Bartsch)—10-30 fathoms, in fine dark sand and shale fragments; rare. This may prove to be the same as D. coronadoensis Arnold. Syn. Cyclostremella californica Bartsch. *Skenea carmelensis Smith and Gordon, new species. Described on p. 229; see pl. 4, figs. 8-10; 25 fathoms, in sand, in Carmel Bay; rare. Scissilabra dalli Bartsch—8-10 fathoms off Del Monte and 15 fathoms off Soquel, in fine muddy sand; scarce. Teinostoma invallatum (Carpenter)—Monterey (Dall). A single specimen from the mantle of Ischnochiton heathiana Berry. 5 miles south of Carmel (Gordon). Teinostoma supravallatum (Carpenter)—Monterey (Dall). We have not collected it. HALIOTIDAE Haliotis assimilis Dall—2 small but full-grown shells and one immature shell from the beach at Seaside (Gordon). One full-grown shell from the beach at Carmel (Smith). Several specimens from about 10 fathoms off Yankee Point, south of Carmel (Soren- sen), which Bartsch has recently described as H. aulaeca. Until lately this species has not been well known from the Monterey region although reported as having been taken from as far north as the Farallone Islands. Mr. A. Sorensen writes: “|. . I learned that a young Japanese abalone diver had brought in several H. as- similis and H. wallalensis ... He said he was getting them from Yankee Point south, in deep water, 10 to 18 fathoms. He had been out to about 20 fathoms, but there were no H/. rufescens deeper than about 12 fathoms, while there were no H. assimilis and H. kamtschatkana inside of 8 to 12 fathoms. Hence the abalone divers know them generally as ‘deep sea’ abalones.” Specimens of H. assimilis from the Monterey region are lower arched and less corrugated in sculpture than typical shells of the species from southern California. Some of the younger specimens show a remark- able resemblance to H. kamtschatkana Jonas and it is sometimes difficult to distinguish them from this latter species. Based on the material we have seen so far we are of the opinion that H. aulaea Bartsch should be considered as a synonym, at least until the anatomical relationships have been worked out. [Haliotis corrugata Gray—Monterey (Dall). We have seen no authentic specimens of this species from the Monterey region. The record is in need of confirmation. ] Halhotis cracherodii Leach—At low tide, under rocks and in rock crevices; common. Fine large specimens are now hard to find. Haliotis fulgens Philippi—The California Academy Collection contains a lot of 8 shells, which appear to be this species, collected by Hemphill at Monterey (C.A.S. No. 29161). These are all small, the largest being about 234 inches in length. Two other similar shells have been collected by Gordon at Point Lobos. Shells with the animal in alcohol are needed to prove whether this is a depauperate race of fulgens or another and possibly new species. Wood recorded one specimen of fulgens from 204 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH SER. Monterey in 1893, Keep (1896) says: “The only live one I ever saw was an aged specimen which was found on the rocks at Cypress Point. Monterey Bay seems to mark its extreme northern location, and even then I have never found a specimen in the Indian shell-heaps, though rufescens and Cracherodii are found by the thousands in all stages of decomposition.” Haliotis kamtschatkana Jonas—A few specimens of small size are occasionally washed on shore after winter storms (Sorensen); 10-15 fathoms, on shale, dead shells only, rare; taken sparingly by abalone divers from about 10-20 fathoms off Yankee Point, south of Carmel (Sorensen). A single young specimen, dredged on the shale in 35 fathoms, is provisionally assigned to this species. Haliotis rufescens Swainson—Low tide, under rocks and in rock crevices, to about 12 fathoms. Once abundant along the rocky shores from Monterey to Point Pinos and along the ocean front from there south, the red abalone of commerce is now hard to find in adult sizes of legal dimensions. The commercial aspects have been dis- cussed elsewhere in this paper. Haliotis wallalensis Stearns—The “Sunset Abalone” is rarely taken in the Monterey region although it is not uncommon at extreme low water north of Point Reyes and along the Mendocino County coast. The California Academy Collection has two shells collected at Monterey by Hemphill (C.A.S. No. 15107), the largest measuring about 3 inches in length. Four specimens have been taken by an abalone diver in about 10 fathoms off Yankee Point (Sorensen). The southern range of wallalensis has recently been extended to Point Buchon, just south of Morro Bay, in San Luis Obispo County (Sorensen). FISSURELLIDAE Fissurella volcano Reeve—Low tide and in deep tide pools, to 20 fathoms, on rocks; common. The color form F. v. crucifera Dall, which we believe should have no standing as a subspecies, is found rarely with the typical form. Syn. Hemitoma golischae (Dall). *Megathura crenulata (Sowerby)—Low tide to 5 fathoms, on rocks. Giant key-hole limpets appear to have become less common in recent years. *Megatebennus bimaculatus (Dall)—Low tide to 20 fathoms, especially in rock crevices and under rocks; fairly common. [Lucapinella callomarginata (Dall)—Monterey (Stearns). Dall believed that a living specimen collected by Stearns might be this species. It is a shell found farther south than Monterey. The record seems doubtful. ] Diodora aspera (Eschscholtz)—Shore, under rocks, to 20 fathoms, on shale; common. A large specimen in the Berry Collection measures: length, 88.8; width, 60.3 mm. The subspecies D. aspera densiclathrata (Reeve) was said by Cooper to be found in deeper water, but those we have dredged appear to be more delicately sculptured, young specimens of the typical form. Cooper also reported that the animal differs from aspera but we suspect he may have confused his shells with D. murina. Syn. D. aspera densiclathrata (Reeve). Diodora murina (Dall)—Beach drift; fairly common. Living, 5-35 fathoms off Pacific Grove and Monterey, on rocks and shale; only occasionally taken alive. Puncturella cooperi Carpenter—10-25 fathoms, on shale; scarce. Puncturella cucullata (Gould)—10-40 fathoms, on rocks and shale; fairly common. Puncturella galeata (Gould)—52-55 fathoms off Point Pinos, on rock; one specimen (Gordon). *Hemitoma bella (Gabb)—Young dead shells and fragments dredged in 5-20 fathoms off Point Pinos, in clean granite sand and broken shells; also, 15 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale. Two large specimens in 20 fathoms (Burch). Although several Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 205 beach-worn specimens of this scarce species have been found, all of the few fine living specimens have been brought in by fishermen. The type specimen of bella, an immature dead shell in the collection of the University of California at Berkeley, is shown on pl. 4, figs. 14-16. There appears to be but one species of Hemitoma from the California coast, H. yatesii, which was also described from Monterey Bay, being merely the adult stage of bella. There are several specimens in the original lot obtained from fishermen by J. K. Oliver, a curio dealer in Monterey. In addition to the type in the National Museum, another is on display in the Pacific Grove Museum, and a third is in the Berry Collection in Redlands, California. Syn. H yatesti (Dall). AMPHINEURA PoLyPLACOPHORA LEPIDOPLEURIDAE [Leptochiton ambustus (Dall)—12 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale fragments (Berry, on Dall’s identification). This record needs confirming as the specimens dredged by Berry are quite likely to be L. heathi Berry.] Leptochiton cancellatus (Sowerby)—20-50 fathoms, on rocks and shale (Burch, Gordon, A. G. Smith). Off Point Joe, Monterey Peninsula, in 65 fathoms, from fishermen (Hunter). Scarce. The deeper-water leptochitons from the Monterey region have somewhat stronger sculpture than typical cancellatus from Puget Sound and are re- ferred to this species with some doubt. *Teptochiton heathi (Berry)—10-35 fathoms off Monterey, on shale; common, [Leptochiton nexus Carpenter—Pacific Grove (Heath, on Pilsbry’s identification). The record needs confirming. | *Leptochiton oldroydi (Dall)—25 fathoms; rare (Gordon). Leptochiton rugatus (Pilsbry)—At low tide or in deep tide-pools, under rocks buried in sand; fairly common. Oldroydia percrassa (Dall)—12-40 fathoms, on shale; scarce. [Hanleya hanleyi (Bean)—Monterey (Dall). May refer to the following species. | *Hanleya spicata Berry—33 fathoms off Point Pinos, on a rock ledge (Heath). Known only from the type specimen. LEPIDOCHITONIDAE Tonicella lineata (Wood)—In tide pools and at low tide, to 35 fathoms; common. Specimens from the Monterey region are not as large and fine as those living along the Mendocino County coast. The color markings on this species are quite variable. Specimens from deeper water are quite small. Tonicella ruber (Linnaeus)—12 fathoms; one specimen (Berry, on Dall’s identification). Not collected recently. Tonicella submarmorca (Middendorff)—Off Monterey, in 10 fathoms (Burch) ; a single small specimen. The occurrence of this minutely granulated northern species in the Bay is the occasion for some surprise. *Cyanoplax fackenthallae Berry—Shore at Pacific Grove (Mrs. Fackenthall). It has been found living sparingly in the holdfasts of ribbon kelp at low tide in the “Great Tide Pool” near Point Pinos, on the ocean side. It mimics the kelp roots in color so closely that it is easily overlooked. Discovery of the habitat of fackenthallae is due to the efforts of the Rev. Elwood B. Hunter and Mr. and Mrs. Emery P. Chace. The species is very closely related to C. lowei (Pilsbry), a southern California form. *Cyanoplax hartwegii (Carpenter)—Between tides, on rocks hidden under seaweed, to 5 fathoms; common. The subspecies C. h. nuttalli (Carpenter) has now been recog- nized as the young stage and therefore is not separable from the typical form. 206 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES __ [Proc. 4ru Srp. Cyanoplax raymondi (Pilsbry)—Found with the above, and also on the backs of red abalones ; fairly common. Nuttallina californica (Reeve)—Between tides on rocks, generally along the ocean front; abundant. *Nuttallina thomasi Pilsbry—Between tides, on rocks and in small tide pools at Pacific Grove, Cypress Point, Pescadero Point, and Point Lobos (Heath, Gordon) ; rare. MOPALIIDAE Basiliochiton flectens (Carpenter )—12-20 fathoms, on shale off Monterey; scarce. *Basiliochiton heathii (Pilsbry)—Low tide to 17 fathoms; scarce. Rare under rocks at low water mark and only occasionally collected in deeper water. [Dendrochiton gothicus (Carpenter)—Monterey (Dall). A doubtful record for this southern California species. We have not collected it in the Bay.] *Dendrochiton thamnoporus (Berry )—Low tide, under rocks, Point Pinos and Carmel; 10-40 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale; scarce. Mopalia acuta (Carpenter )—10-35 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale fragments; scarce. This species is not closely related to M. muscosa Gould, at least in the Monterey region and so we show it as a separate species. Mopalia ciliata (Sowerby)—At low tide, under rocks, in rock crevices, and caves; fairly common. In the Monterey region this species exhibits a puzzling variation in shape, girdle armature, and color markings. Small to medium-sized specimens, usually marked with brilliant red or occasionally entirely red, have been dredged down to 35 fathoms. Along with these are found small, high-arched, red-marked chitons that are related to ciliata and may be a separate species. Adequate identification of this and perhaps of other related Monterey forms depends upon a thorough study of the group. Mopalia ciliata wosnessenskii (Middendorff)—12 fathoms; one specimen (Berry). Mopalia hindsii (Reeve)—At low tide, on and under rocks; common in favorable loca- tions, where it grows very large. In the Monterey region, hindsii is quite different from M. muscosa (Gould) and we have seen no intergrades between the two. Mopalia imporcata Carpenter—10-25 fathoms off Monterey and Del Monte, on shale fragments ; scarce. Mopalia lignosa (Gould)—Between tides, on and under rocks; fairly common. Ap- parently does not intergrade with muscosa. Mopalia muscosa (Gould)—Between tides, on rocks, generally those covered with sea- weed; also in tide pools; common. *Mopalia phorminx Berry—33 fathoms off Point Pinos, on a rock ledge (Heath). Known only from the type specimen. Mopalia sinuata Carpenter—12-35 fathoms, on shale; rare. Placiphorella velata Dall—At low tide, under rocks; immature specimens occasionally found on the backs of red abalones; fairly common. Katharina tunicata (Wood)—Between tides, on rocks, especially those along the ocean front; common. ACANTHOCHITONIDAE Acanthochitona avicula (Carpenter)—Monterey (Cooper). This old record has been confirmed recently by Burch, who dredged a single specimen in 20 fathoms off Monterey. Cryptochiton stelleri (Middendorff)—At low tide, generally along the ocean front but occasionally in the Bay; scarce. The “Giant Chiton” or “China Abalone” is much less common in the vicinity of Monterey than farther to the north. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 207 CHAETOPLEURIDAE *Chaetopleura gemma Dall—Low tide under rocks, to 15 fathoms on shale; common. ISCHNOCHITONIDAE [Ischnochiton (Stenoplax) conspicuus (Dall)—Monterey (Dall). A doubtful record for this southern species. Occasional immature specimens of J. heathiana (Berry) have a rugose sculpture suggesting that of conspicuus.] *Ischnochiton (Stenoplax) fallax Pilsbry—Low tide at Pacific Grove, Carmel, and five miles south of Carmel, under smooth rocks imbedded in sand; scarce; 10 fathoms (Sorensen). A highly-colored species, of which the major color forms include light yellow-brown, wine-red, and wine-red with green maculations. *Tschnochiton (Stenoplax) heathiana (Berry)—Same habitat as the preceding species and found with it; common. Formerly identified as J. magdalenensis (Hinds), which Berry (1946a) has shown to belong to a more southern fauna. *Ischnochiton (Ischnochiton) decipiens Carpenter—Monterey (Dall). An insufficiently known species that can hardly be identified from Carpenter’s meager description. It has probably been described subsequently under other species names. Ischnochiton (Ischnochiton) interstinctus (Gould)—Monterey (Cooper, Dall). Prob- ably a deeper water species to be dredged in 40 fathoms or more in the Monterey region. We have not collected specimens that can be referred to this name with any certainty. *Ischnochiton (Ischnochiton) marmoratus Dall—Pacific Grove (Dall). According to Berry this is probably not an Jschnochiton as Dall’s description reads more like a species of Chaetopleura, close to or identical with C. gemma Dall. The type has not been figured. *Ischnochiton (Ischnochiton) radians Carpenter—Low tide under rocks, to 35 fathoms, on shale; occasional near shore but common in deeper water. Many color forms of this pretty chiton are to be found, some with white and brown markings, others marked with bright blue. *Ischnochiton (Rhombochiton) regularis (Carpenter)—At low tide under rocks; fairly common. *Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) berryi Dall—10-25 fathoms off Del Monte, on rocks and shale; common. This species seems closely related to J. sinudentatus Carpenter and may prove to be a deeper-water analog of it. [Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) californiensis Berry—Monterey (Keep, Dall), as J. clath- ratus (Reeve). Berry’s specimens, determined by Dall, are J. sinudentatus Carpenter and Keep’s record may also be based on this other species. Berry (Proc. Mal. Soc. London, 1915; 255-258, pl. 29, figs. 1, 2, 1931) has shown that true clathratus is Lower Californian. ] Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) catalinae Willett—40 fathoms off Monterey, on shale; a single specimen (Smith). This species seems closely related to J. willetti Berry from southern Alaska. Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) cooperi Dall—At low tide under rocks, to 25 fathoms on shale; common. Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) golischi Berry—Low tide, under rocks at Carmel (Hunter) ; 12 fathoms off Del Monte, on shale (Smith) ; 80 fathoms, from fishermen (Berry). The shore specimen collected by Hunter is close to, if not actually J. sinudentatus Carpenter. The single specimen from 12 fathoms occurred with a sizeable series of I. berryi Dall, from which it differs only in the peculiar color markings. We suspect that golischi may be only a rare color variant of sinudentatus or berryi, or both, which is evidence of the close relationship, if not the identity of these three species. The entire group needs careful working over. 208 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Serr. Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) mertensii (Middendorft )—Low tide under rocks, to 35 fathoms on shale; common. Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) retiporosus Carpenter—80 fathoms, from fishermen (Berry). *Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) sinudentatus Pilsbry—Low tide under rocks, to 35 fathoms on shale. Scarce on shore but common in 35 fathoms on the shale bed. See remarks under J. berryi and I. golischi. [Ischnochiton (Lepidozona) veredenticns Carpenter—Point Afio Nuevo (Dall). Berry states that this record is based on poor material and needs confirming. ] Callistochiton connelleyi Willett—Low tide in the ‘Great Tide Pool” near Point Pinos, under rocks; rare (Chace). This may be the young of the following species. *Callistochiton crassicostatus Pilsbry—Low tide under rocks, to 15 fathoms on shale; fairly common. [Callistochiton decoratus punctocostatus Pilsbry—Monterey (Button). This record for a more southern species needs confirmation. We have not taken it.] [Callistochiton infortunatus Pilsbry—Monterey (Dall). According to Dr. Berry, the record is unquestionably erroneous. | Callistochiton palmulatus Pilsbry—Low tide under rocks, to 35 fathoms on shale; scarce. Callistochiton palmulatus mirabilis Pilsbry—With the preceding; fairly common. APLACOPHORA CHAETODERMATIDAE *Chaetoderma montereyense Heath—39-356 fathoms off Santa Cruz and Point Pinos, mostly in soft mud and sand (USFC Stas. 4485, 4508, 4522, 4523, 4524, 4525); a total of 1555 specimens (Heath). *Chaetoderma scabrum Heath—795-871 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard gray sand (USFC Sta. 4538) ; a single specimen (Heath). CEPHALOPODA ONYCHOTEUTHIDAE Moroteuthis robusta (Verrill)—Cast on shore near Monterey (Phillips). According to Berry (1910), it was previously reported from Unalaska, the type locality, where one specimen cast on shore had an over-all length of over 14 feet, thus making it the largest mollusk and perhaps even the largest invertebrate known from western North America. Onychoteuthis banksti (Leach)—Monterey Bay (Phillips). Not previously reported by Berry from western North America. GON ATIDAE Gonatus sp., cf. G. fabricii (Lichtenstein) —32-1000 fathoms off Point Pinos (USFC Stas. 4468, 4512, 4517, 4530, 4544; seven specimens. HISTIOTEUTHIDAE Calliteuthis (Meleagroteuthis) heteropsis Berry—724-1000 fathoms off Point Pinos (USFC Stas. 4538, 4544) ; two specimens. Previously recorded as Meleagroteuthis hoylei Peffer. OMNASTREPHIDAE Dosidicus gigas (d’Orbigny)—Occasional in Monterey Bay prior to August, 1935, but common since then. Vor, XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 209 CRANCHIIDAE Galiteuthis armata Joubin—780-799 fathoms off Point Pinos (USFC Sta. 4529); one specimen. Syn. G. phyllura Berry. LOLIGINIDAE Loligo opalescens Berry—Abundant in April, May, and June in Monterey Bay, which is the squid season, with the commercial catch in the Bay averaging from 100 to 150 tons annually (W. L. Scofield). SEPIOLIDAE Rossia pacifica Berry—20-142 fathoms at various stations in Monterey Bay dredged by the U. S. Fisheries Commission steamer Albatross. It is not unusual for trawl fishermen to bring up this species in their nets. A fairly common squid in the Bay. CIRROTEUTHIDAE Cirroteuthis macrope Berry—One specimen taken by Santa Cruz fishermen in Septem- ber, 1932 (Phillips). The type locality is 2113-2259 fathoms off San Diego (USFC Sta. 4393). OCTOPODIDAE Octopus sp., cf. O. apollyon Berry—Monterey Bay and along the ocean front; common. According to Berry the name O. hongkongensis Hoyle, though previously used for this cephalopod, is not properly applied to the large Pacific Coast species. The main commercial fishing locality is off the rocky shores of the open coast between Point Pinos and Carmel, in 10-30 fathoms (Phillips). [Octopus californicus Berry—Monterey (Keep). A doubtful record for this southern California species. ] Octopus sp., cf. O. californicus (Berry)—1006-1041 fathoms off Point Pinos (USFC Sta. 4536) ; one young specimen. The identity of this octopus with californicus is not fully established, according to Dr. Berry. Octopus leioderma (Berry )—204-239 fathoms off Point Pinos (USFC Sta. 4526); one specimen. *Octopus pricei Berry—From the stomach of a salmon off Point Pinos. Octopus sp.—A young specimen, taken in 50-57 fathoms off Point Pinos (USFC Sta. 4550), has been reported by Berry as probably representing a new species. ARGONAUTIDAE Argonauta pacifica Dall—Monterey (Dall). We know of no recent record of the paper nautilus from the Monterey region. BRACHIOPODA LINGULIDAE Glottidia albida (Hinds)—10-40 fathoms, in sand; fairly common. RH YNCHONELLIDAE Frieleia halli Dall—659 fathoms off Point Sur, in green mud (USFC Sta. 5699) ; six specimens. TEREBRATULIDAE Terebratulina ktiensis Dall and Pilsbry—52-55 fathoms off Point Pinos, in fine dark sand and pebbles; one dead specimen (Gordon). Also from fishermen in 60 to 80 fathoms; three living specimens (Gordon). 240 fathoms off Watsonville Beach, in black sand and rocks (USFC Sta. 3205?) ; five specimens. 210 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. *Terebratulina unguicula (Carpenter )—10-40 fathoms, on shale; common at the deeper depths. A large slab of shale, dredged in about 40 fathoms near Humpback Rock, off Monterey, had more than a hundred specimens growing on it. Also 240 fathoms off Watsonville Beach, in black sand and rocks (USFC Sta. 3205?) ; one specimen. TEREBRATELLIDAE Morrisia hornii Gabb—25 fathoms off Carmel, in sand and broken shells, nine specimens ; 46-56 fathoms off Point Pinos, in coarse sand, shells, and rocks (USFC Sta. 4551), one specimen. Syns. Platidia hornii (Gabb) ; Platidia seminula radiata Dall. [Terebratalia occidentalis (Dall)—Monterey (Cooper, Dall). These are old records that have not been confirmed by recent collecting. ] [Terebratalia transversa (Sowerby)—One very worn valve, Monterey (Dall). Lamp shells of this group that we have collected belong to the following subspecies. | Terebratalia transversa caurina (Gould)—10-40 fathoms, on rocks and shale; fairly common. Laqueus californianus (Koch)—30-80 fathoms, on rocks; common locally. Also, 861- 1062 fathoms off Point Pinos, in hard sand and mud (USFC Sta. 4537) ; a fragment. SUPPLEMENTARY LIST The following 95 species and subspecies, arranged alphabetically by genera, represent possible additions to the preceding list as their ranges along the West Coast, as reported, include the Monterey region although apparently none of them has been collected there. They should be looked for by collectors. Many of them will be found only by deep dredging. PELECYPODA Barnea pacifica (Stearns) Calyptogena pacifica Dall Cardiomya beringensis (Leche) Cardiomya oldroydi (Dall) Lyonsia californica haroldi Dall Lyonsiella alaskana Dall Macoma incongrua (von Martens) Martesia intercalata Carpenter Martesia xylophaga (Valenciennes ) Nucula bellottu. A. Adams Nuculana minuta (Fabricius) Nuculana navisa (Dall) Pecten alaskensis Dall Pecten randolphi Dall Rochefortia compressa Dall Rochefortia ferruginosa Dall Solemya agassizu Dall Solemya johnsoni Dall Sphenia ovoidea Carpenter Thyasira barbarensis (Dall) Thyasira excavata Dall Thyasira gouldit (Philippi) Thyasira trisinuata (d’Orbigny) Thyasira trisinuata polygona (Jeffreys) Tindaria kennerleyi Dall Tindaria martiniana Dall Turtonia minuta (Fabricius) Vesicomya lepta (Dall) Yoldia cecinella Dall Yoldia limatula (Say) Yoldia martyria Dall Yoldia orcia Dall Yoldia sanesia Dall ScAPHOPODA Cadulus californicus Pilsbry and Sharp Cadulus stearnsii (Pilsbry and Sharp) Dentalium dalli Pilsbry and Sharp Dentalium inversum Deshayes Dentalium watsoni Sharp and Pilsbry Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 211 GASTROPODA Acmacea persona strigatella Carpenter Admete couthouyt gracilior Carpenter Ancistrolepis californicus Dall Bittium oldroydae Bartsch Carinoturris pernodata (Dall) Carinoturris polycaste (Dall) Chaetopleura beanii (Carpenter) Cingula californica (Tryon) Clio occidentalis (Dall) Cocculina agassizit Dall Colus adonis Dall Colus halimeris (Dall) Colus hallii (Dall) Crepidula nummaria Gould Diala exilis (Tryon) Epitonium caamanoi (Dall and Bartsch) Epitonium densiclathratum Dall Exilioidea kelseyi (Dall) Fartulum bakeri Bartsch Haminoea olgae Dall Hipponix barbatus Sowerby Homalopoma luridum (Dall) Lacuna divaricata (Fabricius) Lepidochitona alba (Linnaeus) Lepidochitona sacharrina (Dall) Leptochiton farallonis (Dall) Leptochiton internexus (Carpenter) Leptochiton luridus (Dall) Leucosyrinx? persimilis leonis (Dall) Margarites helicinus (Phipps) Margarites lacunatus (Carpenter) Margarites rhodia Dall Mitra catalinae (Dall) Mitrella permodesta (Dall) Mopalia porifera Pilsbry Ocenebra interfossa atropurpurea (Dall) Ocenebra painei (Dall) Ocenebra sclera (Dall) Placiphorella stimpsoni (Gould) Polinices canonicus (Dall) Polinices nanus (Moller) Propebela lotta (Dall) Puncturella multistriata Dall Rectiplanes? briseis (Dall) Rectiplanes? hyperia (Dall) Rectiplanes? litus (Dall) Rectiplanes? rotula smithi (Dall) Scissurella kelseyi Dall Solariella varicosa (Mighels and Adams) Tachyrhynchus lacteolus subplanatus (Car- penter ) Tachyrhynchus pratomus Dall Taranis strongi (Arnold) Trophon pacificus (Dall) Trophon staphylina (Dall) Trophon tenuisculptus Carpenter Turritellopsis acicula stimpsoni Dall Volutomitra alaskana Dall 212 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECIES AND SUBSPECIES Cardita (Cyclocardia) ventricosa montereyensis Smith and Gordon, new species Text figures 2, 3. Description of the holotype: Shell solid, rounded-triangular in out- line, moderately compressed laterally; anterior margin rounded, with the dorsal and posterior margins gently curved and merging with no marked change in curvature; ventral margin gently curved also and ob- lique to the lower margin of the hinge-plate. Beaks anterior to the middle of the shell, depressed, not conspicuous, slightly prosogyrate, somewhat eroded. Valves thick, ornamented on the outside with about eighteen well-defined, low, rounded, radiating costae, with rather nar- row interspaces, crossed by numerous concentric lirations that are stronger on the upper portion of the shell although inconspicuous in the intercostal spaces. Just anterior to the beaks is a small, depressed, slightly elongately-cordate, unornamented lunule. Posterior to the beaks is a long, narrow, escutcheon-like depression in which the ligament is situated. Periostracum greenish-brown and velvety in appearance, the pile set in radiating lines although appearing to be concentrically lamel- lose, especially near the ventral margin of the shell. Hinge-plate thick, its lower edge somewhat beveled; right valve with a solid triangular car- dinal tooth immediately below the beak, its apex detached from the shell- margin and beveled above, set off by a furrow on each side forming a chevron into which the two cardinal teeth of the left valve fit; anterior cardinal tooth a small inconspicuous monticule in front of the anterior furrow; posterior cardinal a narrow elongate flange bordering the pos- terior furrow, separated by a shallow groove from the nymph on which the ligament is seated. Hinge-plate in the left valve with two cardinal teeth diverging in a chevron, the anterior small and subtriangular, the posterior a nearly straight alar flange terminating obliquely at the hinge- margin and separated by a moderately-wide groove from the nymph carrying the ligament; at the intersection of the hinge-margin and the anterior margin is a short, low, rounded ridge, which probably represents a rudimentary anterior lateral tooth; similarly, there is an irregularity at the intersection of the hinge-margin and the posterior margin. Muscle impressions in both valves deep-seated, the posterior pair roughly tear- shaped and the anterior pair somewhat reniform in shape, narrower at the upper ends; just above the anterior pair 1s another pair of small, impressed, ovate pedal-retractor impressions. The pallial line is simple, connecting the lower ends of the muscle impressions in each valve in a curve generally parallel to the ventral margin of the shell. This margin Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 213 is sculptured internally by quadrangular excavations that coincide with the ends of the external ribs. Dimensions: length, 25.8; width, 16.0; height, measured from the umbo in a line perpendicular to a line bisect- ing the muscle impressions, 23.0; oblique height, measured from the umbo to the posterior bulge, 25.2 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci., Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8518, dredged in 63 fathoms about 4.6 miles northwest of Point Pinos, in fine sand, sand pellets, and pebbles, Monterey Bay, California, August 22, 1932, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr. The type lot consists of six specimens. Paratypes: These include the five specimens collected with the type; four specimens and one valve from 52-55 fathoms, about 3.1 miles north- west of Point Pinos, in fine dark sand and pebbles, August 8, 1932, dredged by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr.; and five specimens dredged in 70 fathoms off Monterey by G. E. McGinitie. Paratype specimens have been placed in the California Academy of Sciences (Type Coll. Nos. 8519-8523, incl.), Stan- ford University, the U. S. National Museum, the Los Angeles Museum, and. the private collections of S. S. Berry and Mr. and Mrs. E. P. Chace. Range: Fort Bragg, Mendocino County, to Ventura, California, in 30-70 fathoms. A lot of over 100 specimens from the northern limit of the range (C.A.S. Locality No. 31141) shows intergradation with the typical C. ven- tricosa. The lot from Ventura (C.A.S. Locality No. 31700) consists of five small specimens that show no tendency to intergrade with the southern form of C. ventricosa. Remarks: The cyclocardias of the west coast of North America are a difficult group with a comparatively limited range of variation. Unfor- tunately, there has been much taxonomic confusion regarding them. Cardita ventricosa (Gould, 1850) was described from shells collected in Puget Sound, Washington, by members of the United States Exploring Ex- pedition under Wilkes. There were two separate species in the type lot (U. S. National Museum No. 3373). The first, represented by several speci- mens, was a transversely ovate shell with a moderately weak hinge-arrange- ment. The second, represented by a single specimen, was a plump, elevated shell with high beaks and a strong hinge-arrangement. According to Dall, Gould’s diagnosis refers partly to both species, al- though this is not altogether clear from reading the original description. At any rate, Gould’s dimensions of the specimen described, and his subsequent figure of it (Gould, 1852), can only be referred to the transversely ovate species and apparently also only to the largest specimen of the lot, which should be selected as the lectoholotype. Stearns (1890), however, mis- takenly figured the single specimen belonging to the second species as Dr. Gould’s type of C. ventricosa, at the same time assigning the species to the genus Venericardia, in which he was followed by Dall. Later, Dall (1902) 214 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. pointed out Stearns’ error and designated Stearns’ figured specimen as the type of a new species, which he called Venericardia (Cyclocardia) stearnsii. Cardita stearnsii (Dall) appears to be a scarce but distinct species so far found only in the inland waters of British Columbia and northern Wash- ington at depths of from 20 to 30 fathoms. The Gordon Collection in the California Academy contains two specimens from Puget Sound, which were in a lot of typical ventricosa, collected at the same time and location by T. S. Oldroyd. The species can be distinguished from ventricosa and its allies by its greater height with respect to length; its elevated, more strongly- prosogyrate beaks; its deeply-impressed lunule, and its strong elevated hinge, which, in the left valve, bears a prominently-developed anterior cardinal tooth behind the lunule, and a perceptibly curved posterior cardinal tooth. The periostracum of C. stearnsi, although radially pilose, lacks the velvety appearance of the periostracum of shells of the ventricosa group. The writers recognize three forms of C. ventricosa (Gould) on the west coast of North America—the typical species and two subspecies. These have the following characters in common: the number of external ribs (18 to 20); the slightly prosogyrate beaks; the moderately-depressed lunule; the general form and structure of the hinge-plate; and the velvety-appearing periostracum. They differ principally in shell outline and in minor particulars of the hinge-plate. In outline, the typical northern form of C. ventricosa is ovate; C. ven- tricosa montereyensis, found off the central California coast, is subtriangular and extended posteriorly; and the form found off the coast of southern California is subquadrangular and more ventricose. For this latter form Burch proposes the name redondoensis (Minutes, Conch. Club of Southern California, No. 39, pp. 14, 15, Sept., 1944, and No. 45, p. 11, March, 1945). Cardita ventricosa montereyensis differs from the typical C. ventricosa also in the hinge-plate, in which the lower margin slopes anteriorly instead of being roughly parallel to the ventral margin of the shell; the posterior cardinal tooth in the left valve is somewhat stronger; the shell is more compressed with the beaks slightly less tumid, resulting in a smaller space behind the hinge-plate and a more heavily-buttressed support behind the anterior cardinal tooth in the left valve; and the central cardinal tooth of the right valve is beveled above rather than acute. This last character, however, may be modi- fied by one or two grooves in some individuals of either the species or the subspecies. The difference in shape between C. ventricosa montereyensis and the south- ern form is due to the greater posterior attenuation and consequently more sharply-rounded posterior end of montereyensis, while redondoensis has a much more broadly-rounded posterior end. Also, redondoensis is more ventricose than either of the others; the central California form is the least ventricose. The range of redondoensis, based on several lots totalling about 30 specimens Vout. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 215 Fic. 2. Cardita ventricosa montereyensis Smith and Gordon, n.ssp. Holotype, C.A.S. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8518. Length, 25.8; width, 16.0; height, 23.0; oblique height, 252 mm. A, interior view of left valve; B, same, right valve. (G. D. Hanna, del.) Fic. 3. Cardita ventricosa montereyensis Smith and Gordon, n.ssp. Paratype, C.A.S. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8519. Length, 17.0; width, 10.0; height, 15.7; oblique height, 16.9 mm. A, interior view of left valve; B, same, right valve. (G. D. Hanna, del.) > -* S m4 ins i a Fic. 4. Cardita ventricosa (Gould). Hypotype from Puget Sound, the type locality. C.A.S. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8524. Length, 19.7; width, 11.9; height, 17.8; oblique height, 18.8 mm. A, interior view of left valve; B, same, right valve. (G, D, Hanna, del.) 216 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. in the collection of the California Academy, is from off Santa Cruz Island in 250 fathoms to Cortez Bank in 40 to 60 fathoms. Burch cites it from off Redondo Beach, in 100 fathoms. From the fossil species of Cardita, C. ventricosa and its subspecies differ mainly in the number of radial ribs, as follows: Species No. of Ribs Cardita ventricosa group 18-20 Cardita occidentalis Conrad 15 Cardita monilicosta Gabb 14-17 Cardita californica (Dall 1903, not Deshayes 1854) 14-16 Cardita hilli Willett 25-27 From the living species C. longini Baily (1945), they differ by having more ribs, Jongini having 13 to 15, and also in the fact that adult shells of longini average about half the size. The velvety-appearing epidermis further serves to distinguish the ventricosa group from all other living cyclocardias on the west coast of North America. Dentalium berryi Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figures 1-4. Description of the holotype: Shell relatively large for the genus on the Pacific Coast, fairly heavy, moderately curved throughout its length, at- tenuated toward the apex, the gradually diminishing diameter beginning at about the middle. Color of the upper half chalky white with a very pale brownish stain; of the lower half milk white, somewhat polished and shining. Upper half somewhat eroded. Sculpture consists of irregularly-spaced growth rings that mark the resting stages in the development of the shell; longitudinal striae absent. Aperture circular, thin-edged, not oblique. Ex- terior of apex also circular. Anal orifice a narrow slit, subrectangular in shape, with the long axis on the dorsal side of the shell. The slit appears to have been formed by the building up of layers of shell inside the orifice. Length 46.7 mm.; diameter of aperture, 3.7 mm.; diameter of apex, 1.4 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8525, dredged in about 40 fathoms in fine muddy sand and shale fragments on Humpback Reef, Monterey Bay, California, by A. G. Smith, John Q. Burch, and Tom Burch, August, 1937. The type lot consists of three additional living adults, one dead imperfect adult, and two immature dead shells. Paratypes: Specimens collected with the holotype and another lot con- sisting of one adult and one broken shell dredged in 20 fathoms in fine sand near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., August, 1932, are designated as paratypes. These have been placed in the California Academy of Sciences, the U. S. National Museum, Academy Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY ZA) of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and in the private collections of S. S. Berry, John Q. and Tom Burch, and A. G. Smith. The three living adults are all remarkably like the holotype except for a difference in length and that two of them have a plain circular anal orifice, without notch or slit. The immature shells taper to a fine point and are more curved in the upper portion than the adult shells. One of these, a dead speci- men, has the anal orifice slightly notched, with the notch prolonged on the dorsal side into a deep narrow slit. Remarks: This species is unusual for the chalky upper portion of the adult shell, which lacks all traces of longitudinal striations. Evidently the curved tip, which is a feature of the immature stage, is eroded or broken off at a later stage, after which a slit and shallow notch may be formed by the adult shell in some instances. D. berry differs from D. semipolitum Broderip and Sowerby by having a proportionally heavier shell, by the lack of longi- tudinal striations, by being more evenly curved throughout its length, and by having a chalky and more or less eroded upper portion. D. semipolitum appears to be a form found in shallower water, being dredged in 10-20 fathoms, although it has been taken with D. berryi in deeper water. From D. pretiosum Sowerby, D. berryi differs by being longer and more slender, and particularly in its chalky texture. Retusa (Sulcularia) montereyensis Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 11. Description of the holotype: Shell minute, white, translucent, with a pale straw-colored periostracum; subcylindrical, narrow anteriorly, slightly com- pressed at the center; base somewhat inflated. Apex deeply sunken; spire concealed; aperture narrowed posteriorly, rounded, extending well beyond the apex, while anteriorly it becomes wider, terminating in a rounded flare. Sculpture consisting of close-set, subequally spaced, rounded, somewhat sinuous, vertical, occasionally branching axial ribs, spaced about 24 to the millimeter ; interspaces almost equal to the ribs in width, cut into squares by very fine, subequally spaced spiral lines, which do not pass over the ribs them- selves. On the holotype this sculpture is hardly distinguishable on the base, but on other specimens it continues to the columella. Outer lip thin, some- what sinuous and compressed at the center, smooth inside; pillar lip also thin; columella slightly thickened, almost straight. Body of shell has a slight glaze. Length, 2.8mm.; maximum diameter, 1.1 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8527, C.A.S. Loc. No. 23,820, dredged in 25 fathoms, in fine sand and shell fragments near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point, Monterey, California, by G. D. Hanna and eC. Church. Paratypes: Specimens so designated are as follows: nine shells dredged 218 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Ser. in 8-15 fathoms, in fine sand and broken shale off Del Monte, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., and G. E. McGinitie, August, 1932; a single specimen dredged in the same general locality in 15 fathoms, by G. D. Hanna, J. L. Nicholson, and A. G. Smith, July, 1930. These have been distributed to the U. S. Na- tional Museum, Stanford University, Los Angeles Museum, and the private collections of S. S. Berry, and A. G. Smith. Remarks: At first we believed this little Monterey Retusa was refer- able to R. xystrum Dall. However, comparison of specimens with a hypo- type of rystrum from San Pedro (No. 6414, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll.), which was rather poorly figured by Oldroyd (1927, vol. 2, pt. 1, pl. 2, fig. 10) has convinced us that the Monterey shell is a different species. The specimen of R. xystrum measures: length, 2.7 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.2 mm. It possesses faint threadlike spiral lirae between the axial ribs, a char- acter overlooked by Dall in the original description (Proc. U.S.N.M., 1920, 56:297). The axial ribs are spaced 18 to the millimeter, there being approxi- mately 50 on the last whorl. In R. montereyensis the ribs are spaced 24 to the millimeter, with almost 70 on a paratype of equivalent length. Also, the spiral striations of montereyensis are more closely spaced than on -+rystrum. There is practically no variation in the spacing of the axial ribs and the spiral lirae in all specimens of montereyensis we have examined, and in general it has a constantly more delicate sculpture than rystrum. Metzgeria montereyana Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 6. Description of the holotype: Shell moderately small, whitish, with a brown, minutely wrinkled, conspicuous periostracum. Nucleus with one and one-half whorls, small, depressed-turbinate, white, the tip smooth with weak transverse ribs appearing on the last half turn, the axis slightly oblique. Post-nuclear whorls four and one-quarter, evenly rounded, rather high and slightly obliquely inclined from the horizontal, separated by a moderately deep suture. Axial sculpture consists of 12 to 13 prominent, rounded, elevated axial ribs extending between the sutures and on the last whorl crossing the periphery to about the middle of the base, separated by slightly narrower interspaces. These are crossed by seven to eight narrow, rounded, elevated, spiral cords, which are strongest over the center of the whorl and weaker toward the sutures and separated by wider interspaces. Periphery well- rounded, marked by a continuation of the axial and spiral sculpture. Base and canal have 16 spiral cords that become successively closer spaced toward the end of the canal. Aperture less than half as long as the shell; outer lip thin (partly broken off in the holotype), smooth and whitish within; pillar whitish, somewhat recurved anteriorly, ornamented behind the angle by three distinct, subequally spaced, oblique plaits, the posterior one weaker than Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 219 the other two; canal slightly oblique, open, and moderately wide. Length of shell, 12.4 mm.; of aperture and canal, 5.7 mm.; maximum diameter, 4.8 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8530; a single dead specimen dredged in 15 fathoms, in fine sand and broken shale off Del Monte, Monterey Bay, California, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., August, 1932. Remarks: This species is the second Metzgeria to be described from the California coast. It differs from M. californica Dall in having three to four less axial ribs on the whorls, in lacking the inflated whorls, and in having a shorter, more oblique canal. Balcis delmontensis Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 5. Description of the holotype: Shell small, broadly conic, vitreous, yellow- ish to milk-white. Axis of whorls appears straight at first glance but actually curves slightly to the right. Nuclear whorls two and one-half, smooth, and well-rounded, the first helicoid and loosely coiled. Post-nuclear whorls six, gently rounded except the last, which is subangulated about one-quarter of the distance below the suture. Whorls polished, with a few weak, irregu- larly situated varices. Periphery of the last whorl inflated and sharply rounded. Base short, gently rounded, smooth. Aperture moderately large, ovate, the posterior angle acute; outer lip thin at the edge, somewhat pro- duced ; inner lip thick, strongly curved, reflected over the base and appressed to it posteriorly; parietal wall glazed with a thin callus. Length, 4.5 mm.; maximum diameter, 2.2 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8531; dredged in 10 fathoms, in fine sand and shale fragments off Del Monte, Monterey Bay, California, by A. G. Smith and C. S. Fackenthall, August, 1913. Paratypes: Specimens so designated consist of the following lots: Three shells dredged in 10 fathoms, in granite sand and broken shells off Cabrillo Point, by A. G. Smith, August, 1913 (AGS No. 5087); two specimens dredged in 10 fathoms off Del Monte, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., August, 1932; seven immature shells (C.A.S.-Paleo. Type Coll. Nos. 8532-8538, incl.) dredged in 25 fathoms near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point; a single immature specimen dredged in 8-10 fathoms in sand off Del Monte (AGS No. 5089) ; and two specimens from a seaweed holdfast off Del Monte (AGS No. 8266). Distribution of paratypes has been made, in addition to those in the Academy’s collection to the U. S. National Museum, Stanford Univer- sity, Los Angeles Museum, and the private collections of S. S. Berry, John Q. and Tom Burch, and A. G. Smith. 220 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH Srp. Remarks: This species is nearest to B. tacomaensis (Bartsch), but is more broadly conic, has a more inflated base, and lacks the conspicuously false suture of the latter species. It may be readily distinguished from other melanellas found in Monterey Bay by its inflated base and its straight col- umella. Turbonilla (Turbonilla) fackenthallae Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figures 7, 8. Description of the holotype: Shell rather large for the subgenus, robust, broadly conic, milk-white. Nuclear whorls helicoid, two and one-half, at right angles to and about one-third immersed in the first post-nuclear turn. Post- nuclear whorls 10, well rounded, very narrowly tabulate at the summits, especially on some of the whorls where the axial ribs are posteriorly trun- cated. Sutures prominent. The sculpture consists of broad, rounded, promi- nent, moderately protractive axial ribs, of which there are 10 on the first, 12 on the second to fifth, 14 on the sixth, 12 on the seventh, 10 on the eighth, 12 on the ninth, and 16 on the last whorl where they are slightly less promi- nent than on the others. The ribs are separated by well marked, rounded inter- spaces, from one-half to five-sixths the width of the ribs, and which just start to die out as they reach the suture. Axial sculpture crossed by numer- ous, faintly-incised spiral lines, discernible only under fairly high magnifica- tion. Periphery well rounded; base rather elongate, gently rounded and sculptured by lines of growth and the fine spiral lines. Aperture subquadrate ; posterior angle acute; outer lip thin, showing the axial sculpture within. Columella thin, gently curved, inclined in the same plane as the axial ribs. Length, 7.7 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.9 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8539, Locality No. 24,147, dredged in 20-30 fathoms, in sand, between the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point and the shale bed off Del Monte, California, by G. D. Hanna, J. L. Nicholson, and A. G. Smith, June, 1930. Paratypes: Two specimens were collected with the holotype, one of which has been placed in the U. S. National Museum. This latter shell has 10 whorls, the nuclear whorls being lost. It differs from the holotype in the following particulars: Rib count the same except for 11 on the sixth, 11 on the eighth, and 15 on the last whorl; the interspaces do not quite reach the sutures, leaving a smooth narrow band just below them; on the early whorls this character affects the whorl below so that the narrow tabulation at the summits of the whorls is almost lacking, except when some of the ribs tend to be truncated posteriorly. The second paratype is in the collection at Stan- ford University. Remarks: This species can be identified easily by the robust shape of the shell; the broad, prominent, moderately protractive axial ribs; and its rel- Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 221 atively large size. Named in memory of the late Mrs. Charles S. Fack- enthall, who collected shells for many years in the Monterey region. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) stillmani Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 9. Description of the holotype: Shell small, narrowly conic, flesh-colored, with a narrow indistinct brown band at the periphery, and another less dis- tinct pale brown band just below the suture. Nuclear whorls one and three- quarters, depressed, helicoid, with the axis almost at right angles to that of the succeeding turns, in the first of which they are approximately one-fourth immersed. The five post-nuclear whorls appear to be gently rounded but on close inspection they are actually almost flattened laterally and strongly rounded above. Sutures deeply channeled. Axial sculpture consists of broadly rounded, elevated, straight, very slightly retractive ribs, of which there are 20 on the second, 18 on the third, 22 on the fourth, and 26 on the fifth whorl. These are separated by narrower, shallowly-channeled interspaces. On the last whorl the ribs are somewhat enfeebled and split. Axial sculpture crossed by exceedingly fine, lightly-incised spiral striae, hardly perceptible except under fairly high magnification. Periphery of the last whorl rounded, mod- erately inflated. Base rounded, marked by feeble continuations of the axial ribs and the spiral striae. Aperture suboval; posterior angle acute; outer lip thin; columella slender, slightly twisted; inner lip reflected anteriorly and appressed to the base. Length, 3.5mm.; maximum diameter, 1.1 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8540, dredged in 10 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments, one-half mile off Del Monte Pier, Monterey Bay, California, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr. and G. E. Mc- Ginitie, August, 1932. Two other specimens were collected. Paratypes: Specimens so designated include the two collected with the holotype; a single specimen from about the same locality dredged by A. G. Smith and C. S. Fackenthall, July, 1913; and a specimen from Monterey collected by George Willett. They are placed in the collections at Stanford University and the U. S. National Museum, and the private collections of George Willett and S. S. Berry. Remarks: This species is related most closely to T. pesa Dall and Bartsch but is distinguished from it in having a more elongate base, better defined axial ribs, and broader early post-nuclear whorls. It resembles none of the south- ern California species closely. Tentatively referred to this species also is a single specimen dredged in 25 fathoms off Coronado Beach, California, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., September, 1933. Named in honor of Dr. S. Still- man Berry, of Redlands, California, whose work on the molluscan fauna of Monterey Bay is thus signalized. The name was also chosen in partial com- pensation for the necessity of placing T. berryi Dall and Bartsch in the synonymy of T. chocolata (Carpenter). 222 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) willetti Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 10. Description of the holotype: Shell small, rather broadly conic. Color light brown, with a narrow dark brown band just above the periphery showing on all the whorls, a wider but fainter brown band just below the periphery, and a small but still paler colored area at the columella. Nuclear whorls heli- coid, two and one-half, at right angles to and about one-fourth immersed in the first post-nuclear turn. Post-nuclear whorls eight, very gently rounded but more so at the summits, with narrow but distinct tabulations. Sutures well incised and prominent. Axial sculpture consists of broad, rounded, gen- erally vertical ribs, of which there are 12 on the second, 14 on the third, 16 on the fourth, fifth, and sixth, 18 on the seventh, and 20 on the last whorl. On some of the whorls the ribs are slightly protractive. They are separated by narrow, moderately deep interspaces that are usually about one-half the width of the ribs. On the last whorl the ribs are not so strongly developed as on those preceding it. Ribs and interspaces crossed by numerous fine, wavy, spiral lines. Aperture pyriform; posterior angle acute; outer lip thick (slightly broken away), rounding with a slight flare into the straight, fairly thick, revolute, oblique columella. Length, 5.8mm.; maximum diameter, 1.6 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8541, dredged in 10 fathoms, in sand and shale fragments, one-half mile off Del Monte Pier, Monterey Bay, California, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., and G. E. Mc- Ginitie, August, 1932. Remarks: This species is known so far only from the holotype, which is sufficiently different from others described under the subgenus Pyrgolampros that we have no hesitancy in naming it as new. The narrow tabulation of the whorls is a particular feature. In this it is probably closest to T. strongi Willett although the latter is a much less robust shell. The holotype of willetti has been compared with paratypes of strongi in the Willett collection. Named in honor of the late George Willett, former Curator of Conchology and Ornithology, Los Angeles Museum. Turbonilla (Bartschella) bartschi Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 13. Description of the holotype: Shell small, elongate-conic, cream-white. Nuclear whorls two and one-half, helicoid, with the axis set obliquely to that of the next succeeding turn in which it is about one-third immersed. Post- nuclear whorls six, well rounded, strongly constricted at the sutures. Sculp- ture consists of strong, narrow, sharp, subequally spaced, raised, sinuous, axial ribs, of which there are 17 on the first, 21 on the second and third, 25 on the fourth, and 30 on the last whorl. The ribs are protractive over most Vou. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 223 of the whorl but at the summit and at the suture they are somewhat re- tractive. The whorls are also sculptured by nine spiral cords, equal in strength to the ribs and rendering them somewhat nodulous at the points where they cross. The intercostal spaces are twice the width of the ribs and are in the form of deep squarish pits. Periphery of the last whorl gently rounded. Base marked by continuations of the axial ribs, which reach almost to the umbilical area, and sculptured by eight spiral cords that are progressively more closely spaced and become progressively weaker as the umbilicus is approached. Aperture large, pyriform; posterior angle acute; columella slender, curved ; umbilical chink present. Length, 2.0mm; maximum diameter, 0.7 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8542, Locality No. 23,820, dredged in 25 fathoms near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California, by G. D. Hanna and C. C. Church. Remarks: This species is known so far only from the holotype. It is unique in the further sense of being the only Bartschella from the West Coast of North America with such sharp sinuous ribs. Named in honor of Dr. Paul Bartsch whose valuable work with Dr. W. H. Dall on the western Ameri- can Pyramidellidae now serves as a starting point for all future studies of this group. Odostomia (Salassiella) heathi Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 14. Description of the holotype: Shell small, conic, milk-white, with a narrow brownish band just below the center of the whorls. Nuclear whorls two and one-half, with the axis almost at right angles to the succeeding turns, in the first of which it is approximately one-third immersed. Post-nuclear whorls four and one-half, moderately rounded and shouldered at the summits, marked by slightly flexuous, lamellar, axial ribs, which are but feebly present on the first half turn. There are 28 of these ribs on the second and third, 25 on the fourth, and 24 on the last whorl. The intercostal spaces are about one-third as wide as the ribs and are moderately well impressed. Varices are sparse and irregularly placed, being best developed on the earlier whorls, and ex- tend strongly to the sutures. Periphery of whorls subangulate; sutures well impressed. Base rounded, marked by feeble continuations of the axial ribs almost to the umbilical area, which is relatively smooth. Aperture subpyri- form; posterior angle acute; outer lip moderately thin, smooth within; col- umella almost straight, slender, provided with a weak fold at its insertion. Length, 2.8mm.; maximum diameter, 1.0 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8543, dredged in 15 fathoms near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point, Monterey, California, by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr. Remarks: Known only from the holotype. This is the first species of the 224 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH Serr. subgenus Salassiella found north of San Pedro, California. It differs from other West American representatives of the subgenus by the greater number of axial ribs on the earlier whorls. Named for Dr. Harold Heath, well-known biologist (now emeritus) of the Hopkins Marine Biological Laboratory at Pacific Grove, California. Odostomia (Menestho) churchi Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 12. Description of the holotype: Shell small, subcylindrical, translucent, white. Nuclear whorls smooth, two and one-half, prominent, obliquely immersed in the next succeeding turn. Post-nuclear whorls nearly four, moderately rounded, with a sloping shoulder that gives the shell a tabulated aspect. There is a slight suggestion of a constriction at the periphery of the whorls. Sculpture consists of about 25 low, flattened, subequal, spiral cords, which are separated, in turn, by fine, wavy, well-impressed, spiral grooves. In addition to these there are numerous and very fine axial and spiral striae that form a network over the entire shell, visible only under high magnifica- tion. Periphery and base well rounded and, like the spire, sculptured by spiral cords, of which there are about 15, and the reticulate striae. Aperture pyriform, entire; outer lip thin, the sculpture showing through. Columella strong, greatly reflected; posterior angle obtuse. Length, 1.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 0.5 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8544, dredged in 25 fathoms near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California, by GD. Hanna andsC.1C, Church. Remarks: This species is known so far only from the holotype. It sug- gests O. (Ivara) turricula Dall and Bartsch, but is much more elongate and lacks the feeble axial ribs of the latter species. It is also rather like O. (Men- estho) pharcida Dall and Bartsch, but is more shouldered and has more spiral lirae. Named for Mr. Clifford C. Church, paleontologist with the Tidewater-Associated Oil Company, one of the collectors of the holotype. Rissoella hertleini Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 3, figure 15. Description of the holotype: Shell small, subglobose, translucent, light yellowish-brown. Nuclear whorls one and one-quarter, well rounded, smooth. Post-nuclear whorls three, rounded, but with a slight posterior flattening, smooth except for minute irregularities caused by normal lines of growth and by stopping points in the development of the shell. Sutures moderately con- stricted. Periphery strongly rounded, marked like the spire, and with a small umbilicus. Umbilical area bounded above by a moderate angulation. Aperture Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 225 semi-lunar, the posterior angle almost a right angle; outer lip thin, well rounded, meeting the inner lip at an obtuse angle; inner lip thin above, strongly reflected below, prominently channeled behind, and appressed to the base at the extreme lower end; peritreme completed by a fairly heavy callus on the parietal wall. Operculum corneous, thin, imbricate, with a submar- ginal clawlike process on the posterior side. Length, 2.2mm.; maximum diameter, 1.5 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8545, dredged in 10 fathoms, in sand, off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California, by A. G. Smith, July, 1913. Six additional specimens, similar in all respects to the holotype, were collected with it. Paratypes: Specimens so designated are the six just mentioned. They have been placed in the U. S. National Museum, the Los Angeles Museum, the San Diego Society of Natural History, Stanford University, and the private collections of S. S. Berry, and A. G. Smith (No. 2010). Remarks: This species is closely related to those already described from the west coast of Lower California. The operculum has the same characters as those of the genotype (See Tryon, Man. Conch., vol. 9, pl. 54, figs. 96, 97). It may be identified easily by its subglobose shape, channeled umbilical area, and lack of distinctive sculpture. Named for Dr. Leo G. Hertlein, Assistant Curator of Paleontology, California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. Alaba serrana Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 4, figures 1, 2. Description of the holotype: Shell small, elongate-conic, light cream-white. Whorls 10 (the last imperfect), the early ones rounded, the later ones with a sloping shoulder that forms a slight angulation about one-quarter of the dis- tance below the suture. On the last entire whorl three more faint angulations or subobsolete carinae are spaced equally between the shoulder edge and the periphery. No incised lines are present. Axial sculpture consists of fine, sinuous, protractively slanting lines of growth. Varicial thickenings make their appearance on the second whorl, where they are feebly developed, although they increase in strength on the succeeding turns. Periphery subangulate ; base gently rounded. Aperture broken away, suboval; outer lip thin; pos- terior angle obtuse. Columella curved, the parietal wall covered by a thin callus. Length, 5.2 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.8 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8546. Locality No. 24.830, dredged in 25 fathoms, Carmel Bay, California, with a tow net that accidentally scraped bottom, by W. L. Scofield of the California Division of Fish and Game, who turned the material so obtained over to Dr. Harold Heath. 226 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Ser. Paratype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll. No. 8547; a single specimen dredged with the holotype. It is immature, shining, translucent, and more slender than the holotype, with sculpture consisting of fine, closely-spaced punctations on the earlier whorls. It has eight whorls and measures: length, 3.4mm. ; maximum diameter, 1.2 mm. Remarks: This species is most nearly related to A. catalinensis Bartsch, from which it differs by its subangulate spiral sculpture. It represents a con- siderable extension northward of the range of the genus. Named for Padre Junipero Serra, who founded the mission at Carmel. Rissoina hannai Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 4, figure 4. Description of the holotype: Shell small, elongate-conic, translucent, milk-white. Nuclear whorls two, well rounded, smooth. Post-nuclear whorls five, moderately rounded, appressed at the summits, giving the appearance of having a double suture. Under low magnification the whorls appear to be devoid of sculpture, but under higher power the sculpture is seen to consist of numerous, extremely fine, closely spaced axial striae or lines of growth. Occasionally a small, obsolete axial rib begins to develop near the suture but dies out immediately and is overridden by the axial striae. Under still higher magnification a number of tiny, irregularly-spaced punctations make their appearance. Periphery and base gently rounded, marked like the spire. Aperture large, effuse, slightly channeled at the posterior angle; outer lip moderately thick and effuse; inner lip also fairly thick, curved, and appressed to the base; parietal wall covered by a callus that renders the peritreme com- plete. Length, 2.7 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.3 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8548, Locality No. 24,830, dredged in 25 fathoms in Carmel Bay, California, with a tow net by W. L. Scofield of the California Division of Fish and Game and sent to the Academy by Dr. Harold Heath. In addition to the holotype, 27 other specimens were taken. Paratypes: Specimens so designated have been placed in the California Academy of Sciences (Type Nos. 8549-8552, inc.), the U. S. National Mu- seum, the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences, Stanford University, the San Diego Society of Natural History, the Los Angeles Museum, and in the private collections of S. S. Berry, A. G. Smith, E. P. and E. M. Chace, and Tom and John QO. Burch. Remarks: This species is nearest to R. cerrosensis Bartsch, but its shape is elongate-conic while the latter species is decidedly ovate. From all other described West American species it differs in having no apparent sculpture under low magnification. Named for Dr. G. Dallas Hanna of the California Academy of Sciences. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 227 Rissoina keenae Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 4, figure 3. Description of the holotype: Shell small, elongate-conic, subdiaphanous, milk-white. Nuclear whorls two, smooth and shining. Post-nuclear whorls four, strongly rounded, very narrowly and feebly beveled at the sutures, marked by almost vertical, generally straight, closely-spaced, axial threads, which vary somewhat in strength, and which are equally spaced except occasionally when two or more coalesce or where there is a variation in strength. The axial threads are weakly defined on the first post-nuclear whorl, become stronger on the second, and reach maximum development on the last two, on which there are 56 to 58 of them. Intercostal spaces are generally less than half the width of the threads. There is occasional splitting of the threads also, with the result that some of them are not continuous across the entire whorl. Sutures strongly impressed. Base slightly concave posteriorly, marked by continuations of the axial threads, which extend without diminution in strength to the umbilical area. Aperture large, some- what oblique, suboval. Outer lip reinforced by a thick varix immediately be- hind the edge, the posterior portion being slightly reflected. Inner lip thin, gently curved, reflected over and appressed to the base, making the peritreme complete. Length, 2.8mm.; maximum diameter, 1.1 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8553, dredged in 5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos, Monterey Bay, California, in coarse granite sand and broken shells, by A. G. Smith and Mackenzie Gordon, Jr., Septem- ber, 1932. Two additional specimens were collected with the holotype. Paratypes: Specimens so designated are the two just mentioned, and two others dredged in 15 fathoms, in fine sand near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr. They have been placed in the U. S. National Museum, Stanford University, and the private collections of S. S. Berry and A. G. Smith. . Remarks: This species differs from others described from the Pacific Coast by having a larger number of axial threads of relatively equal strength that cross the post-nuclear whorls. It has the well-rounded whorls of Fe. bakeri Bartsch, but lacks the strong axial ribs of that species. From R. newcombet Dall it differs by having more rounded whorls, with more and closer-spaced axial threads. All of the specimens collected show no marked deviation in shape or sculpture. Named for Dr. A. Myra Keen, Curator of the Paleonto- logical Collections, Stanford University. Calyptraea burchi Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 4, figures 11-13. Description of the holotype: Shell of medium size, low, broadly conic, with'a circular aperture and slightly concave sides. Exterior whitish, chalky, 228 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. and covered with a thin yellowish-brown epidermis. Nuclear whorls a little over one and one-half, smooth, yellowish-brown; the first oblique, rounded, and set off by a prominent suture, giving the shell a mammillate aspect. The post-nuclear portion of the shell expands rapidly and is marked externally only by circular lines of growth. Interiorly the shell carries the spiral septum usual in the genus, which is white, markedly sinuate at the edge, and which shows closely-spaced, sinuate lines of growth that are alternately an opaque milk-white and translucent. Toward the columella the septum margin be- comes recurved and finally folded back on the columella itself, to which it is appressed and fused. Remainder of the interior smooth and polished, but un- der medium magnification both this and the septum have finely-granulated microscopic sculpture. Color of the interior light yellowish-brown marked by many flecks and flammulations of darker brown. Margin thin. Maximum diameter, 16.3 mm.; height, 6.4 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8554, Locality No. 24,147, dredged in 20-30 fathoms between the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point and the shale bed off Del Monte, Monterey Bay, California, by G. D. Hanna, J. L. Nicholson, and A. G: Smith, july, 1930) Uiegeape lot consists of the holotype and two immature shells. Paratypes: Specimens so designated include the two young shells just mentioned and the following additional lots: four adult and four immature specimens in the A. G. Smith (No. 5748) and the J. Q. Burch collections, dredged in 35-40 fathoms, on shale, at Humpback Reef, off Monterey; an imperfect adult and two young shells dredged in 15 fathoms off Del Monte on the shale bed, by A. G. Smith (No. 3644) ; one young shell dredged in the same locality by Mackenzie Gordon, Jr.; and two dead specimens from 25 fathoms, in shelly sand, off Del Monte in the Berry collection (SSB No. 1677). Remarks: Two additional small lots that appear to be this species are in the California Academy’s Collection. They are from Carmel. Differs from C. fastigiata Gould in its smaller size and in the brown markings, which also show on the outside of the shell on some of the paratypes. Differs from C. contorta (Carpenter) by having a colored nuclear apex instead of a white one, by its larger size, and also in its brown markings. All shells of these two other species in the lots we have seen from the West Coast north of San Pedro are white and otherwise uncolored. Named for John Q. and Tom Burch of Redondo Beach, California. Margarites keepi Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 4, figures 5-7. Description of the holotype: Shell small, broadly conic, whitish with occasional dark flammulations. Nuclear whorls one and one-half, somewhat VoL. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 229 oblique, smooth. Post-nuclear whorls three, sloping, tabulate, marked by three spiral keels. The first of these keels consists of a thin, raised, spiral thread adjacent to the suture; the second and third are prominent, of equal strength, and divide the whorl into three equal parts. Periphery marked by a strong cord of about the same prominence as the second and third keels. The keels are crossed by about 24 raised, retractive, axial riblets of slightly lesser strength than the keels, forming well-developed tubercles at the points of crossing. The axial riblets die out at the periphery, beyond which the base slopes gently to the umbilicus. Base sculptured with seven spiral cords that decrease successively in strength toward the umbilical region, the outer four being well developed. The basal cords are crossed by very fine, closely- spaced, slightly retractive, axial lines. Aperture suboval; outer lip thin, crenulated by the spiral keels; columella moderately thin, curved, and re- flected so that it partially closes the umbilicus ; posterior angle obtuse ; parietal wall covered by a thin wash of callus. Height, 2.0 mm.; maximum diameter, 2.1 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8557, Locality No. 23,820, dredged in 25 fathoms, in sand, near the bell buoy off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California, by G. D. Hanna and C. C. Church. Four additional specimens were taken with the holotype. Paratypes: Specimens so designated have been placed in the California Academy’s collection (Nos. 8558, 8559), the U. S. National Museum, and the private collection of A. G. Smith. They are part of the type lot. Remarks: This species is unique among the Margarites described from the West Coast of North America, there being no other with such strong axial ribbing and tuberculation. Named in honor of Professor Josiah Keep, formerly of Mills College, who did so much to advance the knowledge of the shells of the West Coast. Skenea carmelensis Smith and Gordon, new species Plate 4, figures 8-10. Description of the holotvpe: Shell small, depressed, turbinate, white. Nu- clear whorls one and one-half, helicoid, smooth. Post-nuclear whorls one and one-half, well rounded, sloping posteriorly, marked by a number of narrow, slightly raised, rounded, spiral cords, separated by V-shaped or U-shaped grooves, and crossed by irregularly-spaced lines of growth. Periph- ery of the last whorl strongly rounded. The base slopes gently into the um- bilical angle and is sculptured by many spiral cords of lesser dimension but more closely spaced than those on the spire. The spiral cords continue weakly but a short distance beyond the umbilical angle into the rather narrow um- bilicus, which is marked mainly by continuations of the lines of growth. Aperture nearly circular; posterior angle obtuse; outer lip thin, minutely 230 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. crenulated by the spiral cords; inner lip thin, curved, appressed to the base above, slightly reflected over the umbilicus, and also reflected and grooved below ; parietal wall covered by a thin callus, making the peritreme complete. Height, 1.3 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.7 mm. Holotype: Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll., No. 8560, Locality No. 24,830, dredged.in 25 fathoms, in sand, in Carmel Bay, California, with a tow net by W. L. Scofield of the California Division of Fish and Game and forwarded to Dr. Harold Heath, who turned the material over to the California Academy. Three other specimens were dredged with the holotype. Paratypes: Specimens so designated are the three just mentioned. They have been placed in the California Academy of Sciences (Nos. 8561, 8562), and the private collection of A. G. Smith. Remarks: There remains a certain amount of doubt in assigning this species to Vitrinellidae because of the relatively small size of the nuclear whorls and the narrowness of the umbilicus. However, the thinness of the shell and the configuration of the columella do not appear to warrant placing it in Turbinidae or in Trochidae. We have seen nothing else like it from the Monterey region or elsewhere. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 231 SY NONYMIC NOTES Acmaea cassis Eschscholtz, A. cassis pelta Eschscholtz, A. cassis monticola Dall, A. cassis nacelloides Dall, and A. cassis olympica Dall, see A. pelta Eschscholtz—Grant, 1938. Acmaea permabilis Dall, see A. ochracea (Dall)—Grant, 1938. Acmaea scutum patina Eschscholtz, A. scutum pintadina (Gould), A. scutum parallela Dall, and A. emydia Dall, see A. scutum Eschscholtz—Grant, 1938. Acmaea spectrum Reeve, see A. scabra (Govld)—Dall, Nautilus, vol. 28, (2), p. 14. Alectrion, Montfort, 1910, see Nassarius Duméril, 1805—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 670, 672. Alvania Risso, 1826—For discussion of the classification of the northwest American species under this genus, see Gordon, Nautilus, vol. 53, (1), pp. 29-33. Antiplanes Dall, 1902 (in part), see Rectiplanes Bartsch, 1944, created to include cer- tain dextral turrids formerly included in Antiplanes. Type: Rectiplanes santarosana (Dall)—Bartsch, 1944b, p. 59. Antiplanes Dall, 1902 (in part), see Rhodopetoma Bartsch, 1944, for A. amycus Dall— Bartsch, 1944b, p. 59. Arca pernoides (Carpenter), see A. bailyi (Bartsch)—Reinhart, 1943, pp. 35, 82. Astraea inaequalis montereyensis Oldroyd, see A. inaequalis (Martyn). We are of the opinion that this subspecies has doubtful taxonomic value. Basiliochiton Berry, 1918—For use as a genus to include Lepidochitona flectens (Car- penter), L. flectens heathii Pilsbry (— Mopalia heathii Pilsbry), and Basiliochiton lobium Berry, see Berry, 1925. Botula diegensis Dall, see Volsella diegensis (Dall)—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 253. Cardita Bruguiére, 1792 (in part), see Glans Megerle von Mihlfeldt, 1811—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 276. Cardita subquadrata (Carpenter), see Glans carpenteri Lamy—Lamy, 1922, p. 264. Cardiidace—For latest arrangement, see Keen, 1937b. Cardium corbis (Martyn), see C. nuttallii Conrad—Keen, 1936. Cavolina occidentalis Dall, see C. tricuspida (Rivers)—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 441. Chemnitzia gracillima Gabb, see Turbonilla gabbiana (Cooper )—Cooper, 1870a, p. 66. Cerithiopsis sassetta Dall, see Bittium serra Bartsch—This paper, p. 196. Chaetopleura Shuttleworth, 1853, see Dendrochiton Berry, 1911, for use of this latter genus to include C. thamnopora Berry, C. gothica Carpenter, and Dendrochiton semiliratus Berry—Berry, 1911b. Chironia Deshayes, 1839—For use of this genus name in place of Kellia Turton, 1822, see Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 299. Chrysodomus Swainson, 1840, see Neptunea Bolten, 1798—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 652- 653. Clathrodrillia Dall, 1918, see Ophiodermella Bartsch, 1944, for C. halcyonis (Dall) and C. incisa ophioderma (Dall)—Bartsch, 1944b, pp. 61-62. Columbella Lamarck, 1799 (as used in Dall, Bull. No. 112), see Mitrella Risso, 1826— Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 679, 683, 689-698. Corbula Bruguiére, 1798, see Aloidis Megerle von Mithlfeldt, 1811—Winckworth, 1930, p. 15; Keen, 1937a, p. 18; Gardner, Nautilus, vol. 40, (2), p. 43. Crepidula Lamarck, 1799, see Crepipatella Lesson, 1830, for C. lingulata Gould and C. orbiculata Dall—Woodring, Minutes, Conch. Club of So. Calif., No. 56, p. 17, Jan. 1945. Cryptoconus von Koenen, 1867, see Megasurcula Casey, 1904—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 495, 501; Keen, 1937a, p. 40. Cryptogemma Dall, 1917, see Carinoturris Bartsch, 1944, for C. adrastia Dall—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 571; Bartsch, 1944b, p. 60. 232 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H SER. Cumingia lamellosa Sowerby, see C. californica Conrad—Keen, 1937a, p. 20. Cuspidaria Nardo, 1840, see Cardiomya A. Adams, 1864—Stewart, 1930, p. 308. Cuspidaria nana Oldroyd, see Sphenia nana (Oldroyd)—Based on the type in the Stan- ford collection (Keen, in correspondence). Cyanoplax hartwegii nuttallii (Carpenter), see C. hartwegii (Carpenter)—Berry, 1933, p. 435. Cyclostremella californica Bartsch, see Skenea californica (Bartsch)— Iredale, Proc. Mal. Soc. London, 1915, vol. 11, p. 292. Cymbuliopsis vitrea Heath and Spaulding, see Corolla vitrea (Heath and Spaulding)— Dall (in Williamson), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. 15, (898), p. 194, 1892. Dentalium hannai Baker, see D. semipolitum Broderip and Sowerby—This paper, p. 178. Diala marmorea Carpenter, see Barleeia marmorea (Carpenter)—Dall, Nautilus, vol. 35, (3), p. 84. Diplodonta Bronn, 1831, see Taras Risso, 1826—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 293. Epitonium crenimarginatum (Dall), see E. (Dentiscala) insculptum (Carpenter)— Willett, Nautilus, vol. 52, (1), p. 10. Epitonium (Nitidoscala) fallaciosum Dall, see E. (Nitidiscala) cooperi Strong— Strong, 1930, pp. 189, 194, Epitonium subcoronatum (Carpenter), see E. (Nitidiscala) tinctum (Carpenter )—Strong, 1930, p. 187. Epitonium (Opalia) wroblewskyi Morch, see Opalia chacei Strong—Strong, Nautilus, vol. 51, (1) p. 5; also Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 853. Exilia rectirostris (Carpenter), see Evrilioidea rectirostris (Carpenter )—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 665. Fusinus robustus (Trask), see F. monksae Dall—Dall, Nautilus, vol. 29, (5), p. 55. Gadinea reticulata (Sowerby), see Trimusculus reticulatus (Sowerby)—Rehder, 1940, pp. 67-70. Galiteuthis phyllura Berry, see G. armata Joubin—Berry, in correspondence. Haliotis aulea Bartsch, see H. assimilis Dall—Comparison of a series of H. aulea ob- tained by Mr. Andrew Sorensen with shells of H. assimilis from various localities lead us to the conclusion that the former species is a variant of the latter that is found toward the northern end of its range. Halistylus subpupoideus (Tryon), see H. pupoideus (Carpenter )—Grant and Gale, 1931. p. 825. Hemitoma golischae (Dall), see Fissurella volcano Reeve—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 848. Hemitoma yatesti (Dall), see H. bella (Gabb)—Based on a comparison of specimens in the California Academy and other collections with the type of H. bella in the Univer- sity of California collection at Berkeley. See this paper, p. 205. Hinnites giganteus (Gray), see H. multirugosus (Gale)—Gale, 1928, p. 92. Lacuna porrecta Carpenter, see L. carinata Gould—Minutes, Conch. Club of So. Calif., No. 55, p. 13, Dec. 1945. Leda Schumacher, 1817, see Nuculana Link, 1807—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 118. Leptochiton Gray, 1847—For use as a genus instead of a section of Lepidopleurus Risso, 1826, see Berry, 1919, p. 6. Leptonidae, see Erycinidae—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 299. Leptothyra Dall, 1871, see Homalopoma Carpenter, 1864—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 821. Leucosyrinx amycus Dall, see Irenosyrinx amycus (Dall)—Bartsch, in correspondence. Lora Gistel, 1848 (in part), see Propebela Iredale, 1918, for the inclusion of the Mon- terey species L. casentina Dall, P. diomedea Bartsch, L. monterealis Dall, L. pitysa Dall, P. profundicola Bartsch, P. smithi Bartsch, L. surana Dall, and other northwest American species—Bartsch, 1941, pp. 3, 7; also Bartsch, 1944b, pp. 66-68. = Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 233 Macoma balthica inconspicua (Broderip and Sowerby), see M. inconspicua (Broderip and Sowerby )—Keen, 1937a, p. 22. Macoma inquinata (Deshayes), see M. irus (Hanley)—Salisbury, Proc. Mal. Soc. London, vol. 22, (2), p. 85, pl. 12, figs. 7, 8, 1934. Mangilia Risso, 1826 (emended spelling, of authors), see Mangelia Risso, 1826—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 585. Mangelia Risso, 1826 (Section Kurtziella Dall, 1918), see Kurtzia Bartsch, 1944, for M. arteaga roperi Dall as reported from Monterey (= Kurtzia gordoni Bartsch) — Bartsch, 1944b, p. 64. Mangelia Risso, 1826 (in part), see Kurtzina Bartsch, 1944. Type: Kurtzina beta (Dall) = Mangelia (Kurtziella) beta Dall—Bartsch, 1944b, p. 64. Mangelia angulata Carpenter, see M. barbarensis Oldroyd—Oldroyd, 1924, p. 82. Mangelia nitens Carpenter, see M. variegata Carpenter—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 590. Mangelia pulchrior Dall (—M. nitens Carpenter), see M. variegata Carpenter—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 590. Mangelia (Mitromorpha) crassaspera Grant and Gale, see Daphnella fuscoligata Dall— Keen, 1937a, p. 39. Marcia H. and A. Adams, 1857 (in part), see Compsomyax Stewart, 1930, for Marcia subdiaphana (Carpenter )—Stewart, 1930, p. 224. Marcia H. and A. Adams, 1857 (in part), see Hwmilaria, Grant and Gale, 1931, for Marcia kennerleyi (Reeve)—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 325-326. Melanella Bowdich, 1822, see Balcis Leach, 1847—Winckworth, 1934, pp. 12-13; Keen, Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., 1943, vol. 10, (2), pp. 43, 45. Mitromorpha intermedia Arnold, see M. gracilior Tryon—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 597. Modiolus Lamarck, see V’olsella Scopoli, 1777—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 248-251. Murex carpenteri tremperi Dall, see M. tremperi Dall—This paper, p. 188. Nitidella Swainson, 1840, see Mitrella Risso, 1826, for N. gouldii Carpenter and N. lu- tulenta Dall—Minutes, Conch. Club of So. Calif., No. 51, p. 17, Aug. 1945. Nitidoscala de Boury, 1909 (emended spelling of Dall and other authors), a subgenus of Epitonium, Bolten, 1798, see Nitidiscala de Boury, 1909—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 857. Ostrea gigas Thunberg, see O. laperousii Schrenck—Hanna, 1939, p. 307. Paphia Bolten, 1798, see Protothaca Dall, 1902—Frizzell, 1936. Pectinidae—For latest classification see Hertlein, 1935. Pecten (Chlamys) hindsii navarchus Dall, see P. hindsii Carpenter—Grant and Gale, 19S. G3: Pecten latiauritus Conrad (emended spelling of authors), see P. latiawratus Conrad— Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 203. Pecten latiauratus delosi Arnold, see P. latiauratus Conrad—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 203. Pedicularia californica Newcomb, see Pediculariclla californica (Newcomb)—Thiele, Handbuch der Syst. Weichtierkunde, 1929, part 1, p. 270. Petricola denticulata Sowerby, see P. californiensis Pilsbry and Lowe—Pilsbry and Lowe, 1932, p. 97. Phacoides Gray, 1847, see Lucina Bruguiére, 1797—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 283-291. Philbertia Monterosato, 1884, see Glyphostoma Gabb, 1873, for P. canfieldi (Dall) and P. hesione Dall—Bartsch, in correspondence. Pitaria newcombiana (Gabb), see Pitar newcombianus (Gabb)—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 344-346. Platidia hornii (Gabb) and P. seminula radiata Dall, see Morrisia hornii Gabb—Hert- lein and Grant, 1944, p. 110. 234 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH Serr. Polinices recluziana (Deshayes), emended spelling of authors, see P. reclusiana (Deshayes) —Pilsbry, Nautilus, vol. 42, (4), pp. 110-13, pl. 6. Protocardia centifilosa (Carpenter), see Nemocardium centifilosum (Carpenter )—Keen, 1937a, p. 23. Protothaca staminea orbella (Carpenter), see P. staminea (Conrad)—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 329. Protothaca staminea petitii (Deshayes), see P. staminea (Conrad)—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 329. Psammobia californica Conrad, see Gari californica (Conrad)—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 381-382. Siliqua patula nuttallii (Conrad), see S. patula (Dixon)—Weymouth, McMillan and Holmes, 1925, pp. 202-204. Simnia Risso, 1826, see Neosimnia Fischer, 1884, for all Californian species—F. A. Schilder, 1932. Simnia variabilis (C. B. Adams), see Neosimnia inflexa (Sowerby)—F. A. Schilder, 1932. Sinum californicum Oldroyd, see S. scopulosum (Conrad)—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 806. Sphenia globula Dall, see S. nana (Oldroyd)—Keen, in correspondence. Syncera translucens (Carpenter), see Assiminea translucens (Carpenter )—Winckworth, Jour: ‘Conch. 1932, vol. 19, (7), p.-223: Tritonalia Fleming, 1828, see Ocenebra Leach, 1818—Winckworth, 1934, p. 14. Tritonalia michaeli Ford, see Ocenebra subangulata (Stearns)—Grant and Gale, 1931, pa7ls: Tritonalia stearnsi (Hemphill), see Ocenebra gracillima Stearns—Comparison of the types of stearnsi in the California Academy collection with a large series of gracil- lima from various localities indicates the identity of these two species. Trophon Montfort, 1810, see Trophonopsis Bucquoy, Dautzenberg and Dollfus, 1882, for Trophon lasius (Dall) and T. tripherus (Dall)—Minutes, Conch. Club of So. Calif., No. 51, p. 56, Aug. 1945. Trophon peregrinus Dall, see Boreotrophon triangulatus (Carpenter )—Based on a com- parison of specimens of both species in the U. S. National Museum. Turbonilla (Mormula) ambusta Dall and Bartsch, see T. (M.) tridentata Carpenter— Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 871; Willett, 1937, p. 404. Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) delmontensis Bartsch, see T. (P.) delmontana Bartsch—Bartsch, Nautilus, vol. 50, (3), pp. 100-101. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) berryi Dall and Bartsch, see T. (P.) chocolata (Car- penter)—This paper, pp. 192, 193. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) painei Dall and Bartsch, see T. (P.) chocolata Carpenter— This paper, pp. 192, 193. Venericardia Lamarck, 1801, see Cardita Bruguiére, 1792—Grant and Gale, 1931, pp. 272- 276. Venerupis lamellifera (Conrad), see Irus lamellifer (Conrad)—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 332. Yoldia ensifera Dall, see Y. scissurata Dall—Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 131. Zirfaeca gabbi Tryon, see Z. pilsbryi Lowe—Lowe, Nautilus, vol. 45, (2), pp. 52-53. SELECTED LIST OF REFERENCES BAILy, JOSHUA L., Jr. 1945. Cardita (Cyclocardia) longini, new name for Venericardia (Cyclocardia) nod- ulosa Dall, 1919. Nautilus, vol. 58, (4), pp. 118-120. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 235 BartscH, PAUL 1935. An invasion of Monterey Bay by squids. Nautilus, vol. 48, (3), pp. 107-108. 1940. The west American Ffaliotis. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. 89, pp. 49-58, pls. 6-8. 1941. The nomenclatorial status of certain northern turritid mollusks. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vol. 54, pp. 1-14. 1944a. Some notes upon west American turrid mollusks. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vol. 57, pp. 25-30. 1944b. Some turrid mollusks of Monterey Bay and vicinity. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vol. 57, pp. 57-68. Berry, S. STLLMAN 1907. Molluscan fauna of Monterey Bay, California. Nautilus, vol. 21, (2), pp. 17- 22; vol. 21, (3), pp. 34-35; vol. 21, (4), pp. 39-47; vol. 21, (5), pp. 51-52. 1908. Miscellaneous notes on California mollusks. Nautilus, vol. 22, (4), pp. 37-41. 1910. A review of the cephalopods of western North America. Bull. Bur. Fish., Wash., vol. 30, pp. 267-336. 191la. Notes on some cephalopods in the collection of the University of California. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., vol. 8, (7), pp. 301-310. 1911b. A new California chiton. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 63, pp. 487- 492, pl. 40, 2 text figs. 1912. Note on the occurrence of a giant squid off the California coast. Nautilus, vol. 25, (10), pp. 117-118. 1914. Another giant squid in Monterey Bay. Nautilus, vol. 28, (2), pp. 22-23. 1919. Notes on west American chitons, II. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 9, (1), pp. 1-36, pls. 1-8. 1921. A distributional note on Haliotis. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 7, pp. 254-255, 1 text fig. 1922. Fossil chitons of western North America. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 11, (18), pp. 399-526, pls. 1-16, 11 text figs. 1925. The species of Basiliochiton. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia, vol. 77, pp. 23-29, 2 pls., 2 text figs. 1946a. A re-examination of the chiton, Stenoplax magdalenensis (Hinds), with de- scription of a new species. Proc. Mal. Soc. London, vol. 26, (6), pp. 161-166, e pls. 4-5. 1946b. A new Californian Neosimnia. Jour. Conch., vol. 22, (8), pp. 190-193, text figs. 1-4. BiceLtow, H. B. ANp LEsLIg, M. 1930. Reconnaissance of the waters and plankton of Monterey Bay, July, 1928. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard Coll., vol. 70, pp. 427-581. Bonnot, PAUL 1930. Abalones in California. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 16, (1), pp. 15-23, figs. 72: 1940a. California abalones. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 26, (3), pp. 200-211, figs. 77- 80. 1940b. The edible bivalves of California. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 26, (3), pp. 212- 239, figs. 81-97. Burcu, JOHN Q. AND Burcu, Tom 1943. List of species dredged on the shale bed off Del Monte, Monterey, Calif. (in) 10-35 fathoms, August, 1940. Minutes, Conch. Club. of So. Calif., No. 22, pp. 5-6. 236 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H SEr. CALIFORNIA, Division OF FISH AND GAME 1935. The commercial fish catch of California for the years 1930-1934, inclusive. Fish Bull., vol. 44, pp. 1-124, 19 figs. 1937. The commercial fish catch of California for the year 1935. Fish Bull., vol. 49, pp. 1-170, 114 figs. 1940a. The commericial fish catch of California for the years 1936-1939, inclusive. Fish Bull., vol. 57, pp. 1-100, 9 figs. 1940b. Commercial fish landings in California by fishing boats. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 26, pp. 302-307, 408-413. Statistics for Monterey region, January-June, 1940. 1941. Commercial fish landings in California by fishing boats. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 27, (1), pp. 54-59; vol. 27, (2), pp. 58-63. Statistics for Monterey region, July-December, 1940. Cuace, E. P. 1942. Field notes on some west coast Mollusca. Nautilus, vol. 56, (2), pp. 41-43. CiLarK, FrANcEs N. AND PHILLIPs, J. B. 1936. Commercial use of the jumbo squid, Dosidicus gigas. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 22, (2), pp. 143-144. CxLassic, RALPH F, 1921. Monterey squid fishery. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 15, (4), pp. 317-320. CoLiins, J. W. 1892. Rept. on the fisheries of the Pacific Coast of the United States. [In] Rept. of the United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1889. Pt. 16, pp. 3-269, 49 pls., 4 text figs. Fisheries of Monterey County, pp. 56-62. CONCHOLOGICAL CLUB OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA 1941-46. Minutes, Nos. 1-62, inclusive, July 1941 to August 1946. John Q. Burch, Editor. Generally issued monthly. These Minutes were distributed to Club members, and sent free to a repre- sentative list of scientific institutions, universities, and libraries, including the Library of Congress. The first 47 numbers were stated to be not open to subscription, although copies were sent to interested persons upon ap- plication and receipt of “donations” to cover the cost of materials and mailing. Beginning with No. 48 for May 1945, a fixed minimum annual amount was charged for persons other than Club members to be retained on the mailing list but the intention not to accept regular subscriptions was continued. Regular periodical publication was not guaranteed. 1944. Distribution list of the west American marine mollusks from San Diego to the Polar Sea. Part I. Pelecypoda. Proc. Conch. Club of So. Calif. John Q.. Burch, Editor. Includes pages of Minutes (of. cit., above) from March, 1944 to March, 1945, inclusive (Nos. 33-45). Mimeographed and bound, 246 pp. 1946. Distribution list of the west American marine mollusks from San Diego to the Polar Sea. Part II. Vol. 1, Scaphopoda and Gastropoda—Includes Minutes (op. cit. above) 46-54. Vol. 2, includes Minutes Nos. 55-63 plus index to Minutes Nos. 1-63, inclusive. Cooper, J. G. 1867. Geographical catalogue of the Mollusca found west of the Rocky Mountains between latitudes 33° and 49° north. San Francisco, Towne & Bacon, printers. 40 pp. Geological Survey of California. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 237 1870a. Notes on Mollusca of Monterey Bay, California. Amer. Jour. Conch., vol. 6, pp. 42-70. 1870b. Additions and corrections to the catalogue of Monterey Mollusca. Amer. Jour. Conch., vol. 6, pp. 321-322. 1871. Catalogue of the invertebrate fossils of the western slope of the United States Part II. San Francisco, Bacon & Company, 39 pp. Geological Survey of California. CostTELLo, D. P. 1938. Notes on the breeding habits of the nudibranchs of Monterey Bay and vicinity. Jour. Morph., vol. 63, pp. 319-344, pls. 1-2. Croker, R. S. 1931. California abalones. Calif. Div. of Fish and Game, Fish Bull., vol. 30, pp. 58- 72, illus. 1936. Smoked, salted, and dried sea foods of California. Calif. Fish and Game, voleeZ2e Gl) Neppeel Ze 1937. Further notes on the jumbo squid, Dosidicus gigas. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 23, (3), pp. 246-247. CURTNER, W. W. 1917. Observations on the growth and habits of the red and black abalones. Stan- ford Univ. Master’s Thesis (unpublished). For notes on this study, see Bonnot, 1930. DALL, WLLIAM H. 1866. Remarks on collecting shells at Monterey. Proc. Calif. Acad. Nat. Sci., vol 3, DB 27 il 1871. Description of sixty new forms of mollusks from the west coast of north America and the north Pacific Ocean, with notes on others already described. Am. Jour. Conch., vol. 7, (2), pp. 93-159, pls. 13-16. 1892. Extract from a letter to the editor of the Nautilus on collecting at Monterey. Nautilus, vol. 6, (4), p. 48. 1903. A new species of Metzgeria. Nautilus, vol. 17, (5), pp. 51-52. 1907a. A new Cardium from Puget Sound. Nautilus, vol. 20, (10), pp. 111-112. 1907b. Three new species of Scala from California. Nautilus, vol. 20, (11), pp. 127- 128. 1912. New California Mollusca. Nautilus, vol. 25, (11), pp. 127-129. 1921. Summary of the marine shellbearing mollusks of the northwest coast of America, from San Diego, California, to the polar sea, mostly contained in the collection of the United States National Museum, with illustrations of hitherto unfigured species. U. S. Nat. Mus., Bull. No. 112, pp. 1-217, 22 pls. 1923. Additions and emendations to United States National Museum Bulletin No. 112. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. 63, (10), pp. 1-4. DELKIN:, J. 1. 1941. Monterey Peninsula. Stanford Univ. Compiled by workers of the Works Progress Administration in northern California. The Hopkins Marine Life Refuge is described on p. 131. FRrizzeELt, D. L. 1936. Preliminary reclassification of veneracean pelecypods. Bull. Mus. roy. dhist. nat. de Belgique, vol. 12, (34), pp. 1-84. GALE, Hoyt RopNEy 1928. West coast species of Hinnites. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 5, (9), pp. 91-94. 238 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH Ser. GALLIHER, E.. W. 1932. Sediments of Monterey Bay, California. Rept. of (Calif.) State Mineralogist, vol. 28, pp. 42-79, pl. 3 (lithologic map), 17 text figs. GirrorD, D. S. AND E. W. 1942. Color variation in Olivella biplicata in various localities. Nautilus, vol. 56, (2), pp. 43-48. GRANT, AVERY RANSOME 1938. A systematic revision of the genus Acmaea Echscholtz, including considera- tion of ecology and speciation. Univ. Calif. Ph. D. Thesis, dep. in Univ. Calif. Library, Jan. 1938. A section of this thesis has been published (see Test, A. R., 1945). The original includes 432 typewritten pages and 35 plates of photographs, 29 of which are of shells of Acmaea and the others of drawings of lingual ribbons. Grant, U. S., IV, Anp GALE, Hoyt RopNEy 1931. Catalogue of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene Mollusca of California and adjacent regions. Mem., San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 1, pp. 1-1036, 32 pls., 15 text figs. Haas, Fritz 1943. Two new species of minute California marine shells. Malacological notes— III. Field Museum of Natural History, Zool. ser., vol. 29, pp. 1-7, figs. 1-2. Hanna, G. DALias 1939. Exotic Mollusca in California. Bull. Dept. Agric., State of California, vol. 28, pp. 298-321, 4 pls., 2 figs. HEATH, HArRoip 1899. The development of Jschnochiton. Zool. Jahrb., Abt. Morphol. vol. 12, pp. 567- 656, pls. 31-35, 5 text figs. 1917. Devilfish and squid. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 3, (3), pp. 103-108, 4 text figs. 1925. The abalone question. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 11, (3), pp. 138-139. Note on the life history of the red abalone. HEATH, HAROLD AND SPAULDING, M. H. 1901. Cymbuliopsis vitrea, a new species of pteropod. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- delphia, vol. 53, pp. 509-511, 1 text fig. Herzer, R. F. 1940. The introduction of Monterey shells to the Indians of the Northwest Coast. Pacific Northwest Quar., Oct. 1940, pp. 399-402. HERRINGTON, W. C. 1930. The Pismo clam; further studies of its life history and depletion. Calif. Div. of Fish and Game, Fish Bull., No. 18, pp. 1-67, 16 text figs. HERTLEIN, LEo G. 1935. The recent Pectinidae. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 21, (25), pp. 301- 328. HERTLEIN, L. G. AND GRAnt, U. S., IV 1944. The Cenozoic Brachiopoda of western North America. Publ. Univ. Calif., Los Angeles, Math. Phys. Sci., vol. 3, (1), pp. 1-236, pls. 1-21, 34 text figs. HErTLEIN, L. G. ann Stronc, A. M. 1940. Mollusks of the west coast of Mexico and Central America, Part I. Zoologica (N. Y.), vol. 25, (4), pp. 369-430, pls. 1-2. A review of the families Solemyidae, Nuculidae, and Nuculanidae. Vor. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 239 Hewatt, W. G. 1935. Ecological succession in the Mytilus californianus habitat as observed in Monterey Bay, California. Ecology, vol. 16, pp. 244-251. 1937. Ecological studies on selected marine intertidal communities of Monterey Bay, California. Amer. Midl. Nat., vol. 18, pp. 161-206, 2 pls., 10 text figs. 1938. Notes on the breeding seasons of the rocky beach fauna of Monterey Bay, California. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 23, (19), pp. 283-288. Jounson, Myrtite E. anp Snook, H. J. 1927. Seashore animals of the Pacific Coast. The Macmillan Company, New York. 659 pp., col. front., illus., 11 col. pls. For phylum Mollusca, see pages 411-581, figures 365-679, colored frontis- piece and colored plates 8-11 of nudibranchs. Keen, A. Myra 1936. A new pelecypod genus of the family Cardiidae. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 8, (17), pp. 119-120. 1937a. An abridged check list and bibliography of west north American marine Mollusca. Stanford Univ. Press. 87 pp. 1937b. Nomenclatural units of the pelecypod family Cardiidae. Bull. Mus. roy. d’Hist. nat. de Belgique, vol. 13, (7), pp. 1-22. Keep, JOSIAH 1881. Common sea-shells of California. San Francisco. Printed for the author by Upton Bros. 64 pp., 16 pls. 1887. West Coast shells. San Francisco, Bancroft Bros. and Co., 230 pp., col. front., 182 text figs. 1888. West Coast shells. San Francisco, Samuel Carson & Co. 230 pp., col. front., 182 text figs. 1889. Summer studies in conchology. Nautilus, vol. 3, (5), pp. 54-56. 1891. West Coast shells. San Francisco, Samuel Carson & Co. 230 pp., col. front., 182 text figs. 1896, West Coast species of Haliotis. Nautilus, vol. 9, (11), pp. 129-132. 1901. Shells and sea life. San Francisco, The Whittaker and Ray Company, Inc. 199 pp., col. front., illus., 87 text figs. 1904. West American shells. San Francisco, The Whittaker and Ray Company, Inc. 360 pp., col. front., 303 text figs. 1910. List of the most common mollusks found around Monterey Bay. Arranged by Josiah Keep, July, 1910. 20 pp. Privately printed for the author by Hancock Bros., San Francisco, for use in his Chautauqua classes. 1911. West Coast shells. (Revised edition.) Also a chapter on the fresh water mol- lusks of the Pacific slope, by Harold Hannibal, San Francisco, The Whittaker & Ray-Wiggin Company. 364 pp., col. front., 300 text figs. 1935. West Coast shells. Revised by Joshua L. Baily, Jr., Stanford Univ. Press, 350 pp., 334 text figs. A second printing was made in July, 1947. Kine, Mrs. E. H. 1897. Collecting in Monterey Bay. Nautilus, vol. 11, (2), pp. 23-24. MacFarvanp, F. M. 1905. A preliminary account of the Dorididae of Monterey Bay, California. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vol. 18, pp. 35-54. 1906. Opisthobranchiate Mollusca from Monterey Bay, California. Bull. Bur. Fish., Wash., vol. 25, pp. 109-151, col. pls. 18-31. 240 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4tH SER. McGinitlz, G. E. 1935. Ecological aspects of a California marine estuary. Amer. Midl. Nat., vol. 16, pp. 629-765. Mollusca, pp. 658, 719-745. May, R. M. 1924. The ophiurans of Monterey Bay. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. 4th ser., vol. 13, pp. 261-303. For bottom data. Ovproyp, IpaA S. 1918. A new species of Cuspidaria from Monterey. Nautilus, vol. 32, (1), p. 28. 1924. Marine shells of Puget Sound and vicinity. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta. Univ. Wash., vol. 4, pp. 1-271, pls. 1-49. 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of north America. Stanford Univ. Publ. Geol. Sci., vol. 1, pp. 1-247, pls. 1-57; vol. 2, (1), pp. 1-298, pls. 1-29; vol. 2, (2), pp. 299-602, pls. 30-72; vol. 2, (3), pp. 603-941, pls. 73-108. Oxproyp, T. S. 1921. Some varieties of western olivellas. Nautilus, vol. 34, (4), pp. 117-119, pl. 5, figs. 1-7, Puitiips, J. B. 1930. How abalones are sometimes planted. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 16, (2), p. 185. Note on the wreck of an abalone boat and data on Japanese diving opera- tions. 1931. Live boxes for abalones at Monterey. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 17, (1), p. 85. 1934. Octopi of California. Calif., Fish and Game, vol. 20, (1), pp. 20-29, figs. 4-6. 1941. Squid canning at Monterey, California, Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 27, (4), pp. 269-271, fig. 86. Pitsspry, HENRY A. 1898. Chitons collected by Dr. Harold Heath at Pacific Grove, near Monterey, Calif. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 50, pp. 287-290. Pitspry, H. A. AND Lowe, H. N. 1932. West Mexican and Central American mollusks collected by H. N. Lowe, 1929-31. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 84, pp. 33-144, pls. 1-17. RANKIN, E. P. 1918. The mussels of the Pacific coast. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 4, (3), pp. 113- 117, 1 text fig. REHDER, HARALD A. 1940. On the molluscan genus Trimusculus Schmidt 1818, with notes on some Medi- terranean and west African siphonarias. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vol. 53, pp. 67-70. REINHART, P. W. 1943. Mesozoic and Cenozoic Arcidae from the Pacific slope of north America. Geol. Soc. Amer., Spec. Paper No. 47, pp. i-xi, 1-117, pls. 1-15. Ricketts, E. F. Aanp CALvIN, JACK 1939. Between Pacific tides. Stanford Univ. Press. 320 pp., 46 pls., 112 text figs. An account of the habitats of some five hundred of the common con- spicuous seashore invertebrates of the Pacific coast between Sitka, Alaska, and northern Mexico. Vo. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 241 Rivers, J. J. 1892. A new volutid shell from Monterey Bay. Nautilus, vol. 5, (10), pp. 111-112. Roepe, P. M. 1941. Results of the 1940 Pismo clam census. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 27, (2), p. 48. 1942. The 1941 Pismo clam census. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 28, (1), p. 66. Scuinper, F. A. 1931. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Cypraeacea (Moll. Gastr.)—IV. Zool. Anz., vol. 96, (3-4), pp. 65-72, 7 text figs. 1932. The living species of Amphiperatinae. Proc. Mal. Soc. London, vol. 20, (1), pp. 46-64, pls. 3-5. ScHILper, F. A. AND SCHILDER, M. 1939. Prodrome of a monograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Mal. Soc. London, vol. 23, (4), pp. 119-231. ScoFIELp, N. B. 1928. Abalone safe from extermination. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 14, (1), p. 87. 1930a. Conservation laws provide ample protection for abalones. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 16, (1), pp. 13-15. 1930b. Abalones in demand. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 16, (2), pp. 185-186. Note on commercial fishery at Monterey. ScoFleELp, W. L. 1924. Squid at Monterey. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 10, (4), pp. 176-182. SKOGSBERG, TAGE 1936. Hydrography of Monterey Bay, California. Thermal conditions, 1929-1933. Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., new ser., vol. 29, pp. 1-152, 45 text figs. SMITH, GILBERT M. 1944. Sublittoral marine algae of the Monterey Peninsula. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 25, (4), pp. 171-176. Stearns, R. E. C. 1899. Abalone fishery in California—Protective regulation. Nautilus, vol. 13, (7), pp. 81-82. Stewart, R. B. 1927. Gabb’s California type gastropods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 78, pp. 287-447, pls. 20-32 (1926). 1930. Gabb’s California Cretaceous and Tertiary type lamellibranchs. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Spec. Publ. No. 3, pp. 1-314, 17 pls. Strone, A. M. 1928. West American Mollusca of the genus Phasianella. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 17, (6), pp. 187-203, pl. 10. 1930. Notes on some species of Epitonium, subgenus Nitidiscala, from the west coast of north America. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 6, pp. 183-196, pl. 20. Test, Avery RANSOME (GRANT) 1945. Ecology of California Acmaca. Ecology, vol. 26, (4), pp. 395-405. (See also, Grant, 1938.) Tuompson, W. E. 1920. The abalones of California. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 6, (1), pp. 45-50, 3 text figs. 242 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47H Serr. U. S. BurEAU oF FISHERIES 1906. Dredging and hydrographic records of the U. S. Fisheries steamer Albatross for 1904 and 1905. Bureau of Fisheries Doc. No. 604. Pp. 1-80 [In] Rept. of the Commissioner of Fisheries for the fiscal year 1905 and special papers. 1901. Dredging and other records of the United States Fish Commission steamer Albatross, with bibliography relative to the work of the vessel. Compiled by C. N. Townsend. U. S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries, Pt. 26, Rept. of the Commissioner for the year ending June 30, 1900. Pp. 387-562, pls. 1-4, 3 maps. Watrorp, L. A. 1931. Handbook of common commercial fishes of California. Calif. Div. of Fish and Game, Fish Bull. No. 28, pp. 160-169, figs. 132-137. A discussion of abalones, octopi, and squid. WeymoutTH, F. W. 1920. The edible clams, mussels and scallops of California. Calif. Div. of Fish and Game, Fish Bull. No. 4, 72 pp., 19 pls., 27 text figs. 1923. The life-history and growth of the Pismo Clam (Tivela stultorum Mawe). Calif. Div. of Fish and Game, Fish Bull. No. 7, 120 pp. WeEymMouTH, F. W., McMittan, H. C. ann Hortmes, H. B. 1925. Growth and age at maturity of the Pacific Razor Clam, Siliqua patula Dixon. Bull. U. S. Bur. Fisheries, vol. 41, pp. 201-236, 27 text figs. Witcox, W. A. 1907. The commercial fisheries of the Pacific Coast. Report and Special Papers, U. S. Bur. Fisheries, 1905, p. 19. Note on the squid fishery of Monterey Bay. WILLETT, GEORGE 1937. An Upper Pleistocene fauna from the Baldwin Hills, Los Angeles County, Cali- fornia. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 8, pp. 379-406, pls. 25-26. WILLIAMSON, Mrs. M. B. 1906. Abalones and the penal code of California. Nautilus, vol. 20, (8), pp. 85-87. WINCKWorTH, R. 1930. Notes on nomenclature. Proc. Mal. Soc. London, vol. 19, (1), pp. 14-16. 1934. Names of British Mollusca, II. Jour. Conch., vol. 20, (1), pages 9-15. Woop, W. M. 1893. On a collecting trip to Monterey Bay. Nautilus, vol. 7, (6), pp. 70-72. SPECIAL REFERENCES ON SHELLFISH POISONING AND REEAT ED SUBJECTS ALLEN, W. E. 1928. Review of five years of studies on phytoplankton at southern California piers, 1920-1924, inclusive. Bull. Scripps Inst. Oceanography, Univ. Calif., La Jolla, Tech. Ser., vol. 1, pp. 357-401, 5 text figs. BonNot, PAUL AND PHILLIPS, J. B. 1938. Red water, its cause and occurrences. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 24, (1), pp. 55-59. Curtis, BRIAN 1943a. Mussel poisoning twenty-five years ago and today. Calif. Fish and Game, Viole 2 9a((3)) ae pamloile 1943b. Mussel poisoning on the Pacific coast. Nautilus, vol. 57, p. 70. A reprint of the above. VoL. XXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 243 HeatH, HAroip 1929. Poisonous mussels. Nautilus, vol. 42, (4), pp. 139-140. Koromp, C. A. 1911. Dinoflagellates of the San Diego region. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., vol. 18, pp. 187-286. Marks, G. W. anv Fox, Denis L. 1934. Studies on catalase from the California mussel. Bull. Scripps Inst. Ocean- ography, Univ. Calif., La Jolla, Tech. Ser., vol. 3, (13), pp. 297-310, 6 text figs., 3 tables. Meyer, K. F. 1928. Mussel poisoning in California. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 14, (3), p. 201, fig. 60. 1929. Mussel poisoning in California. Nautilus, vol. 42, (3), pp. 100-101. A reprint of the above. 1931. Newer knowledge on botulism and mussel poisoning. Amer. Jour. Pub. Health, vol. 21, pp. 762-767. Meyer, K. F. anp Sommer, H. 1935. Mussel poisoning. Calif. and Western Medicine, vol. 42, (6), pp. 423-426. Meyer, K. F., Sommer, H. AND SCHOENHOLz, P. 1928. Mussel poisoning. Jour. Preventive Medicine, vol. 2, pp. 365-394. NIGHTINGALE, H. W. 1936. Red water organisms, their occurrence and influence on marine aquatic ani- mals. Argus Press, Seattle. 24 pp. PRINZMETAL, M., Sommer, H., anp LEAKE, C. D. 1932. The pharmacological action of “Mussel Poison.’ Jour. Pharm., vol. 46, pp. 63- P35: RANKIN, E. P. 1918. The mussels of the Pacific coast. Calif. Fish and Game, vol. 4, (3), p. 117. Ricketts, E. F. anp CALvin, JACK 1939. Between Pacific tides. Stanford Univ. Press. Pp. 119-120. SomMER, HERMANN 1932. The occurrence of the paralytic shell-fish poison in the common sand crab. Science, vol. 76, pp. 574-575. SOMMER, MEYER, ET AL. 1937. Paralytic shell-fish poisoning. Archiv. Path., vol. 24, pp. 560-598. SOMMER, H., WuHEpon, W. F., Koroip, C. A. AND STOHLER, R. 1937. Relation of the paralytic shell-fish poison to certain plankton organisms of the genus Gonyaulax. Archiv. Path., vol. 24, pp. 537-559. STOHLER, R. 1930. Beitrag zur Kenntniss des Geschlechtzyklus von Mytilus californianus Conrad. Zool. Anz., vol. 90, pp. 263-268, 3 figs. Torrey, H. B. 1902. An unusual occurrence of Dinoflagellates on the California Coast. Amer. Nat., vol. 36, pp. 187-192. Waites, G. H. 1928. Dinoflagellates from British Columbia. Part II. Art. Hist. Sci. Assoc. Van- couver, Mus. Notes, vol. 3, (2), pp. 27-35, pls. 4-6. WHEDON, W. F. 1936. Spawning habits of the mussel Mytilus californianus Conrad, with notes on the possible relation to mussel poison, Mussel Poison I. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., vol. 41, (5), pp. 35-44, pl. 3, fig. 1. 244 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH SER, EXPLANATION OF PLATES PEALE 3 Fig. 1. Dentalium berryi Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8525 (C.A.S.), about 40 fathoms, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 46.7 mm.; diameter of aperture, 3.7 mm.; diameter of apex, 1.4 mm.; p. 216. Fig. 2. Same. Paratype No. 8526 (C.A.S.). Fig. 3. Same. Enlarged view of notched apex of the holotype shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 4. Same. Enlarged view of plain circular apex of the paratype shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 5. Balcis delmontensis Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8531 (C.A.S.), 10 fathoms off Del Monte, California. Length, 4.5 mm.; maximum diameter, 2.2 mm.; p. 219. Fig. 6. Metsgeria montereyana Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8530 (C.A.S), 15 fathoms off Del Monte, California. Length, 12.4 mm.; maximum diameter, 4.8 mm.; p. 218. Fig. 7. Turbonilla (Turbonilla) fackenthallae Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8539 (C.A.S), 20-30 fathoms, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 7.7 mm.; maximum diam- eter, 1.9 mm.; p. 220. Fig. 8. Same. Paratype (Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll.). Fig. 9. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) stillmani Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8540 (C.A.S), 10 fathoms off Del Monte, California. Length, 3.5 mm.; maximum diameter, lial saavnak Sega, 77h Fig. 10. Turbonilla (Pyrgolampros) willetti Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8541 (C.A.S.), 10 fathoms off Del Monte, California. Length, 5.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.6 mm.; p. 222. Fig. 11. Retusa (Sulcularia) montereyensis Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8527 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 2.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.1 mm.; p. 217. Fig. 12. Odostomia (Menestho) churchi Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8544 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 1.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 0.5 mm.; p. 224. Fig. 13. Turbonilla (Bartschella) bartschi Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8542 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 2.0 mm.; maximum diameter, 0.7 mm.; p. 222. Fig. 14. Odostomia (Salassiella) heathi Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8543 (C.A.S.), 15 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 2.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.0 mm.; p. 223. Fig. 15. Rissoella hertleini Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8545 (C.A.S.), 10 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 2.2 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.5 mm.; p. 224. [SMITH & GORDON] PLATE 3 PROC. CALIF. ACAD. SCI., 4TH SERIES, VOL. XXVI, NO. 8 YD lel PROC. CALIF. ACAD. SCI., 4TH SERIES, VOL. XXVI, NO. 8 [SMITH & GORDON] PLATE 4 Vot. XXXVI] SMITH & GORDON: MOLLUSKS OF MONTEREY BAY 245 PLATE 4 Fig. 1. Alaba serrana Smith and Gordon. Paratype No. 8547 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms, Carmel Bay, California. Length, 3.4 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.8 mm.; p. 225. A young translucent specimen. Fig. 2. Same. Holotype No. 8546 (C.A.S.). An adult specimen with body whorl somewhat broken. Length, 5.2 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.8 mm. Fig. 3. Rissoina keenae Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8553 (C.A.S.), 5-15 fathoms off Point Pinos, Monterey Bay, California. Length, 2.8 mm.; maximum diam- eter, 1.1 mm.; p. 227. Fig. 4. Rissoina hannai Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8548 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms, Carmel Bay, California. Length, 2.7 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.3 mm.; p. 226. Figs. 5-7. Margarites keepi Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8557 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms off Cabrillo Point, Monterey Bay, California. Height, 2.0 mm.; maximum diameter, 2.1 mm.; p. 228. Figs. 8-10. Skenea carmelensis Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8560 (C.A.S.), 25 fathoms, Carmel Bay, California. Height, 1.3 mm.; maximum diameter, 1.7 mm.; p. 229. Figs. 11-13. Calyptraea burchi Smith and Gordon. Holotype No. 8554 (C.A.S.), 20-30 fathoms off Monterey, California. Height, 6.4 mm.; maximum diameter, 16.3 mm. ; D227. Figs. 14-16. Hemitoma bella (Gabb). Type, No. 2395 (Univ. California Paleo. Type Coll.) ; original No. 466, State Geol. Survey Coll.; Monterey, California, col- lected by J. G. Cooper. Length, 13.7 mm.; maximum width, 8.7 mm.; height, 4.4 mm. Figured through the courtesy of the University of California Department of Paleon- tology. All figures from photographs by F. L. Rogers. =! | ee ae ea o. ape” Li a em tae t ae ts nl ~ fase its aii , x - : ett ay a Kee =e E 'y .) cs at, Be | ay" ‘ : Oa ad ' 6 Phe AN, : yy Lea ] 5 ; i . 7 { wt x “ i a oe = PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 9, pp. 247-322, pls. 5-10, 4 text figures January 28, 1949 WEST AMERICAN MOLLUSKS OF THE GENUS CONUS BY G. D. HANNA and A. M. STRONG California Academy of Sciences CON? ENS PAGE Mega terstOCHTA GGL TU fe ec ce ac ae a esc A varee tence cevarghes obneneergerateenae one 249 Pilabioe raphe. roves | ote cc eee caer een rere 256 Chee CS ap ese 8 a ae ere Sr eee 266 Wieder > C tera brane hiicitas ee ee ee eee ede vem ae cher careers Seance enema 266 Superfamily Toxoglossa —....-----------11---- SR AERA dele Son Ope See ae 266 rarinilty, Coors oceans et ec case enmmerne ect ncn secs ectcene 266 Geass, Matinee tte a eee nae canst one eee azes eaten soe 266 Key to west American species...........- eS a NS NS gS eee eee ee 267 Gadi OUTS NW COU eee eee aera acta secre n naan ee 269 Cons Giadema SOwWer Dy -cccce------1---:-n2-cecnnennnnncecececectesteeeneececenenennencctsnens 270 Conus diadema pemphigus Dall.....-.--------..-------------- 271 Gonus bartscm Hanna Se ‘Stroma tsps cna coes eect ee 271 Conus traratus Broderipy 2.s feces esata een nsec ocean 272 Conus gladiator Broderip —..-..--.-----------1---1--- eect 273 Conus num Broderip -.....---2-------2----c-ceeecccccreeeeeereeeeeneceessnenensneneannneaeatoesess 274 248 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH Srr. CONTENTS (Continued) Class Gastropoda (Continued) Key to West American species (Continued ) Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus Conus PAGE princeps, Linnaeus: 202.3 o.oo 275 princeps lmneolatus. Valenciennes. .....2-.---:::--:---2.--<3 278 princeps apogrammatus Dall... 22)... ak 278 gradatus Mawe ceonsnceeencecennnntenetees sensciachusceonksuee ted 279 TECUPUUS: LOGE AD 9035, cc snbsien, gaeceascace sepaecsen of the principal red al 336 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. The Alaria zone is also narrow, extending in vertical distance only from the one-foot to the three-foot level. It is clearly dominated by Alaria tenuifolia which is the only species of large individuals abundant in it. It is limited to this zone as are also the small individuals of Microcladia, Plocamium, and Spongomorpha. Enormous individuals of Egregia Menziesti occur occasionally throughout this zone but this species will be discussed in connection with the next zone below. Fauchea Fryeana, which in the region of the San Juan Islands is mostly dredged at 6 to 8 fathoms, here occurs in the littoral zone. Spongomorpha coalita, with its filaments held together by small hook-like branches so that they form a dense strand, seems well fitted to withstand mechanical injury and desiccation. The crustaceous Lithothamnion and the small stiff calcareous individuals of Amphiroa and Corallina flourish well in this zone. The distal portion of the fronds of Alaria are worn off by the mechanical effect of wave action and occasionally one finds individuals on which the frond has been entirely destroyed so that only the holdfast, stipe, and sporophylls remain. The production of spores thus seems assured though the vegetative portion may be largely sacrificed. It has been found, however (Frye, 1918), that there are annual rings in the stipe of this species and that the midrib continues to grow in length even when the blade at its margins is destroyed. It thus seems possible that the plants of this species may continue to live in spite of rough treatment. The Lessoniopsis zone is completely dominated by a dense growth of enor- mous plants of Lessoniopsis littoralis. This is a perennial plant with a stout stipe several inches thick at the base and so hard that a small axe is the best tool for securing specimens. The stipe tapers upward and forks repeatedly bearing a long slender frond at the end of each branch. Zoospores are produced in the sori in these fronds. The great weight of this plant and the flexibility of its stipe cause it to hang down at low tide. A single plant held over the shoulder by its stipe and hanging down the back almost to the ground makes a good load for an able bodied man to carry. This species is on exposed rock shores throughout the region and is seen on Seal Rock, Sail Rock, and along the rocky shore from Koitlah Point to Cape Flattery. It furnishes advantageous anchorage on its stipe for numerous red algae, and large masses of a sponge. are numerous on it. Among the red algae growing on its stipe or holdfast are Dasyopsis and Callophyllis. Egregia Menziesti is common in this zone. No plants were measured here but a plant which was collected at False Bay on San Juan Island in July, 1936, may be taken as characteristic of the species. It had 14 stipes from one holdfast. These stipes varied in length from 8 to 25 feet, five of them approximating the maximum length. It required three men to carry it away. Its holdfast is massive and its stipe is like a long strip of leather. The fronds are borne along the edges of the stipe throughout its whole length and are very small with a small float at the base of each. Zoospores are borne in sporophylls among these fronds. Vor. XX VT] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 337 The Laminaria zone extends from —1%4 to —3 and is dominated by Laminaria Andersonii. It has an erect dark-colored stipe from the tip of which the digitate frond is pendant at low tide. The stems are flexible and are bent by every wave, but constantly return to an erect position. This species extends upward through the Lessoniopsis zone and into the Alaria zone but is dominant only within the limits stated above. Pleurophycus Gardner, a Laminaria-like kelp with a broad midrib in which the zoospores are borne, ex- tends from above into this zone, as do also such red algae as Dasyopsis, Fauchea, Hymenena, and Rhodymenia, which in the waters among the San Juan Islands are obtained mostly by dredging at depths of 6 to 8 fathoms. The factors in the occurrence of these red algae at higher levels in the Neah Bay region than in the San Juan Island region are not clear. A possible factor is less intense light due to the prevalence of foggy and cloudy weather and protection from direct sunlight by the dense growth of brown algae. The Nereocystis zone extends from about 3 feet below datum to an unde- termined depth. No soundings were made here but our work in the Puget Sound region and Alaska indicates that Nereocystis does not commonly grow in water that is much deeper than 10 fathoms. This plant and its relation to its habitat have been discussed in so many papers that it is unnecessary to give details here. (Crandall, 1915; Frye, 1906, 1915; Hartge, 1928; Hurd, 1916, 1917; MacMillan, 1899, 1901; Muenscher, 1915; Rigg, 1912, 1915, 1915a, 1917; Setchell, 1908, 1912; Setchell and Gardner, 1925.) No doubt red algae a. Fic. 7. “Reef Channels,” north end of Waadah Island. 338 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SrEr. grow on the stipe and holdfast of this kelp here as they do elsewhere. The plant seen most abundantly on the distal portion of the stipe of this plant in the Neah Bay region is a filamentous diatom (Navicula sp.). Comparisons of zonation. In general there is considerable similarity be- tween the zonation at Postelsia Point and at the other four places studied, but there are also noticeable differences in both the occurrence of species and their vertical distribution. It seems possible to correlate these differences to a cer- tain extent with environmental factors. The Reef Channels are not exposed directly to tidal currents and not to direct action of waves except in northerly winds but are subjected to heavy surge of water in and out, giving rise to some surf. There is always water in these channels even at extreme low tide and there are many rocks in them either exposed at low water or awash in the waves. Brown algae are abundant in these channels both on the rocks in the bottom and on the steep sandstone walls which border them. The first impression that one gets of these channels at low tide is of a dense growth of brown algae forming a thick tangled layer on the rocks or pendant from the walls. Mixed with the brown of the tangled mat is the vivid green of Phyllospadix Scouleri whose rhizomes cling to the rocks while its long slender leaves are swept about in the surge. Among the bases of the leaves mature pistillate flowers in rows two or three inches long on a spadix and safely enclosed in the boat-shaped spathe were commonly found in July. The vigor of the growth of the branching rhizomes suggests that this plant is largely reproduced here vegetatively rather than by the germination of seeds, but no definite information on this point is at hand. Red algae are more abundant in these channels than they are on Postelsia Point both as to number of species and number of individuals. The greater number of species is apparent in Table I. Fucus is also common here. The absence of Postelsia and Lessoniopsis constitutes a striking difference between the Channels and Postelsia Point. The absence of heavy waves and surf seems to be a large factor in this. The absence of Ralfsia and Prasiola is no doubt associated with the lack of surf and spray at high levels. The southwest shore of Waadah Island is more protected than any of the other four places studied. There is no strong tide through the harbor, and the force of westerly and southerly winds is largely broken by the high land across the bay. The force of such waves as do come in is also broken by the large beds of Nereocystis, with some Macrocystis, which are immediately to the westward. The island itself prevents easterly winds from affecting this shore. The area was visited at a 7.6 foot tide and it was found that the entire rock shore up to the boulders which lie back of it was awash. This shore has fewer algae than any of the other four places. Ralfsia, Prasiola, Postelsia, and Lessoniopsis are naturally absent. Red algae are, however, numerous both as to species and individuals. Seal Rock has quite different conditions from Waadah Island as is indicated VoL. XX VJ] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 339 by the description given earlier in this paper. The strong tides rush past its north and south shores instead of beating directly upon them as at Postelsia Point, while the east and west ends split the seas that strike them directly, and part of their force carries them along the north and south shores. Then, too, the force of surf and spray at higher levels is lessened by their passage across the ledge. Ralfsia occurs here, though not at as high a level as at Postelsia Point, while Prasiola maintains about the same level as at the Point. Fucus is abundant in places but the individual plants are not large. A notable plant occurring on the south side of this rock but not at the other four places is Pterygophora californica. It is mostly in the sublittoral zone, but extends also into the lower littoral as it does also on the neighboring shore of the mainland. It is a stout, erect perennial kelp with annual rings in its stipe. It bears a new crop of fronds at its top each year. Frye (1918) has investigated the age attained by individuals of this species, by means of both annual rings and leaf traces. Those that he examined were from 5 to 13 years old. MacMillan (1902) reports 24 annual rings in a stalk 5 cm. in diameter. A specimen that drifted up on the rocks at False Bay on San Juan Island in July, 1936, had a stipe 6 feet 9 inches tall and had 15 fronds. The considerable number of large plants that had drifted up on the beach at Neah Bay indicates that the plant flourishes abundantly in the vicinity. It was reported by Mac- Millan (1901) at Port Renfrew on the coast of Vancouver Island opposite Neah Bay. The fact that it drifts up on the west shore of San Juan Island at the inner end of the Strait of Juan de Fuca indicates its abundance some- where in the Strait. It seems quite possible that these drift plants come from the Neah Bay region or the south end of Vancouver Island. The known facts thus indicate that this plant is abundant in the Neah Bay region but grows mostly so far below low tide that not even its tops are ever exposed. It is occasionally dredged at 6 to 8 fathoms in Peavine Pass in the San Juan Islands. Small, round shallow tide pools are common in the sandstone at Postelsia Point and other places on the west shore of Waadah Island and also on Seal Rock. The two most important environmental factors for algae which are different in tide pools from those in other places on these rocky shores are (1) that the plants in them are not subject to desiccation, and (2) that the water becomes warmer. The latter is especially true of those that occur in the upper portion of the littoral zone where they are exposed to the sun’s rays for several hours at low tide. The plants found in tide pools at the points studied are Priontis Lyallii, Codium fragile (with Ceramium sp. epiphytic upon it), Chaetomorpha cannabina, Cladophora glaucescens, Enteromorpha intes- tinalis, and Ulva linsa. In addition to the algae, Phyllospadix Scouleri also occurs in the tide pools on both Waadah Island and Seal Rock. Muenscher (1915) has studied the tide pools of San Juan Island. He quotes data indicating an extreme difference of 5.6°C between the temperatures of the tide pools and that of the neighboring sea water. He lists 8 species of algae in the San Juan tide pools, only one of which 340 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. (Prionitis Lyallii) is in our list for the Neah Bay region. He found Ulva lactuca while we found Ulva linsa. The tide pools of the west coast of Van- couver Island are numerous and striking in character, especially in the vicinity of the old Minnesota Seaside Station. Their origin and general character have been discussed by Henkel (1906). In 1939 we found Codium fragile abundant in a large tide pool on Cerantes Rock. The pool was at about the high tide level and was near the middle of the rock. It was under a ledge of rock which gave shade after about 10 a.m. The occurrence of this species in tide pools at high levels in the Neah Bay region and on the west coast of Vancouver Island is in striking contrast with its position in the San Juan Islands, where it occurs at about the —1.0 foot level. Unusually large tide pools occur on the south side of Seal Rock. These are irregular depressions in the rocky surface of the shale and are not comparable in origin to the small round tide pools in sandstone discussed above. The vegetation of the two types of tide pools also has little in common. A large one at unusually low level contains a wealth of the brown algae which are characteristic of these shores, and in 1938 two Nereocystis plants about 8 feet long were growing in it. Cymathaere triplicata is abundant in large tide pools at the site of the old Minnesota Seaside Station on Vancouver Island. The distribution of Macrocystis along the south shore of the Strait of Juan de Fuca has been discussed in a previous paper (Rigg, 1913) and the principal beds of Nereocystis in the region have been mapped. (Portfolio accompanying Rept. No. 100, U. S. Dept. Agr.) Both of these kelps reach a considerable length (100 feet or more). The size of these and other kelps has been given by Frye, Rigg, and Crandall (1915). It should be emphasized that reports of enormous lengths of several hundred feet previously reported for these kelps have not been verified. These two kelps form considerable beds or “groves” in the Neah Bay region where depth, anchorage and water movement are suitable. The two species intermingle to only a slight extent. Where the two form beds along the shore, the Nereocystis is outside and the Macrocystis is closer to the shore (Rigg, 1913). Nereocystis commonly dis- appears in winter in the Puget Sound region and in Alaska and it is to be presumed that it does the same in the Neah Bay region. Macrocystis, as is well known, is a perennial species with numerous stipes attached to one large holdfast and its growing region is at the distal end. It has a small float at the base of each of its numerous fronds which are scattered along the slender stipe. The sporophylls occur on special short stipes from the holdfast several fathoms under the surface of the water. Two species of seed plants, Zostera marina and Phyllospadix Scoulert, occur in the Neah Bay region, and a third one, Phyllospadix Torreyi, is found rolled up in considerable quantities on the sandy ocean beaches southward from Waatch Point, though it was not seen growing. The first is a cosmo- politan species whose range on this coast is Alaska to California (Piper, 1906). VoL. XXVI] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 341 It occurs mostly below low tide and its rhizomes grow in sand or mud. The second has already been discussed. Its range is British Columbia to California teiper, 1906): VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION AND ZONATION OF THE LITTORAL INVERTEBRATES For the purpose of an initial survey of the littoral invertebrates of the Neah Bay region with reference to their distribution in or proximal to the intertidal belt, four zones were established on the basis of the most obvious ecological factors: A. The splash zone, extending from mean higher high water to the extreme upper limit of occurrence of barnacles or limpets. Approximate limits, +-8.0 feet to +-14.0 feet (above mean lower low water). Organisms living in this zone are out of water the greater part of the time and must be prepared to resist both rainfall and desiccation, to withstand a wide range of temperatures, and to subsist on intermittent feeding. B. The upper intertidal zone. Approximate limits, +4.0 to +8.0 feet. Organisms in this zone are out of water more than half the time, but are not subjected to the extreme conditions of environmental stress found in the splash zone. They are to some extent sheltered and aided in their resistance to heat and desiccation by the presence of various algae, especially Fucus, Halosaccion, and Gigartina. C. The lower intertidal zone. Approximate limits, +1.0 to +4.0 feet. Organisms in this zone are exposed by the tide half the time or less, and grow in the shelter of numerous large algae, most conspicuous of which are Lessoniop- sis, Egregia, and Alaria (see figs. 3 and 8). D. The demersal zone. Approximate limits, +- 1.0 to —2.0 feet and beyond. This is the zone that is uncovered only at the lowest tides, and while it affords the seashore biologist his best collecting, most of the animals occurring at these levels are not in the ecological sense intertidal forms at all; they are demersal species which at intervals are briefly exposed by the receding tide, an event to them doubtless as unhappy as it is unexpected. Many of the species collected at the lowest tides can also be dredged at depths of 10 to 20 or more fathoms. For the purpose of comparison with Shelford’s (1935) classification of marine biotic communities in the Puget Sound area, the splash zone corresponds with the Littorina-glandula fasciation and the Littorina-cariosus fasciation of the Balanus-M. californianus association of the Balanus-Littorina biome. The upper intertidal corresponds to the Mitella-Mytilus fasciation and the lower intertidal to the Cribina fasciation of the same association. The demersal zone corresponds to the Strongylocentrotus-Pugettia association of the Stron- gylocentrotus-Argobuccinum biome. This nomenclature is more complex than is required for the present purpose. 342 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH SER. Comparison should also be made with the zones which Ricketts and Calvin (1939) have designated (1) uppermost horizon, (2) high tide horizon, (3) mid-tide horizon, and (4) low tide horizon. The major difference is one of nomenclature, the present writers having regarded mid-tide, not as a zone but as the boundary between the upper and lower intertidal regions. A very little vertical displacement would bring the two sets of concepts into harmony. The present authors, either for adequate reasons or from habit, consider that the terminology herein used provides a better picture of the pattern of dis- tribution on a steep rocky shore. As a matter of fact, all of these concepts are somewhat arbitrary, and to be thought of primarily as categories for convenience of description. There is no sharp dividing line between lower intertidal and demersal, nor between upper and lower intertidal zones. The splash zone is the best defined ; never- theless, its vertical limits vary greatly with immediate local conditions, such as slope of the rock and exposure to wave action or to sun. On the north and northwest sides of Seal Rock, for example, the splash zone extends on the average at least three feet higher than on the east and south; and in a crevice on the northwest side (most exposed to wave action and least exposed to sun) Balanus glandula occurs up to 16 feet and Acmaea digitalis up to 19.5 feet above mean low water. At each locality investigated, zones A, B, C, and D were laid out quickly in terms of measurements based on the height of the tide as ascertained from the tide tables, collecting was done as widely as possible in each zone and the specimens were taken to the laboratory for subsequent identification. Notes were also taken in the field of special conditions, peculiarities of distribution, and general impressions gained by the collector. The notes were subsequently correlated with distributions as determined from identified specimens. In Table II are given the approximate vertical distributions of some sixty organisms as determined in this way. When an organism occurs in two or three zones but has its maximum distribution in one, the zones of lesser dis- tribution are indicated by parentheses. The time available for collecting was so limited that it is reasonable to assume that all of the organisms found are moderately common in the region. Certain groups are conspicuous by their absence from the table, notably hydroids, nemerteans, annelids, small crustaceans, and Bryozoa. This does not signify that they were absent in the fauna, but only that they were not taken in the course of rapid general collecting. For most of these groups, special attention and special methods are necessary to collect and identify them. Only three of the five localities of Table I are included in Table II. Not enough collecting was done in the Reef Channels to justify tabulation. The flat on Waddah Island will be discussed separately on a subsequent page. Voit. XXVI] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 343 TABEE Th Vertical Distribution of Littoral Invertebrates in the Neah Bay Region A=Splash Zone; B—Upper Intertidal ; C—Lower Intertidal ; D—Demersal Zone Waadah Island Seal Rock OrGANISMS Postelsia Point North Side South Side ALPE COSSIe ee D D ACTOS eee A A A YAU LT UOV AOS 10101) | eee D D NCTC SNOT RR D ARTUR 1 ee oe (O10) Be) D D Amphissa columbiana..................-....--- D (Gad) D AMUSOMOTUS WODUUS.-.-teee (CE D PR OUCNLUSIGONNUO SUS ons s ee eee Bi, (C CA) BYE CA), Be, (Db) PRUNES TEN CNOLUS 2.225. Secress coe vcoteeseseees (Ca 1D) 4 Balamus Gland ula....22.-.-.10..<-nceeoncceooee A, B, GG) Jao) ANB. (©) BU OVISATLU ODL US eee ee Cc D Balanophylla elegans.................---------- D D Bittium eschrichtit..................-..2.22------ D Cadlina marginata............-..--.--.----------- D Calliostoma costatum......-.....2..22.20.------ D (CID) D Gancermoregonensis. ee D D COMET PT OCUCEUS ance tesa nantes D (Chihomalus dallis. 2.22.0 caceccno A A Grepidula lingulata........-...2csesctecean (G D repraula Per fOr ans xc. <-cnc-occcccceede-ccexs (On) D Cribrina xanthogrammica..................- CD D D Grypiociiton stellert. D Cucumaria chronjhelmi...................-.- D Cucwmaria miniata...........-..-.---.------ D Dermasterias tmbricata..............--...--- D D WD YOD OG GS PONG. 4.08 nes ele seca D (Cm D, D Entodesma saxicola............2....-.000------ D Evasterias troschelit...............-.....000---+- D D PACWICLIONG CINCY EG D D Fliemigrapsws, nudus..-.--.--<--.20------2- A, B Henricia leviuscula....................-- aes D (GID) D Hinmites multirugosus..........-..------------ D D Katharina tunicata............. ==... D D D CUO P COWS see D D Lepidochitona lineata...................-------- (CJD) D Leptasterias aequalis.................--.------ (Se 1D D Littoring scutulata..2 Fo B B DL OFUNOR SUCH ONG ot A A A ONO ta foe fod Ly | a a A Margarites pupillus 2.200002. D Mitella polyanerus.....:.22.-2..2.-0-00---000-- B 1B Mio alia) Mis COS (GD) D Mytilus californianus............2..00---+-- B B Opnepoltsiaculeata ee (C, 1D D Paphiarstanmineda. 22 Gab D Petrolisthes eriomerus.......2....-.220------+ D 344 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. Waadah Island Seal Rock ORGANISMS Postelsia Point North Side South Side Pholadideg pentta.......-..--.-.---2-------------- D C,D Pisaster OCHTACEUS....-.-.----.-----00-0----0--0- (Ore D) (EID) (B), C, D Piagetian calico eer eto scents D Pugettia productus..........-.----------+----- Paar Pratrer OU oo Scan aee oss D FROSEGI GG PUL CI cece encase ca enn anne SAAC UU CKO CULE enna ee eens SOAICAUCIPNOLOCIS eee eee SATA OSI CITA D eerootm Ne Pe Strongylocentrotus drobachiensts...... Strongylocentrotus franciscanus....... Strongylocentrotus purpuratus........-- Styela MontereyenstS......---------c--0------- TREE GTS VG CG aa ae ee UU QUSTLU IN ere enor ee a ee D WON GUSTOS ENUM eee eee ee Tritonalia inter fossq.......--------------------- Tritonalia, lurid ......-........-..c.0-ceceoen-ns D D Veelutinalacutg ata... -5) oo eceee-ceeeees whoKons) SSNs) Se ichetsliopoiel ie. Sele] The greatest number of species was found on the south side of Seal Rock, where the relatively sheltered, shelving shore with numerous boulders and an abundance of tide-pools provides the greatest variety of habitats. The steep, surf-beaten rocks at Postelsia Point and on the north side of Seal Rock obviously constitute a more restricted environment. On the other hand, organ- isms adapted to this rugged life flourish best where pounded by the surf. Mitella is noticeably less numerous on the south than on the north side of Seal Rock and Mytilus, while abundant at both places, is definitely smaller in the more sheltered location. Too much significance should not be attached to the presence of an organism at one locality and its apparent absence at another, as additional collecting would be likely -to fill the gaps. It is to be remembered that the workers were always driven away from the rocks by the incoming tide before they were ready to go. The vertical distribution shown in the table, however, may be accepted with a greater degree of confidence, especially when the same organism has been found at the same level at two or more places. The greatest number of species is to be found in the demersal zone. In several cases species that are characteristic of this zone on the south side of Seal Rock extend also into the lower intertidal on the north side. The explana- tion may well be that the surf on the north side, combined with the greater shade, enables the organisms to live at a higher vertical level without suffering desiccation. A similar difference in the uppermost level of organisms on the north and south sides of the rock has already been noted (p. 342). In the upper intertidal and splash zones, the number of species is small, but the number of individuals is often very great. In the areas here studied, Vor. XX VI] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 345 the bands of sessile or sedentary organisms characteristic of these levels stand out with actually diagrammatic effect. These bands, which are narrow on a vertical wall, spread out on a sloping rock to a width inversely proportional to the declivity (fig. 8). On the north and east sides of Seal Rock, the wave-cut platform is almost at the level separating zones A and B. Here we find hundreds of square feet covered with a nearly pure stand of Balanus glandula, which is invaded about six feet in from the seaward edge by Mytilus and Mitella. Mytilus also grows in all depressions in the platform, so that as one surveys the area, the patches of Mytilus interspersed among the Balanus provide a kind of relief map of the flat. On this flat also there are a few shallow tide pools, eighteen inches or two feet deep, which contain Cribrina xanthogrammica, Katharina tunicata, Mopalia muscosa, and Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis, showing that species normally having their distribution in the lower intertidal or demersal zones can subsist at higher levels if the situation is such that they are kept constantly submerged. A comparable situation obtains on the “flat” on the west side of Waadah Island, which is flat only by contrast with the steepness of much of the island. Fic. 8. Base of Seal Rock, south side. At the upper left is a point of the adjacent mainland, with Waadah Island showing faintly in the distance. 1. Ralfsia verrucosa. 2. Balanus glandula, with some Gigartina interspersed. 3. Gigartina papillata and Fucus furcatus. 4. Mytilus californianus. 5. Halosaccion glandiforme. 6. Alaria tenuifolia. 7. Lessoniopsis littoralis. The dominants only are listed. In all cases other species are inter- mingled. 346 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H Ser. The area consists of a substrate of horizontal or gently sloping rock overlain with large boulders, the tops of which are awash at high tide. The rough and irregular nature of the terrain, with tide-pools at various levels containing characteristic demersal forms, tends to obscure the vertical stratification of organisms so prominent at the other localities studied. The relative poverty of marine algae on this side of the island has already been noted (p. 338 and Table I). The invertebrate fauna is likewise rather disappointing when one considers the size of the area exposed at low tide. Thirty-three species were collected here, twenty-eight of which occurred at one or more of the other stations. The five species which in our collecting were found only on the Waadah flat are Acmaea persona, Crepidula adunca, Crepidula nummeria, Epitonium wroblewsku, and Tegula funebralis. Their presence here is presumably correlated with the relatively sheltered conditions, the surf having its force broken as the incoming waves stream among the boulders. On August 4, 1948, Waadah Island was revisited by one of us (Miller) to ascertain whether any substantial changes in the biological situation had occurred as a result of the erection of a breakwater (shown as a double dotted line in the map, fig. 1) between Waadah Island and the adjacent mainland south of Koitlah Point. This breakwater, about 2800 yards long, was con- structed over a two-year period, 1942-43. It is composed of over one million tons of large rocks somewhat irregularly piled together, forming an extremely rough substrate, over which one can scramble only with considerable difficulty. It shelters the harbor from northerly storms. The breakwater itself provides material for an interesting biological study. Its outer (northerly) face has rapidly been colonized by Mytilus californianus, Mitella polymerus, and other characteristic inhabitants of surf-beaten rocks. No Postelsia was observed. The inner, sheltered face of the breakwater has developed the usual complement of sessile organisms found in quiet waters, Balanus glandula, Mytilus edulis, Pisaster ochraceus being abundant (B. glan- dula and P. ochraceus of course occur on the outer face of the breakwater as well.) So far as could be determined by a quick survey (the breakwater itself and a mile or more of adjacent rocky shore were traversed at one low tide), the zonation of organisms on the breakwater represents simply an extension of that found generally in the vicinity. An unexpected feature was an extraor- dinary abundance of the twenty-rayed starfish (Pycnopodia helianthoides) in the demersal zone on the inner, sheltered face of the breakwater. It was possible to observe one of these every thirty or forty feet over a distance of more than a mile. The breakwater kad exercised no discernible effect on the organisms at the localities described earlier in this paper. At Postelsia Point, which is on Vor. XXVI] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 347 the opposite side of Waadah Island from the breakwater, the stand of Postelsia palmaeformis in 1948 was thinner than that observed in earlier years, and the individual plants appeared less vigorous. No reason for this was apparent in the physical environment. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS The conditions mentioned in the second paragraph of this paper seem to favor an abundant growth of algae. None of the species mentioned, how- ever, are peculiar to the Neah Bay region. It is their great abundance here both as to species and individuals that is impressive, and the same is true of the Port Renfrew region on Vancouver Island. While a good deal of attention has been given to the form and structure of the large kelps in relation to the factors that determine their distribution (literature cited above) there seems to have been relatively little consideration of the red and the green algae from this point of view. A review of the known facts about the form and structure of the algae of the Neah Bay region in relation to the environmental factors and a further study of the ecological anatomy is highly desirable. A study of the algae of this region from the viewpoint of the relation between their methods of reproduction and their local distribution would be an interesting line of investigation. Such questions as whether the species is annual or perennial and whether it is reproduced mainly by vegetative means or by spores would add much to our understanding of the biology of the littoral zone in the Neah Bay region. Studies of the winter condition of algae such as have been made by Hurd (1917) for the Puget Sound region or of the seasonal development of species such as have been made by Rigg for Nereocystis (1917) would be interesting work, full of adventure. Wind and rain are common in the region during the winter months and the days are relatively short in this latitude. There are plenty of low tides in the region in winter but they mostly occur between 5 and 9 p.m. Hardy, sure- footed workers experienced in negotiating treacherous waters and provided with good artificial lights could have an adventurous time working on these shores in winter and could contribute valuable data. Desiccation does not seem to be as important a factor in the zonation of algae here as it probably is in regions where higher temperatures, greater light intensities, and drier winds prevail on the beaches at low tide (cf. Muenscher, 1915). The exposed rocks in the Neah Bay region are usually cold and damp, and the air is the same. Cloudy or foggy weather is more common than bright sunshine especially on early summer mornings when the low tides cccur. Many of the algae (e.g. Polysiphonia spp. and Gigartina leptorynchos) plaster themselves to the surface of the rocks when the tide 348 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SER. recedes and retain water among their densely crowded filaments or their numerous proliferations so that they are in little danger of excessive water loss. The distal portions of the larger brown algae form thick layers on the rocks at low tide and are thus likewise protected from excessive loss of water. The smaller red algae in the littoral zone are commonly so completely covered at low tide by the dense layer of brown algae that they are found only by moving their protectors aside. This is notably the case on the south side of Seal Rock. The red algae are thus protected from the effects of desiccation and intense light. Evidently all the algal associations of the region are climax vegetation. No evidence of succession was found and this seems to be the natural situation for marine algae. Their “‘soil” is not the rocks to which they attach themselves, but rather the water which bathes them. Their holdfasts are not comparable to the roots of higher plants except in the one function of anchorage. There does not seem to be any evidence that absorption of either water or salts takes place to a greater extent in the holdfast than in other portions of the plant, and no evidence has been found of the storage of food in the holdfasts. The holdfast is not a region of active growth after the plants attain firm anchorage on the surface of the rocks. The boundaries between zones of algae on these shores are sometimes rather sharp but more frequently are seen to be indefinite when carefully studied. In no case are they to be regarded as real tension lines, but rather as an indication that the plants have established themselves where the conditions are suitable for their form, structure, and methods of reproduc- tion. It does not seem probable that their zonation would show successive changes with the passage of years. The interrelations between the plants and animals of the upper littoral have been a subject of considerable interest to the writers during the course of this survey, but opportunities for the kind of investigation needed have been extremely limited. The sponge Haliclonia cinereus seems to flourish especially on the stalks of large algae, and various species of hydroids and Bryozoa grow on the stalks or stipes. The limpet Acmaea instabilis has been found nowhere except on the stalks of Lessoniopsis. A good many lower intertidal and demersal animals must obtain from the large algae a great deal of protection from the surf, and from desiccation when the tide is out. Algae and algal detritus un- doubtedly provide an important, if not indeed the major, source of food in the littoral economy. It has been stated by Shelford (1930) that, in areas studied by him, plants are to be classed as sub-dominants in both the intertidal and sub-tidal areas. This probably varies from place to place. In the areas under consideration here, plants are sub-dominant in the upper intertidal (figs. 4 and 8), but it is hard to avoid the belief that they should be classed as dominants in the lower intertidal and in at least the proximal part of the demersal zone (figs. 3 and 8). Voi. XXVI] RIGG & MILLER: INTERTIDAL ZONATION 349 In the upper intertidal there appears to be competition between plants and animals for “standing room.’’ On the whole the animals seem to be more successful in occupying the available space. In a situation such as that shown in figure 8, the impression is almost inescapable that the algae have been crowded out to the very borders of the colonies of Balanus and Mytilus. On the other hand, one finds instances where the algae seem to have gained addi- tional anchorage by pushing their holdfasts in among the barnacles. Plants and animals struggle endlessly for existence in the rigorous environ- ment of a surf-swept shore. The micro-ecology of these wave-beaten com- munities presents fascinating possibilities for further study. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS A survey is here reported of the vertical distribution of a number of species of marine algae and marine invertebrates in or adjacent to the intertidal zone at certain localities in the vicinity of Neah Bay in the extreme northwest corner of the continental United States. Steep rocky shores, considerable surf, a large tidal range, and a moist climate free from cxtremes of temperature, form an environmental complex favorable to an abundant intertidal flora and fauna. At different vertical levels, different species are dominant, resulting in a zonation of organisms so distinct as to be visible in the form of conspicuous horizontal bands. For selected localities, tabulations have been made of the vertical range, in feet above or below zero tide datum, of the principal species of brown, red, and green algae, and of the vertical distribution of a number of littoral in- vertebrates in zones, as follows: (A) splash zone; (B) upper intertidal; (C) lower intertidal; (D) demersal. At a typical locality (“Postelsia Point’? on Waadah Island) eight zones of algae are clearly distinguished. These are in order from top to bottom: (1) Ralfsia-Prasiola, (2) Endocladia-Gigartina, (3) Postelsia, (4) Halosac- cion, (5) Alaria, (6) Lessoniopsis, (7) Laminaria, and (8) Nereocystis. Only above the large algae is the zonation of invertebrates conspicuous. In the upper intertidal belt we find a large stand of Mytilus californianus inter- mingled with Endocladia, Gigartina, and—on points most exposed to the surf— dense colonies of Mitella polymerus. Above these, but still in the upper inter- tidal, occurs a nearly pure stand of Balanus glandula. Still, above this, in the splash zone, we find a belt of Littorina sitchana and Acmaea digitalis with scattered Balanus glandula. On a similar rocky shore which slopes more gently (south side of Seal Rock), the width of these bands of organisms increases, in inverse proportion to the steepness of the slope, emphasizing the significance of vertical range. On a wide wave-cut bench at a suitable level (east end of Seal Rock), Balanus 350 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 47H SER. glandula forms a dense growth over an area as large as a city lot, although on a vertical shore the width of the belt in which this organism would be similarly dominant would hardly exceed ten inches. At levels below the upper intertidal, zonation of animal life is less con- spicuous because of the abundance of algae, which the present authors class as dominants in the lower intertidal and at least the proximal part of the demersal zone. Zonation is regarded as a resultant of two primary factors, which are in fact reciprocals of each other: (A) Organisms of the upper littoral have an optimum vertical range that is determined by a variety of conditions, among which are food supply ; illumination ; degree of resistance to desiccation when exposed to air and sunshine, and to endosmosis when exposed to rain; and adaptability to survival under the pounding of heavy surf. (B) Organisms characteristic of a given vertical range often can and do survive in limited numbers above or below the level regarded as optimum. It would appear that such organisms could, in the absence of competition, successfully occupy much wider vertical ranges. Their apparent restriction to a narrow belt is due primarily to competition from other organisms better adapted to the vertical ranges immediately adjacent. PITERATURE Chie) [Notre.—The authors have cited only literature relating to the area under discussion. For a more general bibliography cf. Hewitt (1937) and Dakin, et al., (1948), which are included below. ] CRANDALL, W. C. 1915. The kelps from Lower California to Puget Sound. Rept. No. 100, Part II, pp. 33-49. U. S. Dept. of Agr. DakIN, W. J., Isopet BENNETT, and ELIZABETH POPE 1948. 1/1. Fig. 172. Big, 173. CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 47TH SER. PLATE, 20 Solierella sayi. Female. From San Francisco, California. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Same. Male. Head and extremity of antenna. From San Francisco, Cali- Female. From Tahoe, California, 6500 ft. Male. Aedeagal lobe. From San Francisco, California. Male. Aedeagal lobe. From Riverside, California. Male. Clypeus. Paratype (U.S.N.M.). From Florissant, Colorado. Male. Aedeagal lobe. Paratype (U.S.N.M.). From Florissant, Col- Female. Clypeus. From Tahoe, California, 6500 ft. Male. The pair of aedeagal lobes. Male. Last visible ventral segment. From San Francisco, California. Male. Fore coxa and trochanter, from in front. Male. Paratype. Last visible ventral segment. Solierella californica. Female. Head. From Los Angeles, California. Solierella sayi. Female. Pygidial area. From San Francisco, California. Same. Male and female. Ocelli. Solierella californica. Male. Aedeagal lobe of specimen having 3 teeth on one lobe and 4 on the other. From Los Angeles, California. Same. Same. Male. From Los Angeles, California. Male and female. Antennae. From Los Angeles, California. Solierella sayi. Wing. From San Francisco. PROC, CALIF, ACAD, SCI., 4TH SERIES, VOL. XXVI, NO. 11 [WILLIAMS] PLATE 20 [ 415 ] 416 Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. 174. 175. 176. We 178. 179. 180. 181. 182. CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4tH SEr. PLATE 21 Solierella lasseni. Male. Shaded area is pronotum in profile. Solierella similis. Male. Shaded area is pronotum in profile. Same. Male. Metatarsus, dorsal view. Solierella sayi. Male. Metatarsus, dorsal view. Solierella levis, Female. Fore tarsus. Solierella albipes. Female. Fore tarsus. Solierella sayi. Female. Fore tarsus. Solierella californica. Female. Fore tarsus. Solierella arcuata. Male. Mandible, outer broadside view. From Sierra Nevada, California. Fig. 183. Solierella blaisdelli. Male. Clypeus. From Whittier, California, August 11, 1920 (No. 1234). Fig. 1238). Fig. 1239). Fig. 184. 185. 186. California. Fig. 187. Same. Male. Clypeus. From Whittier, ‘California, August 11, 1920 (No. Same. Male. Clypeus. From Whittier, California, August 11, 1920 (No. Plenoculus sp. Female. Mandible, outer broadside view. From Riverside, Solierella albipes. Male. Mandible, outer broadside view. PROC. CALIF. ACAD. SCI., 4TH SERIES, VOL, XXVI, No, 11 [WILLIAMS] PLATE 21 [ 417 ] PROCEEDINGS OF THE CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fourth Series Vol. XXVI, No. 12, pp. 419-466, 10 text figures April 28, 1950 SNAKES OF THE KIUKIANG-LUSHAN AREA, KIANGSI, CHINA BY T. PAUL MASLIN University of Colorado Boulder, Colorado Large collections of any group of animals from a circumscribed area are of particular interest from a taxonomic and ecological point of view because they provide precise evidence of the animals’ choice of habitat and they fairly adequately indicate the fauna of the area. The present paper is a description of such a collection consisting of 403 snakes taken in the vicinity of Lushan, a small mountain range ten miles south of Kiukiang, Kiangsi, China, in the course of my stay there in 1935 and 1936. The importance of this collection lies in the fact that, though it is from an area with a herpetological history dating from 1871, it is the first comprehensive collection made there. Furthermore, it rep- resents the fauna of a region with diverse habitats, including such widely different ecological situations as hot humid plains and mountains high enough to support purely montane species. Lushan is a range of mountains rising as a promontory from the South Yangste Hills (Cressey, 1934, p. 323). This range extends north and east along the western side of Poyang Lake, ending abruptly ten miles south of the Yangste River near Kiukiang, Kiangsi. It is isolated on three sides from other mountain areas, but on the south low hills connect it with the South Yangste Hills. The promontory, arising abruptly from the alluvial plains, is approximately fifteen miles wide and forty miles long. It averages between 3,500 and 4,000 feet in altitude, but certain points are as high as 5,000 feet. These altitudes are the high- est of any in the lower Yangste River Basin. There are numerous temples and pagodas situated in the mountains, usually surrounded by [ 419 ] 420 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH Ser. areas not molested by woodcutters. Except for such isolated forested tracts and deep inaccessible ravines, the mountains are denuded of tim- ber. Comparatively recent acquisitions of estates by foreign residents and the even more recent interest of the Chinese government in refores- tation have added several more forested areas to Lushan. These, from a herpetological standpoint, are invaluable as collecting sites for certain species. The larger valleys in the foothills of Lushan are given over to the growing of rice. Most of the smaller valleys and gorges are so pre- cipitous or so subject to violent torrents following rains as to make them unsuitable for agricultural use. The climate of this area is typical of central China in that extremes of temperature are great. In Kiukiang, the average mean yearly tem- perature is 17.4° C. The lowest mean temperature, 4.7° C., is in January; the highest, 29.8° C., is in July. The mean temperatures in the moun- tains, for which figures are not at present available, are lower by pos- sibly three or four degrees. Often, in winter storms, the trees and brush in the mountains become heavily encrusted with ice. Figures for rainfall in Lushan also are not available at present. In Kiukiang the average yearly total is 1,465.7 mm. The heaviest rains are in June (242.7 mm.), and the lightest precipitation occurs in December. (43.3 mm.). Although these figures are high, they give no indication of the exceedingly heavy precipitation on the mountains. The low but hilly regions east of Poyang Lake average over 2,000 mm. of precipitation per year. Probably the rainfall on the summits of Lushan is even greater. The average number of rainy days per year in Kiukiang is 123.5. Rain falls at any season of the year; droughts of six weeks or longer are unusual. From a physiographic point of view the area may be divided into three simple divisions, the plains, the mountains, and a transitional zone between them, the foothills. The plains include the floors of the larger valleys, up to elevations of 100 or 200 feet; these are extensively used for the cultivation of rice and also include the slightly elevated areas away from the hills which are surrounded by irrigated lands. The foot- hills include the outlying, more highly elevated areas and the valleys and ridges at the base of the mountains up to approximately the 1500- foot level. The mountains comprise those regions above this level, or more particularly the steeper slopes, the summit ridges and the high valleys. A crude indication of the relative frequency of species in the various zones 1s indicated by the numbers of asterisks in the appropriate column of table 1. Also included in the table are the earliest local rec- ords of the species, with the name combination under which the form was recorded. Of the 29 species known to inhabit the region, Natrix percar- VoL. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 421 inata, Dinodon flavozonatum, Elaphe porphyracea nigrofasciata, and Trime- resurus mucrosquamatus are here recorded with certainty for the first time. TABLE 1. DISTRIBUTION OF THE SNAKES OF THE KIUKIANG-LUSHAN REGION Foot- Moun- Plains hills tains First record from the area Guenther, 1888, also in Pratt, Stanley, 1914, Species David, 1873 1892 1915-1920 Chang, 1936 Sibynophis * S. collaris chinensis ' chinensis Natrix annularis Sie! * Tropidonotus annularis N. percarinata BYE 2 N. tigrina lateralis Y saa Amphiesma tigrinum Tropidonotus lateralis Pseudoxenodon te mo Pseudoxenodon nothus macrops Plagiopholis has Trirhinopholis styani, styani Achalinus spinalis * si “elapoid’”’ Lycodon ruhstrati me Ophites septentrionalis Dinodon x flayozonatum D. rufozonatum i % * Lycodon rufozonatus Zaocys dhumnades “as * Zaocys dhumnades dhumnades Ptyas korros not rep. in collection Ptyas korros Elaphe bimaculata * Elaphis dione E. carinata s Elaphis sauromates Elaphis conspicillatus E. mandarinus E. porphyracea nigrofasciata FE. rufodorsata a 9 Coluber rufo-dorsatus FE. taeniurus * i ie Elaphis virgatus ()pheodrys major ia le ic Cyclophis major Oligodon chinensis Simotes chinensis Calamaria iH fe 1872 septentrionalis description Bungarus m. not rep. in collection Bungarus multicinctus semifasciatus 422 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc, 47H Ser. Foot- Moun- Plains hills tains First record from the area Guenther, 1888, also in Pratt, Stanley, 1914, Species David, 1873 1892 1915-1920 Chang, 1936 Calliophis * EN Callophis macclellandi annularis Naja naja atra *? not rep. incollection Naja tripudians Pareas chinensis not rep. in collection *? Amblycephalus Amblycephalus ( sp. chinensis P. boulengeri ut A. boulengeri Agkistrodon halys aa Se * — Trigonocephalus blomhoffi Trimeresurus * Trimeresurus mucrosquamatus } Trimeresurus gramineus T. s. stejnegeri me Xs sp. stejnegeri It will be seen from this list that most of the mountain and plains forms extend into the intermediate zone, the foothills. Only three species are at present known to occur only in the foothills; these are Elaphe bimaculata, E. carinata, and Trimeresurus mucrosquamatus. Further collecting will probably demonstrate that the first two also occur on the plains. This division of the area into altitudinal zones does not take into account the ecological variables concerned in the restriction of the various species. Clues as to the controlling factors in certain of the species appear when the habitat choice of the same species in different areas is considered. Certain mountain inhabiting species of southern and western China when present in central China are found to inhabit the foothills and plains, or at least to occur at very much lower altitudes. This trend is still more marked when the same species are considered in northern and eastern China where they exhibit a still greater restriction to lower levels. The following species fall into this category: Achalinus spinalis, Zaocys dhumnades, Elaphe carinata, Opheodrys major, Oligodon chinensis, Calamaria septentrionalis, and Trimeresurus stej- negert. In connection with this altitudinal distribution as correlated with latitudinal distribution it should be pointed out that collecting records indicate that Natrix tigrina lateralis is definitely a snake of the foothills and plains in the Lushan region, yet it ascends to considerable altitudes in both northern and southern China. Pope (1935, p. 292) states that in central China Oli- godon chinensis occurs on open plains and plateaus; but both the specimens included in this collection were captured in the foothills. In southern China Trimeresurus stejnegert appears to be a mountain species, but altitude appar- ently is of little significance in Lushan, for the snake is found distributed generally throughout the hilly regions. Its distribution is more directly corre- lated with the presence of bushes and low trees. Certain species, namely Sibynophis chinensis, Plagiopholis styam, Achal- VoL. XX VI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 423 nus spinalis, Lycodon ruhstrati, Dinodon flavozonatum, Elaphe mandarinus, Elaphe porphyracea nigrofasciata, and Calliophis macclellandi are typically montane throughout the greater part of their ranges. Sibynophis chinensis and Achalinus spinalis do occur at low altitudes in eastern China; the latter also descends into the lower slopes of Lushan and for this reason has also been considered with those snakes whose altitudinal distribution is correlated with latitude. Calliophis macclellandi also is found at fairly low elevations. Pope (1935, p. 343) states that Mell has informed him that this species occurs in open level country about Pingsiang, Kiangsi. He accounts for this habitat choice on the grounds of the northern position of the station, yet in Lushan, 150 miles to the northwest, it is quite obviously a mountain form. In all the foregoing species, then, mean temperature as a controlling factor in their distribution is relatively unimportant in that north or south they occur at similar altitudes. This, per se, indicates that they possess a wider degree of temperature tolerance with a lower threshold than other snakes inhabiting the same geographic areas. With the exception of P. styani, A. spinalis, and C. macclellandi these species are relatively rare and their habits little known. It is then impossible to say what environmental factor is dom- inant in controlling their distribution. Plagiopholis styani and A. spinalis are known to feed on earthworms and both inhabit damp hardwood forests with their accompanying deep humus floors. Calliophis macclellandi is found in the same situations but it is ophiophagous. Both C. macclellandi and P. styani are fossorial snakes whereas A. spinalis apparently is not. The latter, how- ever, is extremely delicate and especially subject to desiccation. It is quite likely that its range of tolerance for humidity is unusually narrow. While there is no direct evidence as yet that C. macclellandi feeds on these two small species, nor on the small Sibynophis chinensis and Calamaria septentrionalis which are found in the same habitat, the presence of these five species together suggests that they form part of a distinct hardwood forest com- munity. Calliophis macclellandi plays the part of vertebrate predator ; its prey may differ in different localities, but its status in the community remains the same. The only species which may be described as being typically snakes of the plains are Natrix annularis and Elaphe rufodorsata. Both species are water snakes and occur in great abundance in paddy fields and irrigation ditches all around the mountain. Natrix annularis ascends into cultivated valleys in the foothills but is always associated with still or slow moving water. It shares this habitat with Natrix tigrina lateralis which, however, is frequently found some distance from water, although clearly associated with it. The two other common water snakes of the region are typically found in pools or cascading streams. These species, Natrix percarinata and Pseu- doxenodon nothus, show little altitudinal preference. The former is found in 424 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. similar situations in southern and western China. In areas other than Lushan nothing is known of the habits of P. nothus. Of the remaining species known to occur in the region but not mentioned above, Dinodon rufozonatum, Elaphe taeniurus, Pareas boulengeri, and Agkistrodon halys are apparently eurytopic both in Lushan and elsewhere. All of them with the exception of the amblycephalid are quite common. The latter seems to be restricted to forests but its rarity makes such a classification hardly warrantable. Ptyas korros, Bungarus m. multicinctus, Naja naja atra, and Pareas chinensis are not represented in the collection and no precise data regarding their habitats in the region is available, but from indirect evidence it appears that Naja naja atra is a snake of the plains. More specific details concerning the habits and habitats of the species and the morphological variations exhibited by them are included in the following annotated list. When possible the observations of other work- ers have been verified. Variations have been discussed at some length with the hope that these observations may be integrated with those of others and make for a clearer understanding of the geographic variations in behavior and morphology of the Chinese snakes represented in this region. METHODS AND MEASUREMENTS Unless otherwise stated, all measurements of length are in milli- meters. The ventral scale count is made from the first median unpaired scale on the throat to and including the scale immediately preceding the anal plate or plates. If any ventrals are partly divided, paired, or incompletely traverse the ventrum, they are counted as a single ventral. Subcaudal counts are begun on the first pair of scales in contact with each other posterior to the vent; or, when the subcaudals are single, the first median subcaudal posterior to the vent. The terminal scale is included in the subcaudal counts regardless of whether the subcaudals are single or paired. The first number of the scale row formula repre- sents the number of rows at that point on the neck where the circum- ference of the neck is smallest; in the event that the head is not distinct from the neck, the count is made one head-length posterior to the head. The last number in a scale row formula represents the number of rows one head-length anterior to the vent. The remaining numbers in the formula represent the number of scale rows found at as many points as numbers are given, these points dividing the intervening body into equal lengths. When numeric formulae of oculars, labials, and temporals are given, the left-hand number represents the number of plates on the left side of the animal; the right-hand number, that of the right side. When Vor. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 425 measurements of identical structures are given in the text for two or more animals, the order in which they are given corresponds to the order of the catalog numbers initiated at the head of that species account. All subsequent comparative measurements are given in the same order. In various places the following abbreviations have been used: v, ventrals; sc, subcaudals; jv, juveniles. Descriptions and draw- ings of hemipenes are based on hemipenes that have been dissected free of the tail, opened longitudinally opposite the sulcus spermaticus and stretched out flat. All the figures of the dorsal and lateral views of the heads of snakes are tracings of photographs of alcoholic specimens. Unless otherwise indicated, catalog numbers refer to specimens in the Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of California. In addition to the specimens in this collection the small collections of the Kuling Library and the Kuling American School were examined. ANNOTATED bisa,.OF SPECIES Achalinus spinalis Peters This series consists of five specimens, Nos. 22167-22169, Kuling American School Collection No. 28, and Kuling Library Collection No. 4. No. 22167 is a female; the other four are males. TABEE’2: SUMMARY OF COUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Achalinus spinalis Sex No. Extremes Mean _ Standard Dev. Source Ventrals 3 4 150-153 WELZ 1.6 Maslin Q 1 162 Maslin 5 156-164 Chang, 1936, p. 328 2 152,175 Chang, 1936, p. 328, types of Ophielaps braconniert Sauvage, 1877. Subcaudals ¢ 4 — 61,60,59,60 60 Maslin Q 1 49 Maslin 5 45-57 49.6 Chang, loc. cit. 2 59,52 Chang, loc. cit. Tail ratio 3 4 .22..20,.20,.20 Maslin Q 1 WS Maslin 5 se Zil 178 Chang, loc. cit. Z .20,.16 Chang, loc. cit. Inasmuch as the hemipenis of this species has not been adequately described, I here include a description and figure of the organ: Hemi- 426 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH Ser. penis thin-walled, slender, extending to 16th subcaudal; sulcus deep, extending to tips of organ, forked just proximal to hemipenial fork; lips of sulcus massive in basal half of unforked region, these lips and adja- cent regions covered with minute folds; lips in distal portion of unforked region less massive, still secondarily folded; arising from sulcus lips distal to fork, high, thin folds extend diagonally around organ, meeting Fig. 1. Achalinus spinalis, left hemipenis of No. 22169, x 4%. on wall opposite sulcus; these folds slightly flounced, edges sharply but minutely serrate; more distally, low longitudinal connecting folds appear, thus forming typical calyces; one-half distance toward tip of fork, calyces become smaller and shallower, with thicker septa; tip of organ with deeper calyces, edges of septa weakly papillated, almost smooth; just proximal to tip of organ sulcus lips raised into two basally directed pocket-like flaps; sulcus lips elsewhere ornamented as adjacent regions. : A compilation of the records of the relatively few specimens that have been sexed seems to indicate that the ventral counts show consid- erable variations, as Pope (1935, p. 184) has noted. But in each locality there is a definite sexual difference, the females having on the average ten more ventrals than males. The subcaudal counts are even more definitely segregated. In the species as a whole the males have from 50 to 61 subcaudals, the females 39 to 54. In any specific locality, however, there is a distinct difference with no overlapping (Pope’s 1935 Chungan Hsien series offers the only exception to date). There is a difference in tail per cent between males and females; my single female has a tail .15 of the total body length; the males average .20. These figures agree with other records. The above differences have been noted by Pope (1935, p. 184) and others; but no mention has been made of the differences in the anal regions. In males, the scales of this region are slightly knobbed and very much reduced in length, so that the general pattern of long slender scales is suddenly broken by these pebble-like scales about the vent. Habits and habitat: The animals which I caught alive, three in all, were captured at night on the roads of Kuling at an altitude of 3500 feet. They were close to streams and damp humus soil. I have observed others, badly VoL. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 427 crushed, lying on the ground as though they had been stepped on inadver- tently, not deliberately killed. These dead snakes were curiously desiccated, which corroborates Pope’s (1929) observation that after death they quickly dry up without putrefying. Alive, the snakes are extremely docile, soft and delicate to the touch. The scales are highly iridescent, and over the rich brown of the body this iridescence is beautifully accentuated. The female, caught on the 28th of June, 1936, contained six eggs, the largest being 15x 6 mm. The natives of this region say they do not see this snake on the plains, but often find its crushed remains on the mountain paths. Remarks: The variations in the stripe on the back may have some taxo- nomic significance. The Lushan form has an unusually wide stripe (three entire median scale rows), whereas Chang and Fang’s (1931, p. 264) Nanking specimen has a stripe inclusive of but one median row. Pope (1929, p. 435) found that the majority of his Fukien snakes were similar to the Nanking form, but that two had a stripe twice as wide. Stejneger (1907, p. 297) found that the Japanese variety was of this lat- ter type. Chang’s (1936, p. 327) specimens from the same locality as the present series also have three scale rows involved in the stripe, while Boulenger (1893, p. 309) found no stripe at all on certain Ichang forms (“Achalinus bracconierv’). As yet there are not enough records concerning this point to warrant conclusive geographic correlation. Sibynophis chinensis (Guenther) Two specimens, females, numbered 21927 and 21928, from Lushan, Kiangsi, China. TABLE 3. SUMMARY OF CouNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Sibynophis chinensis No. and sex Ventrals Anals Subcaudals Source 2 °) 180-179 1 101+-108 Maslin 2 Q 170-175 74+-81+ Chang, 1928, p. 321 Habits and habitat: Both specimens were found in Kuling at an altitude of 4000 feet, in tall grass and brush adjacent to forested areas. The stomachs have been examined ; one contained a few reptilian scales (Takydromus), the other was empty. Pope (1929, p. 390) also tound that his specimens had eaten lizards. Remarks: These two specimens possess the diagnostic characters which Pope (1935, p. 85) used to separate this species from S. collaris. There are two anterior temporals on each side, and 9-9 supralabials, the lower anterior temporal thrusting itself between the seventh and eighth labial but not reach- 428 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4TH Serr. ing the lip. The dark bands on the head are most indistinct ; the band crossing the posterior third of the parietals as described by Pope (Joc. cit.) is, in these specimens, completely confluent with the nuchal or occipital band. The sub- caudal counts are high in these specimens; in No. 21927 a few terminal scales are missing but the number of subcaudals is still within the range for chinen- sis. The color pattern of the head, especially the labial and nuchal pattern, is = SA iy Fig. 2. Sibynophis chinensis, No. 219289, dorsal and lateral view of the head, x 2. strikingly like that of S. grahami, in that the nuchal white collar is not cres- centic as it is in chinensis, and in that the white labial band is broken up anterior to the eye into posteriorly pointing V-shaped marks; but, as Pope (1929, p. 390) has pointed out, the color pattern in this species is extremely variable. Natrix annularis (Hallowell) A series of 110 specimens, numbered 21929 to 22038 inclusive; the series consists of 6 male and 12 female juveniles plus 51 male and 41 female adults. No. 21929 was obtained in October, 1935; all the others were collected between the dates of May 7 and June 7, 1936, in the foot- hills and plains about Lushan. TABLE 4. SUMMARY OF COUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Natrix annularis Sex No. Extremes Mean Standard Dev. Remarks Ventrals Bo BY 150-165 155.1 2.3 co 58) 143-159 149.0 27, Subcaudals ¢ 38 63-72 68.2 1.87 oF TPS) 59-69 63.3 22 Tail ratio Gyn a3 .21-—.23 JHA .006 O23 .18-.24 PANS) .012 Maximum total lengths 3 3 584,589,599 g 3. 835,867,696 Last specimen to vent only. Body bands 3 57 35-45 40.0 22 Qo 42 31-43 38.1 2.97 VoL. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 429 Sexual dimorphism is marked in this species. Pope (1935, p. 97) has pointed out the difference in ventral and subcaudal counts, the greater size of the females, and the greater number of bands, especially on the tail, in males. These characters are expressed numerically in Table 2. Pope also mentions the tuberosities on the labials and chin shields in males. These tuberosities are lacking on snakes measuring less than 325 mm. in length, but are invariably present on adults. Habits and habitat: Pope (1929, p. 394) reports that these snakes are “vicious and wild.’ I found them rather the contrary in this locality. When caught, they made efforts to escape, and when cornered, assumed a hostile stance, but they seldom struck. None of the females had eggs. This was to be expected, as Pope (1935, p. 99) has shown that females of this species give birth to their young in September. Specimen No. 21929, caught in October in a wide stream in the foothills, regurgitated a large loach soon after capture. The other individuals of this species were caught in habitats similar to that described for No. 21929, some in flooded rice fields. This snake does not occur in the mountains them- selves. Growth: Study of this large series has brought out several points regard- ing growth rates in this species. In the accompanying graph (fig. 3), the series is arranged according to length measured from snout to vent to the nearest 5 mm. Pope (1929) reports seeing a large female give birth to nine offspring, and gives the measurements of the two largest. Assuming the tail to be 20 per cent of the body, I have calculated the length to the vent of these snakes recorded by Pope and have included them in the graph. Stejneger (1907, Formosa), and Chang and Fang (1931) also record young, giving their measurements. These are likewise included. My juveniles, judging from these, must have been born the preceding fall, their present size representing probably only a month’s growth or less. A large gap occurs in length, the next group being about 100 mm. longer. The first few snakes between 300 and 335 mm. have very nearly the same color pattern as the smaller snakes and the males of this length have smooth chins. It is assumed that snakes in the 300-435 mm. group are one year older than those in the 150-210 mm. group. In the males it is possible to judge the second year’s growth as represented by the group about the 460 mm. lengths. The females do not show this as well, and after the third year there are no size differences which have any significance whatsoever. It is significant that the females grow much faster and become much larger than do the males. There are 22 females longer than the longest male among the 92 adults. Remarks: There has been some confusion in the written accounts of the similar color patterns of the two closely allied species N. annularis and N. 430 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc. 4rH SEr. percarinata. But a close examination of the snakes discloses considerable difference, particularly obvious in young snakes. One of the best characters for distinguishing the two forms is that in N. annularis the bars extend to mid-belly on the neck region, while in NV. percarinata they do not (Pope, 1929, p. 394). Another obvious character is the shape of the bars on the dorsum. In N. percarinata these bars form a sub-diamond shaped loop on the back, 4 ceceenes Stejneger, 1907, : at ee Pope, 1929. = Chang & Fang, 1931. a Maslin Reem bin tay: Maslin. Smooth- ae chinned sub-adult ij males. ke oii | 2 i if i | 2 ih [50mm ZOO 250 300 350 400 ' 450 S00 550 --600 “650 700 Fig. 3. Natrix annularis, lengths from snout to vent. Juveniles recorded by Stejneger 1907, Pope 1929, and Chang and Fang 1931, are included in both groups. the centers being somewhat lighter than the ground color; this looping 1s hardly apparent in annularis. A good character for distinguishing specimens over 450 mm. is the color of the ventrum in life; N. annularis has a rich coral red ventrum, whereas that of N. percarinata is pale white. This characteristic, however, is nearly useless for preserved or young specimens. In both species the black ventral bars fade considerably with age, and even disappear in some old females. But since they tend to fade from the center first, it is possible to determine their outlines even when they are almost gone. Natrix percarinata displays a peculiar ontogenetic color change. The ventrum of the young is a rich orange color which extends up the sides between the black bars as a deeper red orange. In this juvenile color phase Voit. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 431 it closely resembles N. annularis, although the abdomen of the latter is a coral red. As N. percarinata becomes older, this color fades from the ventrum, and by the time the animal is a year old the ventrum is white. The lateral reddish markings persist considerably longer; one female measuring 672 mm. still had traces of this color on her sides. Further differences between N. annularis and N. percarinata may be summarized as follows: Rings on the tail: In N. annularis the tail rings are distinct and countable on even the largest snake. In N. percarinata after the first year the subcaudal regions become so mottled that it is almost impossible to distinguish the rings. This obliteration of the pattern is most pronounced distally but with increasing age becomes more general. In large specimens no subcaudal rings can be made out at all. Tail ratio: Snakes with tails less than .24 of the total length are N. annul- aris, and those having tails greater than .24 are N. percarinata, regardless of sex. Ventrals: N. annularis has a higher ventral count: ¢150-165, 2143-159; with averages of 155.06 and 149.02, respectively. For N. percarinata counts are 6136-142, 2135-142; averages 139.55 and 138.78, respectively. Subcaudals: N. annularis has a slightly lower subcaudal count: ¢63-72, 259-69; averages 68.2 and 63.3, respectively. N. percarinata has $72-74, 268-76; averages 73.00 and 71.22, respectively. Labials entering the eye: N. annularis has only the fifth labial entering the eye, while N. percarinata has the fourth and fifth entering. This is a good character in this collection; exceptions are rare. Labial sutures: The sutures are dark or black in N. annularis and are undifferentiated from the rest of the labials in N. percarinata. Width of eye: The eye in N. annularis is as wide as the diameter of the frontal at its center. The eye is wider in N. percarinata when measured in the same way (Boulenger, 1899, p. 163). Boulenger (1893, p. 233) in his catalog has given the counts of the speci- mens collected by Pratt. These are as follows: specimen nos. a-d (Brit. Mitts; 32 (ve 148-147 61453 secds4, er ey juve, 1533 sc. 69). The above measurements increase the range of subcaudals in females from 59-69 to 54-69. Natrix percarinata (Boulenger) This series consists of 32 specimens (nos. 22039-22070) ; 29 adults, 16 males and 13 females; 3 juveniles, 2 males, and 1 female. With the exception 432 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4TH SER. of the three specimens they were caught between May 7 and June 6, 1936. All specimens were collected in the foothills and mountains of Lushan. TABLE. 5S SUMMARY OF CouUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Natrix percarinata Sex No. Extremes Mean Standard Dev. Remarks Ventrals ae os 136-142 139.6 1.5 Q 14 135-142 138.8 2.0 Subcaudals ¢ 9 72-74 FS yall 1.0 Ss 9 68-76 71.2 | Tail ratio epall 24-28 265 .010 g 7, .25-.29 .264 014 Body bands ¢ _ 16 36-43 40.0 2.0 Bands indistinguishable in °) 9 35-42 39.0 2:3 the larger specimens. Juv. tail bands re) 30,33 2 i} 20 Maximum lengths re 2 608,638 mm. g 2 887,1040 mm. Sexual dimorphism is not so pronounced in Natrix percarinata as in N. annularis as far as body measurements are concerned, except that females are larger. But the rugosity of the anterior lower labials and chin plates is more pronounced in males of this species than in N. annularis. Such rugosity is found also on the upper labials, nasals, and adjacent scales of many indi- viduals. Habits and habitat: N. percarinata is more active and vigorous than annularis and will strike when teased. It is fond of shaded streams in the mountains but is more commonly found in the streams in the foothills. At these lower altitudes it is found with N. annularis. Both species, when alarmed, dive beneath the surface of the water and secrete themselves under rocks or in tangles of submerged roots. Remarks: This series is too small to allow an adequate study of growth but it does represent a complete age sequence. The three juveniles measure 194, 264, and 266 mm., respectively, in total length, the first two being males. Natrix tigrina lateralis (Berthold) Of the 71 specimens in this series, 68 are numbered 22071 to 22138; the remaining 3 are in the Kuling American School collection. In all there are 24 males and 47 females. VoL. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 433 TABLE 6. SUMMARY OF CoUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Natrix t. lateralis Sex No. Extremes Mean Standard Dev. Source Ventrals Gueee 143-155 149.5 Pj Maslin Q 49 144-159 152.4 2.66 Maslin 1 151 Boettger, 1894, p. 139 2 1 152 Boulenger, 1893, p. 250 Subcaudals ¢ 20 61-71 65.2 2.9 Maslin 2 BY 52-64 57.6 fed Maslin 1 56 Boettger, loc. cit. Tail ratio a 20 .20-.29 225 012 Maslin g 37 6—.25 BRA 013. Maslin The average ventral counts of both sexes are nearly the same. The average subcaudal counts, however, differ considerably when series are considered, but overlapping is extensive. The most obvious sexual differ- ence with high diagnostic reliability is the sudden reduction of girth at the vent in females; in males, the body tapers imperceptibly into the tail. As Pope (1935, p. 438) has mentioned, the scales in the anal region of males are more strongly keeled than elsewhere on the body. This pronounced development is even more noticeable to the touch than to the eye. If the fingers are rubbed over this area in postero-anterior direc- tion the scales seem rough and catch on the fingers. Another difference, variable in its distinctness, is the presence of small tubercules on the heads of males. In most specimens they occur on the upper and lateral parts of the head, with the exception of the frontal and medial parts of the parietals, but are absent from the ventral head surface. In this respect these snakes differ from others of this genus. Habits and habitat: In agreement with Pope (1935, p. 137), I find that this snake varies in its choice of habitat. Usually it is found near streams, irrigation ditches, and paddy fields. I have taken it also several hundred yards from water on hill slopes at the base of Lushan. Sowerby (1926) states that in North China it is found at altitudes between 2000 and 4000 feet. In the Lushan area, however, it is distinctly a snake of the foothills and plains. The actions of a snake which I kept for several days in a glass box were similar to those observed by Kreyenberg (1907) and Pope (Schmidt, 1927, p. 512). Pope’s description follows: “It flat- tened the whole body, especially the neck, and the sides of the neck were drawn down until the angle below was a right angle, or less, and the skin above was tightly stretched over the vertebrae. Just behind the head the neck was strongly arched, to such a degree as to make a fold 434 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH SEr. of loose skin appear under the head where head and neck meet. The head, held in this position, was raised from one to four inches from the ground. The body was thrown into varying but gracefully regular coils. This snake could not be induced to bite or strike, but when its body was pinched at any point it would turn and ‘butt’ with its nose, but not with any particular violence. Sometimes the head and arched neck would be thrown well back, and then its attitude was much like that of a cobra.” In the snake I observed the head was held higher, five to six inches above the ground, and, significantly, the back of the neck was always kept facing towards me. If I circled about the snake, it carefully maintained this orientation. I say “significantly” because of Nakamura’s (1935) dis- covery of integumental poison glands in the nuchal region of this species. He finds these glands function by rupture, their excretions being offensive in odor and irritating to mucous membranes in general. The action of the snake seems correlated with the possession of what I have termed Nakamura’s glands; and the exposure of the vivid red and black pattern on the neck may serve as a warning, anticipating and discouraging attack on the part of an experienced aggressor. Smith (1938) has found similar glands in a number of other species. Remarks: The series here reported on does not differ from those described by Schmidt (1927), Pope (1929), or Chang and Fang (1931) in any significant way. The ventral counts most closely resemble series from Anhwei, whereas the subcaudal counts are more similar to the northern and extreme southern types. The longest males in this series measure 754 and 668 mm.; the longest females, 778, 764, and 749 mm. These are not large compared with the measurements made by Chang (1932) and others, who have records of 1031 and 1090 mm. for total length. Pseudoxenodon nothus H. M. Smith Of 17 specimens, 15 are numbered 22139-22153; one, No. 18, is in the Kuling American School collection; and one, No. 2, is in the Kuling Library collection. All specimens were collected in Lushan. Description: Head broad, distinct from body; body cylindrical, skin of neck loose, dilatable; tail moderate (see table 5); scales keeled, weakly on neck (five or six scale rows smooth in this region) ; posteriorly all rows keeled; scales arranged in 19-17-15 rows, reduction to 17 rows occurring between 6lst and 74th ventral, reduction from 17 to 15 invari- ably occurring within ten ventrals posterior to the first reduction; anal plates large; subcaudals paired; occasionally ventrals immediately ante- rior to vent are divided. Vor. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 435 TABLEY?: SUMMARY OF CoUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Pseudoxenodon nothus Sex No. Extremes Mean Standard Dev. Source Ventrals é 12 138-145 142.7 1.8 Maslin g 5 145-150 146.4 Za9 Maslin 5 141-150? (4)143.5 Chang, 1936, p. 324 Subcaudals ¢ 10 60-66 62.7 2.0 Maslin 2 3 57,58,59 Maslin 5 43 2-63 (4)59.8 Chang, loc. cit. Tail ratio é 10 .19=.21 203 007. Maslin se) 3 .18,.19,.20 Maslin Rostral almost twice as broad as high, clearly visible from above; internasals slightly shorter than prefrontals, as wide as inter-prefrontal suture; frontal as long as distance from it to rostral; broad anteriorly, greatest breadth equalling length of lateral edge; parietals large, longer than frontal; supraorbitals twice as long as wide. Nostril large, touches internasals; posterior nasal broadly in contact with prefrontal, this suture twice as long as posterior nasal-internasal suture; loreal quad- Fig. 4. Pseudoxenodon nothus, No. 221459, dorsal and lateral view of the head, x 1. rangular, much longer than high; preoculars 1-1, 1-2 in one female; postoculars varying from 2-2 to 43, normally 3-3, upper largest, in contact with parietals; temporals 2+2, occasionally a third posterior temporal is present. Supralabials 8-8, occasionally six or seven on either side, fourth and fifth entering eye, seventh largest; infralabials 9-9, variations from 8-8 to 11-10 in eight specimens; four or five labials in contact with anterior chinshields; posterior chinshields equal to or larger than anterior, widely divergent posteriorly. Ground color of head tan-gray; an indistinct interorbital bar of darker gray markings hes across posterior edges of prefrontals; frontal marked by several dots of a similar dark gray; starting from posterior tip of frontal a parabolic mark of gray reaches to sides of neck; this mark has a clearly defined anterior edge, posterior edge fades to a red- dish gray; a dark gray chevron is superimposed on this reddish portion, its arms extending to tenth ventral; posteriorly, edge of chevron bor- 436 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH Srr. dered with a narrow, but conspicuous, light gray stripe similar in color to centers of dorsal spots (see below); postorbital streak extends from eye to corner of mouth; posterior edges of first five supralabials edged with black, this color not touching lips; scales of dorsum rich gray, with intervening irregular cutaneous pattern of black and light gray, this pattern usually embracing basal edges of scales; a row of 21 black- bordered light gray marks of irregular shape extends down back; ante- riorly these are diagonal bars about four scale widths long and one scale width wide, posteriorly bars become shorter, wider, more irregular; from one tail length or less anterior to vent a black-bordered stripe sim- ilar in color to dorsal spots extends to tip of tail; scales of neck not entering into chevron mark are red or yellow basally with gray tips, this color extending posteriorly down sides, disappearing at mid-body ; ventrum anteriorly spotted with large, diffuse black smudges; beginning sparsely about two head lengths down body, bases of ventrals become speckled with black, these speckled areas extending laterally to posterior edge of each ventral, thus forming a distinct but mottled line extending to tip of tail; anals and ventral anterior to them conspicuously lhghter than adjacent scales. Maxillary teeth number 24 to 26, arranged in two groups; anterior group consists of strong, slender conical teeth, anterior few smallest, remainder subequal; posterior group consists of two large teeth pre- ceded by a short gap, these teeth twice as long as teeth of first group. Lateral processes of maxillary small, subequal; dorsal surface of bone undulated. Hemipenis forked, extends to seventeenth subcaudal; sulcus shallow, proximally paralleled by minute folds without spines; this region fol- lowed by an area in which sulcus is deeper, with spinous lips, paralleled on each side by a large fold covered with small soft spines; sulcus forks : eo all = See Seas Oe. a SN Fig. 5. Pseudoxenodon nothus, right hemipenis of No. 22142, x 4. at sixth subcaudal; hemipenis forks at the twelfth; immediately distal to this fork in each branch large folds of main canal give way to dense masses of large, hard spines, and a similar mass lies on opposite side of Voit. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 437 sulcus; these masses gradually diminish in size, giving way at tip to minute calyculations; edges of distal calyces deeply serrated, appearing like densely crowded, soft spines; sulcus ends in raised fold near tip of organ; calyculate area and immediately proximal spines extend com- pletely about hemipenial wall; more proximal spiny areas lie in two masses On either side of sulcus, as mentioned above. In common with P. striaticaudatus, the largest snakes are males, the two largest measuring, respectively, 736 and 731 mm. The largest females are 645, and 584 mm., respectively. Of the 12 males examined, 10 have knobbed scales in the cloacal region; the other two are young snakes measuring, respectively, 405 and 531 mm. There is a correlation between body length and the size of the knobs, the largest snakes having these knobs better developed. The males have slightly fewer ventrals and more subcaudals than do the females. There is also sexual chromatic dimorphism ; the females have reddish neck areas, and the males yellow with no trace of red. Habits and habitat: These snakes are mountain-stream dwellers, foraging in the streams or on the banks close by. Some of the specimens were caught near streams in the foothills. The altitudinal range of these snakes varies from 500 to 4000 feet. When cornered, they invariably coil and dilate the skin of the neck region, exposing the vivid red or yellow pattern. When caught, they strike or writhe about with great energy. Their hibernation period apparently extends from late October to the latter part of April. None of the 5 females examined was gravid. Remarks: Pseudoxenodon nothus has been named by Hobart M. Smith (1942). This species is obviously closely allied to P. striaticaudatus in that it has the lineate tail which separates it from the other mainland forms. This series differs from typical P. nothus in having a higher ventral count and in having 17 scale rows for only a short distance, about ten ventrals, at the mid- body. In coloration, however, it is remarkably similar to typical P. nothus. It differs from P. striaticaudatus in having 19 scale rows anteriorly and in having a red or yellow coloration about the neck regions. Another point of difference between this species and P. striaticaudatus is the shape of the dorsal spots. These are large and diamond-shaped in P. striaticaudatus, and oblique rhombic bars in P. nothus. Still another point of difference is the distance the caudal stripe extends onto the body. In P. stri- aticaudatus this distance is usually from one to two tail lengths, whereas in P. nothus it is never longer than one tail length and may be as short as one- half a head length. There is overlapping in this character. Only seven speci- mens, or one-half of this series, have 44 labials in contact with the anterior chinshields, four have 5-5, three 5-4, and one has 4-5. Pope (1929, p. 406) points out that in striaticaudatus 4-4 labials are regularly in contact with the 438 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [Proc. 4rH SER anterior shields. Chang (1936, p. 324) shows that there is a correlation between this character and the number of lower labials: when ten of the latter are present five are in contact with the anterior chinshields. This correlation is not found in the present series. The lower labials number 9-9 in P. striati- caudatus, with occasionally 10 on one side. Chang (1936, p. 321) has described five specimens from this locality. His descriptions do not differ essentially from the foregoing, but his ventral and subcaudal counts increase the range as here outlined. He has synonymized P. striaticaudatus and P. nothus, but for the reasons already established I feel that striaticaudatus is a perfectly valid form. Plagiopholis styani Boulenger Fourteen specimens, ten males and four females, caught in Kuling at an altitude of 4000 feet, Nos. 22154-22166, and one specimen in the Kuling American School collection. TABLES: SUMMARY OF COUNTS AND MEASUREMENTS OF Plagiopholis styani Sex No. Extremes Mean _ Standard Dev. Source Ventrals 6 610 111-117 114.1 1.74 Maslin 2 4 119-122 120.7 25 Maslin 5 112-121 117.0 Chang, 1936, p. 326 Subcaudals 62 10 28-34 Sil 1.92 Maslin Q 3 26,29,30 Maslin 5 25-30 27.6 Chang, loc. cit. Tail ratio 3 10 12-15 14 007. Maslin fe} 3 e314 Maslin There is a distinct difference between males and females in the num- ber of ventrals. In this rather small series there is even a distinct gap between the extremes; but this would certainly be filled if more speci- mens were available. Pope (1935, p. 179) and Stejneger (1925, p. 77) give counts for series from Fukien and Szechwan. Here also there are sexual differences in the counts, but the Szechwan females have prac- tically the same range as the Fukien males. The inference is that locally there is strong sexual dimorphism but in the species as a whole exten- sive overlapping occurs. There is also a tendency for the males to have a greater number of subcaudals. Pope (1935, p. 179) mentions that the males have keeled scales in the anal region. I find that the keeling is also present in all but one of the females in this series, but is much fainter than in the males. In some males these keels show a tendency to develop Vor. XXVI] MASLIN: SNAKES OF KIANGSI 439 knobs. Females show a slight but sudden reduction of girth posterior to the vent. Habits and habitat: This snake is quite common in Kuling but for the greater part of the year is rarely seen. During the months of May and June it can easily be found in the mornings along the roads and paths about the resort. Friends on a stroll before breakfast have reported see- ing as many as seven or eight of these snakes. Usually this species is associated with damp forests having brush or grassy floors. The snake is harmless, never attempting to bite or strike, but when held it may press its tail against the hand, giving a pricking sensation. Its tail and neck are unusually strong; by flexing the latter between the fingers it can exert sufficient pressure to wedge itself through. Its body form and actions in general suggest burrowing habits. An examination of the stomachs of seven specimens revealed an earthworm in one and black erit in two others; the rest were empty. One specimen had a parasitic nematode in its intestine. Two of the females had six and eight eggs, respectively. The largest eggs measured 18x9 mm., and appeared to contain very young embryos. The eggs were enclosed in extremely thin membranes. One female was caught in May, 1935, the other on June 7, 1936. Remarks: The longest female of this series measured 396 mm. in total length and 352 mm. from snout to vent. The two longest males meas- ured, respectively, 374 and 349 mm. in total length and 320 and 307 mm. from snout to vent. Chang (1936, p. 326) records one specimen from this region measuring 435 mm. in total length or 384 mm. from snout to vent. This is truly a large snake for this species, the usual adult length being about 350 mm. Lycodon ruhstrati (Fischer) One male, No. 22170, of this comparatively rare snake was collected at an elevation of 3500 feet in Kuling. TABLE 9. SUMMARY OF Counts oF Lycodon ruhstrati Sex No. Ventrals ~ Subcaudals Source é 1 210 89 Maslin Nive 1 211 88 Boulenger, 1893, p. 363 Habits and habitat: This specimen was taken at the west end of Kuling at an altitude of 3500 feet, some hundreds of yards from the nearest stream. It was in a clearing on a westerly facing slope where lizards abounded and 440 CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES [ Proc, 4rH SER. may have been hunting them when caught. The time of capture was approxi- mately 2:00 p.m. The undigested tail of a lizard (Takydromus sp.) was found in the stomach. Pope (1935, p. 195) suggested that the snake was nocturnal in habits and a frequenter of streams. However, he found the remains of a small skink in one, and a species of Takydromus in another. So it is likely that this snake is active both day and night. aaa — S——S a mee ee SS =, SSS — sees SEES SS WN : = ES Ss ee a ee ee See S\N == —S S— Se orn ees oy See ss OE TER EES SS SSS eS ee . a = SSS == < = Woo de eh ewey dt .de™, ty Per tok _ erate a : Sine scl ate” an rn ae meer - eee: ca astray at ee ~y re . — eta o~ whee we + omgiw whe ng hat teal - = a a = a, a - “ay ed er am us ye ie erereghie ar a = te : ee zat nan ap ee SD “ie ery z Le ye : alee ve ate : : _& - “ : 3 : re eee 7 ~ oe faaak ; Dipl Sa rer . z : + * ; : -_ + : : ~ te | ae : : = 7 — = - i ee > 44 ae : | eA rae - . = ae 4 . =: : . Page : > ~ - = ~ —~ o : ewe tar MH a ~ a ~ wad _ : 3a : 2 2 — “~ . , a ~ ~*~ ¥ er S : - - ‘ ~*~ ' ae * af Pets day ere eee